advertisement
Tekla Structural Designer
2017
User Guide
March 2017
(5.0.0.7)
© 2017 Trimble Solutions Corporation – part of Trimble Navigation Ltd.
Table of Contents
iii
User Guides (UK)
To dock a window as a tabbed page in another window .......................................... 14
iv
Table of Contents
How do I configure the default design codes to be applied to new projects?........ 22
How do I configure the default units to be applied to new projects? ...................... 22
How do I change units and units precision in an existing project? .......................... 23
How do I load settings from a settings set to the current project? .......................... 27
How do I save settings from the current project to a settings set? .......................... 27
How do I copy a settings set from one computer to another? ................................. 28
v
User Guides (UK)
How do I delete a user defined section from the database? .................................... 39
How do I add connection resistances to the database? ............................................ 40
How do I configure the default references to be applied to new projects? ............ 49
How do I change reference formats and texts in an existing project? .................... 49
How do I edit reference format syntax applied to an object type? .......................... 49
vi
Table of Contents
How do I re-apply automatic grouping in order to reset manually edited groups?
How do I split an existing member group into smaller groups? ............................... 56
How do I manually move an existing member between groups? ............................ 56
How do I use the Wind Model Tree to display a Wind Direction View? ................... 58
How do I open a 2D view of an existing construction level? ..................................... 60
Zooming/Panning/Rotating and Walking through Scene Views ............................... 62
Zooming/Panning/Rotating and Walking through Scene Views ................................... 62
vii
User Guides (UK)
How do I use the ViewCube to display one of the preset views? ............................. 62
How do I make selections in the Scene Content Window? ........................................ 66
How do I reinstate the default Scene Content selections? ........................................ 68
How do I deselect a single entity from the current selection? .................................. 99
viii
Table of Contents
How do I save properties to a named Property Set from the Properties Window?
How do I recall a previously saved property set from the Properties Window? ..104
How do I save the properties of an existing model object to a named Property
How do I apply a property set to an individual existing model object? .................104
How do I apply a property set to multiple existing model objects? .......................105
How do I graphically review where property sets have been applied? .................105
How do I set up attribute definitions in the current model? ...................................108
How do I attach a UDA value using the Properties Window? ..................................108
How do I attach an existing UDA value in the Review View? ...................................109
How do I graphically review the UDA values that have been attached? ...............109
How do I open a file that has been attached as a UDA? ..........................................109
How do I apply a (Selected attributes) filter to Material List Review Data? ...........110
ix
User Guides (UK)
How do I import a project from a Structural BIM Import file? ................................123
How do I export a model to Autodesk Revit Structure? ...........................................124
How do I import a beam from Westok Cellbeam? ....................................................125
How do I export a model to Autodesk Robot Structural Analysis? .........................126
Export to Autodesk Robot Structural Analysis - Limitations ....................................127
Import from a 3D DXF file - Assumptions and Limitations ......................................132
x
Table of Contents
How do I edit the project details and view the revision history? ............................133
How do I make one level an identical copy of another? ..........................................147
How do I make one level an independent copy of another?...................................147
How do I modify the properties associated with a level? ........................................148
Why are the grid lines not being shown at a particular level? ................................151
How to I apply an existing architectural grid to a specific level? ............................151
How do I create a single grid line between two points?...........................................155
xi
User Guides (UK)
How do I import grids from a .dxf, or import a .dxf as a shadow? .........................158
How do I change the name or color of an existing architectural grid? ..................159
How do I change the name of an individual grid-line, -arc? ....................................159
How do I move a grid line in a perpendicular direction? .........................................160
How do I create a rectangular construction line system? ........................................161
How do I create a single construction line between two points? ...........................164
How do I create one or more parallel (quick) construction lines? ..........................165
How do I extend, move or rotate construction lines and arcs? ..............................167
How do I extend, move or rotate construction lines and arcs? ..................................167
How do I move a construction line in a perpendicular direction? ..........................168
Modeling Steel Columns and Cold Formed Columns ..................................................170
xii
Table of Contents
How do I create a single column in a Frame, or Structure View? ...........................171
How do I align a column to a specific angle, or an angled gridline? ......................171
How do I create a Plated, Concrete Filled, or Encased Concrete column? ............173
How do I modify the position of a single column stack? ..........................................174
Modeling Steel Beams and Cold Formed Beams ......................................................174
How do I create a Plated, Westok Cellular, Westok Plated, or Fabsec beam? ......175
xiii
User Guides (UK)
How do I edit the properties of an existing portal frame? ......................................186
How do I create a concrete wall in a Frame, or Structure View? ............................194
How do I specify whether the wall is to be meshed or mid-pier? ..........................195
How do I create a door or window opening in an existing concrete wall? ............196
How do I create a single concrete column in a 2D View?.........................................197
How do I create a series of concrete columns in a 2D View? ..................................198
How do I create a single concrete column in a Frame, or Structure View? ...........198
How do I align a column to a specific angle, or an angled gridline? ......................199
How do I specify the column alignment relative to the grid? ..................................199
How do I modify the position of a single column stack? ..........................................202
xiv
Table of Contents
How do I edit the column alignment or specify an offset? ......................................202
How do I specify the beam alignment relative to the grid? .....................................207
How do I specify and use beam flanges for an existing beam? ..............................209
How do I specify and use beam flanges for multiple beams simultaneously? .....209
How do I edit the beam alignment or specify an offset? .........................................210
How do I choose the slab type and specify its properties? .....................................215
How do I specify the parent slab to which the panel belongs? ...............................216
xv
User Guides (UK)
How do I create a single timber column in a 2D View? ............................................225
How do I create a series of timber columns in a 2D View? ......................................225
How do I create a single timber column in a Frame, or Structure View? ..............226
How do I align a column to a specific angle, or an angled gridline? ......................226
How do I modify the position of a single column stack? ..........................................227
How do I create a series of single span timber beams? ..........................................229
xvi
Table of Contents
How do I edit the geometry of an existing timber truss? ........................................234
How do I modify the position of an analysis element? ............................................240
How do I create a bearing wall in a Frame, or Structure View? ..............................241
xvii
User Guides (UK)
How do I add or remove existing elements in an existing sub structure? ............246
How do I open a 3D view of an existing sub structure? ...........................................246
How do I control which conditions are considered during model validation? .....250
How do I copy and rotate elements to a new location? ...........................................253
How do I move and rotate elements to a new location? .........................................253
How do I copy all member loads from one span to another? ................................254
How do I copy just one member load if several are applied to the same span? .255
xviii
Table of Contents
How do I Automatically Join All Concrete Beams (Make Continuous)? ..................259
How do I move a cutting plane in order to hide part of the model? ......................260
xix
User Guides (UK)
How do I indicate that reductions apply to live (imposed) load cases? .................273
How do I generate load combinations automatically? .............................................277
How do I set an imposed load case to be patterned? ..............................................283
xx
Table of Contents
How do I manually create a loadcase for Simple Wind? ..........................................292
How do I manually decompose slab loads for an individual construction level? 295
How do I manually decompose slab loads for all the required levels? .................295
How do I view the decomposed loads (either with, or without load values)? ......295
How do I create a partial length torsion UDL or torsion VDL? ................................304
xxi
User Guides (UK)
How do I control the mesh parameters to be used? ................................................319
How do I apply different mesh parameters at different levels? .............................319
How do I review the slab mesh prior to running the analysis? ...............................320
Discontinuity of force contours at slab steps (and column drops) ........................321
How do I specify whether the wall is to be meshed or mid-pier? ..........................324
How do I control the global wall mesh parameters to be used? ............................324
How do I override the global wall mesh parameters for an individual wall? ........324
How do I review the wall mesh prior to running the analysis? ...............................324
How do I activate rigid diaphragm action within a slab? .........................................325
How do I activate semi-rigid diaphragm action within a slab? ................................325
xxii
Table of Contents
How do I identify which nodes are constrained by rigid diaphragms? ..................326
How do I intentionally exclude individual nodes from a rigid diaphragm? ..........327
How do I intentionally exclude a slab panel from a diaphragm? ...........................327
Running FE chase-down and Grillage chase-down analysis ....................................329
Running FE chase-down and Grillage chase-down analysis ........................................330
How do I display the Solver Model used for a particular analysis type? ...............331
How do I see Solver Node and Solver Element properties? ....................................331
How do I view tabular results in the Solver Model Data View? ...............................331
xxiii
User Guides (UK)
Cross checking the sum of reactions against the load input ..................................341
Cross checking the sum of reactions against the load input ......................................341
Displaying 1D and 2D results, deflections and reactions ........................................343
How do I choose the loadcase, combination, or envelope to see the results for?
What are 2D Wall Results and how do I display them? ............................................346
Displaying Notional Forces and Seismic Equivalent Lateral Forces .......................349
Displaying Notional Forces and Seismic Equivalent Lateral Forces ...........................349
xxiv
Table of Contents
Displaying analysis results for individual members (Loading Analysis View) .......359
Displaying analysis results for individual members (Loading Analysis View) ...........359
Displaying RSA Seismic Results in a Loading Analysis View ....................................360
xxv
User Guides (UK)
Horizontal Panel Local Axis System and Applied Load Directions .........................384
Vertical and Sloped Plane Local Axis System and Applied Load Directions ..........385
xxvi
Table of Contents
Design Options-Concrete-Reinforcement Parameters ................................................396
Concrete - Beam - Bottom Longitudinal Bar Pattern................................................400
Concrete - Isolated Foundations - Reinforcement Layout .......................................416
Concrete - Isolated Foundations - General Parameters...........................................417
xxvii
User Guides (UK)
xxviii
Table of Contents
How do I design or check all slab panels in the model? ..........................................445
How do I edit the properties of an existing Punching Check item?........................448
How do I check punching for all Punching Check items? .........................................449
How do I check punching for an individual Punching Check item? ........................449
xxix
User Guides (UK)
How do I design stud rail reinforcement for an individual Punching Check item?
How do I create a check which considers two or three adjoining spans? .............451
How do I edit the properties of an existing Floor Vibration Check item? ..............452
How do I check vibration for all Floor Vibration Check items? ................................452
How do I check floor vibration for an individual Floor Vibration Check item? .....452
How do I design or check all pad and strip bases in the model? ...............................460
xxx
Table of Contents
xxxi
User Guides (UK)
How do I display a Design Summary in a Review Data table?.................................486
How do I display Sway Results in a Review Data table? ...........................................486
How do I display Storey Shear in a Review Data table? ...........................................487
How do I display Seismic Drift Results in a Review Data table? ..............................487
How do I display Wind Drift Results in a Review Data table? ..................................487
How do I display Connection Resistance checks in a Review Data table? .............488
How do I select the Member Report style to use in the Model Report? ................497
xxxii
Table of Contents
How do I select the Member Report style to use in an individual Member Report?
xxxiii
User Guides (UK)
What data is output in each Beam End Forces Report configuration? ..................507
How do I change the default Beam End Forces Report configuration? .................509
How do I enter company details (logo, address etc.) in the header? .....................511
How do I enter project specific details (job ref, structure etc.) in the header? .....512
xxxiv
Table of Contents
How do I add, modify, copy or remove a layer configuration? ...............................519
How do I add, modify, copy or remove a drawing style? .........................................520
xxxv
User Guides (UK)
xxxvi
Table of Contents
How do I create a General Arrangement drawing? ..................................................544
How do I add new drawings and specify their content? ..........................................554
For load dependant drawing variants, how do I specify the loading? ...................555
How do I consolidate the bar marks used on concrete detail drawings? .............556
xxxvii
User Guides (UK)
How do I add new drawings and specify their content? ..........................................559
xxxviii
Table of Contents
xxxix
User Guides (UK)
xl
Table of Contents
xli
Basics of Tekla Structural Designer
About Tekla Structural Designer
Tekla Structural Designer is a tool for structural engineers. It is an integrated model-
based 3D solution for analysis and design 1 of multi-material structures. Tekla Structural
Designer features interactive modeling, automated structural analysis and design, and drawing creation.
Tekla Structural Designer supports multiple design codes including ACI/AISC, Eurocodes and British Standards.
Tekla Structural Designer includes a wide range of standard drawings and reports. You can also create your own customised drawings and reports.
Tekla Structural Designer Philosophy
One of the main aims of Tekla Structural Designer is to allow you to rapidly build your model, apply loads and then design it for an appropriate set of design forces. On a day to day basis, you don’t need to be involved with the underlying analysis models required to achieve this, instead you can focus on the design results…
To make this possible, the program automatically creates and analyses multiple solver models, each one being based on a different but widely accepted approach.
By designing for the forces from all the solver models, you can be confident that each scenario has been catered for.
How does the Tekla Structural Designer way of working differ from traditional methods?
The traditional modelling, analysis and design process might be summarised under the following headings:
1.
Provide a way to input/describe the model.
2.
Analyse it.
3.
Design it.
4.
Produce Calculations.
5.
Produce Drawings.
1
User Guides (UK)
A similar process is followed in Tekla Structural Designer with the exception that analysis and design are merged into a single process.
As a result the workflow is as follows:
1.
Input the Geometry and Loads:
A key requirement these days is ‘BIM Integration’ - the ability to be able to transfer data from one application to another. Tekla Structural Designer has tools to automatically import model data from Neutral Files and from 3D DXF to facilitate this.
Of course you can always build the model directly - the Quick Start Guides covers many of the modelling techniques required to achieve this so no further mention is required here.
Once the physical model has been created, the next step is to load it. A wide range of loads can be applied in a flexible system of loadcases, with a wind load generator available to automatically create the wind load cases. Load combinations can also be generated automatically.
You should also consider pattern loading - patterned beam loads can be created automatically; patterned slab loads can be manually created for design of slabs.
2.
Combined Analysis and Design:
Tekla Structural Designer automatically performs the analyses required to enable member design to proceed: in effect Analysis and Design (with the exception of slab design) are combined into a single automated process.
3.
Produce Reports:
A wide range of calculations can be created, which you can tailor extensively to meet your specific requirements
4.
Produce Drawings:
Beam and Column detail drawings can be produced and member schedules can also be produced.
Whilst multiple materials can be analysed, design is only supported for concrete and
hot rolled steel members.
Interface Overview
Interface components
File menu
The File menu contains those commands that can be used to perform file related operations
2
Button Description
New (button) creates a new blank project from scratch.
Open an existing project.
Save the currently open project.
Save As saves the currently open project to a new name, or to a template.
Save Model Only saves smaller ‘model only’ files without the analysis results, which can be easily shared amongst the project team.
Close the currently open project.
Print the currently open view.
Start Revision records changes to this revision of the project.
Send As Email creates a new e-mail with the project attached.
Exit prompts you to save any open project then closes the program.
User Guides
3
User Guides (UK)
Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access Toolbar displays commonly used commands: New, Open, Save,
Undo, Redo, Delete and Validate.
Viewcube
In 3D Views - click a vertex, edge, or face of the Viewcube to rotate the model to a preset view.
Ribbon
The Ribbon consists of a number of toolbars placed on tabs. Each toolbar contains related commands organised into logical groups.
Project Workspace
The Project Workspace is a central location for organising the entire model into a hierarchical structure.
4
User Guides
Because the Project Workspace provides access to a whole range functions it is a key tool for creating and controlling your model.
Structure Tree
Levels, grids, elements and certain other model properties are accessible from the
Structure Tree located on the Structure tab of the Project Workspace.
Groups Tree
The Groups Tree located on the Groups tab of the Project Workspace is used to organise members into Design and Detailing groups.
5
User Guides (UK)
Loading Tree
The Loading Tree located on the Loading tab of the Project Workspace is used to summate the total loads applied in each of the loadcases and combinations.
Wind Model Tree
The Wind Model Tree located on the Wind tab of the Project Workspace is used to access Wind Direction Views and Wind Loadcases.
Status Tree
The Status Tree located on the Status tab of the Project Workspace is used to review the status of the model and analyses that have been performed. It also displays the import/export status.
6
User Guides
Cutting Planes
The Cutting Planes symbol is displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the Scene
View when any of the cutting planes are currently active.
Report Index
The Report Index is located in the Project Workspace. When a Report is displayed it contains bookmarks that can be used to move around the report.
Scene Views
2D and 3D views (and solver views) of the model, sub models, frames, construction levels and individual members can be displayed in tabbed windows.
7
User Guides (UK)
Basic Tooltip
Basic tooltips display the name of the command and may also include a brief description of its function.
Select Entity Tooltip
The program is automatically in ‘select mode’ when no other commands are being performed. In this mode you can hover the cursor over an entity and its name will be displayed in the Select Entity Tooltip.
When the correct entity is displayed click it to select it. If several entities are displayed you control which one will be selected by using the tab or cursor keys.
8
User Guides
Right Click Menu
At any time you can right click within a 2D or 3D View to display a menu that is context sensitive to the item that is currently highlighted.
Properties Window
The Properties Window facilitates the input, review and editing of model properties.
It is used as follows:
• to input data when a command is run from a toolbar
• to review/edit existing properties when individual or multiple items are selected in the active Scene View
9
User Guides (UK)
• to review/edit properties when a branch of the Project Workspace is selected
The properties displayed vary according to the selection - they are generally editable unless they are greyed out, in which case they cannot be changed.
A key feature of the Properties Window is that it enables the editing of multiple selected items in one go. Existing properties of selected items are only displayed where they are identical for all selected items - where they differ the property field is left empty.
By default the Properties Window is initially docked at the bottom left of the main window, but you can reposition it if required.
Property Dialog
The Property Dialog is used for viewing and editing parameters associated with an individual model object. It is displayed by right clicking on the object in the graphical display and picking the Edit option from the context menu that appears.
Scene Content
The Scene Content window is used to control the displayed content in the 2D and 3D
Scene Views.
10
User Guides
The window contains:
Entity categories (with check boxes)
• Some categories have arrow symbols to their side, indicating sub categories - click the arrow symbol in order to see these.
• The check box controls whether the entity category and its associated information is displayed - Simply check the entities you want to see and remove the check against those that you do not.
Entity information controls
• These list the information in each category that will be displayed. When clicked they expand to drop list menus allowing you to select the information required.
Loading drop list
The Loading drop list is permanently docked at the bottom edge of the main window.
It has two main functions:
11
User Guides (UK)
• selecting a specific loadcase to add loads in to,
• selecting a specific loadcase, combination, or envelope to view the results for.
When viewing results, first click the Loadcase, Combination, or Envelope button as required, then choose the specific loadcase, combination, or envelope name from the drop list.
Process Window
Initially the Process Window is minimised; it can be displayed by clicking the Show
Process button located at the left end of the Status Bar.
When you analyse or design the model, each step of the process is logged and displayed in the window.
12
When the window is minimised to the Status Bar, if warnings or errors have been detected these are flagged thus:
•
•
Such warnings and errors should always be fully investigated as they may have an adverse affect the design.
Status Bar
User Guides
Hiding, re-displaying and moving windows
The Properties Window, Process Window, Scene Content and each of the Project
Workspace tabs (shown below) are displayed in windows that can be resized and repositioned, or docked to an edge of another window.
To auto hide a window:
To increase the area available for graphical display you can choose to Auto Hide any of the windows.
1.
Click the window Auto Hide option icon ( ).
2.
The window contracts immediately to a tab.
3.
Click the window tab to expand it.
You can only do this if the window is docked against an edge of the main window.
To close a window:
• Click the icon at the top-right of the window.
To re-display a window that has been closed:
• Click the tab
• In the View group click the window name.
If the window is already switched on its control will be emphasised on the
View group.
13
User Guides (UK)
To move a window to a new location
• Grab the window by its handle (the title bar at the top of the window) and drag it to its new location.
• If you place the window over an edge of the main window, or over a divider within it, then it will dock to that edge or divider.
To dock a window as a tabbed page in another window
• Grab the window by its handle (the title bar at the top of the window) and drag it to over the title bar of the other window, or over the tab group of the other window.
To open a tabbed page in another window
• Click the tab and drag it to a new location. It will then open in a new window.
To dock a window using the docking control
When you grab a window, and drag it over another window, a docking control appears in the middle of that window. You can then use this control to dock the window in a number of ways.
1.
To dock to a tabbed page of the current window:
• Drag the grabbed window over the central button of the docking control and then release the mouse.
The grabbed window becomes a tab of the current window.
2.
To dock as a new window at an edge of the current window:
• Drag the grabbed window over one of the buttons adjacent to the central button of the docking control and then release the mouse.
The grabbed window is docked above, below, to the left, or to the right of the current window (depending on the button chosen in the docking control).
3.
To dock as a new window at an edge of the main window:
• Drag the grabbed window over one of the outer buttons of the docking control and then release the mouse.
14
User Guides
The grabbed window is docked at the top, bottom, left, or right of the main window
(depending on the button chosen in the docking control).
Commands on the ribbon toolbars
The majority of commands are organised on toolbars located on the ribbon.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Right click menu commands
Right click menu commands
Hovering the cursor over the top of an entity and right clicking will display a menu containing options which vary depending upon the entity being clicked on.
Apply property set...
Displays the Select property set dialog, so that a previously saved property set can be applied to the currently highlighted element.
Check Member
Carries out a check design of the highlighted member.
Check Member ignores the auto-design setting of the member. (i.e. it will always perform a check even if the auto-design property is on.)
Check Panel
Carries out a check design of the highlighted slab panel.
15
User Guides (UK)
Check Panel ignores the auto-design setting of the panel. (i.e. it will always perform a check even if the auto-design property is on.)
Check Patches
Carries out a check design of all the slab patches at the current level (if activated from a
2D View), or all the patches in the model (if activated from the Structure 3D View).
Check Patches ignores the auto-design setting of the patch. (i.e. it will always perform a check even if the auto-design property is on.)
Check plane
This command is available by right clicking on an individual level, frame, or slope in the
Structure Tree.
Carries out a check of all members in the selected plane.
Check plane ignores the auto-design settings of individual members. (i.e. members are always checked, even if their auto-design property is on.)
Check plane slabs
This command is available by right clicking on an individual level, frame, or slope in the
Structure Tree.
Carries out a check of all slabs in the selected plane.
Check plane slabs ignores the auto-design settings of individual slabs. (i.e. slabs are always checked, even if their auto-design property is on.)
Check Punching
Carries out a check design of the highlighted punching check item.
16
User Guides
Check Punching ignores the auto-design setting of the punching check item. (i.e. it will always perform a check even if the auto-design property is on.)
Check Slabs
Carries out a check design of all the slabs at the current level (if activated from a 2D
View), or all the slabs in the model (if activated from the Structure 3D View).
Check Slabs ignores the auto-design setting of the slabs. (i.e. it will always perform a check even if the auto-design property is on.)
Check Truss
Carries out a check of all truss members in the highlighted truss.
Check truss ignores the auto-design settings of individual truss members.
(i.e. truss members are always checked, even if their auto-design property is on.)
Check Wall
Carries out a check design of the highlighted wall.
Check Wall ignores the auto-design setting of the wall. (i.e. it will always perform a check even if the auto-design property is on.)
Copy
Copies existing selected entities to new locations in the model.
Create property set...
Creates a new property set based on the properties of the currently highlighted element.
Delete Element
Deletes the currently highlighted element.
17
User Guides (UK)
Design Member
Carries out a design of the highlighted member or slab panel.
Design Member ignores the auto-design setting of the member. (i.e. it will always perform a design even if the auto-design property is off.
Design Patches
Carries out a design of all the slab patches at the current level (if activated from a 2D
View), or all the patches in the model (if activated from the Structure 3D View).
Design Patches ignores the auto-design setting of the patches. (i.e. it will always perform a design even if the auto-design property is off.)
Design plane
This command is available by right clicking on an individual level, frame, or slope in the
Structure Tree, but only when at least one member in the selected plane is in autodesign mode.
All members in the plane are checked or designed according to individual autodesign settings.
Design plane slabs
This command is available by right clicking on an individual level, frame, or slope in the
Structure Tree, but only when at least one slab in the selected plane is in auto-design mode.
All slabs in the plane are checked or designed according to individual autodesign settings.
Design Punching
Carries out a design of the highlighted punching check item.
Design Punching ignores the auto-design setting of the punching check item. (i.e. it will always perform a design even if the auto-design property is off.
Design Slabs
18
User Guides
Carries out a design of all the slabs at the current level (if activated from a 2D View), or all the slabs in the model (if activated from the Structure 3D View).
Design Slabs ignores the auto-design setting of the slabs. (i.e. it will always perform a design even if the auto-design property is off.)
Design Truss
For this command to be available at least one truss member in the highlighted truss has to be in auto-design mode.
All truss members in the highlighted truss are checked or designed according to individual autodesign settings.
Design Wall
Carries out a design of the highlighted wall.
Design Wall ignores the auto-design setting of the member. (i.e. it will always perform a design even if the auto-design property is off.
Edit
Displays the Edit Element Properties dialog, opened at the General page for the currently highlighted element.
Generate Detailing Drawing...
Creates a Drawing for the currently highlighted member.
•
Interactive Design...
This command is only available for concrete beams and columns.
When clicked, it opens a dialog showing the existing design of the highlighted member for the currently supplied reinforcement. From here you can interactively modify the reinforcement and instantly see the result.
Open load analysis view
Opens a Loading Analysis View for the currently highlighted member.
Open member view
Opens a Member View containing the currently highlighted member.
19
User Guides (UK)
The Member toolbar includes commands to edit the member, design it, create a member report and generate a member detail drawing.
Open view
Opens a 2D view of the frame, slope or level that contains the currently highlighted panel.
Redraw
Redraws and updates the current view.
Report for member
Opens a Report View for the currently highlighted member.
•
Save Screenshot
Saves the currently displayed view as a png or jpg file.
Save View Configuration...
Saves the currently displayed orientation and zoom state of the active Scene View under a given name.
View Configurations can be used in two ways:
1.
They can be included in Model Reports (but note that in the current release there is a limitation that the Scene Content settings in place when the View Configuration was saved are not retained).
2.
They can be re-opened in a new Scene View at a subsequent time (in which case they adopt whatever Scene Content settings are currently in place).
Show Member Loading
The Member Loading dialog tabulates all the loads applied to the currently highlighted member.
To filter the Member Loading data by Loadcase, Source, Direction, or Type
1.
Click the appropriate column header to filter by (Loadcase..., Source..., Direction..., or Type...)
2.
From the drop list that appears uncheck the categories that you don’t want to be displayed.
3.
Click the Close button under the drop list.
Undo/Redo
20
User Guides
Undo and redo can be used to repetitively undo/redo operations in the sequence they were performed.
Zoom Out
Zooms out to the extents of the model.
Zoom to selection
Zooms out to the extents of the current selection.
Keyboard functions
Keys which perform specific functions in Tekla Structural Designer are listed below:
Key Description
F1
F2
F8
Up/Down cursor keys
Ctrl
Esc
ZA
Displays Help.
Enables keyboard input of values into ‘Data Entry’ tooltips.
Toggles display of the ViewCube in 3D views.
Used to scroll between entities in the ‘Select Entity’ tooltip when multiple entities have been detected.
Holding Ctrl when selecting adds to the current selection.
Cancels the current command.
Zoom Extents
Customising the appearance of the user interface
You can use skins to change the appearance of the user interface.
To apply a new skin:
1.
Click Window > Skins (drop list)
2.
Select a new skin from the list.
Head Codes and Design Codes
Tekla Structural Designer allows you to choose from a range of international design codes of practice. Each new project will initially adopt the codes that have been
21
User Guides (UK) specified in the active settings set, however it is also possible to change codes in mid project.
The head code is used to control which action and resistance codes are available for selection.
How do I configure the default design codes to be applied to new projects?
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
Select a suitable settings set from the drop list and make it active.
3.
Use the Design Codes page of the Settings dialog to choose the codes required.
Having set the codes as required, Tekla Structural Designer will retain these as the default codes to apply for each new project until you decide to amend them.
To start a new project with the chosen design codes:
• Click Home > New ( )
How do I change design codes in an existing project?
1.
Click Home > Model Settings ( )
2.
In the Design Codes page of the dialog choose the codes required.
If you change design codes in mid project, any existing load combinations will be lost - you will therefore need to recreate them.
Depending on the type of construction and the actual code change applied, it is possible that additional data will also need to be re-specified. For example changing from British codes to Eurocodes results in a loss of composite beam stud layouts. ‘Simple’ columns may also require the support at the base to be re-specified in this situation.
Units
Tekla Structural Designer allows you to switch between Metric and US Customary units.
Furthermore, you can then choose the units with which you are comfortable working.
For example if using US Customary units you can choose to input forces in either kip or lb. Input lengths can be input in either feet or inches, or if you prefer feet and inches - length values that are not whole numbers can be input either as decimals or fractions to your required precision.
How do I configure the default units to be applied to new projects?
22
User Guides
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
Select a suitable settings set from the drop list and make it active.
3.
Use the Units page of the dialog to choose the System required.
4.
You can then tailor the way the chosen units system will be applied. The various options allow you to set the units and the precision (number of decimal places or fractions) which you want Tekla Structural Designer to use.
Note that the length unit can be set appropriate for the type of dimension being input:
• Fine Dimension units - these are used for defining stud spacings, section size constraints and other typically small distances.
• Dimension units - these are used for defining grid spacings, positioning members, positioning load locations etc. They are also used to control the accuracy of any measured dimension lines that you apply to the model.
• Deflection units - these are used for reporting deflection results.
• Distance units - these are used for defining large dimensions.
Having set the units as required, Tekla Structural Designer will then expect input in the same format.
If the Dimension unit is set to ft, in fract. Then to input a dimension of two feet six and one quarter inches you would type: 2’ 6 1/4”
To input a series of irregular grid lines at spacings of fifteen feet, followed by three spacings of twenty feet six and one half inches, followed by one spacing of fifteen feet you would type: 15’,3*20’ 6 1/2”,15’
To start a new project with the chosen units:
• Click Home > New ( )
How do I change units and units precision in an existing project?
1.
Click Home > Model Settings ( )
2.
Use the Units page of the dialog to choose the System required.
3.
You can then tailor the way the chosen units system will be applied. The various options allow you to set the units and the precision (number of decimal places or fractions) which you want Tekla Structural Designer to use.
Note that the length unit can be set appropriate for the type of dimension being input:
23
User Guides (UK)
• Fine Dimension units - these are used for defining stud spacings, section size constraints and other typically small distances.
• Dimension units - these are used for defining grid spacings, positioning members, positioning load locations etc. They are also used to control the accuracy of any measured dimension lines that you apply to the model.
• Deflection units - these are used for reporting deflection results.
• Distance units - these are used for defining large dimensions.
Having set the units as required, Tekla Structural Designer will then expect input in the same format.
If the Dimension unit is set to ft, in fract. Then to input a dimension of two feet six and one quarter inches you would type: 2’ 6 1/4”
To input a series of irregular grid lines at spacings of fifteen feet, followed by three spacings of twenty feet six and one half inches, followed by one spacing of fifteen feet you would type: 15’,3*20’ 6 1/2”,15’
Settings
Various defaults (referred to collectively as a ‘settings set’) can be managed via the
Settings dialog . When these settings are edited you will find that mainly they do not get
directly applied to the current project - they do however get applied to future
projects.
are the exception, as they are applied instantly whenever the ‘settings set’ to which they belong is made ‘active’.
Settings and defaults in the current project (with the exception of general and display settings) are not controlled directly from the Settings dialog - these can only be changed from the Model Settings, Analysis Options, or
Design Options dialogs.
Working with setting sets
Initial setup
The very first time the program is run you are required to select a country/region in order to configure an appropriate initial settings set.
Importing/adding further sets
You are not restricted to a single settings set - you can import additional sets for other countries/regions and add customised copies of existing sets (to cater for different types of project for example).
Editing the set contents
24
User Guides
You can review and customise the settings in a particular set simply by selecting it from the drop list at the top of the page and then making the changes required.
Changing the defaults in a set won’t affect the defaults in a model that is already open - these can only be changed from the Model Settings, Analysis
Options, or Design Options dialogs.
The active set
You choose the settings set to be applied to a new project by designating it as the
active set.
Ensuring the active set is specified correctly before commencing work on a new model is an efficient way to ensure the most appropriate defaults are in place at the outset, minimising the need to change Model Settings, Analysis and Design Options etc. at a later stage.
If you subsequently further customise the settings within an individual project you can save these back to the active set if you require.
Distributing sets
In order to apply consistent settings on a company wide basis, once suitable settings sets have been configured, the resulting settings files can be made available to all users within the company by manually copying them to the appropriate folder on each computer.
Selecting a settings set the first time the program is run
The first time the program is run after installation, you will be asked to select an appropriate region. This configures a settings set for you containing defaults most appropriate to the region selected.
Each settings set includes defaults for:
• Design Codes
• Units
• Section Defaults
• Settings for Drawings, Schedules and Reports
Although only one region can be selected at this point, you can subsequently import settings sets for any of the other regions if you so require. Each set
can then be modified to your exact needs via the Settings dialog
dialog.
How do I edit the content of a settings set?
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
25
User Guides (UK)
2.
On the Settings Sets page select the settings set to be edited from the drop list.
3.
Use the various pages of the Settings dialog to tailor the set to your requirements.
The various options allow you to:
• configure the font use to display results in the Results Viewer,
• configure the appearance of the Reports,
• set the units with which you are comfortable working, and set the precision
(number of decimal places) to which you want Tekla Structural Designer to use for each unit type,
• set the Design Codes to be applied,
• set default section sizes for each of the member types,
• set if confirmations are required for specific actions,
• set element references,
• configure the appearance of the Schedules,
• configure drawing types and styles,
• configure the colors used in the 2D and 3D views.
4.
When the settings are configured as required click OK to save them to the currently selected Settings Set.
How do I add a different settings set?
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
In the Settings Sets page of the dialog click Add
3.
Enter the name of the new set and then click OK
4.
Use the various pages of the Settings dialog to configure the settings that apply for
the new set.
5.
When the settings are configured as required click OK to save them to the currently selected Settings Set.
How do I specify the active settings set?
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
On the Settings Sets page select the settings set required from the drop list.
3.
Click >> Active to make this the default set for new projects.
4.
Click OK to close the dialog.
How do I import a settings set for a different region?
26
User Guides
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
From the Settings Sets page of the dialog click Import...
3.
Choose the country to import the settings for and click OK.
How do I delete a settings set?
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
In the Settings Sets page of the dialog choose the set to be deleted from the dropdown list.
3.
Click Remove to delete it.
How do I load settings from a settings set to the current project?
Having edited the settings within an individual project, you may subsequently require to change them back to the original defaults from the settings set, or you may even decide to replace them with settings from a different settings set.
Firstly you need to ensure the required settings set is active as follows:
1.
Open the Settings dialog at the Settings Sets page.
2.
Select the settings set you want to use to update settings within the current project.
3.
If it is not already the active set, click the >>Active button to make it so.
4.
Click OK
Next you have to choose which settings are to be updated. (You are able to update either: Analysis Options, Design Options, Drawing Settings, or Model Settings.)
1.
Open the dialog containing the settings to be updated, either:
• Click Home > Model Settings ( )
• Click Analyse > Options ( )
• Click Design > Options ( )
• Click Draw > Edit... ( )
2.
Click the Load... button.
3.
Click ‘Yes’ to update the model settings with those from the active settings set.
How do I save settings from the current project to a settings set?
27
User Guides (UK)
In some instances, you may decide that specific changes you’ve made to the model settings, analysis options or design options should be applied not just within the existing project but to new projects also. To do this the changes have to be saved back to the active settings set.
Firstly you need to ensure the required settings set is active as follows:
1.
Open the Settings dialog at the Settings Sets page.
2.
Select the settings set you want to be updated from the drop list.
3.
If it is not already the active set, click the >>Active button to make it so.
4.
Click OK
Next you have to choose which settings are to be updated. (You are able to update either: Analysis Options, Design Options, Drawing Settings, or Model Settings.)
1.
Open the dialog containing the settings to be saved, either:
• Click Home > Model Settings ( )
• Click Analyse > Options ( )
• Click Design > Options ( )
• Click Draw > Edit... ( )
2.
Click the Save... button.
3.
Click ‘Yes’ to update the active Settings Set with the current settings shown in the dialog.
How do I copy a settings set from one computer to another?
In order to apply consistent settings on a company wide basis, once a suitable settings set has been configured on one computer, the resulting xml file would need to be manually copied to other computers to make it available to other users.
1.
On the computer containing the settings set to be copied: click Home > Settings
( )
2.
On the Settings Sets page of the dialog, ensure the set to be copied has a name that distinguishes it from the default installed sets - (if necessary click Rename to do this.)
3.
Next, click Open Folder
28
User Guides
4.
Select the required xml file and manually transfer it to the settings folder on each destination computer - (the settings folder is located by clicking Open Folder from the Settings dialog on each destination computer).
5.
Restart Tekla Structural Designer on the destination computers in order to see the new set listed on the Settings Sets page.
General and display settings
The settings on the General, Results Viewer, Report and Scene pages control the appearance and behaviour of different areas of the user interface.
Provided the set that has been edited is the ‘active’ set - any changes are instantly applied to the current work-session when you click OK to close the Settings dialog.
These general and display settings continue to apply in future work-sessions (for any model) whenever the edited set is ‘active’.
Settings dialog
Settings dialog
Located on the Home toolbar, this dialog serves two purposes:
• to manage defaults (referred to collectively as a settings set) that are applied to future projects
• to manage that are applied instantly to the current work session
Settings - Settings Sets
This page controls the settings sets which are used to create the model/analysis/design settings in new projects, and which can also be used to replace the model/analysis/design settings in existing projects.
Fields
Settings set drop list
The drop list displays all the existing settings sets.
The selected set’s content can be viewed/edited by clicking on the other pages of the
Settings dialog.
Buttons
Creates a new settings set which is initially a copy of the active settings set.
It can then be customised by clicking on the other pages of the Settings dialog and making edits as required.
Makes the settings set that is currently displayed in the drop list the active settings set.
29
User Guides (UK)
Displays a dialog from which you can choose to import setting sets applicable to other geographic regions. drop list.
Can be used to rename the settings set that is currently displayed in the drop list.
Can be used to remove the settings set that is currently displayed in the
Opens the folder in which the existing settings sets are located.
Updates the settings in the currently displayed settings set and closes the dialog. The settings that apply to the current model are NOT updated.
Closes the dialog without making changes to the settings set.
Settings - General
This page and sub-pages are used to (for the settings set selected at the top of the page):
• configure the language,
• configure autosave,
• set the font used in the Results Viewer,
• configure which actions require confirmation.
Unlike other ‘settings set’ settings, changes to general settings are instantly applied to the current work-session when you click OK to close the Settings dialog (provided the edits were made to the ‘active’ set).
Language
Preferred Language
Changing the language changes the terminology used in the interface and output.
For example the term ‘links’ is used when the language is English (United Kingdom) but this becomes ‘stirrups’ when the language is English (United States).
The Preferred Language cannot be configured differently between Settings
Sets.
Appearance
Windows
You can elect to show captions on top by checking the box.
Autosave
30
User Guides
Autosave
Used to enable the autosave feature and set the autosave interval.
When autosave is enabled, a backup is made of the model at a specified interval (minimum 5 minutes). If you have to restart the program after a crash; then provided the autosave is newer than the last saved version of the model, you will be offered the opportunity to open the autosaved version.
Confirmations
Confirm on
Uncheck the boxes for operations that you don’t want to have to confirm each time.
Settings - Results Viewer
This page and sub-pages are used to configure (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the appearance of the on screen results viewer.
Unlike other ‘settings set’ settings, changes to results viewer settings are instantly applied to the current work-session when you click OK to close the
Settings dialog (provided the edits were made to the ‘active’ set).
General
Viewer font
The ‘Viewer’ font only controls the text that is displayed in the left hand pane of the results viewer.
Styles
Calc Normal
‘Calc Normal’ is not currently used.
Table
The ‘Table’ font controls all the text displayed in the right hand pane of the results viewer, with the exception of the first row in any table.
Table Heading
The ‘Table Heading’ font controls the first row in any table.
Settings - Units
This page is used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the units, format and precision that apply.
Fields
31
User Guides (UK)
System
Use the drop list to select either Metric or US Customary Units.
Table of Quantities
This table lists each quantity, showing its current unit and precision.
Settings
When a quantity is selected from the table, its available units are displayed here.
Precision
When a quantity is selected from the table, its precision is displayed here.
Exponential Format
Specify the lower and upper limits for when exponential formats should be applied.
Settings - Design Codes
This page is used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the head code and subsequent design codes.
Fields
Head Code
Select the head code to automatically populate the subsequent action and resistance codes.
Design Codes
The action and resistance codes are dependent on the selected head code. The drop down menus can be used to select between alternatives where applicable.
Structure Defaults
This page is used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) miscellaneous structure defaults.
Unlike other ‘settings set’ settings, changes to nominal cover are applied instantaneously for new members.
Section Defaults
This page is used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the default section size when a new member is created for each member type.
Settings - References
This page and sub-pages are used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of
the page) the References that get applied.
32
User Guides
General page
Numbering
When object references include the ‘Count’ item, this field can be used to specify the start number to count from at each construction level, (eg 1, 100, 1000).
Renumbering Direction
The renumbering directions that you set here control the way that member numbering gets applied when you use the Renumber command.
Grid Line Naming
The initial number and initial letter specified are applied to the first gridlines; the labelling for subsequent lines follows the sequence of the naming style. You can choose to ignore letters ‘I’ and ‘O’.
Formats page
Object/Reference Format/Edit
This table lists each object type showing its current reference format. Reference formats are fully customisable, being built up from component ‘items’ arranged in any order - click the Edit button to change.
Texts page
Characteristics
When object references include the ‘Characteristic’ item, this table can be used to specify the text used to designate the characteristic.
Materials
When object references include the ‘Material’ item, this table can be used to specify the text used to designate the material.
Settings - Grouping
This page is used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the default text used for each member type’s group labelling.
Sub-group Name
Enter the text that you want to use for group labelling here.
This text forms the stem of the Design Group and Detailing Group names that are displayed on the Groups tab of the Project Workspace. These names are shown in the output reports and drawings when grouped design has been applied.
Settings - Material List
This page is used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) settings affecting material lists.
Ignore openings with area less than
33
User Guides (UK)
This setting allows you to specify the size of opening that can be considered small enough to be ignored when determining the quantity of slab reinforcement required.
Settings - Solver
This page is used to specify (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the solver method that gets applied.
Two different solvers are available. The compressed sparse row solver is preferred as this will generally reduce the time required for analysis (particularly for finite element analysis).
Settings - User Defined Attributes
This page controls (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) a table of the attributes that will be made available for new projects. You can add new attribute definitions or delete them, and also set each attribute’s type and control the values that are permitted.
Fields
Name
The name of the attribute that will be displayed in the UDA section of the Properties
Window.
Type drop list
Attributes must be set to be one to three types: Text, Number, or File.
Source drop list
To restrict the allowable input for an attribute to a preset list choose Value List, otherwise choose Custom Value.
Values
This field is only active when the source is set to Value List. It is used to limit the allowable values to a preset list.
Buttons
Creates a blank row in the table for defining a new attribute. the table.
Deletes the currently selected attribute from the table.
Moves the currently selected attribute upwards in the table. The order in which attributes are listed in the Properties Window reflects the order in
Moves the currently selected attribute downwards in the table. The order in which attributes are listed in the Properties Window reflects the order
34
User Guides in the table.
Updates the settings in the currently displayed settings set and closes the dialog. The settings that apply to the current model are NOT updated.
Closes the dialog without making changes to the settings set.
Settings - Scene
This page is used to control (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the color and opacity of each object type in the scene views.
Unlike other ‘settings set’ settings, changes to scene settings are instantly applied to the current work-session when you click OK to close the Settings dialog (provided the edits were made to the ‘active’ set).
Colors page
Reset Colors
Resets all the colors to the default settings.
Color Name
The item to which the color applies.
An arrow is displayed to the left of some of the items, this can be clicked on in order to set the colors for sub-items.
Opacity
Use the slider to set the opacity
Color
Set the color for each item as required.
Fonts page
Reset Fonts
Resets all the fonts to the default settings.
Font Name
The item to which the font applies.
Font, Size, Bold, Italic
Set for each item as required.
Contours page
This page is used to configure the way that FE contours are displayed when in Results
View mode.
35
User Guides (UK)
The default configuration consists of 10 evenly sized contours, each accounting for 10% of the total range. You can increase or decrease the number of contours, and also change the size and the color of individual contours.
Lower bound (%)
The lower bound of each contour cannot be edited directly - instead it is adjusted by editing the Size (%)
Upper bound (%)
The upper bound of each contour cannot be edited directly - instead it is adjusted by editing the Size (%)
Size (%)
You can edit the size of individual contours as required, however the sum of the sizes must equate to 100%.
Color
Click on the color of a contour in order to change it.
Split
Click this button to divide the selected contour into two contours, each being half the size of the original.
Delete
Click this button to remove the selected contour.
Reset
Click this button to reset to the default configuration of 10 evenly sized contours.
View Settings page
Results
Many columns can have very small values of storey shear associated with them which can detract from the important ones. The Do not display values of storey
shear below setting provides a means to limit the values for a new model. Storey shears less than the limiting value set here are not displayed in the Results View.
Piles
The pile lengths displayed in the views can be cropped by unchecking the Show full
pile length setting. You can specify a shorter pile length to be displayed.
Materials
The Materials dialog is used to manage the material databases. These databases contain an extensive range of sections, materials, reinforcement, decking and connectors for each Head Code and/or Country.
The initial (system) data in the databases is protected so that standard items cannot be accidently edited or deleted, but you can supplement it with extra (user) data from other sources/suppliers if so required. Any user data you add is fully editable.
36
User Guides
Although the ‘Materials dialog’ can be used to view the properties for any of the head codes, only those properties for the currently specified head code in
‘Model Settings’ can be applied to the model.
Materials - Sections
The Sections page of the Materials dialog can be used to view the available steel, cold formed, cold rolled and timber sections for each Head Code. New ‘user’ sections can also be added.
Fields
Units System
When the United States (ACI/AISC) Head Code is selected you can view properties in either metric or US customary units. (Properties for other head codes can only be viewed in the metric system).
Current database version
The version of the section properties database that is currently installed.
Head Code
Choose a head code to view the current database properties for.
Material
Choose a material type to view the current database properties for.
Buttons
This button is only displayed if the program has detected that the currently installed sections database is older than the latest available version.
If you click ‘Upgrade’ the installed section properties database is updated to the latest version.
Alternatively if you choose not to upgrade, the old section properties database will be maintained.
Click Manage Sections to view and edit the database contents
for the current selection in the Sections dialog .
Click Manage Section Orders to create or edit a ‘design section order’ for the current selection.
The Connection Resistance button is used to specify the composite and non composite resistance for steel sections. The values entered can then be used in connection checks.
The Steel Joists button is used to view the capacities of steel joist sections.
37
User Guides (UK)
Sections dialog
This dialog is used to manage the sections held in the database.
• The Details button is then used to view properties of the selected section.
• The Add... button can be used to add further sections to the database.
The Delete button can be used to delete user defined sections.
The Edit... button can be used to edit user defined sections.
How do I add a user defined section to the database?
Either the Select Section dialog
, or the Sections dialog can be used to add sections to
the database.
If you require to edit an existing user defined section you can only do so from the Section dialog.
To open the Sections dialog:
1.
Click Home > Materials ( )
2.
In the Sections page of the dialog click Manage Sections.
The Sections dialog is displayed.
To add a section:
1.
Select the database country from the Country droplist.
38
User Guides
2.
Select the section geometry required from the Page pane.
(If the shape you require is not shown it may have been filtered out - click the
Geometry filter if you need to check this.)
3.
Click Add...
4.
Enter values for each of the variables requested and then click OK
The new section size should now be shown on the Item pane.
How do I delete a user defined section from the database?
Either the Select Section dialog
, or the Sections dialog can be used to delete user
defined sections from the database.
If you require to edit an existing user defined section you can only do so from the Section dialog.
To open the Sections dialog:
1.
Click Home > Materials ( )
2.
In the Sections page of the dialog click Manage Sections.
The Sections dialog is displayed.
To delete a section:
1.
Select the database country from the Country droplist.
2.
Select the section geometry required from the Page pane.
(If the shape you require is not shown it may have been filtered out - click the
Geometry filter if you need to check this.)
3.
Select the user defined section size to be deleted from the Item pane.
4.
Click Delete.
Only user defined sections (i.e. those marked ‘*’) can be deleted from the database.
How do I edit a user defined section in the database?
39
User Guides (UK)
User defined section properties can only be edited via the Sections dialog .
To open the Sections dialog:
1.
Click Home > Materials ( )
2.
In the Sections page of the dialog click Manage Sections.
The Sections dialog is displayed.
To edit a section:
1.
Select the database country from the Country droplist.
2.
Select the section geometry required from the Page pane.
(If the shape you require is not shown it may have been filtered out - click the
Geometry filter if you need to check this.)
3.
Select the user defined section size to be edited from the Item pane.
Only user defined sections (i.e. those marked ‘*’) can be edited in this way.
4.
Click Edit...
How do I manage section orders?
1.
Click Home > Materials ( )
2.
Click the Sections page
3.
Select the Head Code required.
4.
Select the Material required.
5.
Click Manage Section Orders
6.
Choose the section order required
7.
Click Edit...
How do I add connection resistances to the database?
1.
Click Home > Materials ( )
40
User Guides
2.
Click the Sections page
3.
Select the Head Code required.
4.
Select Steel from the Material droplist.
5.
Click Connection Resistance
The Connection Resistance dialog is displayed.
6.
Click Add...
The Select Section dialog is displayed.
7.
Select the database country from the Country droplist.
8.
Choose the section required from the Page pane.
(If the shape you require is not shown it may have been filtered out - click the
Geometry filter if you need to check this.)
9.
Click Select
10.
Enter the non-composite and composite resistance for this section size.
11.
Either click Add... to add resistances for another section, or click OK when done.
Select Section dialog
This dialog provides the means to select sections for use in the model. It can also be used to add (and delete) user defined sections to the section database if required.
41
User Guides (UK)
How do I select a section from the Select Section dialog?
1.
If the displayed country is not correct you can select another from the Country
droplist.
2.
Select the section geometry required from the Page pane.
(If the shape you require is not shown it may have been filtered out - click the
Geometry filter if you need to check this.)
3.
Select the section size required from the Item pane.
Any section size marked ‘#’ has limited availability.
Any section size marked ‘*’ is a user defined section that has been manually added to the database.
4.
Click the Select button.
Materials - Material
The Materials page of the Materials dialog can be used to view the properties of each grade of each material for each Head Code. New ‘user’ grades can also be added.
Fields
Current database version
The version of the material database that is currently installed.
Head Code
42
User Guides
Choose a head code to view the current database properties for.
Material Type
Choose a material type to view the current database properties for.
Available Grades
Choose a specific grade from list in order to view the material properties associated with it in the current database.
Where there is more than one grade, one will be listed as the default.
When a new member is created, the grade applied will be the default in the Material database for the Head Code specified in Model Settings.
Buttons
This button is only displayed if the program has detected that the currently installed materials database is older than the latest available version.
If you click ‘Upgrade’ the installed material properties database is updated to the latest version.
Alternatively if you choose not to upgrade, the old material properties database will be maintained.
If your required grade does not exist in the current database version, this button can be used to display a dialog allowing a ‘user’ grade to be defined.
When a ‘system’ grade is selected, this button displays a dialog to view the properties. properties.
When a ‘user’ grade is selected, this button displays a dialog to edit the
When a ‘user’ grade is selected, this button can be used to delete the grade. (‘System’ grades are protected and cannot be deleted).
Makes the currently highlighted grade the default grade.
Materials - Reinforcement
The Reinforcement page of the Materials dialog can be used to view the properties of each reinforcement grade and each bar size.
Where there is more than one class, one will be listed as the default class to apply to new members.
If required new classes and new bar sizes can be defined using the Add... buttons.
Fields
Current database version
43
User Guides (UK)
The version of the reinforcement properties database that is currently installed.
Head Code
Choose a head code to view the current database properties for.
Country
Choose a country to view the current database properties for.
Type
Choose a bar type to view the current database properties for.
Rib Type
Choose a rib type to view the current database properties for.
Available Classes
Choose a specific class from list in order to view the properties associated with it in the current database.
Where there is more than one class, one will be listed as the default.
When a new member is created, the class applied will be the default in the
Reinforcement database for the Head Code specified in Model Settings.
Available Sizes
Choose a specific size from list in order to view the properties associated with it in the current database.
Buttons
This button is only displayed if the program has detected that the currently installed reinforcement database is older than the latest available version.
If you click ‘Upgrade’ the installed reinforcement database is updated to the latest version.
Alternatively if you choose not to upgrade, the old reinforcement database will be maintained.
If your required class/size does not exist in the current database version, this button can be used to display a dialog allowing a ‘user’ class/size to be defined.
When a ‘system’ class/size is selected, this button displays a dialog to view the properties.
When a ‘user’ class/size is selected, this button displays a dialog to edit the properties.
When a ‘user’ class/size is selected, this button can be used to delete it.
(‘System’ classes/sizes are protected and cannot be deleted).
Makes the currently highlighted class the default class.
44
User Guides
Materials - Metal Decking
The Metal Decking page of the Materials dialog can be used to view the properties of each profile and each gauge.
Where there is more than one profile, one will be listed as the default profile to apply to new decks. (The >>Default button can be used to change this if required.)
If required new profiles and new gauges can be defined using the Add... buttons.
Materials - Shear Connectors
The Shear Connectors page of the Materials dialog can be used to view the properties of each connector.
Where there is more than one connector, one will be listed as the default to apply for metal decks and one for concrete. (The >>Def. Metal and >>Def. Concrete buttons can be used to change these if required.)
If required new connector sources and connectors can be defined using the Add... buttons.
Materials - Model
The Model page of the Materials dialog can be used to update Tekla Structural Designer’s material databases with new properties from the model, or it can be used in reverse to update material properties in the model with new values from the material databases.
Understanding the ‘In Database’ status indicator
Provided there are no inconsistencies between the material data in the model and the databases, the Model page will be shown similar to the one below:
• The solid circle against each material data object indicates the data for that object matches that in the database.
• If the ‘Show only objects not saved in the database’ option is checked, then nothing is displayed as everything is consistent.
If there is an inconsistency between the material data in the model and the databases, the Model page will show this by placing a tick against those object classes where there is a problem:
45
User Guides (UK)
• If the ‘Show only objects not saved in the database’ option is then checked, then only the inconsistent data is displayed making it easier to drill down and locate the problem objects.
The inconsistency can be resolved by first checking the problem objects and then choosing to either ‘Add to Database’ (from the model) or ‘Update from Database’ (to the model).
Adding material properties from the model to a material database
When you define a member the material properties assigned to it are initially read from the appropriate material database but subsequently held with the member itself. This means that the model can be opened and run on another computer, even if it doesn’t have a matching material in its database.
When such a mis-match between the model’s material data and the material database arises, you are not required to add the missing properties to the database. It may however be beneficial to do so if you anticipate that you will need to re-use the property in question in new models.
Updating the model’s material properties from a material database
As stated above, once a member has been created its material properties are permanently held with it. Consequently if Tekla Structural Designer’s material databases are subsequently updated, the member itself will not be automatically updated.
If this situation arises you can choose to refresh the model’s material data with data from a material database wherever there is a mis-match between the two.
Upgrading the material databases
46
User Guides
The installed material databases each have their own database version, (displayed separately on each page of the Materials dialog). The original data in each of these databases is referred to as ‘system data’ and cannot be edited. The version number relates specifically to this system data.
From time to time new system data might become available through a program update.
When this happens, an ‘Upgrade’ button is displayed adjacent to the current database version on the relevant page of the Materials dialog. You then have the choice to either upgrade the database or retain the old version.
Any extra items you add to the databases are referred to as ‘user data’, this data is fully editable. Adding user data has no effect on the database version.
Updating the database version does not cause you to lose any user data you may have added to the old version, since it is automatically copied back in to the new database.
In certain circumstances an inconsistency can arise between the user data in a model and the installed databases. (Typically this can occur if a model containing user data is transferred to a different computer). Such inconsistencies can be identified and resolved from the Model page of the Materials dialog, either by updating the model data, or by updating the databases.
References
Tekla Structural Designer has a flexible object referencing system specifically designed to cater for the use of multiple materials within the same model.
Reference Format basics
Object references are totally user definable and can be constructed from any or all of the following items:
Icon Item Comment
Material
Characteristic
User definable text: (e.g. S for Steel,
C for Concrete)
User definable text: (e.g. B for
Beam, C for Column) grid (or construction point) reference
47
User Guides (UK)
Direction
Count
Custom Text grid (or construction point) reference
Beams only
A separate count is kept for each level for each object type.
Fixed text: (e.g. “Block C”)
Separator (dash)
Separator (slash)
Separator (space)
Separator (times)
The default references from the active Settings Set for each object type are applied as objects of that type are created.
You can edit the syntax of the reference format at any time and objects created after the edit will adopt the new format.
You can optionally include a separator between each of the items.
You can include fixed custom text within the reference format e.g. "DB" or "B", "G",
"Block C" at any position within the reference.
Once objects have been created you can edit their references on an object by object basis if required so that they can be further individualised.
The start and end reference points P1 and P2, work from the grids that you define, and from the construction points which have been created automatically when you place members which don’t lie between existing points.
These reference points, when constructed using two grid reference points, always need to automatically use a separator e.g. A/11 to avoid confusion as A1 and 1 could be confused
48
User Guides
A separate count for each level is kept for beams, braces, joists, but not a separate count by material. So for example Steel beams and Concrete beams are included in the same count on a level.
If the direction prefix is specified, then separate counts are made for each direction.
Direction 1 is defined as objects falling within +- 45 degrees of the horizontal and
Direction 2 +- 45 degrees of the vertical of the global axis.
The object reference does not include the group reference as part of the reference
descriptor; instead options are provided within the Scene Content settings and the GA
drawing's control to show either the object reference and/or the group reference.
The object reference does not include the geometric shape and section size as part of
the descriptor, instead options are provided within the Scene Content settings and the
GA drawing's control to show this information.
How do I configure the default references to be applied to new projects?
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
Select a suitable settings set from the drop list and make it active.
3.
Click References
4.
You can then tailor the way the references will be applied to each of the object types in new projects.
To start a new project with these references:
• Click Home > New ( )
How do I change reference formats and texts in an existing project?
1.
Click Home > Model Settings ( )
2.
Click References
3.
You can then tailor the way references will be applied.
How do I edit reference format syntax applied to an object type?
On the Reference Formats page, click the Edit... button to display the Edit Reference
Format dialog for the selected object type, then:
To add an extra item to the reference format:
1.
Click Add... and choose the item required.
2.
The chosen item initially appears at the end of the reference format.
To re-order the items in the reference format:
49
User Guides (UK)
1.
Hover the cursor over the item to be moved.
2.
Drag the item to reposition it.
To remove an item from the reference format:
1.
Hover the cursor over the item to be removed.
2.
Drag the item until it is outside the Edit Reference Format dialog.
How do I change the text used for the materials and characteristics in the reference format?
1.
When the References page is displayed, click Texts to display the Texts sub-page.
2.
On the Materials or Characteristics tab locate the type to be changed and edit the text as required.
3.
Click OK.
How do I renumber members?
The renumber command can be applied in order to simultaneously renumber all member types in the model whose reference format includes a ‘count’.
The member types referenced in this way would have initially been numbered in the order in which they were created. Renumbering makes the members easier to find in the model and on drawings.
Renumber works from the lowest plane/level in the model upwards. By default the count starts at 1 and continues sequentially. The renumbering direction (top left of each level to the bottom right, bottom left of each level to the top right etc.) is controlled via
Model Settings> References> General. The starting value can also be controlled on the same page.
To renumber members:
1.
Right click on the Members branch in the Structure tab of Project Workspace.
2.
From the right click menu, choose Renumber.
All members in the model that include a count in their reference format are automatically renumbered.
How do I renumber slabs?
The renumber command can be applied in order to simultaneously renumber all slab items in the model.
Slab items would have initially been numbered in the order in which they were created.
Renumbering makes them easier to find in the model and on drawings.
50
User Guides
Renumber works from the lowest plane/level in the model upwards. By default the count starts at 1 and continues sequentially. The renumbering direction (top left of each level to the bottom right, bottom left of each level to the top right etc.) is controlled via
Model Settings> References> General. The starting value can also be controlled on the same page.
To renumber slab items:
1.
Right click on the Slabs branch in the Structure tab of Project Workspace.
2.
From the right click menu, choose Renumber.
All slab items in the model are automatically renumbered.
Working with the Project Workspace
The is the central control area for your model, providing access to a range of functions.
It is divided into 6 tabs each containing an expandable ‘tree’.
Working with the Structure Tree
The purpose of the Structure Tree is to organise the model geometry in a hierarchical
way.
When opened for a new model it contains two sub branches:
As the model geometry develops new branches are added accordingly:
When a branch or sub-branch is selected, the common properties of the branch/sub
branch are also displayed in the Properties Window
from where they can be edited.
Structure
To display the building’s parameters:
51
User Guides (UK)
1.
2.
Click
are then displayed in the Properties Window
These parameters control its principal direction and default meshing properties.
Levels
To display and edit parameters common to all levels:
1.
2.
Click
The Level Properties common to all levels are displayed in the
Properties Window.
To display and edit the parameters for an individual level:
1.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of your model.
to show all the construction levels in
2.
Click an individual level to display its Level Properties in the
Properties Window.
To display the Construction Levels dialog:
1.
Right click
The Construction Levels dialog is displayed.
Frames and Slopes
A branch is added when the first frame is created, similarly a is added when the first slope is created.
To display and edit the parameters for an individual frame:
1.
branch
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of frames in your model.
to show all the currently defined
3.
Click an individual frame to display its Frame Properties in the
Properties Window.
To display and edit the parameters for an individual slope:
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of in your model.
to show all the currently defined slopes
52
User Guides
3.
Click an individual slope to display its Slope Properties in the
Properties Window.
Architectural Grids
To edit grid color, name or visibility:
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of defined grids
to show all the currently
3.
Click a grid in order to display its properties in the Properties Window.
To renumber all grids:
1.
Right click
2.
Choose ‘Renumber’ from the menu.
Sub Models
To display and edit the parameters for an individual sub model:
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of to show the existing sub models.
3.
Click an individual sub model to display its Sub Model Properties in the
Properties
Window.
To display the Sub Models dialog:
1.
Double-click
Members
Members are classified by material and type, then further classified by fabrication and then by shape.
To display and edit common properties for members of a particular type and fabrication:
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of to show the existing member types.
3.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of an existing type to show the fabrication types.
4.
Click a fabrication type to display the common properties of all members of that
53
User Guides (UK)
To display and edit common properties for members of a particular type, fabrication and shape:
1.
Expand the branch and sub-branches as described above, then:
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of fabrication type to show the shapes.
3.
Click a shape to display the common properties of all members of that shape.
To display and edit the properties of an individual member in the Properties
Window:
1.
Expand the branch and sub-branches as described above, then:
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of the shape type to show individual member references.
3.
Click a member reference to display the properties of the individual member.
To view a member in a new window, select it in visible views, delete it, or edit it in a Properties Dialog:
1.
Expand the branch and sub-branches as described above, then:
2.
Right click a member reference and select the required option from the context menu.
Slabs
To display and edit properties common to all slabs:
1.
2.
Click
3.
Those properties common to all slabs are displayed in the Properties Window .
To display and edit the properties of a parent slab:
1.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of
2.
Click a parent slab to display its properties.
to show the existing parent slabs.
To edit the properties of a parent slab in a Property Dialog, or to delete it:
1.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of to show the existing parent slabs.
2.
Right click a parent slab to either edit it in a dialog, or delete it.
To display and edit the properties of a slab item:
54
User Guides
1.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of to show the existing parent slabs.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of a parent slab to show all the slab items (slab panels) within it.
3.
Click a slab item to display its properties.
Walls and Roofs
To display and edit the properties of a wall or roof panel:
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of defined Wall and Roof Panels
and to show all the currently
3.
Left click a wall or roof panel to display its properties in the Properties Window .
Result Strips
To display and edit the properties of a result strip:
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of
Result Strips
to show all the currently defined
3.
Left click a result strip to display its properties in the Properties Window .
Related topics
•
Working with 2D Strips and displaying Strip Results
Working with the Groups Tree
Working with the Groups Tree
The Groups Tree is used to organise members into design groups.
If concrete members have been defined these are also organised into further groups for detailing purposes.
The application of grouping is of most benefit in concrete structures.
You can right-click on a group name in order to select all of its members simultaneously in the visible views.
55
User Guides (UK)
If any user defined attributes (UDAs) have been defined these are also displayed on the Groups Tree, so that all members with a particular attribute value can similarly be selected in the visible views.
How do I re-apply automatic grouping in order to reset manually edited groups?
There are occasions where it becomes necessary to re-apply automatic grouping for a specific member type.
To re-group a specific member type
1.
In the Groups Tree, right-click the member type to be re-grouped.
2.
Choose Regroup Members from the right click menu.
Grouping is reapplied for the chosen member type only.
To regroup ALL member types
1.
Click (located at the top of the Groups Tree) to automatically regroup all member types and undo any manual grouping.
How do I split an existing member group into smaller groups?
1.
Right-Click the group name to be split in the Groups Tree.
2.
Choose Split Group from the right click menu.
All members of the group are placed into individual groups - in effect making them un-grouped.
How do I manually move an existing member between groups?
1.
In the Groups Tree open the group containing the member to be moved.
2.
Click and drag the member name over the group name to which it is to be moved.
Provided that the member meets the geometric criteria to belong to the group, a small rectangle will be displayed alongside the cursor. At this point release the mouse button to move the member to the new group.
If the member does not meet the geometric criteria to belong to the group, the cursor will display a barred circle.
56
User Guides
How do I remove an existing member group?
1.
Right-click the group name to be removed in the Groups Tree.
2.
Choose Remove Group from the right click menu.
All members of the group are placed into individual groups - in effect making them un-grouped.
How do I rename groups?
To manually rename individual groups in the current project:
1.
In the Groups Tree right-click the group to be renamed.
2.
Choose Rename Group from the right click menu.
To modify the group name defaults for future projects:
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
In the Settings Sets page of the dialog select the settings set to be updated.
You can update any settings set simply by selecting it from the droplist, it does not need to be active.
3.
In the Grouping page of the dialog, review and edit the default group names as required.
4.
If you change any of the settings, click:
• OK - to save the changes to the selected settings set (to act as defaults for future projects when that set is active), or
• Cancel - to cancel the changes
Working with the Loading Tree
The Loading Tree is used to organise the loadcases and combinations into a hierarchical
structure.
It also provides a summary of each loadcase that can be used to cross check the sum of reactions determined by each of the analyses performed against the sum of the loads applied.
The status of each loadcase or combination is indicated as follows:
- Total Reaction in equilibrium with the Total Load on Structure
57
User Guides (UK)
- Total Reaction not in equilibrium with the Total Load on Structure
- Total Reaction not available
Working with the Wind Model Tree
Working with the Wind Model Tree
Once the wind modelling process has been completed, the Wind Model Tree can be
used to display the resulting Wind Model views. It comprises the following branches:
Pressure Zones
Solely indicates if the pressure zone calculations have been performed.
Wind Directions
Each Wind Direction View can be displayed from here. Wind direction dependent properties can be accessed through the relevant Wind Direction View and then edited by selecting the relevant roof- or wall-elements.
Wind Loadcases
Wind Loadcases can be created and edited from here
How do I use the Wind Model Tree to display a Wind Direction View?
Wind direction dependent properties can be accessed through the relevant Wind
Direction View and then edited by selecting the relevant roof- or wall-elements.
1.
Right-click the direction required in the Wind Directions branch of the tree.
2.
Choose Open View from the right click menu.
Working with the Status Tree
The Status Tree is used to review:
• Validation status for the model.
• Validation status for the analysis.
The analysis model validation is performed automatically as part of the analysis process.
• Decomposition status.
This branch indicates if load decomposition has been successfully completed.
• Solver status.
This branch lists those analyses which have been performed. A tick indicates the analysis was successful so that results are available to view.
58
User Guides
• BIM validation
If the model has been imported/exported (e.g. to Robot, or Revit) then any warnings or errors that relate to the import/export are listed on this branch.
The Report Index
When a report view is active the Report Index can be used to locate and display a specific section in a multi-page report.
Working with Scene Views, View Modes and Scene
Content
display views of the model (or a part of it) in tabbed windows. Different scene views can be created to show 3D views, 2D plans, frames, planes or individual members.
For each scene view you can choose a View Mode appropriate to the task being performed. Different modes are available including a mode for creating the structure, and separate modes for viewing the analysis model, the wind model, the analysis results, and the design.
There is also a separate Load Analysis View for displaying the force and moment diagrams for individual members.
Opening and Closing and Saving Scene Views
Multiple scene views can be displayed simultaneously in tabbed windows docked within
the main window. If required, specific views can be permanently saved as View
How do I open a 3D view of my entire structure?
1.
2.
Double click to open a
(or right click to open a )
How do I open a 3D view of an existing sub model?
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of models, then:
3.
Double click an individual sub model to open a
(or right click to open a )
to show all the currently defined sub
59
User Guides (UK)
How do I open a 3D view of a single member?
To open a single member view from within another view:
1.
Hover the cursor over the member until it becomes highlighted, then,
2.
Right-click and then click Open (member ref) view from the context menu.
To open a single member view from the Project Workspace:
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of
3.
Expand the appropriate sub-branches to display the member references:
4.
Right click the required member reference and choose ‘Open view’
How do I open a 2D view of an existing construction level?
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of your model, then:
3.
Double click an individual level to open a
(or right click to open a )
to show all the construction levels in
Before you can view a 2D view of a construction level, you must have created that level in your model.
How do I open a 2D view of an existing frame?
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of then:
3.
Double click an individual frame to open a
(or right click to open a )
to show all the frames in your model,
Before you can view a 2D view of a frame, you must have created that frame in your model.
60
User Guides
How do I open a 2D view of an existing sloped plane?
1.
2.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of then:
3.
Double click an individual slope to open a
(or right click to open a )
to show all the slopes in your model,
Before you can view a 2D view of a sloped plane, you must have created that plane in your model.
View Configurations
Once a Scene View has been orientated to show a specific area of the model, it can be saved if required to a View Configuration.
View Configurations can then be used in two ways:
1.
They can be included as Views in Model Reports (in which case they retain the
Scene Content settings that were in place when the View Configuration was saved).
2.
They can be re-opened in a new Scene View at a subsequent time (in which case they adopt whatever Scene Content settings are currently in place).
To save a View Configuration:
1.
Right click in the View and choose Save View Configuration... from the context menu.
2.
Enter a descriptive name, then click OK.
To re-open a saved a View Configuration:
1.
Click Home > Manage View Configurations
2.
Select the view configuration required.
3.
Click Open
To delete a a View Configuration:
1.
Click Home > Manage View Configurations
2.
Select the view configuration required.
3.
Click Delete
61
User Guides (UK)
How do I close a view?
1.
Click the icon at the top-right of the view tab.
Zooming/Panning/Rotating and Walking through Scene Views
Zooming/Panning/Rotating and Walking through Scene Views
The mouse is used to manually, zoom, pan, or rotate the model to any orientation you require. Additionally, the model can be rotated to a range of preset views using the
ViewCube.
A walk through mode is available for 3D views.
How do I zoom in/zoom out/zoom extents?
To manually zoom in and out:
1.
The mouse wheel is used to zoom in and out.
To zoom extents:
1.
Simply right-click anywhere within the view and select Zoom Out from the menu.
The keyboard shortcut ‘ZA’ can also be used to zoom extents.
How do I pan the view?
1.
Simply hold down the middle mouse button and drag.
2.
Once you have achieved the pan you require release the mouse button.
How do I manually rotate the view
If none of the standard Viewcube views are appropriate, you can rotate the model to get to just the view you require.
1.
Simply right-click and hold over the 3D view, and move the mouse to perform the rotation.
2.
Once you have achieved the view you require simply release the mouse button.
How do I use the ViewCube to display one of the preset views?
62
User Guides
The ViewCube provides quick access to a range of preset views in any 3D view.
1.
Move the cursor over the ViewCube to make it active.
2.
Simply use one of the methods below to choose the view that you want to see. a) To display one of the eight isometric views click the required vertex on the
ViewCube. If the required vertex is not visible spin the ViewCube by clicking on one of the other vertices until the required one appears. b) To display one of the twelve edge views click the required edge on the ViewCube. If the required edge is not visible spin the ViewCube by clicking on a vertex adjacent to the required edge. c) To display one of the six face views click the required face on the ViewCube. If the required face is not visible spin the ViewCube by clicking on a vertex adjacent to the required face.
63
User Guides (UK)
With a face view displayed additional ViewCube controls become active. d) If the required face is not visible you can roll the ViewCube on to an adjacent face by clicking on one of triangular controls. e) If the required face view is displayed, but the orientation of the face is not correct you can rotate it clockwise, or anti-clockwise by clicking on one of the two arrow controls.
Pressing F8 toggles the display of the ViewCube on and off.
How do I walk through the model in a 3D view?
When you are working in a 3D view it is sometimes useful to be able to walk through the model.
1.
Click Home > Walk ( )
This puts you into walk mode:
Use the arrow keys to move back/forward/left /right.
Use Q/Z to move up/down.
To rotate click and drag the right mouse button.
Press [Esc] to exit walk mode.
64
User Guides
How do I display a 2D view in 3D?
When you are working in a 2D view it is often useful to display it in 3D, as this gives you a 3D view whilst hiding the rest of the structure.
You can switch between the 2D and 3D by clicking the 3D/2D toggle button.
The 3D/2D toggle button is located at the bottom right hand corner of the 2D
view and also at the right hand end of the Status Bar at the bottom right of the screen.
1.
If the 2D view is currently displayed in plan, the 3D/2D toggle button will be labelled
3D.
2.
Click the 3D/2D toggle button.
3.
The 2D view is now displayed in 3D (and the 3D/2D toggle button changes to 2D.
4.
To change back to a plan view click the 3D/2D toggle button once more.
Controlling Scene Content
Controlling Scene Content
Different entities types have different levels of information associated with them. You can choose how much of this information is displayed in each of the different scene views and view modes.
For example, in a solver view it is generally sufficient to represent beams by their insertion lines, however in a physical model view you are likely to also include their geometric outlines. In either of the views you may also choose to display their direction arrows and possibly their reference texts also.
The information displayed in each scene view is controlled by making appropriate
selections in the Scene Content window.
Scene content selections are saved independently with each scene view.
How do I display the Scene Content window?
If the Scene Content window is not currently visible, this is either because it is set to auto-hide, or because it has been closed.
Displaying the Scene Content window when it is set to auto-hide:
• If Scene Content is set to auto-hide there will be a Scene Content tab docked on one edge of the interface - click the tab to expand the window.
65
User Guides (UK)
• When you have finished making your selections, click anywhere in the scene view to hide it once more.
Re-displaying the Scene Content window after it has been closed:
• If Scene Content has been closed, it can be reopened by re-selecting Scene
Content on the View group on the Windows toolbar.
How do I make selections in the Scene Content Window?
The Scene Content window displays two columns of information:
• In the left column is a list of the different entity categories. Some entities have arrow symbols to their left, indicating sub categories - click the arrow symbol in order to see these.
• A check box controls whether an entity and its associated information is displayed - Simply check the entities you want to see and remove the check against those that you do not.
66
User Guides
• In the right column the entity information control lists the information in each category that will be displayed. When clicked this expands to a drop list menu, allowing you to select the information required.
Example View
Grid and Construction Lines have sub categories
(indicated by the arrow sign).
The checked box indicates that all the sub categories are currently displayed.
Clicking the arrow expands the category....
To hide a particular sub category uncheck it...
When some, but not all sub categories are unchecked, the main category is shown as a shaded box.
67
User Guides (UK)
The information displayed for each entity type can be controlled by expanding the entity information control...
If you switch off the display of a particular entity type, then some commands that affect that entity type can no longer be performed. For instance if you switch off the display of ‘Slab Items’, then you can not define slab or area loads on a floor, since there are no slab panels for you to select.
If planar objects (slabs, roofs, area loads etc.) lie over the start point for performing a selection in the current scene view, you can use Scene Content to switch off their display, (assuming you don't want to have them considered in your selection.
How do I reinstate the default Scene Content selections?
You do not have to worry about changing the initial Scene Content configuration as you can reinstate the default selections at any time.
To discard your current selections and reinstate the defaults:
1.
Close the View.
2.
Re-open the View from the Structure Tree.
Scene Content Entity Categories
When the Scene Content window is accessed it indicates which entities are selected for display in the current scene view.
Although the entity categories listed in the content vary depending on the view type
(3D/2D) and the view mode (Structural/Solver/Results/Review etc.), most categories are common to multiple views.
68
User Guides
The entity categories are generally self-explanatory, but some clarification may be useful.
Architectural Grids
This category is not displayed for 2D views.
This category is used to show/hide architectural grids in 3D views. When checked they are displayed at the lowest level in the model. (
Grid & Construction Lines can be displayed at any level.)
Grid & Construction Lines
This category is used to show/hide grid and construction lines at individual levels in both 2D and 3D windows.
69
User Guides (UK)
The levels at which grids are displayed/not displayed are controlled via the
Properties Window for each individual level. Grids are only displayed in 2D windows if 'Show grids in plane view is checked' and only displayed in 3D windows if 'Show grids in 3D view is checked'.
Points
These are the construction points (CP) that are formed at connections between members.
Point Groups
These are for advanced use only - in normal use they should be switched off.
Dimensions
Shows any dimensions that have been applied.
Members, Trusses and Portal Frames
The Members category has a sub category for each of the member types.
Members, Trusses and Portal Frames can each have the following entity information displayed.
Geometry
This shows the faces of the member by shading them.
70
Different colors are used for the different member types.
The view below shows a concrete beam and column example with Geometry and
Architectural grids selected.
User Guides
The colors used are customizable from Settings > Scene on the Home toolbar.
InsertionLine
This shows a solid line between the start and end node of the member.
The view below shows the same concrete beam and column example with
InsertionLine and Architectural grids selected.
LoadingLine
This shows a solid line through the center of the member. Any member loads are applied along this line, (which may be at an offset to the InsertionLine).
The zoomed in view below shows the same concrete beam and column example with InsertionLine and LoadingLine selected.
71
User Guides (UK)
Normals
These are unlikely to be required in general usage, but can be selected in order to see the normal directions at each corner of the member.
The view below shows the same concrete beam and column example with
Geometry and Normals selected.
Text
This shows the member name.
The view below shows a composite steel beam example with Geometry and Text selected.
72
User Guides
Text2D
This shows the member name, section and class in the 2D plane of the member.
The view below shows the same composite steel beam example with Geometry and
Text2D selected.
Direction
This shows the direction from end 1 to end 2 of the member. (If the direction is incorrect it can be changed using the Reverse command on the Edit menu.)
The view below shows the same composite steel beam example with
InsertionLine and Direction selected.
BoundingBox
This is unlikely to be required in general usage, but can potentially be selected in order to make it easier to right click on sections of small cross section.
The view below shows the same composite steel beam example with Geometry and
BoundingBox selected.
73
User Guides (UK)
Decking
This shows the strip of decking that is connected to the member.
The zoomed in view below shows the same composite steel beam example with
Geometry and BoundingBox selected.
Slab Items
This category is used to show/hide slab panels.
Slab Items can have the following entity information displayed.
74
User Guides
Geometry
This shades in the top, bottom and side faces of the slab panel.
The view below shows the above composite steel beam example with only
Geometry selected.
SlabOutline
This shows the overall outline of the parent slab.
The view below shows the same example with only SlabOutline selected.
SlabItemOutline
This shows the overall outline of each individual slab item.
The view below shows the same example with only SlabItemOutline selected.
SpanDirection
75
User Guides (UK)
This shows the span direction symbol.
The view below shows the same example with SlabItemOutline and SpanDirection selected.
TopReinforcement and BtmReinforcement
These show the top and bottom reinforcement symbols.
The view below shows a concrete slab example with TopReinforcement and
BtmReinforcement (and SpanDirection) selected.
ReinforcementText2D
This labels the reinforcement.
The view below shows a concrete slab example with TopReinforcement,
BtmReinforcement, ReinforcementText2D and SpanDirection selected.
76
User Guides
Text2D
This shows the slab item name and thickness in the 2D plane of the slab.
The view below shows a concrete slab example with Text2D and SpanDirection selected.
Slab Openings
Geometry
Crossed lines are used to represent the location of each opening.
Concrete Walls
This entity has three sub categories
Concrete Walls
This sub category can have the following entity information displayed.
Geometry - This shades in the top, bottom and side faces of the wall panel.
Mesh - This option is not used! To see the mesh you must first uncheck Geometry and then check Concrete Walls inside the 2D Elements entity category instead.
77
User Guides (UK)
Edges - This shows the left and right edges of the wall.
Support - This shows the wall support.
Wall Elements
This sub category is used to show/hide the 1D elements that exist within concrete walls. When modelled using FE shells a single wall element exists along the top of the wall (as shown below). When modelled as mid pier additional wall elements are also created along the base of the wall and vertically through the middle of the wall).
These wall elements have the same entity information available as Members..
Wall Lines
This sub category only relates to walls modelled using FE shells.
Wall lines are not displayed for the working solver model because they are only formed at the point of analysis. Therefore if you have switched them on in Scene Content but they are still not being shown, trying changing the
Solver Model that is being displayed, (from the right click menu when in
Solver View mode).
It shows/hides the result lines (used to determine the total internal forces in a wall mesh), and also the wall line itself (used to display the forces from the result lines in an intuitive way).
78
User Guides
Wall lines have the following entity information.
Geometry - Shows/hides the wall line.
Result Lines - Shows/hides the result lines.
UCS - Shows/hides the user co-ordinate system that applies to the wall line.
Bearing Walls
This entity has two sub-categories
Bearing Walls
This sub category can have the following entity information displayed.
Geometry - This shades in the top, bottom and side faces of the wall panel.
Support - This shows the wall support.
Wall Elements
This sub category is used to show the analysis elements that form the bearing wall.
It has the same entity information available as Members.
Wind Panels, Roof Panels
Wind and Roof Panels can have the following entity information displayed.
Geometry
This shades the inner and outer faces of each panel in different colours.
SpanDirection
This shows the span direction symbol.
Local Axes
This shows the positive directions of the local axes.
Loading
79
User Guides (UK)
This has sub categories for different applied loads and also has a Decomposed subcategory which is useful for visually checking how slab loads have been decomposed onto members post analysis.
Solver Nodes
These nodes define the ends and middle of each 1D element and the vertices of each
2D element.
1D Elements
These are 1D elements in the analysis model. They have the following entity information.
Geometry - A single line is used.
Text - This shows the element number.
Rigid Offset - This is shown as a thicker line.
ElasticExtension - This is the portion of 1D Element that exists inside the boundary of a connected member.
LocalAxes - The local axis system that applies to the 1D Element can optionally be displayed.
Releases - The end releases can also be displayed.
80
User Guides
2D Elements
These are 2D finite elements that may have been used in the analysis.
2D elements are not displayed for the working solver model, (even when you have chosen to mesh slabs/walls). This is because 2D elements are only formed at the point of analysis. Therefore if you have switched them on in
Scene Content but they are still not being shown, trying changing the Solver
Model that is being displayed, (from the right click menu when in Solver View mode).
There are three sub-categories
Shells - This sub-category specifically refers to the 2D elements used in slab meshes,
(in the FE chasedown model, and also in the 3D Analysis model when slabs have been meshed).
Semi-rigids - This sub-category specifically refers to the 2D elements used in to model one way spanning slabs when they have been modelled as semi-rigid diaphragms
Concrete Walls - This sub-category specifically refers to the 2D elements used in concrete walls when the option to use mid pier has not been checked.
81
User Guides (UK)
Diaphragms
This category is only available when the view is in Solver View mode.
This category shows/hides the diaphragm as a shaded plane.
For flexible diaphragms the mesh can also be shown.
Slabs
This category shows/hides the slab mesh used for load decomposition.
Supports
This category shows/hides the supports under columns and manually defined supports, but not the line supports under concrete walls, (which are controlled by the Concrete
Walls entity category).
82
User Guides
Result Strips
User defined Result Strips can be placed across 2D element meshes. From these strips, force and moment results are determined from the shell/plate/membrane nodal analysis results.
Slab Patches
In concrete models if you have created any slab patches, you use this entity to control their display.
Punching Checks
In concrete models if you have created any punching check items, you use this entity to control their display.
83
User Guides (UK)
Floor Vibration Checks
Beams
Shades the critical beams in each check.
CriticalSlab
Shades the critical slab item in each check.
Levels, Frames, Slopes
Geometry
Shades the extents of each Level, Frame, or Slope entity.
Pad Base, Pile Cap, Pile
Geometry
Shows the faces of each Pad Base, Pile Cap, or Pile by shaping them.
Center of Mass
For any given load case or combination, all gravity loads (self weight, slab dry, live, etc.) applied to a given floor have a center of action (or centre of mass), a point about which the loads would balance if a pinned support were positioned at this location in plan.
You can graphically review this for each floor and each loadcase/combination. By hovering the cursor over the center of mass a tooltip displays its coordinates.
84
User Guides
Center of Rigidity
Any given floor has a center of rigidity or bending stiffness based on the stiffness of the structure that supports it (i.e. the columns, walls etc. below).
Its location can be rapidly approximated ‘on the fly’ for each floor - you will see the position constantly changing as the model develops - and by hovering the cursor over it, approximate coordinates can also be displayed.
Since the center of rigidity never actually gets used in Tekla Structural
Designer for any analysis or design it is not calculated accurately - the complex nature of the calculation would unnecessarily extend the overall model solution time.
Plan
This is a special category only available in 2D Views - see: Scene Content Plan Category
Scene Content Plan Category
The initial display for 2D Views is configured for modelling purposes and consequently by default does not show all the information that will be output when drawings are created. However, at any point you can check the Plan category in Scene Content in order to selectively choose individual drawing layers to be overlaid on the 2D View. This can be very useful for displaying information that would otherwise not be available whilst modelling.
Plan Sub Categories
The main sub categories beneath Plan are as follows:
General
This sub-category is used for displaying grids, construction lines and dimensions as they would appear on the general arrangement drawings.
Members
This sub-category is used for displaying the various different member types labelled as they would appear on the general arrangement drawings.
85
User Guides (UK)
Walls
This sub-category is used for displaying concrete walls labelled as they would appear on the general arrangement drawings.
Slabs/Mats
This sub-category is used for displaying concrete slabs labelled as they would appear on the general arrangement drawings.
Reinforcement
This sub-category is used for displaying slab reinforcement as it would appear on the slab detailing drawings.
Other
This sub-category is used for displaying various other items that can be output to the general arrangement drawings.
In the first release it is not yet possible to overlay Beam End Forces or
Foundation Reactions on a scene view. They can however be displayed on general arrangement drawings.
Tables
This sub-category is used for displaying tables of information that can be output to the general arrangement drawings.
Connections
This sub-category is used for displaying connection names, attributes and reactions.
To use the Plan Category
1.
Ensure a 2D View is active.
2.
In Scene Content, check the Plan box.
3.
Next to the Plan box use the drop list to choose the drawing variant.
Only those layers that exist in the General Arrangement, Foundation Layout,
Loading Plan or Slab/Mat Layout drawing variants can be displayed.
The sub categories beneath Plan correspond to the drawing layers in the chosen drawing variant. (By default the layers that are initially active match those in the first
Layer Configuration for the drawing variant in Drawing Settings).
4.
Adjust the layers to be displayed by checking/unchecking the Plan sub categories as required.
86
User Guides
Layer content can be further controlled via ‘Drawing Options’ in exactly the same way that it is controlled when creating the drawings themselves.
5.
Layer colors, line types, fonts and font sizes match those in the first Layer Style for the drawing variant in Drawing Settings).
Example
To illustrate how the Plan category would typically be used, consider the following composite beam example designed to the AISC 360 ASD code:
In the below floor view the standard beam labelling for modelling is being applied. This consists of the beam name, section, grade, number of connectors and transverse reinforcement.
87
User Guides (UK)
When the Tekla Structural Designer drawings are produced, it is likely that additional design information would also be conveyed, for example the amount beam camber required.
The camber is included in one of the drawing layers, so it should also be possible to include it in the 2D scene view - (provided we know the layer it belongs to).
The procedure to follow is therefore:
1.
Make the 2D scene view showing the beams the active view.
2.
Open Scene Content and select the Plan category.
88
User Guides
Depending on the current scene content selection there is potentially going to substantial duplication of axes, members and labelling etc.
3.
In this example we will display all members in the view as they would appear on the drawing - this is achieved by:
• Unchecking the following main Categories from the top of the scene content list:
Members, Slab Items
• Checking the following sub categories beneath Plan as shown::
89
User Guides (UK)
4.
The scene view is now less cluttered as shown below:
90
User Guides
5.
In this example it will be further adjusted using the drawing options as follows:
• From the Draw toolbar, click Edit… and then:
• Click Options > General Arrangement > Beams
• Ensure that 'Append camber to section' is checked
• Click Options > General Arrangement > Slabs
• Uncheck all the panel labelling and the span direction symbol
• Click OK
The drawing is re-displayed with the revised options applied.
91
User Guides (UK)
View Modes
View Modes
Different view modes are available for:
• physical modelling of the structure geometry and loading, ( Structural View)
• displaying the analysis model, ( Solver View)
• displaying analysis results, ( Results View)
• displaying the wind models, ( Wind View)
• graphically interrogating the model properties/status, ( Review View)
Structural View
92
User Guides
Structural Views offer physical modelling of the structure with the aid of grids in either
3D or 2D.
Both geometry and loading are typically defined within this type of view.
A new scene view can be opened in this mode from the Structure Tree in the Project
Workspace. You can change an existing scene view to this mode from the Status Bar , or
by right clicking on its view tab.
Solver View
2D and 3D Solver Views are mainly used for previewing and interrogating the analytical model, but they can also be used for modelling purposes.
A new scene view can be opened in this mode from the Structure Tree in the Project
Workspace. You can change an existing scene view to this mode from the Status Bar , or
by right clicking on its view tab.
Results View
A Results View opens automatically at the end of an analysis - it is used for graphically displaying the various analysis results.
You can change an existing scene view to this mode from the Status Bar , or by right
clicking on its view tab.
Wind View
Wind Views becomes available after running the Wind Wizard - these are used for graphically displaying the wind zones and zone load details.
Once the wind wizard has been run, you can change an existing scene view to this mode
from the Status Bar , or by right clicking on its view tab.
Review View
A
Review View opens automatically at the end of the Design All (Static) process - it is
used for graphically interrogating the model properties/status.
You can change an existing scene view to this mode from the Status Bar , or by right
clicking on its view tab.
Changing the View Mode
An existing scene view can be switched to another mode, either from the status bar, or by right clicking on its view tab.
To change the view mode from the status bar
The different view modes are shown on buttons in the Status Bar at the bottom right of
the screen.
93
User Guides (UK)
Click one of the unselected buttons to make the active scene view display in that mode.
To change the view mode from the active view tab
An open scene view can be made active by left clicking its tab. Once a view has been made active its mode can be changed by right clicking the tab and then selecting one of the other view mode options from the right-click menu.
Scene View Tab Groups
Scene View Tab Groups
When multiple scene views have been created, by default only the active view visible. It is often useful to instead display views side by side; this can be achieved by creating new Tab Groups.
94
User Guides
To create a new Tab Group from an existing view tab
1.
Right click an existing view tab and from the right-click menu select New Horizontal
Tab Group, or New Vertical Tab Group as required.
To create a new Tab Group using the docking control
When you grab a view by its tab and drag it, a docking control appears in the middle of the view. You can then use this control to create a new Tab Group.
To create a new Vertical Tab Group:
1.
Drag the grabbed view over the left or right button of the docking control and then release the mouse.
To create a new Horizontal Tab Group:
1.
Drag the grabbed view over the top or bottom button of the docking control and then release the mouse.
To move a view between Tab Groups
95
User Guides (UK)
1.
Right click the view tab and from the right-click menu select ‘Move to Next Tab
Group.
Working with Command Prompts
Yellow command prompts are displayed across the top of the active view to guide you through each Tekla Structural Designer command.
Press <Esc> in a command prompt to cancel, or go back
• Press <Esc> at the first command prompt to cancel.
• Press <Esc> at subsequent command prompts to go back to the first prompt.
• Selecting another command also cancels the current command.
Example
The parallel grid line command consists of four steps - hence four consecutive command prompts are displayed:
The grid line is created after the fourth prompt, after which the second prompt is automatically redisplayed:
At this point you could either continue to create additional lines parallel to the original, or by pressing <Esc> go back to the first prompt:
You could then select a new reference line and continue again, or by pressing <Esc> again cancel the command.
Using the tooltip for input in a command
When you are required to specify a distance or pick a point, a tooltip appears displaying the current value.
To enter a value either:
• move the cursor to the point required and click to use it,
• alternatively, press <F2> to type an exact number and press <Enter> to use it.
Undoing a command
96
User Guides
Once a command has completed, to undo it do the following:
• Click Undo in the Quick Access Toolbar
Undo and redo can be used to repetitively undo/redo commands in the sequence they were performed.
Selecting Entities
In order to perform an operation (edit, delete etc.) on an entity, or group of entities they must first be selected.
All entity types can be selected/deselected using the mouse provided they are visible in the scene view you are working in. Alternatively they can be selected using the
Find command. Members can also be selected from the Structure Tree and the Groups
If planar objects (slabs, roofs, area loads etc.) lie over the start point for performing your
selection, you may want to use Scene Content
to switch off their display, (assuming you don’t want to have them considered in your selection).
How do I select an individual entity?
1.
Move the cursor over the required entity in one of the 2D or 3D Views.
• If the entity is the only one at that location it will become highlighted (it will also be the one listed in the Select Entity tooltip).
• If several entities exist at the same location they will all be listed in the Select
Entity tooltip, only the first one being highlighted. If this is not the required entity, use the tab key or up/down cursor keys to scroll through the list.
2.
When the required entity is highlighted, you can either press the Enter key or left click to select it.
The selected entity’s properties are displayed in the Properties Window .
Example View
Four entities are located under the current cursor position, so each of these are listed in the Select Entity tooltip.
We require to select the horizontal beam, however the currently highlighted entity shown in the tooltip is a slab panel.
97
User Guides (UK)
By pressing the tab key once, the next entity in the list (a column) becomes highlighted.
This is still not correct, so press the tab key once more - the required beam is now highlighted.
Either press the Enter key or left click and the beam is selected.
Individual members can also be selected by clicking their name in the
Structure Tree.
How do I add further entities to the current selection?
1.
Hold the Ctrl key whilst clicking on each subsequent entity.
The selected entity’s properties are added to those already displayed in the
How do I select multiple entities by dragging a box?
If you only want to select those entities which are totally encompassed by the box, then:
1.
Move the cursor to the left corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the entities that you want to select.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a purple rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area you are selecting).
98
User Guides
4.
Release the mouse button.
If you want to select those entities which are totally encompassed by the box, and which it crosses, then:
1.
Move the cursor to the right corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the entities that you want to select.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a green rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area you are selecting).
4.
Release the mouse button.
The selected entities’ properties are displayed in the Properties Window .
How do I deselect a single entity from the current selection?
1.
Click the entity you want to de-select.
The entity’s properties are removed from the Properties Window .
How do I deselect multiple entities by dragging a box?
If you only want to deselect those entities which are totally encompassed by the box, then:
1.
Move the cursor to the left corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the entities that you want to deselect.
2.
Hold the Ctrl key whilst clicking and holding the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a purple rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area you are selecting).
4.
Release the mouse button then release the Ctrl key.
If you want to select those entities which are totally encompassed by the box, and which it crosses, then:
1.
Move the cursor to the right corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the entities that you want to select.
2.
Hold the Ctrl key whilst clicking and holding the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a green rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area you are selecting).
99
User Guides (UK)
4.
Release the mouse button then release the Ctrl key.
The entities’ properties are removed from the Properties Window .
How do I deselect all entities?
1.
Press the Esc key to deselect all currently selected entities.
The information displayed in the Properties Window is also cleared.
Entity selection using Find
If you know the name of the entity you are looking for it can be selected using the Find command.
1.
Click Home > Find ( )
2.
Type a part of the name you are looking for into the box.
Any matching entity names are immediately displayed in the table below.
3.
Click an entity name that you want to select.
Hold the Ctrl key whilst clicking to append further selections.
4.
Click Select.
The selected entities’ properties are displayed in the Properties Window .
Member selection using the Structure Tree
Only individual members can be selected from the Structure Tree
, (it in not possible to select multiple members in this way).
1.
Expand the Members branch of the Structure Tree and then the appropriate subbranches until the member names are displayed.
If you want to find a particular reinforced rectangular concrete column click the plus sign ( ) to the left of the Concrete Column entry, then the plus sign
( ) to the left of the Reinforced Concrete entry, then the plus sign ( ) to the left of the Rectangular entry.
2.
Right-click the required member name and then pick ‘Select in visible views’ from the context menu.
Member selection using the Groups Tree
Member groups and individual members can both be selected from the Groups Tree .
100
User Guides
1.
Expand the appropriate branch of the Groups Tree until you can click the required group or member name.
2.
Right-click the required group or member name and then pick ‘Select in visible views’ from the context menu.
Entity Nodes
When an individual entity is selected the nodes that define it are also displayed; each entity type having a different number of nodes associated.
For example:
• Grid lines and single span 1D elements have nodes at each end and at the midpoint.
• Panels have nodes at each vertex and at the mid-point of each edge.
• Concrete walls have nodes at each corner. grid line
1D element panel wall
A node can be selected and moved in order to stretch, shorten, reshape or move the entity.
101
User Guides (UK)
Properties and Property Sets
When a new entity is created, it adopts the properties that are displayed in the
Properties Window at that particular time. You should therefore ensure the properties
are correct before you place the entity.
When an existing entity is selected its properties are displayed in the Properties
Window from where they can be edited.
If multiple entities are selected the Properties Window can still be used to make edits, but only the common properties are displayed.
When a model object such as a beam, slab item or concrete wall is selected its
properties can also be edited using a Property Dialog .
In a typical model you may want to apply the same properties to similar model objects at a number of different locations. To do this efficiently, once properties have been set up for a member, slab item or roof panel you can save them away to a named Property
Set for subsequent recall.
dialog can be used to export saved property sets to a file so that they can then be imported into other Tekla Structural Designer models.
How do I edit the properties of a single entity?
1.
Select the entity in the graphical display or from the Structure Tree .
( How do I select an individual entity?
2.
Change the Properties of the entity using the Properties Window .
How do I edit the properties of multiple entities?
The common properties of multiple entities can be displayed and edited using the
You may decide to change the grade of steel applied to all steel beams in your structure. This can be done easily by selecting all beams and then using the Properties Window to change the grade. The change gets applied to all selected beams irrespective of whether they are simple, composite or plated.
The Properties Window will show a blank where an item (Reference format, Alignment,
Offset, Report etc.) is not identical for all the selected entities.
If you change a blanked item, Tekla Structural Designer applies the new setting to all the selected entities.
If you leave a blank item blank, then Tekla Structural Designer maintains the current diverse settings for the selected entities.
102
User Guides
If multiple entities of the different types are selected, then property information is displayed separately for each type. A dropdown menu at the top of the Properties
Window is used for moving between types.
To edit multiple entities in the Properties Window:
1.
2.
If entities of different types have been selected, use the dropdown menu at the top of the Properties Window to select the required type.
3.
Change the properties as required using the Properties Window.
How do I edit the properties of a single model object?
1.
Hover the cursor over the object to be edited until it becomes highlighted in the
Select Entity tooltip. (If several entities are listed use the tab key to scroll).
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
3.
Edit the properties as required and then click OK
How do I save properties to a named Property Set from the Properties
Window?
Properties can only be saved to a property set from the Properties
Window when there are no objects selected - this ensures that unique entries exist for each of the properties in the set.
1.
Click the model object type you want to save a property set for from the tab.
2.
The drop list at the top of the Properties Window should now read ‘<unsaved set>’
3.
Specify the properties as required, then click the Save... button.
4.
Enter a name for the saved set.
103
User Guides (UK)
How do I recall a previously saved property set from the Properties Window?
Provided you have previously saved a property set, you can recall it again later from the
Properties Window - but only when it is applicable to the current command.
For example, assume different steel beam properties have previously been assigned to the main, secondary and edge beams in a structure, each being saved to a set for reuse. You subsequently want to re-use the edge beam properties.
To recall the edge beam property set:
1.
Click tab >
Properties applicable to steel beams are displayed in the Properties Window.
2.
Click the drop list at the top of the Properties Window, only the previously saved steel beam property sets are displayed.
3.
Choose the ‘Edge Beams’ property set.
How do I save the properties of an existing model object to a named Property
Set?
1.
Hover the cursor over the object until it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right-click and select ‘Create Property Set’ from the context menu. (If the object has more than one span you will also need to select the span required.)
3.
Enter a name for the property set then click OK.
How do I apply a property set to an individual existing model object?
1.
Hover the cursor over the object until it becomes highlighted.
104
User Guides
2.
Right-click and select ‘Apply property set...’ from the context menu.
3.
Select the property set to be applied then click OK.
The property set is only applied to the individual member that was right clicked on (even if multiple members were selected). To apply the property set
How do I apply a property set to multiple existing model objects?
1.
Select the objects to be updated.
2.
Ensure the drop list at the top of the Properties Window displays the correct object type.
3.
At the top of the Properties Window click ‘Apply...’
4.
Select the property set to be applied then click OK.
All of the selected objects (provided they are of the same object type) have the property set applied.
How do I apply a property set in the Review View?
1.
Click Review > Property Sets
2.
In the Properties Window:
• choose Apply Property Set
• select the entity type
• select the property set to apply
3.
In the Review View click on the objects to which the set is to be applied.
How do I graphically review where property sets have been applied?
1.
Click Review > Property Sets
2.
In the Properties Window, choose Review All
3.
Still in the Properties Window, select the entity type to review.
Entities of the selected type are colour coded to indicate where property sets have been applied.
105
User Guides (UK)
Related topics
•
How do I apply a property set in the Review View?
Manage Property Sets
Once property sets have been saved, they can be exported from the current model so that they can be imported into other Tekla Structural Designer models.
How do I export a property set?
1.
Click Home > Manage Property Sets
2.
In the Manage property sets dialog check the boxes of those sets to be exported.
3.
Click Export...
4.
Save the properties to a .tsps file.
How do I import a property set?
1.
Click Home > Manage Property Sets
2.
In the Manage property sets dialog check the boxes of those sets to be exported.
3.
Click Import...
4.
Browse to the location where the .tsps file to be imported is located and open it.
5.
The property sets contained in the file should now be listed in the Manage
property sets dialog.
How do I delete a property set?
1.
Click Home > Manage Property Sets
2.
In the Manage property sets dialog locate the set to be deleted.
3.
Click Delete
4.
Click OK
Working with Attributes
User defined attributes ( UDAs) can be defined to save miscellaneous data to individual members and panels.
106
User Guides
UDAs are flexible and can be used for a variety of purposes, for example:
• to apply descriptive labels, such as construction phases,
• to record paint specifications,
• to attach office documents, pictures, or any other associated files,
• to link to design files from other applications.
When a file is attached as an attribute, you are given the option to embed it within the
Tekla Structural Designer file. When embedded, the attached file gets included when the model is transferred to another computer.
The embedded file only gets attached when the model is saved using ‘Save’ or
‘Saves As’. Embedded files are not attached when you use ‘Save Model Only’.
Similarly if you have to revert to an autosaved version of the model this will not have the embedded files attached.
Material lists and member design reports can be filtered for specific attributes.
Attributes are transferred when models are exported to Tekla Structures and Revit. In the current release attributes are not yet included on Tekla Structural Designer drawings.
UDA definitions and values
Example UDA definitions have been included in the default settings sets. These are fully customisable and can easily be edited to suit your needs. The definitions that apply to the current model can be edited via Model Settings.
A specific UDA value is attached by selecting the members to which it applies and entering the value required into the UDA area of the Properties Window.
Once a UDA value exists it can also be assigned to members graphically (or removed from them) using the Review View.
Attribute definition
Attributes are defined on the Attributes page of either the Model Settings dialog, or the
Settings dialog, (according to whether they are to be applied to the current model, or new models).
To add an attribute definition you must click ‘Add’ to create a new blank row in the table, then specify the following parameters:
• Name - e.g. Class, Note, Phase, File etc.
• Type - Text, Number, or File
• Source - Custom value, or Value List
• Values - these are the listed value choices that apply when the source is ‘Value
List’
107
User Guides (UK)
The order in which UDAs are listed in the Properties Window replicates the order in which the Attributes are listed in the Model Settings dialog. The Move
Up and Move Down buttons can be used to reorder as required.
How do I set up attribute definitions for new models?
Attribute definitions are held in the settings sets. The ‘active’ settings set contains the attribute definitions that are applied when a new model is created.
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
On the Settings Sets page select the settings set to which the attributes apply.
3.
On the page define the attributes as required.
How do I set up attribute definitions in the current model?
The attributes that are available to the current model are held in the Model Settings.
1.
Click Home > Model Settings ( )
2.
On the page define the attributes as required.
Attaching UDA values to members and panels
Attaching UDA values to members and panels
How do I attach a UDA value using the Properties Window?
1.
Select the members/panels to which the attributes are to be attached.
2.
If the selection consists different member types, use the droplist at the top of the
Properties Window to display the properties of the first type.
3.
Under the UDA heading in the Properties Window, define the value for each attribute that you want to attach.
4.
If the attribute being attached is a file, check the ‘Embedded’ box on the dialog if you want the file to be saved inside the model data file. Only embedded files are automatically transferred when the model is copied to another computer.
For multi-span beams, and multi-stack columns/walls you can attach separate UDAs to individual spans/stacks as required.
108
User Guides
5.
If there are additional member types in the current selection, use the droplist at the top of the Properties Window to display the properties of the next type and then define the attribute values once again.
How do I attach an existing UDA value in the Review View?
1.
Click Review > UDA
2.
In the Properties Window, select the relevant attribute.
3.
For the Review/Update property, choose Update Selected.
4.
Use the droplist to select one of the existing values for the selected attribute.
5.
Choose the Selection Mode (Only Add, Only Remove, Add or Remove).
6.
Click on individual members, (or drag a box around multiple members) to add/remove the UDA value.
When the Selection mode is ‘Add or Remove’ the UDA will toggle between being attached /not attached when you click on a member or box around multiple members
Two additional checkboxes are provided in the Properties Window to assist in the above process:
• Filter by Value - hides everything apart from those members which have the current UDA value.
• Use other Value Color - displays members that have an ‘other value’ of the selected attribute in a different colour. Those members that don’t have the attribute attached are displayed in a ‘not set’ colour.
How do I graphically review the UDA values that have been attached?
1.
Click Review > UDA
2.
In the Properties Window, select the attribute to review.
3.
In the Properties Window, for the Review/Update property select Review All.
The members/panels are colour coded for to represent the different values of the selected attribute and a legend is displayed.
How do I open a file that has been attached as a UDA?
1.
Click Review > UDA
2.
In the Properties Window, select the attribute to review.
3.
In the Properties Window, for the Review/Update property select Review All.
109
User Guides (UK)
4.
Click on the member or panel that has the file attached.
Provided the file extension has been associated with an application, the application should open and display the file.
Applying attribute filters to reports and material lists
Applying attribute filters to reports and material lists
How do I apply a (Selected attributes) filter to Material List Review Data?
1.
Click Review > Tabular Data
2.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group to choose Material List.
3.
From the Type drop list on the Filter toolbar group to choose Attribute.
4.
From the Item drop list on the Filter toolbar group to choose the required attribute values, then click OK.
How do I apply a (Selected attributes) filter to a report?
1.
Click Report> Model Report...
2.
Select the report from the list of Available Styles.
3.
In the Report Structure, right click on the chapter or sub-heading to be filtered.
4.
From the context menu, choose Model Filter > Edit\New...
5.
In the Select Filter dialog, click Add
6.
In the Filter properties, choose the Selected attributes type
7.
Choose the attribute values on the selected items list.
8.
Click OK.
110
User Guides
Starting a New Project
New models are initiated from the Home toolbar . They can either be created from
scratch, or, if you intend to create several models from a common start point, you might consider setting up a template in advance.
Either way, before commencing you should take a few moments to review the defaults that will be applied to the model. These are held in the ‘active’ settings set in the
Settings dialog . Ensuring these match your typical requirements at the outset saves
time as it eliminates unnecessary editing at a later stage.
Once a model is open, its settings can be edited from the Model Settings dialog .
Home toolbar
The Home toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
New
New (drop list)
New (icon) creates a new blank project from scratch.
See: Creating a new project from scratch
New (droplist) creates a new project based on an existing template.
See: How do I create a new project from a template?
Open an existing project. Open
Close
Save
Save As
Close the currently open project.
Save the currently open project.
Save As saves the currently open project to a new name, or to a template.
111
User Guides (UK)
Project Wiki Opens the Project Wiki dialog which is used to record miscellaneous properties associated with the project, and to record revisions.
See: Editing project details using Project Wiki
Opens the Model Settings dialog which is used to specify
the settings for the current project.
Model Settings
Manage
Property Sets
Manage View
Configurations
Find
Import, Export and Delete property sets.
Opens or deletes saved View Configurations.
Walk
Structural BIM
Import
Tekla
Structures
Export
Autodesk Revit
Export
IFC Export
Cellbeam
Export
Find and then select objects in the model by typing a part of their name.
See: Entity selection using Find
Walk through 3D views.
See: How do I walk through the model in a 3D view?
Import a model from a Neutral File.
See: How do I import a project from a Structural BIM
Export a model to Tekla Structures.
See: How do I export a model to Tekla Structures?
Export a model to Revit.
See: How do I export a model to Autodesk Revit Structure?
Export a model to IFC.
See: How do I export a model to IFC?
Export a beam to Westok Cellbeam.
See: How do I export a beam to Westok Cellbeam?
Cellbeam import and Export are not yet available in the current release.
112
User Guides
Cellbeam
Import
Import a beam from Westok Cellbeam.
See: How do I import a beam from Westok Cellbeam?
Cellbeam import and Export are not yet available in the current release.
STAAD Export
Robot Export
Export a model to the STAAD.
See: How do I export a model to STAAD?
Export a model to Robot.
See: How do I export a model to Autodesk Robot
Cloud Export
‘TEL’ File
Import
Export a model to the Cloud.
See: How do I export a model to the Cloud?
Import a model from a TEL File.
See: How do I import a project from a TEL file?
3D DXF Import Import a model from a 3D DXF File.
See: How do I import from a 3D DXF file?
Settings
Opens the Settings dialog which controls the defaults that
are applied prior to starting a new project.
Materials
Check for
Updates
Opens the Materials dialog for viewing and adding to the
list of materials available to work with.
Click this button to check that the program is up to date.
License
Manager
Opens the License Manager.
Related topics
•
Commands on the ribbon toolbars
Creating a new project from scratch
113
User Guides (UK)
Before creating a new project you should ensure an appropriate settings set is active.
See: How do I specify the active settings set?
How do I create a new project from scratch?
1.
Click Home > New ( )
(being careful to click the icon button as shown, rather than the drop list button beneath it).
2.
Your new project opens and you will see:
•
St. Base (Base) 2D (which will show the Base level of your model) in front of Structure 3D (which will show the whole model in 3D).
•
- in which the
Structure tab displays a Structure
Tree containing a Structure main entry below which there two major branches
— Levels and Sub Models
•
a Properties Window - which, (provided the
Structure main entry is selected in the Structure Tree), shows the General and Meshing defaults for the current model.
3.
Click on Structure in the Structure Tree and review the General defaults in the
Properties Window:
• Check the box to Show Building Direction Arrows.
• Since by default the Building Direction Rotation is 0 degrees the building’s principal axes (Dir 1 and Dir 2) are initially aligned with global X and Y. If you are defining a model that is aligned differently you should adjust the Building
Direction Rotation to suit.
4.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of Levels and you will see that your model contains only a base level. Double click
Levels to display the Construction Levels dialog
from where you can add more levels as needed.
If you are creating a steel structure each level you add should be set as T.O.S.
(top of steel). If you are creating either a concrete or mixed material structure you should instead set the type as S.S.L.(structural slab level)
Once the levels have been set up you can:
• left click an existing level in the Structure Tree to show the details for that level in the Properties Window. If you amend these details they are applied to the level immediately.
• double-click the name of a Construction Level to open a 2D view for that level.
114
User Guides
5.
You can then proceed to add building objects, either in the Structure 3D view, or any of the 2D level views.
Working with templates
If the projects you will be creating share a common start point, a template can be employed to avoid repetition of input. In order to use a template you must have created it previously. It can contain as much or as little of a model that you consider applicable to serve as the start point for subsequent models. For example, a particular template may comprise a simple grid and the height of the First Floor Construction Level only.
How do I create a new template?
1.
Start a new project. (See Creating a new project from scratch )
2.
Create only the model data that you want to be included in the template.
3.
Click Home > Save As ( )
4.
In the ‘Save As’ dialog, change the ‘Save as type’ to ‘Tekla Structural Designer template file (*.tsmdt)’.
5.
Enter a file name to describe the template and ensure the dialog is pointing to the folder where you want the template to reside.
6.
Click
How do I create a new project from a template?
Before creating a new project from a template you should ensure an appropriate settings set is active.
See: How do I specify the active settings set?
To create a new project from a template:
1.
Click Home > New ( )
(being careful to click the lower drop list button, rather than the icon button above it).
The drop list menu consists of the most recently used templates and an ‘Open
Template’ option to navigate to any other templates not shown.
2.
Select the required template from the list. The template opens and you will see:
•
One or more Scene Views - their content matching the selected template,
•
displaying a Structure Tree matching the selected template,
115
User Guides (UK)
3.
Click Home > Save As ( )
4.
In the ‘Save As’ dialog, change the ‘Save as type’ to ‘Tekla Structural Designer project files (*.tsmd)’.
5.
Enter a file name to describe the project and ensure the dialog is pointing to the folder where you want the project to reside.
6.
Click
7.
You can then proceed to add the remaining building objects and loads as necessary to complete the project.
Model Settings
Various defaults and settings that apply to the current project only can be controlled
via the Model Settings dialog .
How to apply and manage Model Settings
To access the model settings:
• Click Home > Model Settings ( )
If you change any model settings, click:
• OK - to apply the changes directly to the current project, or
• Save... - to save the changes back to the active settings set for future use, or
• Cancel... - to cancel the changes
You can also click:
• Load... - to revert to the model settings specified in the active settings set. (This loads all of the model settings in the set, not just those displayed on the current page. It does not load Analysis Options or Design Options.)
Model Settings dialog
Model Settings dialog
Located on the Home toolbar, this dialog contains various pages for controlling defaults and settings in the current project.
Model Settings - Design Codes
This page is used to specify the head code and subsequent design codes that apply for the current project.
Head Code
116
User Guides
Select the head code to automatically populate the subsequent action and resistance codes.
Design Codes
The action and resistance codes are dependent on the selected head code. The drop down menus can be used to select between alternatives where applicable.
Model Settings - Units
This page is used to specify the units format and precision that apply for the current project.
System
Use the drop list to select either Metric or US Customary Units.
Table of Quantities
This table lists each quantity, showing its current unit and precision.
Settings
When a quantity is selected from the table, its available units are displayed here.
Precision
When a quantity is selected from the table, its precision is displayed here.
Exponential Format
Specify the lower and upper limits for when exponential formats should be applied.
Model Settings - References
This page is used to specify the References that apply for the current project.
Note that in addition to the General page, there are two further sub-pages: Formats and
Texts.
General page
Numbering
When object references include the ‘Count’ item, this field can be used to specify the start number to count from at each construction level, (eg 1, 100, 1000).
Renumbering Direction
The renumbering directions that you set here control the way that member numbering gets applied when you use the Renumber command.
Grid Line Naming
The initial number and initial letter specified are applied to the first gridlines; the labelling for subsequent lines follows the sequence of the naming style. You can choose to ignore letters ‘I’ and ‘O’.
117
User Guides (UK)
Formats page
Object/Reference Format/Edit
This table lists each object type showing its current reference format. Reference formats are fully customisable, being built up from component ‘items’ arranged in any order - click the Edit button to change.
Texts page
Characteristics
When object references include the ‘Characteristic’ item, this table can be used to specify the text used to designate the characteristic.
Materials
When object references include the ‘Material’ item, this table can be used to specify the text used to designate the material.
Model Settings - Loading
Use pattern loading for steel beams
When checked - pattern loading will automatically be applied to steel beams in addition to any concrete beams. When unchecked - pattern loading is applied to concrete beams only.
Model Settings - Grouping
This page is used to control the tolerance applied when members are grouped.
Maximum edge length variation
This field allows for a tolerance to be applied to the automatic grouping. A member can only be included in an existing group if its span length is within the specified tolerance of the group’s (average) span length.
Maximum length variation
For trusses this field allows for a length tolerance to be applied to the automatic grouping. A truss can only be included in an existing group if its span length is within the specified tolerance of the group’s (average) span length.
Maximum height variation
For trusses this field allows for a height tolerance to be applied to the automatic grouping. A truss can only be included in an existing group if its height is within the specified tolerance of the group’s (average) height.
Model Settings - Material List
118
User Guides
This setting allows you to specify the size of opening that can be considered small enough to be ignored when determining the quantity of slab reinforcement required.
Model Settings - Beam Lines
This page is used to control the parameters used for continuous concrete beam formation.
These parameters are only used to control the automatic concrete beam joining that occurs during the design process or when the ‘Beam Lines’ command is run. They are NOT considered when members are joined manually using the ‘Join’ command.
Join pinned beam end
This option allows you to control whether joining should occur or not if a pin is defined at the end the last span of the first beam or the start of the first span of the second beam, the fixity at the end in question changing from pinned to continuous once joined. If the beam is subsequently re-split at the same location the pin gets reinstated.
Limiting join angle in plan
This field specifies the limiting angle in plan to be applied for joining beams, (only beams meeting in plan at an angle less than the specified value can be joined).
Where two beams start at the end of the first, the one that has the minimum angle is the one that gets connected.
Limiting join angle in elevation
This field specifies the limiting angle in elevation to be applied for joining beams,
(only beams meeting in elevation at an angle less than the specified value can be joined).
Where two beams start at the end of the first, the one that has the minimum angle is the one that gets connected.
Minimum section overlaps
This field can be used to apply a tolerance when joining beams if they do not fully overlap in section. This can be used to prevent joining if there is very little physical overlap between the beam cross sections.
Model Settings - Rigid Zones
Design codes allow engineers to assume parts of concrete beams/columns are rigid, leading to more efficient designs. This page is used to apply these rigid zones to the model, and also to control their rigidity.
Percentage of rigidity
This field can be used to specify the extent of the rigid zone created.
(This will only have an effect if Rigid Zones are applied)
119
User Guides (UK)
Rigid zones not applied.
This box is used to switch rigid zones on/off. This affects where releases are applied in the analysis model and where members start and end for design.
When rigid zones are not applied, the design model corresponds to the analysis model; when they are applied, the design model is defined between the ends of the rigid zones,
There is a significant difference between ‘Rigid Zones Not Applied’ and Rigid
Zones Applied with 0% rigidity. The total elastic length of a member will be the same in the two models, but the position of releases and start/end of design members will be different.
Rigid zones should not be confused with rigid offsets which are used to ensure that the analysis model is properly connected, i.e. it is possible to have rigid offsets in the model even if rigid zones are turned off.
Model Settings - Curved Beams
Maximum facet error
In the solver model, curved beams are replaced by as a series of straight line solver elements. The number of elements used being dictated by the specified Maximum
facet error.
Specifying a larger ‘maximum facet error’ results in a smaller number of straight line elements being used.
Model Settings - Validation
This page is used to control the checks that are applied when the model is validated.
120
User Guides
1D element length
Error limit for length
This field is used to control when an error is displayed when very short analysis elements are detected.
Warning limit for length
This field is used to control when a warning is displayed when very short analysis elements are detected.
2D element quality
Error limit for quality
This field is used to control when an error is displayed when poor quality 2D elements are detected.
Warning limit for quality
This field is used to control when a warning is displayed when poor quality 2D elements are detected.
2D element quality depends on two things, skew and aspect ratio.
0% is bad quality - a ‘squashed’ triangle tends towards this.
100% is perfect quality - an equilateral triangle is perfect quality.
Check for validation warnings
This list is specify which Model, Analysis and Design validation checks are performed. If a box is unchecked the validation check is not performed.
Model Settings - Load Reductions
This page is used to control the imposed load reductions.
Reduction percentage
These fields are used to specify the reduction to be applied for the number of floors carried.
Model Settings - EHF
This page is used to control the percentages of load used for the EHF calculations when working to Eurocodes.
The percentages are material independent (i.e. the same percentages are used for concrete and steel), and vary depending on the height of the structure and the number of columns in each direction.
Height of structure
Used to specify the effective height of the structure to be used in the EHF calculations.
121
User Guides (UK)
Set Default
Sets the height to the highest construction level.
Number of Columns in X and Y directions
In the Eurocode Cl 5.2(5) the calculation of the reduction factor α m number of contributing members, m.
depends on the
Valid input for m in the X and Y directions is any whole number from 1 to 1000. The default value is 1 which results in α m
= 1.000. If a value of 1000 is entered then α would reduce to 0.707. m
Global initial sway imperfections
Displays the calculated alpha values and phi percentages for the above input.
Model Settings - User Defined Attributes
This page displays a table of the attributes that are available for the current project. You can add new attribute definitions or delete them, and also set each attribute’s type and control the values that are permitted.
Fields
Name
The name of the attribute that will be displayed in the UDA section of the Properties
Window.
Type drop list
Attributes must be set to be one to three types: Text, Number, or File.
Source drop list
To restrict the allowable input for an attribute to a preset list choose Value List, otherwise choose Custom Value.
Values
This field is only active when the source is set to Value List. It is used to limit the allowable values to a preset list.
Buttons
Creates a blank row in the table for defining a new attribute.
Deletes the currently selected attribute from the table.
Moves the currently selected attribute upwards in the table. The order in which attributes are listed in the Properties Window reflects the order in the table.
Moves the currently selected attribute downwards in the table. The order in which attributes are listed in the Properties Window reflects the order in the table.
Updates the settings in the currently displayed settings set and closes the
122
User Guides dialog. The settings that apply to the current model are NOT updated.
Closes the dialog without making changes to the settings set.
Model Settings - Graphics View Settings
This page is used to control the display of miscellaneous items in the 2D and 3D Views.
Results
In the Results View, values of storey shear below the value entered here are not shown.
Piles
If the ‘Show full pile length’ box is unchecked, you can enter your a default length to be used for the display of all piles.
2x scale for steel columns
Check this option to display steel columns at double their size in 2D Views.
Importing and Exporting data
How do I export a model to Tekla Structures?
1.
Create your model in Tekla Structural Designer in the usual way.
2.
Click Home > Tekla Structures Export ( )
This opens the Save As dialog which gives the name of the Revit Structure file which
Tekla Structural Designer will create. You can change the name and location of the
Revit Structure file if necessary.
3.
Specify the file name and location then click ‘Save’ to create the Tekla Structures file.
4.
Launch Tekla Structures and open the file to see your project.
How do I import a project from a Structural BIM Import file?
The project that you want to import into Tekla Structural Designer must be available before you start the import process.
1.
Click Home > Structural BIM Import
What happens next depends on whether or not you have a project open in Tekla
Structural Designer:
• If you don’t have a project open, then you will see the Open dialog, navigate to the folder which contains the file you want to import and click the appropriate file name. Tekla Structural Designer automatically creates a new project for you and imports the Revit Structure file into this project.
123
User Guides (UK)
• If you do have a project open, then Tekla Structural Designer will:
• ask if you want to save the project before you do anything else (this only occurs if your open project contains changes which have not been saved),
• show the Import dialog which allows you to choose the type of import that you want to perform and which also allows you to pick the Revit Structure file that you want to import. Two options are available - Standard Import and Model
Merge. These are described below.
Standard Import - Creates a new model based on the contents of the selected import file. Your current Tekla Structural Designer model will be closed (if you have opted not to save the changes, then these will be lost).
Model Merge - Merges the imported model into your current Tekla Structural
Designer model. Where possible, all design data in your current Tekla Structural
Designer model will be maintained when the model is merged.
All Tekla Structural Designer objects which have changed as a result of merging the external model will be shown as “Created Externally” (if new) or “Modified externally” (if changed).
2.
Click OK to start to import the details contained in the Revit Structure file into Tekla
Structural Designer.
How do I export a model to Autodesk Revit Structure?
1.
Create your model in Tekla Structural Designer in the usual way.
2.
Click Home > Revit Export
This shows a dialog which leads you through the export process.
3.
Review each page, modify if required then click Next
4.
On the final page, specify the name and location of the export file, then click Finish
5.
Launch Revit Structure and open the file to see your project.
How do I export a model to IFC?
1.
Create your model in Tekla Structural Designer in the usual way.
2.
Click Home > IFC Export
This shows a dialog which leads you through the export process.
3.
Review each page, modify if required then click Next
4.
On the final page, specify the name and location of the export file, choose the file format, then click Finish
How do I export a beam to Westok Cellbeam?
124
User Guides
Cellbeam import and Export are only available for BS and Eurocode Head
Codes.
1.
Click Home > Cellbeam Export
Any Westok Cellular beams that have been defined in the model will be listed.
2.
From the list, select the beams which you want to transfer to Westok Cellbeam.
Click Next
3.
Choose the export format and enter a file name.
Click Next
4.
Ensure that you have a tick against the design combinations whose results you want to use in the Westok beam design.
Click Next
5.
You will see a dialog asking you to pick the folder into which the Westok files are to be placed. Do so and then click Export to place the selected beam files to this folder.
6.
Click Finish
How do I import a beam from Westok Cellbeam?
Cellbeam import and Export are only available for BS and Eurocode Head
Codes.
In order to import Westok beams into your model you must have previously created these in your Tekla Structural Designer model, and have exported them for Westok design. When you do this each beam is given a unique identifier. This means that when you import the results from the Westok file,
Tekla Structural Designer knows to which beam in your model the imported details apply.
1.
Click Home > Cellbeam Import
2.
Click Add... you will see the Open dialog.
125
User Guides (UK)
3.
Navigate to the folder which contains the file you want to import and click on the appropriate file names. You can select single or multiple files using the standard
Windows method, then click Open
4.
Click Import
Provided that Tekla Structural Designer recognises the identifier, the details in the files will be imported to the associated beam in your model. If Tekla Structural
Designer does not recognise the identifier of the beam, then you will see a message to this effect.
How do I export a model to STAAD?
1.
Create your model in Tekla Structural Designer in the usual way.
2.
Click Home > STAAD Export
This shows a dialog which gives the name of the file which Tekla Structural
Designer will create. You can change the name and location of the file if necessary.
3.
Once the file details are correct click ‘Save’ to create the STAAD file.
4.
Launch STAAD and open the file to see your project.
Export to STAAD - Limitations
The scope of the STAAD Export is constrained by the limitations of the STAAD Text File
(STD) Format.
• Elastic extensions cannot be defined in STAAD, so additional 1D elements are created to preserve model connectivity.
• The exported file will not group elements in any way. 1D elements will not be grouped as members, (columns, beams, etc). Nor will there be any grouping of faceted elements from a curved member. 2D elements will not be grouped into panels.
• Section Data is exported as Analysis Properties only, i.e. no attempt is made to reference STAAD library sections.
• Material Data is exported as Analysis Properties only, i.e. no attempt is made to reference STAAD library materials.
How do I export a model to Autodesk Robot Structural Analysis?
1.
Create your model in Tekla Structural Designer in the usual way.
2.
Click Home > Robot Export
126
User Guides
This shows a dialog which gives the name of the Robot file which Tekla Structural
Designer will create. You can change the name and location of the Robot file if necessary.
3.
Once the file details are correct click ‘Save’ to create the Robot file.
4.
Launch Robot and open the file to see your project.
Export to Autodesk Robot Structural Analysis - Limitations
The scope of the Robot Export is constrained by the limitations of the Robot Text File
(STR) Format.
• The model exported is that used for 1st Order Linear Static analysis, (refer to Linear analysis of structures containing material nonlinearity in the Analysis Limitations and
Assumptions section of the Analysis Handbook for details of how material nonlinearity is removed from the exported model.)
• 1D Element Springs are totally omitted from the export.
• Elastic extensions cannot be defined in Robot, so additional 1D elements are created to preserve model connectivity.
• The exported file will not group elements in any way. 1D elements will not be grouped as members, (columns, beams, etc). Nor will there be any grouping of faceted elements from a curved member. 2D elements will not be grouped into panels.
• Section Data is exported as Analysis Properties only, i.e. no attempt is made to reference Robot library sections.
• Material Data is exported as Analysis Properties only, i.e. no attempt is made to reference Robot library materials.
• Loads in Projection are converted to equivalent loads in Robot.
• Robot will not import the material properties for Timber from the STR file. When the file is opened in Robot, it is possible to delete the G value and then adjust the values manually after import.
• It is not possible to define part-length distributed torsional loads in the STR file so they are converted to equivalent full-length distributed torsional loads.
How do I export a model to the Cloud?
1.
Create your model in Tekla Structural Designer in the usual way.
2.
Click Home > Cloud Export
This shows a dialog which gives the name of the file which Tekla Structural
Designer will create. You can change the name and location of the file if necessary.
3.
Once the file details are correct click OK to create the file.
127
User Guides (UK)
How do I import a project from a TEL file?
1.
Click Home > ‘TEL’ File Import
The ‘TEL File Import’ button will not be active unless there is an open document.
You will see the first page of the BIM Integration Wizard for importing a TEL file.
2.
Either click to browse to the required .TEL file, or type the full path into the box directly, then click ‘Next’.
The next page of the wizard allows you to re-locate the import model.
3.
If required, enter the amounts to move or rotate the model, then click ‘Next’.
The final page of the wizard verifies the mapping of material grades. Every material in the .TEL file will be listed and requires mapping to an appropriate material within
Tekla Structural Designer.
4.
Select an appropriate material type and grade for each material using the drop lists, then click ‘Finish’.
The model is imported. If there are any associated warning messages, these can be reviewed from the BIM branch of the Status tree in the Project Workspace.
Import from a TEL file - Assumptions and Limitations
The following points should be noted when importing TEL files:
Round Tripping
There is no "round-tripping" for TEL file imports, i.e. the import data is used to create new objects in the model, not update existing ones. All existing objects and data are maintained.
Data that is imported
The following TEL file information is imported:
• Project Summary (new models only)
• Project Name, Engineer etc.
• Support conditions
• Any associated UCS is imported
• Spring supports including Linear & Non-linear
128
User Guides
In S-Frame for non-linear spring the default is F_max = 0 but this does not mean the spring has zero capacity, F_max is simply ignored. This is not the case in Tekla Structural Designer - F_max =0 means the spring has zero capacity! Hence for models with compression-only springs imported from S-
Frame, all nonlin spring supports with F_max = 0 will need editing and a nonzero F_max value adding or analysis will fail.
• 1D Elements
• These are imported as analysis elements, but contiguous elements are not merged into members (straight or curved).
• Rigid Offsets are replicated by additional relatively stiff 1D elements.
Automatic supports are not created (e.g. under columns).
• Panels - Area Load Only
• These are created as Roof or Wall Panels without openings
• Panels - Shell : Tri, Quad or Mixed
• These are created as Meshed Concrete Walls (vertical planes only) or 2-way
Spanning Slab Items
• Material Properties - these are mapped manually during the import.
• Thickness
• Panels - Rigid or Independent Diaphragm
• These are created as 1-way spanning Slab Items.
• Material Properties - these are mapped manually during the import.
• Thickness
• Panels - Holes
• These are created as Slab or Wall openings - but must be rectangular for Walls and rectangular or circular for Slabs, otherwise warnings are generated.
• Loadcases (Linear Only)
• Nodal loads
• Settlement Loads
• 1D Element Loads including Uniform Temperature Loads
• Area Panel Loads, not including Uniform Temperature Loads
• Combinations
Exclusions
The following exclusions apply to the import of TEL file information:
129
User Guides (UK)
• Units - the Tekla Structural Designer model units are not changed to match the TEL file units - however values are converted to the Tekla Structural Designer model units.
• There is no special handling. for 2D files. They are imported in the same plane as they are defined in S-Frame - the X-Y plane - and default constraints are not imported (see below).
• Default Constraints are not imported and no warning is generated.
Default constraints are supports applied to all nodes without exception internally during analysis - i.e. these supports are not displayed in the S-Frame interface. For models marked as 2D these supports restrict displacement to the X-Y plane and are as follows: Fz, My and Mz fixed. Default constraints may be manually applied in 3D models - the S-Frame model can be examined to confirm their nature. The import does not replicate these supports. To ensure equivalence these fixed supports must be applied manually to all nodes; either in the S-Frame model prior to import or in
Tekla Structural Designer subsequently.
• No physical members are created by the import. S-Frame physical members are treated like any other 1D element and imported as a single analysis element. In particular Tekla Structural Designer does not merge contiguous elements into members (straight or curved) or identify columns, beams etc. No warnings are generated.
In addition, for S-Frame physical models please note the following:
• Intermediate nodes that do not form the ends of other elements are not imported. If such nodes have supports applied then the model will not be equivalent and should be adjusted to ensure equivalence.
• If physical members have tapered sections, these members should be first subdivided in S-Frame before importing to Tekla Structural Designer to produce an equivalent model.
• Alternatively the S-Frame model can be converted to an analytical model in S-
Frame prior to import using the S-Frame command for this.
• Staged Construction data is not imported - no warning is generated.
Typically, the entire model is imported, representing the last stage in which the model is complete. Otherwise turn the 'Staged Construction' setting in S-Frame off prior to import. This will remove all stages but the last and issue a warning to this effect. The model is then non-staged and so should be valid for import.
• Although the following can be modelled as single objects in Tekla Structural Designer, no attempt is made to import them as single objects from collections of S-Frame objects.
• Mid-pier walls
• Trusses
• Portal Frames
• Inactive Elements - these are imported as inactive Analysis Elements of the Beam type.
130
User Guides
These are quite likely to originate from tension-only cross bracing in Fastrak
Building Designer models. In this situation you are advised to click the warning to identify the relevant part of the model; delete both "braces"; then create new braces using the specific X-Brace Pair.
• Wall and Strip Integration lines are not imported with a warning to this effect.
• Tapered Sections - A 1D Element is imported, however no tapered section dimension data is imported - a warning is issued to this effect.
• Prestress data for 1D & 2D Elements is not imported.
• Percentage Fixity data for 1D Elements is not imported.
• Non-Linear Spring Data by graph - 1D Elements and Supports are imported but the spring stiffnesses are set = 0 - a warning is issued to this effect.
• Non-structural alignment and offsets (Cardinal Point data) is ignored and warnings are issued if they are non-zero.
• Panels - General Diaphragms, Mat Foundations, Membranes and Plates are excluded and a warning is issued.
• Diaphragm Panel Node Exclusions are ignored.
• 2D Elements are excluded and a warning is issued.
• Meshing properties for panels are excluded without warning.
• Shear Walls - only quadrilaterals can be created.
• Diaphragm Constraints - these are excluded and a warning is issued to this effect.
Any diaphragm constraints must be replicated in Tekla Structural Designer to ensure equivalence
• Slaved Nodes - excluded and a warning is issued.
• Lumped Mass are excluded.
• Groups are excluded.
• Notional Load Factors - NHF or EHF are added to combinations with the sign indicating positive or negative for each direction, but the actual value is ignored. The standard notional load calculation method is used and default Strength Factor, i.e.
1.0.
• Non-zero Gravitational Factors for Global X & Y - excluded and a warning is issued.
• Thermal Gradient Loads for 1D & 2D Elements are excluded.
• Moving Loads are excluded.
• Time History Loads are excluded.
• 2D Element Loads - excluded and a warning is issued.
• RSA Data is excluded.
How do I import from a 3D DXF file?
1.
Click Home > 3d DXF Import
131
User Guides (UK)
The ‘3D DXF Import’ button is only active if there is a document open in a 3D
View, (it cannot be selected from a 2D View).
2.
Browse to the required .dxf file, or type the full path into the box directly, then click
‘Open’.
3.
You will now see a Dxf Import dialog which allows you to control the layers and colours which you want to import (self-explanatory). The dialog also allows you to apply offsets or rotate the model before data is imported.
4.
Click ‘OK’
Any line segments found in the selected layers are then imported as ‘Analysis elements’.
Import from a 3D DXF file - Assumptions and Limitations
The following points should be noted when importing 3D DXF files:
Round Tripping
There is no "round-tripping" for 3D DXF file imports, i.e. the import data is used to create new objects in the model, not update existing ones. All existing objects and data are maintained.
Data that is imported
Analysis Elements are created from line segments in the selected layers of the DXF file as follows:
• All LINES in these layers become 1D Analysis Elements
• Arcs and circles in the selected layers are excluded without any warning
• Blocks are not handled - no warnings
• Polylines in the selected layers are excluded without any warning
• 3D Solids in the selected layers are excluded without any warning
• 2D Faces for 3D objects in the selected layers are excluded without any warning
• All ends of lines in the selected layers will be nodes
• Crossing lines - we do not introduce nodes at their intersections
• No reading of any text
• No intelligence on "through members"
• No gridlines/construction lines
• No 2D elements
• No supports
• No section properties
132
User Guides
• No materials
• No loads
• No combinations
Editing project details using Project Wiki
Model statistics and revision control information are stored in Project Wiki.
How do I edit the project details and view the revision history?
You set the initial project details as you create a new project. If you want to change these later, or view other project parameters this is done as follows:
• Click Home > Project Wiki ( )
From the Project Wiki dialog you can see:
Project Summary
Parameters are entered here for inclusion in the output reports.
Revisions
Revision history can be tracked here.
Sessions
Shows the time at which each revision was started and last saved.
Changes
Displays the changes associated with each revision.
Metrics
Displays statistics related to the model size.
How do I record revisions?
You set the initial project details as you create a new project. If you want to change these later, this is easily done.
1.
You must save the project before you can start recording revisions. (eg ‘ABC123’)
2.
>
3.
Enter the Revision ID and add a notes related to this revision.
4.
In order to keep a record of the changes made in this revision, check Track
Changes.
5.
Click OK.
133
User Guides (UK)
6.
Continue to develop the model then save it to a new name.(eg ‘ABC123 rev A’)
7.
Repeat steps 2-5 above as required.
Modeling and Editing Guide
and Architectural Grids and Grid Lines are set out
first, after which the model can be created from a variety of member types. Further
commands for editing the model can be accessed from the Edit toolbar .
Model toolbar
The groups listed below are displayed when a 2D or 3D View is active.
If any other view is active only the ‘Levels’, ‘Edit’ and ‘Validate’ groups are displayed.
Levels group
Button Description
Construction
Levels
Frame
Opens the Construction Levels dialog from where you
can define the levels required in order to construct your model.
Creates a Frame when in a 3D View, (when a 2D View is displayed Frame is inactive). The drop list underneath can be used to delete existing Frames.
A Frame is simply a 2D View of the model created in a vertical plane defined by an existing grid line.
Because only those members that lie within the plane of the Frame are displayed, this type of view can be particularly useful for defining bracing.
See:
134
User Guides
Sloped Plane Creates a Sloped Plane when in a 3D View, (when a 2D
View is displayed Sloped Plane is inactive). The droplist underneath can be used to delete existing Sloped
Planes.
A Sloped Plane is simply a 2D View of the model created in a sloped plane. It is defined by selecting 3 existing grid points.
Because only those members that lie within the plane of the Slope are displayed, this type of view can be particularly useful for defining inclined roofs and ramps.
See:
Grid and Construction Lines group
The Grid and Construction Lines group contains a Grid Line drop list, a Construction
Line drop list and the Dimension command.
The commands on the two drop lists are only available when a 2D view representing the construction level on which you want to create your grid or construction lines is active.
Button Description
Inserts a grid line between two specified points.
Grid Line list)
(on 1st drop
Parallel list)
(on 1st drop
Parallel (quick) list)
(on 1st drop
Perpendicular list)
(on 1st drop
Inserts a parallel grid line at a specified distance from the selected line.
Inserts multiple parallel grid lines at specified distances from the selected line.
For example:
3*5 - inserts 3 parallel lines, each at 5m spacing
3,4,5 - inserts 3 parallel lines at spacings of 3,4, and 5m respectively.
Inserts a perpendicular grid line at a specified location on the selected line.
135
User Guides (UK)
Rectangular
Wizard list)
(on 1st drop
Sector Wizard list)
(on 1st drop
Arc list)
(on 1st drop
Import DXF
(on 1st drop list)
Construction
Line list)
(on 2nd drop
Parallel list)
(on 2nd drop
Parallel (quick) list)
(on 2nd drop
Used to insert a system of grid lines in two directions at a specified angle.
Used to insert a system of radial and arc grid lines.
Used to insert an arc grid line.
Used to import grid lines from a dxf file.
Inserts a construction line between two specified points.
Inserts a parallel construction line at a specified distance from the selected line.
Perpendicular list)
(on 2nd drop
Rectangular
Wizard list)
(on 2nd drop
Inserts multiple parallel construction lines at specified distances from the selected line.
For example:
3*5 - inserts 3 parallel lines, each at 5m spacing
3,4,5 - inserts 3 parallel lines at spacings of 3,4, and 5m respectively.
Inserts a perpendicular construction line at a specified location on the selected line.
Used to insert a system of construction lines in two directions at a specified angle.
136
Sector Wizard list)
(on 2nd drop
Arc list)
(on 2nd drop
Dimension
Used to insert a system of radial and arc construction lines.
Used to insert an arc construction line.
Dimensions allow you to show distances in your structure between appropriate points.
The dimension lines are included on any drawings you create.
Related topics
•
Grid Lines and Construction Lines
•
Steel group
The Steel group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Steel Column list)
(on 1st drop
Plated list)
(on 1st drop
Creates a steel column which adopts the
Creates a plated steel column which adopts
the specified create steel column properties set create steel column properties set
Concrete Filled list)
(on 1st drop
Creates a concrete filled steel column which
adopts the specified properties set create steel column
Concrete Encased list)
(on 1st drop
Creates a concrete encased steel column which
adopts the specified create steel column properties set
Steel Beam list)
(on 2nd drop
Creates a steel beam which adopts the
specified create steel beam properties set
User Guides
137
User Guides (UK)
Plated list)
(on 2nd drop
Westok Cellular list)
(on 1st drop
Westok Plated list)
(on 1st drop
Fabsec list)
(on 1st drop
Steel Brace list)
(on 3rd drop
X Brace list)
(on 3rd drop
K Brace list)
(on 3rd drop
V Brace list)
(on 3rd drop
A Brace list)
(on 3rd drop
Steel Joist
Steel Truss list)
(on 4th drop
Creates a plated steel beam which adopts the
specified create steel beam properties set
Creates a Westok cellular steel beam which
adopts the specified properties set
Creates a steel joist which adopts the specified
create steel joist properties set
Runs the Steel Truss Wizard to define a truss
with the specified edit steel truss properties set
Creates a Westok plated steel beam which
adopts the specified create steel beam properties set
Creates a Fabsec steel beam which adopts the
specified create steel beam properties set
Creates a steel brace which adopts the
specified create steel brace properties set
Creates an X steel brace which adopts the
specified create steel brace properties set
Creates a K steel brace which adopts the
specified create steel brace properties set
Creates a V steel brace which adopts the
specified create steel brace properties set
Creates an A steel brace which adopts the
specified create steel brace properties set
138
Space list)
(on 4th drop
Portal Frame
Runs the Space Truss Wizard to define a truss
with the specified edit steel truss properties set
Creates a portal frame.
To create the frame, you firstly define the two column base positions between which the frame will lie. The base positions are restricted to lie on existing grid points.
All other details of the portal frame are subsequently entered in the Portal Frame dialog.
Related topics
•
Steel, Cold Rolled, and Cold Formed Member modeling
Concrete group
The Concrete group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Concrete Wall
Concrete
Column
Concrete Beam
Creates a reinforced concrete wall which
adopts the specified create concrete wall properties set
Creates a reinforced concrete column which
adopts the specified create concrete column properties set
Creates a reinforced concrete beam which
adopts the specified create concrete beam properties set
Related topics
•
•
•
Slabs group
User Guides
139
User Guides (UK)
The Slabs group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Slab on Beams list)
(on 1st drop
Flat Slab list)
(on 1st drop
Precast list)
(on 1st drop
Steel Deck list)
(on 1st drop
Timber Deck list)
(on 1st drop
Composite Slab list)
(on 1st drop
Column Drop list)
(on 2nd drop
Slab Opening list)
(on 2nd drop
Slab Overhang list)
(on 2nd drop
Slab Split
Creates a concrete slab which adopts the
specified create slab on beams item properties set
Creates a concrete flat slab which adopts the
create flat slab item properties set
Creates a steel deck which adopts the specified
create steel deck item properties set
Creates a composite slab which adopts the
Creates a column drop which adopts the
Creates a slab opening which adopts the
slab opening and mat opening properties
Creates a slab overhang which adopts the
specified slab overhang and mat overhang properties
This command is used to split an existing slab.
Creates a precast concrete slab which adopts
the specified create precast item properties set
Creates a timber deck which adopts the
specified set create timber deck item properties
140
Slab Join
Related topics
•
This command is used to join an existing slabs.
Timber group
The Steel group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Creates a timber column which adopts the
specified create timber column properties set
Timber Column
Timber Beam
Timber Brace list)
(on 1st drop
X Brace list)
(on 1st drop
K Brace list)
(on 1st drop
V Brace list)
(on 1st drop
A Brace list)
(on 1st drop
Timber Truss list)
(on 2nd drop
Creates a timber beam which adopts the
specified create timber beam properties set
Creates a timber brace which adopts the
specified create timber brace properties set
Creates an X timber brace which adopts the
specified create timber brace properties set
Creates a K timber brace which adopts the
specified create timber brace properties set
Creates a V timber brace which adopts the
specified create timber brace properties set
Creates an A timber brace which adopts the
specified create timber brace properties set
Creates a steel truss which adopts the
specified edit timber truss properties
User Guides
141
User Guides (UK)
Space list)
(on 2nd drop
Creates a space truss which adopts the
Related topics
•
Cold Formed group
The Cold Formed group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Column
Beam
Brace
(on drop list)
X Brace
(on drop list)
K Brace
(on drop list)
Creates a column which adopts the specified
create cold formed column properties set
Creates a beam which adopts the specified
create cold formed beam properties set
Creates a brace which adopts the specified
create cold formed brace properties set
Creates an X brace which adopts the specified
create cold formed brace properties set
Creates a K brace which adopts the specified
create cold formed brace properties set
properties
V Brace
(on drop list)
A Brace
(on drop list)
Creates a V brace which adopts the specified
create cold formed brace properties set
Creates an A brace which adopts the specified
create cold formed brace properties set
Related topics
•
Steel, Cold Rolled, and Cold Formed Member modeling
Panels group
The Panels group contains the following commands:
142
Button Description
Roof Panel
Wall Panel
Creates a roof panel which adopts the
specified Roof panel properties
Creates a wall panel which adopts the specified
Related topics
•
•
Miscellaneous group
The Miscellaneous group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Support
Element
Measure
Creates additional supports underneath existing members in the model, which adopt
the specified Support properties
Creates a new analysis element which adopts
the specified Element properties .
Measures the distance between any existing construction points or intersection points in the model.
See: How do I Measure distances?
Measure
Angle
Bearing Wall
Measures angles between existing points in 2D
Views.
Related topics
•
Creates a bearing wall.
Validate
User Guides
143
User Guides (UK)
Button
Validate
Description
This command is used to perform the model validity checks.
Construction Levels
The Construction Levels dialog is used to define those levels that you need to identify in
order to construct your model. They could be floors or roofs, or they may simply be intermediate levels required in order to define specific items...
Construction Levels dialog
From this dialog you can define the levels required in order to construct your model.
Fields
Ref
Each construction level should be given a unique reference. Typically this might be a storey number, 1, 2 , 3 etc.
Name
Each construction level can also be given a name to further assist identification. ‘First
Floor’, or ‘Mezzanine’ etc.
Type
Select the type from the drop down menu:
• T.O.S = Top of Steel
• S.S.L = Structural Slab Level
• T.O.F = Top of Foundation
144
User Guides
Slabs are modelled above the level when it is set to T.O.S or T.O.F but below the level when it is set to S.S.L
Level
The height of the construction level above the base level.
Spacing
The height of the construction level above the level immediately below.
Source
Unique levels can be edited independently, whereas edits to identical levels are applied at both levels simultaneously.
See: How do I make one level an identical copy of another?
and How do I make one level an independent copy of another?
Slab Th.
The default thickness of any slabs created at the level.
Floor
By setting a construction level to be a Floor you are indicating that it is a major level in the building. Floor levels determine the number of sub models that are created for the chasedown analysis. Floor levels are also used to determine items such as your inter story height.
There will certainly be a number of levels that are clearly floor levels, but there could be many others that are not. For example you create intermediate levels in order to define:
• half landing levels and stairs,
• K Bracing - you require a construction level for the intermediate bracing connection points,
• steps in the building floor levels.
Where you define a level which is clearly not a floor, then you should not check the floor box. If a floor exists only at some locations in the level (e.g. in a building with stepped floor levels), then you should check the floor box.
Buttons
Click this button to insert a single construction level above the
current level at the same spacing. See: How do I insert multiple Construction Levels?
Click this button to insert a single construction level below the
current level at the same spacing. See: How do I insert multiple Construction Levels?
Click this button to insert a multiple construction levels above the current level at variable spacings.
145
User Guides (UK)
3*5 - inserts 3 levels, each at 5m spacing
3,4,5 - inserts 3 levels at spacings of 3,4, and 5m respectively
Click this button to insert a multiple construction levels below the current level at variable spacings.
Deletes the selected level.
Related topics
•
•
How do I open the Construction Levels dialog?
•
How do I open the Construction Levels dialog?
To open from the ribbon:
) • Click Model > Construction Levels (
To open from the Structure Tree :
• Double-click
Related topics
•
How do I insert a single Construction Level?
1.
In the Construction Levels dialog , select an existing level.
2.
Click Insert Above or Insert Below as appropriate.
3.
If necessary change the default level name to something more appropriate.
4.
For the new level specify the height above the base in the Level field, the interstorey Spacing is then calculated automatically; alternatively if you specify the interstorey Spacing the Level is calculated automatically.
146
User Guides
A default height is calculated for the new level based on the spacings of any existing levels immediately above/below it. Either accept, or adjust as required.
5.
Indicate if the level is to be treated as a Floor by checking the appropriate box.
How do I insert multiple Construction Levels?
1.
In the Construction Levels dialog , select an existing level.
2.
Click Quick Above or Quick Below as appropriate.
3.
Enter the level spacings.
4.
Click OK
If you have new levels at 4.2m, 6.2m, 9.2m, 12.2m, 15.2m and 18.2m above the current level, you can specify this as 4.2,2,4*3
5.
If necessary change the default level names to something more appropriate.
If you are designing to BS 5950 and the model contains simple columns, then you must set each level at which beams trim into the simple column so that the Floor setting is Yes.
How do I make one level an identical copy of another?
1.
Open the Construction Levels dialog .
2.
At the level you want to be a copy, click in the ‘Source’ column.
3.
Choose the level you want it to be identical to.
4.
Click OK
Edits to either the source or the identical level are automatically applied at both levels.
How do I make one level an independent copy of another?
1.
Open the Construction Levels dialog .
147
User Guides (UK)
2.
At the level you want to be a copy, click in the ‘Source’ column.
3.
Choose the level you want it to be identical to.
4.
Click OK
5.
Reopen the Construction Levels dialog.
6.
Click in the ‘Source’ column at the same level and change the setting back to
‘unique’
7.
Click OK
Edits to a unique level are applied to that level only.
How do I delete a construction level?
To delete from the Construction Levels dialog :
1.
Select the level to be removed.
2.
Click Delete
3.
Click OK
To delete from the Structure Tree :
1.
Open the
branch of the Structure Tree .
2.
Right-click the title of the construction level to be removed.
3.
Click Delete from the context menu that appears.
This option completely deletes the entire level and all its associated details — all beams, members, slabs… You can not recover the level once you have deleted it. Please take due care when you use this feature.
How do I modify the properties associated with a level?
Certain properties can be modified directly from the Construction Levels dialog ,
however there are a number of other parameters associated with levels that can only be edited in the Properties Window .
To edit in the Properties Window:
1.
Open the
branch of the Structure Tree .
148
User Guides
2.
Select the title of the construction level to be edited.
3.
Make your changes to the Level Properties displayed in the Properties Window.
Frames and Slopes
A Frame is simply a 2D View of the model created in a vertical plane defined by an existing grid line - because only those members that lie within the plane of the Frame are displayed, this type of view can be particularly useful for defining bracing.
A Slope is simply a 2D View of the model created in a sloped plane. It is defined by selecting 3 existing grid points - because only those members that lie within the plane of the Slope are displayed, this type of view can be particularly useful for defining inclined roofs and ramps.
A sloped plane must be entirely contained within a single Sub Model because the Sub Model determines the mesh parameters to be applied.
In a sloped plane positive Y is always aligned to the up-slope direction, so that positive X is always perpendicular to the slope.
How do I create a Frame?
1.
Obtain a 3D view of your structure in which you can see the base grid line associated with the frame that you want to create.
2.
Click Model > Frame ( )
3.
Position the cursor over the grid line for the frame you want to create.
4.
Click to create the frame.
5.
This creates a frame view for the selected grid line. You can open this view by clicking the plus sign ( ) to the left of
in the Structure Tree and then
double-clicking the name of the frame whose view you want to open.
How do I create a Slope?
In order to create a slope you need to be able to click three existing grid points (that are not co-linear) which lie in the plane of the slope.
149
User Guides (UK)
Grid points are formed at grid line intersections on construction levels.
Therefore, if the points required to define the slope don’t currently exist, you may need to insert new construction levels and/or grid lines to form them.
To create a slope:
1.
Obtain a 3D view of your structure in which you can see three grid points which define the sloped plane.
If you cannot see grid line intersections on a particular construction level in
the 3D view select the level in the Structure Tree and then check ‘Show grids
in the 3D view’ in the Properties Window. (At the same time you can also uncheck the same property at other levels in order to simplify the display.)
2.
Click Model > Sloped Plane ( )
3.
Click the three points which define the sloped plane.
4.
This creates a sloped plane view. You can open this view by clicking the plus sign ( ) to the left of
in the Structure Tree and then double-clicking the name of
the sloped plane whose view you want to open.
Grid Lines and Construction Lines
Grid lines facilitate the placing of objects in your model. Construction lines serve the same purpose, only without displaying a grid bubble.
Architectural Grids and Grid Lines
An Architectural Grid is a collection of Grid Lines that lie in a horizontal plane. Each architectural grid is only displayed in the 3D View at the lowest level in the structure
(they are not displayed in 2D Views). Vertical lines can be projected from each grid intersection of the architectural grid - these extend to the topmost level at which the architectural grid has been applied.
Each architectural grid can be assigned a color and can be set to display grid line names and vertical lines via the architectural grid properties. (Note that when these options are checked they will only be displayed provided the Architectural Grids>Text2D and
VerticalLines options are also checked in Scene Content.)
Each Grid Line is associated with an architectural grid and is only created at a given level provided the architectural grid has been applied at that level.
150
User Guides
Grid lines that have been created at a given level can optionally be shown or not shown in both the 2D and 3D views via the level properties. (Note that when these show options are checked the lines will only be displayed provided the relevant Grid &
Construction Lines options are also checked in Scene Content.)
Why are the grid lines not being shown at a particular level?
Having activated the display of grid & construction lines in Scene Content for a
particular 2D or 3D view, you may still find that the grid lines are not displayed on particular levels.
In this situation you should first check the level properties to ensure that grids are set to be shown. This is done as follows:
1.
Open the
Levels branch of the Structure Tree .
2.
Left-click on the level at which you want to have the grids shown.
3.
In the Properties Window for the level - check ‘Show grids in plane view’ to make the grids visible in the 2D view, check ‘Show grids in 3D view’ to make the grids visible at that level in 3D views.
If the grids are still not visible in the 3D view at certain levels, you will need to ensure
How to I apply an existing architectural grid to a specific level?
1.
Open the
Architectural Grids branch of the Structure Tree .
2.
Right-click the architectural grid name required and then pick Edit... from the context menu.
3.
Ensure the levels at which you want the architectural grid to be applied are all checked.
How do I create a rectangular grid line system?
1.
Make sure that the 2D view representing the construction level on which you want to create your rectangular grid system is active.
2.
Click Model tab.
3.
From the drop list select
4.
Enter a name for the grid and choose a colour for the grid lines you want to create.
5.
If you want to create the same grid layout on every construction level in your building ensure that each level is checked in the dialog. If you don’t want the grid to be displayed at a particular level uncheck it.
151
User Guides (UK)
6.
Define the origin of the grid system, either by clicking in the 2D view, or by entering the coordinates in the Rectangular Grid Wizard dialog.
7.
Choose which grid lines you want to create, in the X direction only, in the Y direction only, or in both directions, and choose the grid line representation - dash dot, dot… that you want to use for these grid lines.
8.
Define the layout of grids for the bays in the X direction.
If you are only creating grid lines in the X direction, then the wizard skips this step.
You can define a regular or irregular grid layout:
• for a regular grid you define the number of bays you want to create and the bay centres,
• for an irregular grid you define the distance between successive pairs of grid lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of bays that are at the same centres, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have bay centres of 6m, 9m, 6m, 6m, 6m, 6m and 9m you can specify this as 6,9,4*6,9.
You can also specify the reference of the first grid line, and by how much you want to increment that reference to give the references of the other lines that you create.
Numerical grid line numbering is self explanatory. For alphanumeric grid lines, if you specify that the first grid line reference is to be D, and specify an increment of 3, your grid lines will be referenced D, G, J, M…
9.
Define the layout of grids for the bays in the Y direction.
If you are only creating grid lines in the Y direction, then the wizard skips this step.
You can define a regular or irregular grid layout:
• for a regular grid you define the number of bays you want to create and the bay centres,
• for an irregular grid you define the distance between successive pairs of grid lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of bays that are at the same centres, then you can specify these as a single entry.
152
User Guides
If you have bay centres of 6m, 9m, 6m, 6m, 6m, 6m and 9m you can specify this as 6,9,4*6,9.
Again you can specify the reference of the first grid line, and how you want to increment the grid line reference to give the references of the other lines that you create.
10.
Define the rotation of the grid. You can do this graphically by moving the mouse over the 2D view and clicking, or by entering values into the wizard’s dialog. If you use the latter approach you can specify the rotation either with respect to the grid system’s local x or local y directions.
This is useful if you are going to create a grid system which is not orthogonal.
11.
Finally specify the angle between the grid’s axes, you can do this with respect to either the X or Y axis system and click Finish to create your grid layout. Again you can do this graphically, or you can use the wizards dialog - it’s your choice.
How do I create a radial grid line system?
1.
Make sure that the 2D view representing the construction level on which you want to create your radial grid system is active.
2.
Click Model tab
3.
From the drop list select
4.
If you want to create the same grid layout on every construction level in your building ensure that each level is checked in the dialog. If you don’t want the grid to be displayed at a particular level uncheck it.
5.
Define the origin of the grid system, either by clicking in the 2D view, or by entering the coordinates in the Radial Grid Wizard dialog.
6.
Choose which grid lines you want to create, the radial lines only, the arcs only, or both of these, and choose the grid line representation - dash dot, dot… that you want to use for these grid lines.
7.
Define the layout of the arcs that you will create.
153
User Guides (UK)
If you are only creating radial grid lines the wizard skips this step.
You can define a regular or irregular grid layout:
• for a regular grid you define the number of arcs you want to create and the distance between them,
• for an irregular grid you define the distance between successive pairs of arcs lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of arcs that are the same distance apart, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have arcs at distances of 3m, 4m, 3m, 3m, 3m, 3m and 4m you can specify this as 3,4,4*3,4.
You can also specify the reference of the first grid line, and by how much you want to increment that reference to give the references of the other lines that you create.
Numerical grid line numbering is self explanatory. For alphanumeric grid lines, if you specify that the first grid line reference is to be D, and specify an increment of 3, your grid lines will be referenced D, G, J, M…
You can also choose whether the arc grid lines are to be true curves, or represented as a series of straight lines between those points where the arc intersects the other grid lines created as part of this process.
8.
Define the layout of radial grid segments that you want to achieve.
If you are only creating grid arcs the wizard skips this step.
You can define a regular or irregular radial line layout:
• for a regular layout you define the number of radial lines you want to create and the angle between them,
• for an irregular radial line layout you define the angle between successive pairs of radial lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of lines that are at the same centres, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have angles of 30°, 45°, 30°, 30°, 30°, 30° and 45° you can specify this as 30,45,4*30,45.
154
User Guides
Again you can specify the reference of the first grid line, and how you want to increment the reference to give the references of the other radial lines that you create.
9.
Finally define the rotation of the grid. You can do this graphically by moving the mouse over the 2D view and clicking, or by entering values into the wizard’s dialog. If you use the latter approach you can specify the rotation either with respect to the grid system’s local x or local y directions.
How do I create a single grid line between two points?
1.
Make sure that the 2D view representing the construction level on which you want to create your grid line is active.
If you want to create a series of grid lines which form a regular or irregular, rectangular or radial grid system, the Tekla Structural Designer Rectagular and Sector Wizards give the speediest solutions.
2.
Click Model tab
3.
Then from the drop list select
4.
Pick the point where you want the grid line to start (Point 1).
The tooltip gives the cursor’s coordinates exactly. If it has not snapped to an existing point you can press <F2> to enter the exact coordinates of the point required.
5.
Pick the point where you want the grid line to end (Point 2).
The tooltip displays either the absolute, relative, or polar coordinates of Point
2 depending on whether the ABS, REL or POL button is highlighted in the
Status Bar at the bottom right of the screen. To switch the display simply click one of the other buttons.
6.
The grid line is created between the points you have picked.
The grid line does not extend to infinity. Please take care to ensure that the grid line is of sufficient length to meet your needs.
How do I create a parallel grid line?
155
User Guides (UK)
This option creates a grid line parallel to an existing one, but of a different length. If you want to use this option, then you must have at least one existing grid line in the current
2D-window.
1.
Click Model tab
2.
Then from the drop list select
3.
Enter a name for the grid line in the Properties Window.
4.
Select the grid line to which your new grid line is to be parallel.
5.
You will see a dotted line which is parallel to the grid line you selected in step 4 , and
which follows the cursor.
The tooltip gives the distance of the dotted line from the initial grid line you selected in step 3. You can press <F2> to enter the exact distance if required.
As you zoom further and further into the model the distance by which the cursor moves alters in smaller and smaller increments, so for more accuracy zoom in.
6.
Once you have achieved the distance you require:
• click to locate your new grid line at this position
• pick a point to define the end 1 extent
• pick a second point to define the end 2 extent
7.
The new grid line is created, you can now:
• Move the cursor and continue placing other grid lines with respect to the line
• Press <Esc> to end grid placement.
How do I create one or more parallel (quick) grid lines?
This option creates one or more grid lines parallel to, and the same length as, an existing one. If you want to use this option, then you must have at least one existing grid line in the current 2D-window.
1.
Click Model tab
2.
Then from the drop list select
3.
Enter a name for the grid line in the Properties Window.
4.
Select the grid line to which your new grid lines will be parallel.
156
User Guides
5.
You will see a dotted line which is parallel to the grid line you selected in step 4 , and
which follows the cursor.
The tooltip gives the distance of the dotted line from the initial grid line you
As you zoom further and further into the model the distance by which the cursor moves alters in smaller and smaller increments, so for more accuracy zoom in.
You can define a single grid line, or a series of grid lines on a regular, or irregular layout:
• for a single grid line click to place it, or press <F2> to define it’s offset exactly.
• for a series of grid lines press <F2> then define the distance between successive pairs of grid lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of bays that are at the same centres, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have bay centres of 6m, 9m, 6m, 6m, 6m, 6m and 9m you can specify this as 6,9,4*6,9.
How do I create a perpendicular grid line?
If you want to use this option, then you must have at least one existing grid line in the current 2D-window.
1.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
2.
Enter a name for the grid line in the Properties Window.
3.
Select the grid line to which your new grid line is to be perpendicular.
4.
You will see a dotted line overlying the grid line you selected in step 3 , and which
follows the cursor.
The tooltip gives the perpendicular distance to your new grid line from the
middle of the grid line you selected in step 3 .
As you zoom further and further into the model the distance by which the cursor moves alters in smaller and smaller increments, so for more accuracy zoom in.
5.
Once you have achieved the distance you require:
• click to locate your new grid line at this position,
• pick a point to define the end 1 extent
157
User Guides (UK)
• pick a second point to define the end 2 extent.
6.
The new grid line is created, you can now:
• Move the cursor and continue placing other grid lines with respect to the line
• Press <Esc> to end grid placement.
How do I create a grid arc?
1.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
2.
Enter a name for the grid line in the Properties Window.
3.
Select the point which lies at the centre of the grid arc which you want to create.
The tooltip gives the cursor’s coordinates exactly.
4.
As you move the cursor you will see a line which rotates about the centre defined in
step 3 . This end of this line marks the start of the grid arc you are creating. Once you
have achieved the required location click to set this.
5.
Now you will see two dotted lines, a radial line through the centre defined in step 3 ,
and an arc which indicates the sweep of the grid arc you are creating. Once you have achieved the required sweep click to create your new arc at this position.
How do I import grids from a .dxf, or import a .dxf as a shadow?
The .dxf file that you want to use must be available before you start the import process.
You can either have been sent the file, or have created it yourself in some other application.
1.
Open a 2D View of a construction level (to enable the Grid Line dropdown).
2.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
You will see the Open dialog, navigate to the folder which contains the file you want to import, select the appropriate file name and click Open
3.
You will now see the Dxf Import Wizard. This first page of the dialog allows you to control the layers and colours which you want to import (self-explanatory). Of more interest are the output options which allow you choose either Architectural Grids or
Shadow.
• If you import the Architectural Grids from the .dxf file, then all the elements in the selected layers of the .dxf file are mapped to Tekla Structural Designer grid
158
User Guides lines. You must therefore ensure that you switch off all the layers in the dxf apart from the layers in which the grids have been defined.
• If you import the .dxf as a Shadow, then Tekla Structural Designer imports the .dxf file but does not create any Tekla Structural Designer objects. You can then use the intersection points and such like as the source on which to add the Tekla
Structural Designer objects you require.
4.
If required you can adjust the scale and/or offsets for the dxf before proceeding.
5.
Click Next to move to the second page of the dialog.
6.
The Architectural grids options allow you to control how the grids are created.
• Select By layer to have separate named grids for each layer imported from the dxf.
• Select By color to have separate named grids for each color imported from the dxf.
• Select Merged to have a single merged grid containing every layer/color imported from the dxf.
7.
If you want to import the same grid layout to every construction level in your building ensure that each level is checked in the dialog. If you don’t want the grid to be displayed at a particular level uncheck it.
8.
Click Finish to close the wizard and complete the import.
How do I set the initial number or letter used for grids?
The initial number and letter to be used for grid numbering is specified in the Model
Settings. New grids automatically use the next available number or letter depending on whether they are labelled numerically, or alphanumerically.
1.
Click Home > Model Settings ( )
2.
Use the References - General sub page to set the initial values and also to set the naming style.
How do I change the name or color of an existing architectural grid?
1.
Expand
in the Structure Tree to display the existing grids.
2.
Pick the architectural grid name to be changed from the list.
3.
Use the Properties Window to see and
/ or amend the details of the architectural grid.
How do I change the name of an individual grid-line, -arc?
159
User Guides (UK)
1.
Select the grid line or -arc to be renamed.
2.
Edit the User name for the grid line as shown in the Properties Window.
How do I renumber all grids?
1.
Right click menu.
in the Structure Tree and choose ‘Renumber’ from the
Every grid line in the model is renumbered in sequence.
How do I extend, move or rotate grid lines and arcs?
How do I extend, move or rotate grid lines and arcs?
A grid line can be modified as follows:
• It can be stretched, shortened, or be rotated by moving one of its end nodes.
• It can also be moved in a perpendicular direction by moving its centre node.
Similarly a grid arc can be modified as follows:
• It can be stretched or shortened by moving one of its end nodes.
• It can have its radius adjusted by moving the middle node on the arc perimeter.
• It can be moved in any direction by moving its centre node.
Grid lines and arcs can only be moved in a 2D, not 3D view.
How do I stretch, shorten, or rotate a grid line?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the grid line you want to modify.
The two end nodes and the centre node of the grid line should become visible.
2.
Click to select one of the end nodes of the grid line.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The grid line moves to its new position accordingly.
How do I move a grid line in a perpendicular direction?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the grid line you want to modify.
The two end nodes and the centre node of the grid line should become visible.
2.
Click to select the centre node of the grid line.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
160
User Guides
The grid line moves to its new position accordingly.
How do I stretch or shorten a grid arc?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the arc you want to modify.
The two end nodes and a middle node on the arc perimeter should become visible, along width a node at the centre of the arc.
2.
Click to select one of the end nodes.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The arc stretches or shortens accordingly.
How do I adjust the radius of a grid arc?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the arc you want to modify.
The two end nodes and a middle node on the arc perimeter should become visible, along width a node at the centre of the arc.
2.
Click to select the middle node on the perimeter.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The arc radius adjusts accordingly.
How do I move a grid arc?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the arc you want to modify.
The two end nodes and a middle node on the arc perimeter should become visible, along width a node at the centre of the arc.
2.
Click to select the centre node of the arc.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The arc moves to its new position accordingly.
Construction Lines
Construction Lines
Construction lines serve the same purpose as Architectural Grids and Grid Lines , only
without displaying a grid bubble.
How do I create a rectangular construction line system?
1.
Make sure that the 2D view representing the construction level on which you want to create your rectangular construction line system is active.
161
User Guides (UK)
2.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
3.
Define the origin of the construction line system, either by clicking in the 2D view, or by entering the coordinates in the Rectangular Grid Wizard dialog.
4.
Choose which construction lines you want to create, in the X direction only, in the Y direction only, or in both directions, and choose the line representation - dash dot, dot… that you want to use for these construction lines.
5.
Define the layout of construction lines for the bays in the X direction.
If you are only creating construction lines in the X direction, then the wizard skips this step.
You can define a regular or irregular construction line layout:
• for a regular grid you define the number of bays you want to create and the bay centres,
• for an irregular grid you define the distance between successive pairs of construction lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of bays that are at the same centres, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have bay centres of 6m, 9m, 6m, 6m, 6m, 6m and 9m you can specify this as 6,9,4*6,9.
6.
Define the layout of construction lines for the bays in the Y direction.
If you are only creating construction lines in the Y direction, then the wizard skips this step.
7.
Define the rotation of the grid. You can do this graphically by moving the mouse over the 2D view and clicking, or by entering values into the wizard’s dialog. If you use the latter approach you can specify the rotation either with respect to the construction line system’s local x or local y directions.
This is useful if you are going to create a construction line system which is not orthogonal.
162
User Guides
8.
Finally specify the angle between the construction line axes, you can do this with respect to either the X or Y axis system and click Finish to create your construction line layout. Again you can do this graphically, or you can use the wizards dialog - it’s your choice.
How do I create a radial construction line system?
1.
Make sure that the 2D view representing the construction level on which you want to create your radial construction line system is active.
2.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
3.
Define the origin of the grid system, either by clicking in the 2D view, or by entering the coordinates in the Radial Grid Wizard dialog.
4.
Choose which construction lines you want to create, the radial lines only, the arcs only, or both of these, and choose the line representation - dash dot, dot… that you want to use for these construction lines.
5.
Define the layout of the arcs that you will create.
If you are only creating radial construction lines the wizard skips this step.
You can define a regular or irregular layout:
• for a regular layout you define the number of arcs you want to create and the distance between them,
• for an irregular layout you define the distance between successive pairs of arcs lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of arcs that are the same distance apart, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have arcs at distances of 3m, 4m, 3m, 3m, 3m, 3m and 4m you can specify this as 3,4,4*3,4.
You can also choose whether the arc construction lines are to be true curves, or represented as a series of straight lines between those points where the arc intersects the other construction lines created as part of this process.
6.
Define the layout of radial construction line segments that you want to achieve.
If you are only creating arcs the wizard skips this step.
163
User Guides (UK)
You can define a regular or irregular radial line layout:
• for a regular layout you define the number of radial lines you want to create and the angle between them,
• for an irregular radial line layout you define the angle between successive pairs of radial lines, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of lines that are at the same centres, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have angles of 30°, 45°, 30°, 30°, 30°, 30° and 45° you can specify this as 30,45,4*30,45.
7.
Finally define the rotation of the layout. You can do this graphically by moving the mouse over the 2D view and clicking, or by entering values into the wizard’s dialog. If you use the latter approach you can specify the rotation either with respect to the construction line system’s local x or local y directions.
How do I create a single construction line between two points?
If you want to create a series of construction lines which form a regular or irregular, rectangular or radial system, the Tekla Structural Designer wizards give the speediest solutions.
1.
Make sure that the 2D view representing the construction level on which you want to create your construction line is active.
2.
Click Model >
3.
Pick the point where you want the construction line to start (Point 1).
The tooltip gives the cursor’s coordinates exactly. If it has not snapped to an existing point you can press <F2> to enter the exact coordinates of the point required.
4.
Pick the point where you want the construction line to end (Point 2).
The tooltip displays either the absolute, relative, or polar coordinates of Point
2 depending on whether the ABS, REL or POL button is highlighted in the
Status Bar at the bottom right of the screen. To switch the display simply click one of the other buttons.
5.
The construction line is created between the points you have picked.
164
User Guides
The grid line does not extend to infinity. Please take care to ensure that the grid line is of sufficient length to meet your needs.
How do I create a parallel construction line?
This option creates a construction line parallel to an existing line, but of a different length. If you want to use this option, then you must have at least one existing grid or construction line in the current 2D-window.
1.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
2.
Select the line to which your new construction line is to be parallel.
3.
You will see a dotted line which is parallel to the line you selected in step 4 , and
which follows the cursor.
The tooltip gives the distance of the dotted line from the initial line you
selected in step 4 . You can press <F2> to enter the exact distance if required.
As you zoom further and further into the model the distance by which the cursor moves alters in smaller and smaller increments, so for more accuracy zoom in.
4.
Once you have achieved the distance you require:
• click to locate your new construction line at this position
• pick a point to define the end 1 extent
• pick a second point to define the end 2 extent
5.
The new construction line is created, you can now:
• Move the cursor and continue placing other construction lines with respect to
the line you picked in step 4 .
• Press <Esc> to end construction line placement.
How do I create one or more parallel (quick) construction lines?
This option creates one or more construction lines parallel to, and the same length as, an existing line. If you want to use this option, then you must have at least one existing grid or construction in the current 2D-window.
1.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
165
User Guides (UK)
2.
Select the line to which your new construction lines will be parallel.
3.
You will see a dotted line which is parallel to the line you selected in step 4 , and
which follows the cursor.
The tooltip gives the distance of the dotted line from the initial line you
As you zoom further and further into the model the distance by which the cursor moves alters in smaller and smaller increments, so for more accuracy zoom in.
You can define a single construction line, or a series of lines on a regular, or irregular layout:
• for a single construction line click to place it, or press <F2> to define it’s offset exactly.
• for a series of lines press <F2> then define the distance between successive pairs, separating the numbers by commas. If you have a number of bays that are at the same centres, then you can specify these as a single entry.
If you have bay centres of 6m, 9m, 6m, 6m, 6m, 6m and 9m you can specify this as 6,9,4*6,9.
How do I create a perpendicular construction line?
If you want to use this option, then you must have at least one existing grid or construction in the current 2D-window.
1.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
2.
Select the line to which your new construction line is to be perpendicular.
3.
You will see a dotted line overlying the line you selected in step 3 , and which follows
the cursor.
The tooltip gives the perpendicular distance to your new line from the middle
of the line you selected in step 3 .
As you zoom further and further into the model the distance by which the cursor moves alters in smaller and smaller increments, so for more accuracy zoom in.
4.
Once you have achieved the distance you require:
166
User Guides
• click to locate your new construction line at this position,
• pick a point to define the end 1 extent
• pick a second point to define the end 2 extent.
5.
The new construction line is created, you can now:
• Move the cursor and continue placing other construction lines with respect to
the line you picked in step 3 .
• Press <Esc> to end construction line placement.
How do I create a construction line arc?
1.
Click Model tab, then from the drop list select
2.
Select the point which lies at the centre of the arc which you want to create.
The tooltip gives the cursor’s coordinates exactly.
3.
As you move the cursor you will see a line which rotates about the centre defined in
step 3 . This end of this line marks the start of the arc you are creating. Once you
have achieved the required location click to set this.
4.
Now you will see two dotted lines, a radial line through the centre defined in step 3 ,
and an arc which indicates the sweep of the arc you are creating. Once you have achieved the required sweep click to create your new arc at this position.
How do I extend, move or rotate construction lines and arcs?
How do I extend, move or rotate construction lines and arcs?
A construction line can be modified as follows:
• It can be stretched, shortened, or be rotated by moving one of its end nodes.
• It can also be moved in a perpendicular direction by moving its centre node.
Similarly a construction arc can be modified as follows:
• It can be stretched or shortened by moving one of its end nodes.
• It can have its radius adjusted by moving the middle node on the arc perimeter.
• It can be moved in any direction by moving its centre node.
Construction lines and arcs can only be moved in a 2D, not 3D view.
167
User Guides (UK)
How do I stretch, shorten, or rotate a construction line?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the construction line you want to modify.
The two end nodes and the centre node of the construction line should become visible.
2.
Click to select one of the end nodes of the construction line.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The construction line moves to its new position accordingly.
How do I move a construction line in a perpendicular direction?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the construction line you want to modify.
The two end nodes and the centre node of the construction line should become visible.
2.
Click to select the centre node of the construction line.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The construction line moves to its new position accordingly.
How do I stretch or shorten a construction arc?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the arc you want to modify.
The two end nodes and a middle node on the arc perimeter should become visible, along width a node at the centre of the arc.
2.
Click to select one of the end nodes.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The arc stretches or shortens accordingly.
How do I adjust the radius of a construction arc?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the arc you want to modify.
The two end nodes and a middle node on the arc perimeter should become visible, along width a node at the centre of the arc.
2.
Click to select the middle node on the perimeter.
168
User Guides
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The arc radius adjusts accordingly.
How do I move a construction arc?
1.
In a 2D View, select only the arc you want to modify.
The two end nodes and a middle node on the arc perimeter should become visible, along width a node at the centre of the arc.
2.
Click to select the centre node of the arc.
3.
Click where this node is to be moved to.
The arc moves to its new position accordingly.
Dimensions
Dimensions allow you to show distances in your structure between appropriate points.
The dimension lines are included on any drawings you create.
How do I create a single dimension?
1.
Click Model > Dimension ( )
2.
Click the grid point at the start of the dimension.
3.
Click the grid point at the end of the dimension. Tekla Structural Designer will show a line between these two points.
4.
Move this line to the point where you want the dimension line to lie (somewhere where it will be easily visible, and will not conflict with the rest of your model’s details). Tekla Structural Designer shows the dimension line itself, and the two locator lines at its ends. Simply move the dimension line to the correct location and click to create it.
Steel, Cold Rolled, and Cold Formed Member modeling
Cold rolled and cold formed sections can be modelled and analysed in Tekla
Structural Designer but they are not designed.
169
User Guides (UK)
Modeling Steel Columns and Cold Formed Columns
How do I specify the column type and section size?
To specify the type of steel column:
1.
Click Model > drop list.
2.
Select the type (‘steel’, ‘plated’, ‘concrete filled’, or ‘encased concrete’) from the drop list.
Alternatively, to specify a cold formed column:
1.
Click Model > Column ( ) (in the Cold Formed group).
To specify the column size:
1.
Select the parameter in the Properties Window .
2.
Click (adjacent to ) to open the drop list.
3.
Select from the drop list.
4.
Pick the new section from the Select Section dialog , then click
Select
Before proceeding to create the column, check the remaining properties displayed in
the create steel column properties set and adjust as required.
How do I create a single column in a 2D View?
1.
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
2.
Select the column type and size.
( How do I specify the column type and section size?
3.
Check that the Base Level and the Top Level displayed in the Properties Window are correct, or adjust if necessary.
4.
Click the point where the column is to be placed.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
How do I create a series of columns in a 2D View?
1.
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the columns will run and the grid points between which they will lie.
2.
Select the column type and size.
( How do I specify the column type and section size?
170
User Guides
3.
Check that the Base Level and the Top Level displayed in the Properties Window are correct, or adjust if necessary.
4.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the grid intersection points at which you want to create columns.
5.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
6.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating).
7.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the grid intersection points at which you want to create columns, release the mouse button.
How do I create a single column in a Frame, or Structure View?
In order to define a column in a frame-, or structure-view you must have already defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
To create the column:
1.
Select the column type and size.
( How do I specify the column type and section size?
2.
Click the point where the column is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
3.
Click the point where the column is to end. Tekla Structural Designer creates the column between these two points.
How do I align a column to a specific angle, or an angled gridline?
Three options are provided for specifying the alignment of a new column - achieved by setting the Rotation property as follows:
• 0, 90, 180, 90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
How do I create an inclined column?
An inclined column can only be created in a Frame, or Structure View.
In order to define the column you must have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
171
User Guides (UK)
Certain limitations apply to the design of inclined columns.
- An inclined column is any column not truly vertical
- The web of an inclined column must be 'vertical' i.e. it must lie in the vertical plane.
- 'Nominal moments' due to eccentric beam reactions are not taken into account in the design of inclined columns - no explicit guidance is available on this topic. In columns with any significant inclination, 'true' moments are likely to govern design and these are catered for in Fastrak. If you are attempting to design columns that are close to vertical and for which you consider nominal moments to be significant, then you need to make due allowance for them. This can be achieved automatically in the program by modelling them as (truly) vertical or manually by providing your own calculations for the additional effects of the nominal moments following the design of the inclined column.
1.
Select the column type and size.
( How do I specify the column type and section size?
2.
Click the point where the column is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
3.
Click the point where the column is to end. Tekla Structural Designer creates the column between these two points.
Related topics
•
How do I create a cranked column?
How do I create a cranked column?
A cranked column can only be created in a Frame, or Structure View.
In order to define the column you must have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
1.
Select the column type and size.
( How do I specify the column type and section size?
2.
Click the point where the column is to start.
3.
Press and hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and click the next node of your cranked column.
4.
Repeat step 3 until you have defined the penultimate node of your cranked column.
Release the Ctrl key and click the point where the column is to end.
172
User Guides
How do I create a Plated, Concrete Filled, or Encased Concrete column?
1.
Click Model tab, then from the
‘concrete filled’, or ‘encased concrete’).
drop list select the type ( ‘plated’,
2.
How you then proceed to place the column depends on whether you are in a 2D View, or a Frame/Structure View.
How do I create a gable post, or parapet post?
1.
Click Model > Steel Column ( )
(or any of the other element types - it does not actually matter which.)
2.
Change the Characteristic in the property set to Gable post, or Parapet post.
The properties displayed are updated appropriate to the type of post chosen.
3.
or
create parapet post properties set
and adjust as necessary.
For gable posts, consider in particular:
- if an axial load release at the top is required (set under the Releases heading)
- what wind load deflection parameters are required (set under the
Deflection limits heading)
4.
Click where the member is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click where the member is to end (Point 2).
How do I specify a column splice?
Splices can be added at the base of each column stack (apart from stack 1) as required.
The splice offset is then used to locate each splice at a practical distance above the floor level.
173
User Guides (UK)
To add a splice:
1.
Select the columns.
2.
The properties are displayed in the edit steel column properties set - expand the
properties for the stack within which the splice is required.
3.
Check the Splice property box.
4.
A splice can be added at the base of each stack (apart from stack 1) as required. The splice offset can be set to locate the splice at a practical distance above the floor level.
You should notice that the ‘Section’ property, (which was previously greyed out) is now editable, allowing you to specify a different section size above the space position.
How do I modify the position of a single column stack?
A column stack’s position can best be modified in either a Frame, or Structure View.
1.
In Scene Content , ensure that the Grid & Construction Lines box is checked.
2.
Select the column for which a stack is to be moved.
The column is highlighted in one colour, the column end nodes and middle node in another.
3.
Select one end nodes for the column stack to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
4.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the column stack end node position.
The entire column is redrawn with the selected node moved to the new position.
5.
Select the next end node. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity
tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
6.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the end node position.
The column is redrawn once more with the selected node moved to the new position.
How do I modify the position of an entire column?
Simply use the Move command located on the Edit ribbon.
Modeling Steel Beams and Cold Formed Beams
Modeling Steel Beams and Cold Formed Beams
174
User Guides
How do I specify the beam type and section size?
To specify the type of steel beam:
1.
Click Model > drop list.
2.
Select the type (‘Steel’, ‘Plated’, ‘Westok Cellular’, ‘Westok Plated’, or ‘Fabsec’) from the drop list.
Alternatively, to specify a cold formed beam:
1.
Click Model > Beam ( ) (in the Cold Formed group).
To specify the beam size:
1.
Select the parameter in the Properties Window .
2.
Click (adjacent to ) to open the drop list
3.
Select from the drop list.
4.
Pick the new section from the Select Section dialog , then click
Select
How do I create a single span beam?
1.
Select the beam type and size.
( How do I specify the beam type and section size?
2.
Click where the beam is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
3.
Click where the beam is to end (Point 2).
If you are prompted to pick another point (Point 3), this will be due to the
‘Continuous’ box being checked in the beam property set. In order to create a single span beam simply click once again on Point 2, or press the Enter key.
How do I create a Plated, Westok Cellular, Westok Plated, or Fabsec beam?
175
User Guides (UK)
1.
Click Model > Steel Beam (drop list).
2.
Select the beam type required from the drop list.
3.
4.
Click where the beam is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click where the beam is to end (Point 2).
If you are prompted to pick another point (Point 3), this will be due to the
‘Continuous’ box being checked in the beam property set. In order to create a single span beam simply click once again on Point 2, or press the Enter key.
Related topics
•
How do I create a single span beam?
•
How do I create a series of single span beams?
•
How do I create a continuous beam?
•
How do I create a curved beam?
How do I create a series of single span beams?
In order to create beams using this method the floor or construction level must already contain the columns between which the beams will run. You must also use a 2D view of the floor or construction level to use this option.
1.
Select the beam type and size.
( How do I specify the beam type and section size?
2.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the columns between which you want to create beams.
3.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
4.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating).
176
User Guides
5.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the columns between which you want beams creating, release the mouse button.
6.
Beams are created between each adjacent pair of columns within the area you select.
How do I create a continuous beam?
1.
Select the beam type and size.
( How do I specify the beam type and section size?
2.
In the Properties Window , ensure that the Continuous option is checked and adjust
any other details as necessary.
3.
Click where the beam is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
4.
Click the next node of your continuous beam.
5.
Repeat step 4 until you have defined the penultimate node of your continuous
beam.
6.
Click where the beam is to end.
7.
You are now prompted to pick another point, simply click once again on the same point, or press the Enter key in order to create the continuous beam.
You can not define continuous beams which are curved either horizontally or vertically.
How do I add a haunch to an existing beam?
1.
Hover the cursor over the beam in which you want to add haunches so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
3.
Click the Haunches page of the properties dialog
4.
Check the Quick layout check box.
177
User Guides (UK)
5.
Click the Create button.
6.
Define the haunch and end plate geometry as required, then click OK.
Although haunches are considered in the analysis, they are not considered in the beam design.
Caution: In the current release, you should avoid connecting any other member into the haunched portion of a beam.
How do I create a curved beam?
1.
Select the beam type and size.
( How do I specify the beam type and section size?
2.
In the Properties Window , ensure that the Linearity is set to Curved Major (if it is
to curve vertically), or Curved Minor (if it is to curve horizontally), and an appropriate Chord height value is specified to define the curve.
You can control the direction in which horizontally curved beams curve.
When you place the beam you select its start point and its end point. The beam always curves such that if you were to look along the theoretical line from the start point to the end point, then the curve on the beam will always lie to the right of that line.
For vertically curved beams, a negative chord height value can be used to reverse the curve direction.
3.
Adjust any other details in the property set as necessary.
4.
Click where the beam is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click where the beam is to end (Point 2).
178
User Guides
When defining beams which curve vertically, if you are using a 2D view of the floor or construction level, then the vertical projection of the beam is out of the plane of the floor or construction level that you are using. In this case you will not see the beam on the graphical display. You will need to change to a
3D view of the floor, construction level or the entire Structure in order to see them.
Horizontally curved beams always take the chord height defined in the property set, they do not curve automatically to fit on any curved grid line that you may have defined.
How do I modify the position of a beam?
You can modify an individual beam’s position in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Select the beam to be moved.
The beam is highlighted in one colour, the beam end nodes and middle node in another.
2.
Now select the beam end node that is to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
3.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the beam end node position.
The beam is redrawn spanning to the new end position.
Modeling Steel Braces and Cold Formed Braces
Modeling Steel Braces and Cold Formed Braces
Tekla Structural Designer allows you to define braces to provide lateral stability to your structure. Alternatively you can specify rigid frames to achieve the same effect. You can also use both methods within a single structure should this be necessary.
As well as single braces, you are also able to define pairs of braces to form X, K, V and A type braces.
These brace pairs can be defined in any vertical, horizontal or sloped plane within bays formed by the intersections of column and beams. Each brace in the pair has independent properties.
A vertical load release can be applied to the end of a V or A type brace pair so that they don’t prop other members against gravity loads, (you are prevented from releasing single braces, or other brace pairs in this way).
179
User Guides (UK)
V and A brace pairs in models imported from Revit are only recognised as a
pair if they have already been released vertically in Revit. If they have not, they will be imported as two single braces without a vertical release.
The split command is available to split pairs into individual braces.
How do I specify the brace type and section size?
To specify the type of steel brace:
1.
Click Model > drop list.
2.
Select the type (‘Steel Brace’, ‘X’, ‘K’, ‘V’, or ‘A’) from the drop list.
Alternatively, to specify a cold formed brace:
1.
Click Model > Brace ( ) (in the Cold Formed group).
To specify the brace size:
1.
Select the parameter in the Properties Window .
2.
Click (adjacent to ) to open the drop list.
3.
Select from the drop list.
4.
Pick the new section from the Select Section dialog , then click
Select
and adjust as required.
How do I create a single brace?
1.
Select the brace type and size.
( How do I specify the brace type and section size?
2.
Click where the brace is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
3.
Click where the brace is to end (Point 2).
180
User Guides
A and V Braces should be modelled using special tools which can be found on the 'Steel Brace' drop list in the 'Steel' section on the 'Model' tab.
Although it is also possible to model the exact same brace arrangement using individual elements created using the simple 'Steel Brace' command, it is important to note that whilst the EHFs (Equivalent Horizontal Forces) calculated for models built using the A or V Brace tools are correct, this is not the case when the A or V braces are built up out of individual brace members. In this latter case, elements of the vertical loads that are supported by the bracing system are 'lost' and are not included in the EHF calculations with the result that the calculated EHFs are not correct.
How do I create an X, K, V or A brace?
1.
Click Model, then from the
K, V, or A).
drop list select the pattern required (X,
2.
3.
Click to identify the bottom corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 1).
4.
Click to identify the opposite bottom corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 2).
5.
Click to identify the top corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 3). You will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the orientation is correct.
6.
Click to identify the opposite top corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 4).
7.
The brace pattern is created within the area you have selected.
How do I modify the position of a brace?
You can modify an individual brace’s position in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Select the brace to be moved.
The brace is highlighted in one colour, the brace end nodes in another.
2.
Now select the end node that is to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the
Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
3.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the brace end node position.
The brace is redrawn spanning to the new end position.
181
User Guides (UK)
Modeling Steel Joists
Modeling Steel Joists
Steel joists are a specific type of member used in the United States. They are constrained to standard types specified by the US Steel Joist Institute. They are standardized in terms of span, depth and load carrying capacity.
Steel joists (or bar joists) are simply supported secondary members, which do not support any other members - they only support loaded areas.
• Steel joists can be defined with ends at differing levels.
• They can not support any other member.
• Slab and roof loads are supported by steel joists and loads are distributed to them.
How do I specify the joist type and size?
To specify the type of joist:
1.
Click Model > Steel Joist
2.
Select the parameter in the Properties Window .
3.
Click (adjacent to ) to open the drop list.
4.
Select from the drop list.
5.
Pick the series and then the size required from the Select Section dialog , then click
Select
and adjust as required.
How do I create a steel joist?
1.
Select the joist type and size.
( How do I specify the joist type and size?
2.
Click where the joist is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
3.
Click where the joist is to end (Point 2).
182
User Guides
How do I modify the position of a steel joist?
You can modify the joist position in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Select the joist to be moved.
The joist is highlighted in one colour, the joist end nodes in another.
2.
Now select the end node that is to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the
Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
3.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the joist end node position.
The joist is redrawn spanning to the new end position.
Modeling Steel Trusses
Modeling Steel Trusses
Trusses are particular arrangements of members which Tekla Structural
Designer calculates automatically for you. Once you have created a truss you can copy this throughout your model as necessary, and you can pick a truss and move it to the location you require.
Once you have defined and loaded your trusses Tekla Structural Designer automatically checks the member sizes you have specified to determine their adequacy.
How do I use the Steel Truss Wizard?
1.
Click Model > Steel Truss ( )
2.
Choose the truss shape from the list of standard truss patterns.
3.
Click the truss Start Point.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
4.
Click the truss End Point, then click Next
5.
Specify the truss alignment parameters, then click Next
183
User Guides (UK)
6.
Specify the truss details, then click Finish
How do I use the Space Truss Wizard?
1.
Click Model > drop list.
2.
Select Space from the drop list.
3.
Choose either a linear or planar truss type and then specify the alignment and number of bays, then click Next
4.
In the 2D or 3D View, click the truss location points:
• for a linear truss - click the start and end points
• for a planar truss - click the four corners,
5.
Specify the height, then click Next
6.
Define either a straight or curved truss geometry then click Finish
7.
Specify the truss alignment parameters, then click Next
8.
Specify the truss details, then click Finish
How do I define a Free Form Truss?
A free form truss can be created by placing a series of truss members in the shape required.
1.
Open a 2D Frame view in which the truss is to be created. (Note that free form trusses can not be created in a 3D view, or 2D level view).
2.
Click Model > drop list.
3.
Select Free Form from the drop list.
4.
Click where the first truss member is to start.
5.
Click where the first truss member is to end.
6.
Continue in the same way to pace each truss member until the truss geometry is complete.
7.
Press <Esc> to finish.
How do I edit the geometry of an existing steel truss?
1.
Hover the cursor over the truss to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
184
User Guides
The Truss Wizard is displayed.
3.
Edit the properties as required and then click OK
How do I edit the section sizes, material grades and section orientations in an existing steel truss?
1.
Hover the cursor over the truss to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Left click the truss to display the edit steel truss properties set . Review the
properties, adjust as necessary and then click OK
Modeling Portal Frames
Modeling Portal Frames
How do I create a single span portal frame?
1.
Click Model > Portal Frame
2.
Click the grid point for the first column base.
(This also set the local X and Y co-ordinate origin for the frame.)
3.
Click the grid point for the second column base.
(This also defines the positive local X axis direction for the frame.)
The second grid point must lie in the same construction level as the first grid point.
The Portal Frame dialog is displayed allowing you to specify the geometry and section property details for all the elements within the frame.
Initially the local co-ordinates of the Lh and Rh Eaves are invalid (as denoted by the red crosses), this is because the eaves height has yet to be defined.
4.
Click Edit... to specify the eaves level, choose the frame type required, and complete the frame geometry for the first span.
5.
Once the span geometry has been defined, click OK to return to the Portal Frame dialog.
6.
Click Rafters to review the rafter section sizes.
7.
Click Columns to review the column section sizes.
8.
Click Haunches to specify any haunches.
9.
Click Bases to specify the base fixity as either ‘Pinned’ or ‘Fixed’ and if necessary adjust the base levels.
185
User Guides (UK)
‘Nominally Pinned’ and ‘Nominally Fixed’ bases can also be specified, but only by editing individual support properties in the Properties Window after closing the Portal Frame dialog.
When partially fixed bases have been defined, their fixity type is subsequently displayed as ‘User’ in the Portal Frame dialog. See: Partial fixity of column bases
10.
If required click the other pages of the Portal Frame dialog in order to specify where required any:
• Valleys
• Ties
• Tie Members
• Parapets
• Parapet Members
11.
Click Spans to add extra spans into the frame.
See: How do I create a multi-span portal frame?
How do I create a multi-span portal frame?
1.
Start by defining a single span frame.
See: How do I create a single span portal frame?
2.
Then, from the Spans page of the Portal Frame dialog use the buttons to introduce extra spans as required:
• Click Add to introduce a new span at the end of the frame.
• Click Insert to insert a new span below the currently highlighted span.
• Click Copy to copy the currently highlighted span to a target span. (This can only be used to replace a pre-existing span with the copied span, it does not insert a new span).
• Click Mirror to mirror the currently highlighted span to a target span. (This can only be used to replace a pre-existing span with the mirrored span, it does not insert a new span).
How do I edit the properties of an existing portal frame?
To edit the overall frame properties:
1.
Hover the cursor over the portal frame to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the context menu.
The Properties Dialog is displayed.
186
User Guides
3.
Edit the properties as required and then click OK
To edit the properties of an individual portal frame member:
1.
Hover the cursor over the portal frame member to be edited.
2.
Use the down arrow key to scroll through the objects listed in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
When the individual portal frame member becomes highlighted (as opposed to the entire portal frame), right click and select the option to edit the individual member from the context menu.
The Properties Dialog is displayed.
4.
Edit the properties as required and then click OK
Modeling Cold Rolled Sections
Modeling Cold Rolled Sections
The following characteristic types of cold rolled section can be specified in Tekla
Structural Designer: Track, Stud, Joist, Purlin, Rail, Eaves Beam.
Cold rolled sections can be modelled and analysed in Tekla Structural
Designer but they are not designed.
How do I create a single cold rolled section?
1.
Click Model > Steel Beam ( )
(or any of the other element types - it does not actually matter which.)
2.
Change the Characteristic in the property set to the type of cold rolled section you require.
The properties displayed are updated appropriate to the chosen cold rolled section type.
3.
Review the Cold Rolled Properties and adjust as necessary.
4.
Click where the member is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
187
User Guides (UK)
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click where the member is to end (Point 2).
How do I modify the position of a cold rolled section?
You can modify a cold rolled section in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Click the section you want to modify. You will see two handles at its ends. To move the end of the section, click its handle and move it to its new location with the mouse. When the end is where you want it click again to fix the end to that point.
Modeling Web Openings
Modeling Web Openings
Although web openings can be added to steel beams and columns they are only considered in the design of:
- non composite beams designed to Eurocodes or BS codes
- composite beams designed to Eurocodes or BS codes
Web openings can be added either by a 'Quick-layout' process or manually.
'Quick-layout' adds web openings to meet geometric and proximity recommendations published by the SCI, which are created at the maximum depth and spaced at the minimum centres recommended for the section size.
Web openings can be defined manually in two ways from the Web Openings dialog page. With the Quick-layout check box unchecked, the `Add' button adds a new line to the web openings grid to allow the geometric properties of the web opening to be defined, or alternatively, use of the `Add...' button opens the Web Opening Details dialog page which gives access to more help and guidance when defining the opening.
Both methods make use of 'Warning' and 'Invalid' text for data entry checks to provide assistance as the opening parameters are defined.
On the Web Opening Details dialog page, the Center button will position the opening on the beam centre whilst the Auto button will position the opening to meet the spacing recommendations. Also on this page tool tips give information on the recommended values for all the opening parameters.
As web openings are defined, they are immediately visible in the diagram on the Web
Openings dialog page. This diagram displays the results of the geometric and proximity
188
User Guides checks that are carried out on the opening parameters using 'Warning' and 'Invalid' display colours to highlight those areas that are outside the recommended limits.
The areas that are subjected to the checks are end posts, web posts, web opening dimensions and tee dimensions.
This display helps you to decide whether to make any adjustments to the opening parameters before their design is checked.
You should bear in mind that the checks carried out at this stage are geometric checks only and compliance with recommended limits is no guarantee that the opening will pass the subsequent engineering design checks.
Related topics
• Web Openings to SCI P355
• Web Openings to SCI P068
How do I add web openings using Quick Layout?
This method enables you to create maximum depth openings spaced at the minimum centres appropriate to the section size.
1.
Hover the cursor over the member in which you want to add the web openings so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
3.
Ensure the Automatic design check box in the properties is unchecked.
(Web openings cannot be added to members that are in Autodesign mode.)
4.
Click the Web openings page of the properties dialog
5.
Check the Quick layout check box.
6.
Select where you want to start setting out from via the Label openings from droplist.
7.
Select the type (square, rectangular or circular) from the Type droplist.
Data for the first web opening is automatically created as follows:
• l
O
- the length of opening (for rectangular openings only)
• d
O
- the depth of opening
• L
CR
- the distance from the setting out point to the centre of the opening
• L
C
- the distance from end 1 of the member to the centre of the opening.
• d
C
- the distance from the top of the member to the centre of the opening
189
User Guides (UK)
• L
CR
relative to - indicates the setting out point from which L
CR
is measured
(defaults to your selection from the Label openings from droplist)
• Nr. rel. to - this field only applies if you have chosen the ‘Opening ->’ option from the LCR relative to droplist. It is used to specify an existing opening number that you want to use as the setting out point for the new opening.
8.
If stiffening is required select the location from the Stiffening droplist.
Data for the stiffeners is entered manually as follows:
You may need to widen the dialog page to see the relevant column headings.
• d
S
- depth of stiffener
• t
S
- thickness of stiffener
• L
S
- length of stiffener
• e
S
- the distance from edge of the opening to the centre of the stiffener.
190
User Guides
9.
Click then select from the Type droplist to create further openings from the chosen setting out point as required.
10.
At any point you can use the Label openings from droplist to switch to a new setting out point for the next opening.
Related topics
•
How do I add web openings manually?
• Web Openings to SCI P355
• Web Openings to SCI P068
How do I add web openings manually?
This method enables you to create openings to your own specified depth and spacing.
1.
Hover the cursor over the member in which you want to add the web openings so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
3.
Ensure the Automatic design check box in the properties is unchecked.
(Web openings cannot be added to members that are in Autodesign mode.)
4.
Click the Web openings page of the properties dialog
5.
Ensure the Quick layout check box is unchecked.
6.
Select where you want to start setting out from via the Label openings from droplist.
7.
Click (as opposed to )
8.
Select the type (square, rectangular or circular) from the Type droplist.
9.
Manually specify the dimensions of the web opening:
• l
O
- the length of opening (for rectangular openings only)
• d
O
- the depth of opening
191
User Guides (UK)
10.
Manually specify the distance from the setting out point for the web opening
• L
CR
relative to - indicates the setting out point from which L
CR
is measured
(defaults to your selection from the Label openings from droplist)
• Nr. rel. to - this field only applies if you have chosen the ‘Opening ->’ option from the LCR relative to droplist. It is used to specify an existing opening number that you want to use as the setting out point for the new opening.
• L
CR
- the distance from the setting out point to the centre of the opening
• L
C
- the distance from end 1 of the member to the centre of the opening.
Click for L
CR
and L
C
to be automatically calculated as the minimum values appropriate to the size of opening.
• d
C
- the distance from the top of the member to the centre of the opening
Click for d
C
to be automatically calculated to position the opening centrally in the section depth.
11.
If stiffening is required check the Stiffened check box - this creates a second page on the dialog.
Select the location from the Stiffening droplist.
Data for the stiffeners is entered as follows:
• d
S
- depth of stiffener
• t
S
- thickness of stiffener
• L
S
- length of stiffener
• e
S
- the distance from edge of the opening to the centre of the stiffener.
192
User Guides
12.
Click to create the opening.
13.
To create further openings, either:
• click to create multiple copies of a selected opening, or
• click to create a single opening of a different size or spacing,
Related topics
•
How do I add web openings using Quick Layout?
• Web Openings to SCI P355
• Web Openings to SCI P068
Concrete Member modeling
Modeling Concrete Walls
The points used to place a Concrete Wall define the exact size and position of the wall’s analysis model. Its alignment and extension properties have no effect on this model. An
FE meshed wall analysis model will be adopted unless the ‘use mid-pier’ property is checked.
If no slab or other member exists beneath the wall when it is first created, a support is automatically placed underneath it.
Meshed walls default to the model’s mesh parameters, but these can be overridden to allow a user defined mesh to be applied to an individual wall.
193
User Guides (UK)
Releases can be applied at the top and bottom of each panel - pinned connections to incoming slabs and members can be modelled in this way.
If you want to create door or window openings in the wall it must be defined as a meshed wall - openings can not be catered for in mid-pier walls.
Both meshed and mid-pier Concrete Walls introduce structural strength and stiffness to your model, but they do not perform the same function as Wall Panels, i.e. they do not act as a medium via which loads calculated by the Wind Wizard get applied to your structure. Therefore, in order for these wind loads to be applied you should create additional ‘Wall Panels’ in the same physical locations as the ‘Concrete Walls’.
How do I create a concrete wall in a 2D View?
1.
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the wall will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
2.
Click Model > Concrete Wall ( )
3.
The wall will adopt properties from the create concrete wall properties set set
displayed in the Properties Window.
4.
Check that the Base Level and the Top Level shown in the property set are correct, or adjust if necessary.
5.
Check that the Thickness and other properties shown in the property set are also correct, and again adjust if necessary.
6.
Click where the wall is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
7.
Click where the wall is to end (Point 2).
How do I create a concrete wall in a Frame, or Structure View?
In order to define a wall in a frame-, or structure-view you must have already defined the construction levels between which the wall will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
To create the wall:
1.
Click Model > Concrete Wall ( )
2.
194
User Guides
3.
Check that the Base Level and the Top Level shown in the property set are correct, or adjust if necessary.
4.
Check that the Thickness and other properties shown in the property set are also correct, and again adjust if necessary.
5.
Click the point where the base of the wall is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
6.
Click the point where the base of the wall is to end.
7.
Click the point where the top of the wall is to start.
8.
Click the point where the top of the wall is to end.
9.
Tekla Structural Designer creates the wall between these four points.
How do I specify whether the wall is to be meshed or mid-pier?
The model to be adopted for each wall is specified as part of the wall properties.
1.
In the Properties Window leave the
Use Mid-Pier property unchecked to adopt a meshed wall, or check it for a mid-pier wall.
How do I specify extensions?
To automatically trim a new wall back to the face of existing columns or walls:
1.
Check the AutomaticExtension property in the Properties Window when creating the wall.
Or, to manually trim or extend existing walls:
1.
Select the wall to be trimmed or extended.
2.
Specify the required End 1 extension or End 2 extension in the Properties Window:
• A positive extension extends the wall length beyond its insertion point.
• A negative extension trims the wall back from the insertion point.
How do I specify releases?
1.
Select the wall to be released.
2.
In the Properties Window, open the Releases properties.
3.
Select the appropriate release from the ‘Minor Top’ or ‘Minor Bottom’ droplist as required:
• Fixed
• Pinned
195
User Guides (UK)
• Continuous (incoming members pinned) - only available for FE meshed walls
To specify a pinned connection to a supported slab you should use an FE meshed wall and then select Continuous (incoming members
pinned) rather than pinned. This is because the pinned option also releases the wall panel above from the wall panel below - which may result in a mechanism during the analysis.
How do I edit a wall support?
The way this is achieved depends on whether the wall is mid-pier or meshed:
• A mid-pier wall support can be edited or deleted independently in the normal
fashion. See: Modeling Supports
• FE walls have line supports which can only be edited or deleted via the wall properties.
To edit support fixity of an FE wall:
1.
Expand Wall Support in the wall’s properties
2.
Specify the degrees of freedom as required.
Because the discrete supports at each node are angled in the global axis system (always) and not aligned with the wall major/minor axes; it is necessary to set both Mx and My as Free in order to ensure that angled walls are pinned out of plane. (It is not strictly necessary if the wall is aligned in global X or Y, you could set just Mx, or My free as appropriate).
Similarly, both Mx and My should be set as Fixed in order to ensure that angled walls are fixed out of plane.
To remove an FE wall support:
1.
Uncheck Generate support in the wall’s properties.
Generate support will be automatically unchecked if members are created underneath a wall to support it - similarly it will be automatically rechecked if these members are deleted.
How do I create a door or window opening in an existing concrete wall?
1.
Hover the cursor over the wall to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
196
User Guides
3.
Click the plus sign ( ) to the left of Openings to show the panels.
4.
Click the panel in which the opening is to be created.
5.
Click Add
6.
Choose the opening type (‘Door’ or ‘Window’) from the drop list.
7.
Define the opening position and size then click OK
For sizable openings, you should carefully consider if the resulting wall model is appropriate - an alternative in which coupling beams are introduced may be more suitable. See: Limitations of wall openings
Modeling Concrete Columns
Modeling Concrete Columns
How do I specify the column shape and size?
1.
Click Model > Concrete Column ( )
2.
The parameter in the Properties Window shows the default shape and size.
3.
Select the parameter, then to open its drop list click
4.
Select from the drop list.
5.
Select the shape then enter the size in the dialog.
6.
Click OK to save. (Do not click Add unless you want to create a hollow column - See
How do I create a hollow column?
How do I create a single concrete column in a 2D View?
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie, then:
1.
Click Model > Concrete Column ( )
2.
Check the Base Level and Top Level shown in the Properties Window are correct - adjust if necessary.
3.
Check the column shows the correct size - adjust if necessary. Section is correct - adjust if necessary.
( How do I specify the column shape and size?
197
User Guides (UK)
4.
Check the other create concrete column properties set
values are also correct - adjust if necessary.
5.
Click the point where the column is to be placed.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
How do I create a series of concrete columns in a 2D View?
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie, then:
1.
Click Model > Concrete Column ( )
2.
Check the Base Level and Top Level shown in the Properties Window are correct - adjust if necessary.
3.
Check the column shows the correct size - adjust if necessary.
( How do I specify the column shape and size?
4.
Check the other create concrete column properties set
values are also correct - adjust if necessary.
5.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the grid intersection points at which you want to create columns.
6.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
7.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating).
8.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the grid intersection points at which you want to create columns, release the mouse button.
How do I create a single concrete column in a Frame, or Structure View?
In order to define a column in a frame-, or structure-view you must have already defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
To create the column:
1.
Click Model > Concrete Column ( )
2.
Check the column shows the correct size - adjust if necessary.
( How do I specify the column shape and size?
3.
Check the other create concrete column properties set
values are also correct - adjust if necessary.
198
User Guides
4.
Click the point where the column is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
5.
Click the point where the column is to end. Tekla Structural Designer creates the column between these two points.
How do I align a column to a specific angle, or an angled gridline?
Three options are provided for specifying the alignment of a new column - achieved by setting the Rotation property as follows:
• 0, 90, 180, 90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
How do I specify the column alignment relative to the grid?
How each column is initially placed relative to the grid depends on the Automatic
alignment setting in the create concrete column properties set .
If Automatic alignment is on:
Columns on the perimeter of the grid are aligned with their faces flush to the perimeter and internal columns are aligned centrally on the grid.
If Automatic alignment is off:
Columns are aligned according to the Major and Minor alignment settings in the
create concrete column properties set .
199
User Guides (UK)
How do I create a hollow column?
1.
Click Model > Concrete Column ( )
2.
The parameter in the Properties Window shows the default shape and size.
3.
Select the parameter, then to open its drop list click
4.
Select from the drop list.
5.
Select the shape then enter the size in the dialog.
6.
In the same dialog, click Add
7.
In the tabular part of the dialog, select the shape and dimensions of the void.
8.
Leave the minor and major offsets as 0.0 to position the void centrally in the column, or adjust as necessary to create an offset.
How do I create an inclined column?
An inclined column can only be created in a Frame, or Structure View.
In order to define the column you must have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
200
User Guides
Certain limitations apply to the design of inclined columns.
- An inclined column is any column not truly vertical
- The web of an inclined column must be 'vertical' i.e. it must lie in the vertical plane.
- 'Nominal moments' due to eccentric beam reactions are not taken into account in the design of inclined columns - no explicit guidance is available on this topic. In columns with any significant inclination, 'true' moments are likely to govern design and these are catered for in Fastrak. If you are attempting to design columns that are close to vertical and for which you consider nominal moments to be significant, then you need to make due allowance for them. This can be achieved automatically in the program by modelling them as (truly) vertical or manually by providing your own calculations for the additional effects of the nominal moments following the design of the inclined column.
1.
Click Model > Concrete Column ( )
2.
3.
Check that the properties shown in the property set are correct or adjust if necessary.
4.
Click the point where the column is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
5.
Click the point where the column is to end. Tekla Structural Designer creates the column between these two points.
Related topics
•
How do I create a cranked column?
How do I create a cranked column?
A cranked column can only be created in a Frame, or Structure View.
In order to define the column you must have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
1.
Click Model > Concrete Column ( )
2.
3.
Check that the properties shown in the property set are correct or adjust if necessary.
201
User Guides (UK)
4.
Click the point where the column is to start.
5.
Press and hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and click the next node of your cranked column.
6.
Repeat step 3 until you have defined the penultimate node of your cranked column.
Release the Ctrl key and click the point where the column is to end.
How do I modify the position of a single column stack?
A column stack’s position can best be modified in either a Frame, or Structure View.
1.
In Scene Content , ensure that the Grid & Construction Lines box is checked.
2.
Select the column for which a stack is to be moved.
The column is highlighted in one colour, the column end nodes and middle node in another.
3.
Select one end nodes for the column stack to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
4.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the column stack end node position.
The entire column is redrawn with the selected node moved to the new position.
5.
Select the next end node. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity
tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
6.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the end node position.
The column is redrawn once more with the selected node moved to the new position.
How do I modify the position of an entire column?
Simply use the Move command located on the Edit ribbon.
How do I edit the column alignment or specify an offset?
Once columns have been placed their alignments can be adjusted and further offsets specified if required.
• A single column’s alignment can be adjusted either in the Properties Dialog or in the
Properties Window
• Multiple columns can only be realigned using the Properties Window
The example below illustrates editing the alignment in the Properties Window.
1.
Select the columns to be offset.
202
User Guides
2.
Ensure the column properties are displayed in the Properties Window, (use the drop list at the top of the window if necessary).
3.
Edit the ‘Major offset’ and/or ‘Minor offset’ required to move the columns relative to the Major/Minor snap levels by the amount specified.
Modeling Concrete Beams
203
User Guides (UK)
Modeling Concrete Beams
How do I specify the beam size?
1.
Click Model > Concrete Beam ( )
2.
The parameter in the Properties Window shows the default shape and size.
3.
Select the parameter, then to open its drop list click
4.
Select from the drop list.
5.
Select the shape then enter the size in the dialog.
6.
Click OK to save.
How do I create a single span concrete beam?
1.
Click Model > Concrete Beam ( )
2.
Check the beam’s in the Properties Window shows the correct size - adjust if necessary.
( How do I specify the beam size?
3.
Check the other create concrete beam properties set values are also correct - adjust
if necessary.
4.
Click where the beam is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click where the beam is to end (Point 2).
If you are prompted to pick another point (Point 3), this will be due to the
‘Continuous’ box being checked in the beam property set. In order to create a single span beam simply click once again on Point 2, or press the Enter key.
How do I create a continuous concrete beam?
1.
Click Model > Concrete Beam ( )
204
User Guides
2.
Check the beam’s size - adjust if necessary.
parameter in the Properties Window shows the correct
( How do I specify the beam size?
3.
Check the other create concrete beam properties set values are also correct - adjust
if necessary.
4.
Click where the beam is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click the next node of your continuous beam.
6.
Repeat step 4 until you have defined the penultimate node of your continuous
beam.
7.
Click where the beam is to end.
8.
You are now prompted to pick another point, simply click once again on the same point, or press the Enter key in order to create the continuous beam.
You can not define continuous beams which are curved either horizontally or vertically.
How do I create a series of concrete beams?
In order to create beams using this method the floor or construction level must already contain the columns between which the beams will run. You must also use a 2D view of the floor or construction level to use this option.
1.
Click Model > Concrete Beam ( )
2.
Check that necessary.
in the Properties Window
( How do I specify the beam size?
shows the correct size - adjust if
3.
To create continuous beams between the supports - check the box.
4.
Else to create a series of single span beams between the supports - uncheck the box.
205
User Guides (UK)
5.
Review the other create concrete beam properties set values and adjust if
necessary.
6.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the columns between which you want to create beams.
7.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
8.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating).
9.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the columns between which you want beams creating, release the mouse button.
10.
Beams are created between each adjacent pair of columns within the area you select.
How do I create a curved concrete beam?
1.
Click Model > Concrete Beam ( )
2.
Linearity is set to Curved Major (if it is to curve vertically), or Curved Minor (if it is to curve horizontally), and appropriate Chord
height and Maximum facet error values have been specified to define the curve.
You can control the direction in which horizontally curved beams curve.
When you place the beam you select its start point and its end point. The beam always curves such that if you were to look along the theoretical line from the start point to the end point, then the curve on the beam will always lie to the right of that line.
For vertically curved beams, a negative chord height value can be used to reverse the curve direction.
3.
Adjust any other details in the property set as necessary.
4.
Click where the beam is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click where the beam is to end (Point 2).
206
User Guides
When defining beams which curve vertically, if you are using a 2D view of the floor or construction level, then the vertical projection of the beam is out of the plane of the floor or construction level that you are using. In this case you will not see the beam on the graphical display. You will need to change to a
3D view of the floor, construction level or the entire Structure in order to see them.
Horizontally curved beams always take the chord height defined in the property set, they do not curve automatically to fit on any curved grid line that you may have defined.
How do I specify the beam alignment relative to the grid?
For initial placement, beams are aligned relative to the grid depending on the
‘Automatic alignment’ setting in the create concrete beam properties set .
If Automatic alignment is on:
When placed by boxing around columns, each beam’s alignment follows that of the columns between which it spans.
In the below example, because the edge columns were aligned flush with the grid, when the beams are placed (by boxing around the columns) with automatic alignment on, they are flush also.
However, if the edge columns had been aligned centrally, when the beams are placed with automatic alignment on, they would be central also.
207
User Guides (UK)
If Automatic alignment is off:
Beams are aligned according to the
Major and Minor alignment settings in the create concrete beam properties set .
208
User Guides
How do I specify and use beam flanges for an existing beam?
1.
Hover the cursor over the beam to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
The Concrete Beam Property Dialog is displayed.
3.
Open the Design Control page of the dialog for a particular span and check the
‘Consider flanges’ box.
Further boxes are opened up displaying the flange dimensions (initially all zero).
4.
To specify the flange dimensions, click the Calculate flanges button.
- the flange dimensions are automatically calculated.
5.
If required you can add an allowance for openings to reduce the calculated widths by a specified amount.
6.
Repeat the above for additional spans in the beam as required.
Once flanges have been specified in this way they will be considered in the concrete beam design calculations, however the flanged beam properties are not by default used in the analysis.
To use flanged beam properties in the analysis (in addition to the design calculations):
1.
Check the ‘Include flanges in analysis’ box
2.
Repeat for additional spans in the beam as required.
How do I specify and use beam flanges for multiple beams simultaneously?
1.
Select the beams to be edited.
2.
The edit concrete beam properties set
shared by the beams are displayed in the
Properties Window.
3.
Located under All spans - Design Control, check the ‘Consider flanges’ box.
Further boxes are opened up displaying the flange dimensions (initially all zero).
4.
To specify the flange dimensions, firstly select ‘Calculate flanges’ so that it becomes highlighted:
5.
Then click the are automatically calculated.
button - the flange dimensions
209
User Guides (UK)
Only flange dimensions which are common to all the selected beams can be shown in the fields; where different flange dimensions have been calculated for the selected beams, the fields are left blank.
6.
If required you can add an allowance for openings to reduce the calculated widths by a specified amount.
Once flanges have been specified in this way they will be considered in the concrete beam design calculations, however the flanged beam properties are not by default used in the analysis.
To use flanged beam properties in the analysis (in addition to the design calculations):
1.
Located under All spans - Design Control, check the ‘Include flanges in analysis’ box.
How do I edit the beam alignment or specify an offset?
Once beams have been placed their alignments can be adjusted and further offsets specified if required.
• A single beam’s alignment can be adjusted either in the Properties Dialog or in the
Properties Window
• Multiple beams can only be realigned using the Properties Window
The example below illustrates editing the alignment in the Properties Window.
1.
Select the beams to be edited.
2.
Ensure the beam properties are displayed in the Properties Window, (use the drop list at the top of the window if necessary).
210
User Guides
3.
Edit the ‘Major’ and/or ‘Minor snap level’ as required to realign the beams in the vertical and horizontal planes respectively.
4.
Edit the ‘Minor offset’ to move the beams horizontally relative to the Minor snap level by the amount specified.
211
User Guides (UK)
5.
Edit the ‘Major offset’ to move the beams vertically relative to the Major snap level by the amount specified.
How do I modify the position of a beam?
You can modify an individual beam’s position in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Select the beam to be moved.
The beam is highlighted in one colour, the beam end nodes and middle node in another.
2.
Now select the beam end node that is to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
3.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the beam end node position.
The beam is redrawn spanning to the new end position.
Slab modeling
Slabs are the medium via which loads placed on a floor are decomposed back to the supporting structure.
212
User Guides
Each parent slab can consist of a number of individual panels (slab items); these can either be connected or separated from each other, however they must be on the same level.
Each panel initially inherits the properties of the parent slab, but once it has been created it can be edited to allow certain of its properties to be amended: the rotation angle can be changed; the slab depth can be overridden; it can be excluded from the diaphragm.
Each parent slab has a unique name. A slab name used at one level can not be re-used at a different level.
Overview of slab modeling
The Concept of Slabs and Slab Panels
Tekla Structural Designer stores slab data in the form of parent ‘slabs’ each consisting of one or more ‘slab items’ (or ‘slab panels’).
In the view above there are 24 slab items grouped together in one slab.
Some data is set at the ‘slab’ level and is common to all panels, other data is set at the
‘slab panel’ level.
In simple overview terms the data breakdown is as follows:
Slab Data:
213
User Guides (UK)
• Thickness
• Vertical Offset
• Material Properties
• Analysis Settings
• General Design Settings
Slab Panel Data:
• Cover
• Reinforcement information
• Specific Design Settings
In modelling terms you are thus able to create slabs over a wide area, there is no reason at this stage to consider sub-sections of the slab - it is just one big expanse of slab.
When it comes to design you then need to conceptualise the slab as a series of design panels. Each design panel will have it's own design settings and it's own design results.
Different reinforcement can be selected in different panels. You also have to consider pattern loading (some panels loaded and others not). When results are then presented in calculations and drawings you are able to specifically reference the design panels.
Panel sub-division
Regardless of how the slabs and panels are initially created, you are able to further divide (or re-form) them via the Slab Split and Slab Join commands. There are several reasons why you may choose to do this relating to refining geometry (adding steps), pattern loading, and panel design.
When it comes to flat slabs in particular, the way that slabs are split for the purposes of pattern loading is a matter of engineering judgement - the views below show a couple of options that 2 different engineers might both justifiably choose for the same slab perimeter.
214
User Guides
Creating slab panels
Creating slab panels
•
How do I choose the slab type and specify its properties?
1.
Click Model, then from the first Slabs drop list select the slab type required.
2.
Define panel properties for the chosen slab type.
Slab Type Property Set
Slab on
Beams
Flat Slab
Precast
Steel Deck
create slab on beams item properties set
create flat slab item properties set
create precast item properties set
create steel deck item properties set
Timber Deck
create timber deck item properties set
Composite
Slab
create composite slab item properties set
215
User Guides (UK)
3.
Before placing the panel confirm the Slab and Select bays properties (under the
General heading) are set as required.
How do I specify the parent slab to which the panel belongs?
1.
Under the General heading use the Slab property to specify that you want to either:
• create a New Slab
• automatically add to an existing parent slab
• manually select the parent slab.
2.
When the panel properties are defined it can then be placed either by bays or by picking points.
When using the Add to existing option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing slab in the plane with same properties. If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If not found - a new parent slab is created.
The option to manually select the parent slab is only available in 2D Views, and then only after one or more panels have been placed in that view.
How do I create slab panels by bay?
This method is only available in 2D Views.
1.
Under the General heading ensure that the Select bays property is checked.
• Either click within the outline of a bay bounded by beams/walls to add an individual panel, or
• Drag a box to add panels into all bounded bays,
Dragging the box from left to right:
- places panels in those bays totally enclosed by the box.
Dragging the box from right to left:
- places panels in all bays that are either enclosed by, or cross the box.
Hold down the [Shift] key while dragging:
- creates a line instead of a box. Panels are placed in all bays that are cross the line.
How do I create slab panels by points?
This method is available in both 2D and 3D Views.
216
User Guides
1.
Under the General heading ensure that the Select bays property is unchecked.
2.
Pick the first point to define a corner of the panel.
3.
Continue and pick the other points which define the panel outline.
4.
When you get to the final point double-click to create the panel.
Modeling slab and mat openings
Modeling slab and mat openings
Simple Openings
Simple openings can be quickly defined from within existing slabs. Such openings are rectangular or circular in plan.
The Slab Opening command is located on the droplist in the Slabs group, it is only accessible when a 2D view is active.
Openings can
• cross more than one panel/slab
• be overlayed/joined to create openings which together have shapes other than rectangular
• cut across a stepped edge
• be applied to level and sloping slabs
Openings cannot
• be applied to one way spanning slabs
• Cannot reside within or cut a column drop
Irregular Openings
Alternatively, more complex openings can be created by using construction lines and constructing panels around an irregular shape.
How do I create a rectangular slab opening?
1.
Open a 2D view of the level containing the slab or mat within which you want to create an opening.
2.
Click Model > Slab Opening (located on the second Slabs drop list) or
Foundations > Mat Opening (located on the first Mats drop list) as appropriate.
3.
The slab opening and mat opening properties are displayed in the Properties
Window.
217
User Guides (UK)
4.
Use the Opening Type property in this set to specify a Rectangular opening.
5.
If required enter a rotation angle to rotate the opening on plan.
6.
Click within the outline of an existing slab/mat panel to define a corner of the opening.
(Press <F2> if required to enter its exact position.)
7.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the opening (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating the opening).
8.
Click to define the opposite corner of the opening.
(Again, press <F2> if required to enter its exact position.)
How do I create a circular slab opening?
1.
Open a 2D view of the level containing the slab or mat within which you want to create an opening.
2.
Click Model > Slab Opening (located on the second Slabs drop list) or
Foundations > Mat Opening (located on the first Mats drop list) as appropriate.
3.
The slab opening and mat opening properties are displayed in the Properties
Window.
4.
Use the Opening Type property in this set to specify a Circular opening.
5.
Click within the outline of an existing slab panel to define the centre of the opening.
(Press <F2> if required to enter its exact position.)
6.
Drag then click to define the radius of the opening.
(Again, press <F2> if required to enter the exact radius.)
How do I delete a slab opening?
1.
Open the
Slab Openings branch of the Structure Tree .
2.
Right-click over the Name of the slab opening you want to delete.
3.
Click Delete from the context menu which appears.
Adding overhangs to existing slab or mat edges
Adding overhangs to existing slab or mat edges
The building objects that we have dealt with thus far are defined along the grid lines that we have created. For slabs this may not be entirely the case. Particularly for slabs the edge of the slab may extend beyond the grid line, either to the edge of the beam
218
User Guides which supports the edge of the slab, or, around the perimeter of the building to meet the inside face of the cladding.
In order to cater for these common situations, Tekla Structural Designer allows you to define overhangs to the edges of a slab (full length or partial length). An overhang may extend across many panels in one slab. Any loads that you define over an overhang will be included in the total loading on your building. .
The Slab Overhang command is located on the droplist in the Slabs group, it is only accessible when a 2D view is active.
How do I add an overhang to a slab edge?
In order to define a slab overhang you must have already defined the slab to which it applies.
To create the overhang:
1.
Open a 2D view of the level containing the slab for which you want to create an overhang.
2.
Click Model > Slab Overhang (located on the second Slabs drop list) or
Foundations > Mat Overhang (located on the first Mats drop list) as appropriate.
3.
The slab overhang and mat overhang properties are displayed in the Properties
Window from where you can enter the width of the overhang.
4.
Click along the edge of an existing slab/mat panel to define the start point of the overhang.
(Press <F2> if required to enter its exact position.)
5.
Click along the same edge to define the end point of the overhang.
(Press <F2> if required to enter its exact position.)
How do I add a curved overhang to a slab edge?
In order to define a curved slab overhang you must have already defined the slab to which it applies.
To create the overhang:
1.
Open a 2D view of the level containing the slab for which you want to create an overhang.
2.
Click Model > Slab Overhang (located on the second Slabs drop list) or
Foundations > Mat Overhang (located on the first Mats drop list) as appropriate.
3.
In the slab overhang and mat overhang properties , (displayed in the Properties
Window), uncheck the Edge Affiliated box.
219
User Guides (UK)
4.
Enter the curvature of the overhang.
5.
Enter the width of the overhang.
6.
Click along the edge of an existing slab panel to define the start point of the overhang.
(Press <F2> if required to enter its exact position.)
7.
Click along the same edge to define the end point of the overhang.
(Press <F2> if required to enter its exact position.)
Modeling column drops
Modeling column drops
In order to increase punching resistance, drop panels can be inserted within concrete slabs at points where they are supported by columns. Column drops are a slab thickening that can be above the slab, below the slab or both. A column drop is rectangular in plan and is aligned to the column axes.
The extent of the drop is limited by the extent of the slab boundary. (The cut back drop shape may not be rectangular).
How do I create a column drop?
In order to define a slab drop you must have already defined the concrete slab to which it applies.
To create the drop:
1.
Click Model, then from the second Slabs drop list select Column Drop.
2.
The column drop properties are displayed in the Properties Window from where
you can enter the geometry of the drop.
The drop is always positioned centrally over the supporting column.
3.
Click an existing column connected to a concrete slab panel to create a single drop panel, or box around multiple columns to create a series of drops.
220
User Guides
For the drop panel to be inserted correctly, it is important that in the construction level dialog the setting out point ‘Type’ for the slab level in question is set as S.S.L. not T.O.S.
Splitting and joining slabs and mats
Splitting and joining slabs and mats
Existing slab panels can be sub-divided into smaller panels using the ‘Slab Split’ command.
Similarly they can be merged into larger panels using the ‘Slab Join’ command.
The Slab Split and Slab Join commands are only accessible when a 2D view is active.
How do I split a slab?
1.
Click Model > Slab Split, or Foundations > Mat Split as appropriate.
2.
Hover the cursor over the slab edge where you want the split to start.
The points used to define the cut line can be outside the boundary of the slabs being split - they don’t have to be on the slab edges
- you can also use grid points or other ‘points of interest’.
3.
Suggested split points along the edge are highlighted (the selected point being indicated by a red dot).
4.
Click at the point indicated, or move the cursor further along the edge to identify other points at which it could be split.
5.
Hover the cursor over another slab edge (either of the same, or another panel).
• Either click at the point required and continue to click on subsequent points to continue splitting,
• or, double click to complete the split.
6.
Any slab panels entirely crossed by the cut line are split along it.
How do I join slabs?
1.
Click Model > Slab Join, or Foundations > Mat Join as appropriate.
221
User Guides (UK)
2.
Pick the first of the slab panels you wish to join, (the ‘Master’ panel).
3.
Pick the next slab panel.
The two panels are joined to create a new panel which adopts the properties of the
‘Master’ panel.
The panels to be joined must share a common edge.
4.
Pick additional panels as required to add to the ‘Master’ panel, or press Esc when complete.
Slab steps
A step is modelled in Tekla Structural Designer as a panel to which a slab depth override and/or vertical offset is applied.
Steps can therefore be located anywhere in a slab that a panel can be created, the Slab
Split and Slab Join commands are likely to prove useful in their creation.
The additional data needed to allow any panel to be stepped up or down is:
• Override slab depth (checked)
• Depth
• Vertical offset
(+ve raises the panel surface and -ve drops it).
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant as they have no effect on the analysis mesh position relative to the top of the slab in the solver model. The mesh properties would however reflect any change to the slab thickness.
How do I modify the shape or size of a panel?
How do I modify the shape or size of a panel?
You can modify a panel in both 2D and 3D Views; either by moving its nodes, or its edges.
How do I modify a panel by moving a node?
A panel can be modified by moving the nodes at its corners, or at the mid-points of the panel edges as follows:
1.
Select the panel you want to modify.
222
User Guides
2.
Click a node to select it.
3.
Move the mouse over an existing construction point or intersection, then click to reposition the node.
The new node position must be in the same plane as the panel.
When panel nodes are moved, note that:
• When a node at the mid-point of an edge is moved, this becomes a new corner node
(causing two new mid-point nodes to be automatically created).
• When a corner node is moved directly over an adjacent corner node, the original corner node is deleted.
How do I modify a panel by moving an edge?
A panel can be modified by moving any of its edges as follows:
1.
Select the panel you want to modify.
223
User Guides (UK)
2.
Click an edge (away from the nodes) to select it.
3.
Move the mouse over an existing construction point or intersection, then click to reposition the edge so that it passes through the point selected.
The new edge position must be in the same plane as the panel.
How do I apply curved edges to existing slab items?
1.
Select the slab items you want to modify.
2.
To apply the same degree of curvature to all the slab edges:
• Locate the All edges property
• Uncheck ‘Linear’
• Enter the Curvature required as a chord offset, specify a positive value to curve inwards, a negative value to curve outwards.
3.
To apply curvature to a specific edge:
• Locate the Edge property (1,2,3 etc.) for the required edge
• Uncheck ‘Linear’
• Enter the Curvature required as a chord offset, specify a positive value to curve inwards, a negative value to curve outwards.
4.
The slab panel is redrawn with the specified curvature.
How do I delete an entire slab from my model?
1.
Open the
Slabs branch of the Structure Tree .
2.
Right-click over the Name of the slab you want to delete.
224
3.
Click Delete slab from the context menu which appears.
4.
Tekla Structural Designer deletes the entire slab from your model.
Timber Member modeling
Timber sections can be modelled and analysed in Tekla Structural
Designer but they are not designed.
User Guides
Modeling Timber Columns
How do I create a single timber column in a 2D View?
1.
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
2.
Click Model > Timber Column ( )
3.
The column will adopt properties from the currently displayed create timber column properties set .
4.
Check that the Base Level and the Top Level shown in the property set are correct, or adjust if necessary.
5.
Check that the other properties shown in the property set are also correct, and again adjust if necessary.
6.
Click the point where the column is to be placed.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
How do I create a series of timber columns in a 2D View?
1.
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
2.
Click Model > Timber Column ( )
3.
The column will adopt properties from the currently displayed create timber column properties set .
4.
Check that the Base Level and the Top Level shown in the property set are correct, or adjust if necessary.
5.
Check that the other properties shown in the property set are also correct, and again adjust if necessary.
225
User Guides (UK)
6.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the grid intersection points at which you want to create columns.
7.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
8.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating).
9.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the grid intersection points at which you want to create columns, release the mouse button.
How do I create a single timber column in a Frame, or Structure View?
In order to define a column in a frame-, or structure-view you must have already defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
To create the column:
1.
Click Model > Timber Column ( )
2.
The column will adopt properties from the currently displayed create timber column properties set .
3.
Check that the properties shown in the property set are also correct or adjust if necessary.
4.
Click the point where the column is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
5.
Click the point where the column is to end. Tekla Structural Designer creates the column between these two points.
How do I align a column to a specific angle, or an angled gridline?
Three options are provided for specifying the alignment of a new column - achieved by setting the Rotation property as follows:
• 0, 90, 180, 90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
How do I create an inclined column?
An inclined column can only be created in a Frame, or Structure View.
In order to define the column you must have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
226
User Guides
Certain limitations apply to the design of inclined columns.
- An inclined column is any column not truly vertical
- The web of an inclined column must be 'vertical' i.e. it must lie in the vertical plane.
- 'Nominal moments' due to eccentric beam reactions are not taken into account in the design of inclined columns - no explicit guidance is available on this topic. In columns with any significant inclination, 'true' moments are likely to govern design and these are catered for in Fastrak. If you are attempting to design columns that are close to vertical and for which you consider nominal moments to be significant, then you need to make due allowance for them. This can be achieved automatically in the program by modelling them as (truly) vertical or manually by providing your own calculations for the additional effects of the nominal moments following the design of the inclined column.
1.
Click Model > Timber Column ( )
2.
Check that the create timber column properties set shown in the Properties Window
are correct - adjust if necessary.
3.
Click the point where the column is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
4.
Click the point where the column is to end. Tekla Structural Designer creates the column between these two points.
How do I create a cranked column?
A cranked column can only be created in a Frame, or Structure View.
In order to define the column you must have defined the construction levels between which the column will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
1.
Click Model > Timber Column ( )
2.
Check that the create timber column properties set shown in the Properties Window
are correct - adjust if necessary.
3.
Click the point where the column is to start.
4.
Press and hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard and click the next node of your cranked column.
5.
Repeat step 3 until you have defined the penultimate node of your cranked column.
Release the Ctrl key and click the point where the column is to end.
How do I modify the position of a single column stack?
227
User Guides (UK)
A column stack’s position can best be modified in either a Frame, or Structure View.
1.
In Scene Content , ensure that the Grid & Construction Lines box is checked.
2.
Select the column for which a stack is to be moved.
The column is highlighted in one colour, the column end nodes and middle node in another.
3.
Select one end nodes for the column stack to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
4.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the column stack end node position.
The entire column is redrawn with the selected node moved to the new position.
5.
Select the next end node. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity
tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
6.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the end node position.
The column is redrawn once more with the selected node moved to the new position.
How do I modify the position of an entire column?
Simply use the Move command located on the Edit ribbon.
Modeling Timber Beams
Modeling Timber Beams
How do I create a single span timber beam?
1.
Click Model > Timber Beam ( )
2.
3.
Click where the beam is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
228
User Guides
4.
Click where the beam is to end (Point 2).
If you are prompted to pick another point (Point 3), this will be due to the
‘Continuous’ box being checked in the beam property set. In order to create a single span beam simply click once again on Point 2, or press the Enter key.
How do I create a series of single span timber beams?
In order to create beams using this method the floor or construction level must already contain the columns between which the beams will run. You must also use a 2D view of the floor or construction level to use this option.
1.
Click Model > Timber Beam ( )
2.
3.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the columns between which you want to create beams.
4.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
5.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating).
6.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the columns between which you want beams creating, release the mouse button.
7.
Beams are created between each adjacent pair of columns within the area you select.
How do I create a continuous timber beam?
1.
Click Model > Timber Beam ( )
2.
The beam will adopt its properties from the currently displayed create timber beam properties set ;
ensure that the Continuous option is checked and adjust any other details as necessary.
3.
Click where the beam is to start.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
229
User Guides (UK)
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
4.
Click the next node of your continuous beam.
If you are using a point along a beam or member, then click the beam or member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the beam.
5.
Repeat step 4 until you have defined the penultimate node of your continuous
beam.
6.
Click where the beam is to end.
7.
You are now prompted to pick another point, simply click once again on the same point, or press the Enter key in order to create the continuous beam.
You can not define continuous beams which are curved either horizontally or vertically.
How do I create a curved timber beam?
1.
Click Model > Timber Beam ( )
2.
Linearity is set to Curved Major (if it is to curve vertically), or Curved Minor (if it is to curve horizontally), and an appropriate Chord
height value is specified to define the curve.
You can control the direction in which horizontally curved beams curve.
When you place the beam you select its start point and its end point. The beam always curves such that if you were to look along the theoretical line from the start point to the end point, then the curve on the beam will always lie to the right of that line.
For vertically curved beams, a negative chord height value can be used to reverse the curve direction.
230
User Guides
3.
Adjust any other details in the property set as necessary.
4.
Click where the beam is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
5.
Click where the beam is to end (Point 2).
When defining beams which curve vertically, if you are using a 2D view of the floor or construction level, then the vertical projection of the beam is out of the plane of the floor or construction level that you are using. In this case you will not see the beam on the graphical display. You will need to change to a
3D view of the floor, construction level or the entire Structure in order to see them.
Horizontally curved beams always take the chord height defined in the property set, they do not curve automatically to fit on any curved grid line that you may have defined.
How do I modify the position of a beam?
You can modify an individual beam’s position in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Select the beam to be moved.
The beam is highlighted in one colour, the beam end nodes and middle node in another.
2.
Now select the beam end node that is to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
3.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the beam end node position.
The beam is redrawn spanning to the new end position.
Modeling Timber Braces
231
User Guides (UK)
Modeling Timber Braces
Tekla Structural Designer allows you to define braces to provide lateral stability to your structure. Alternatively you can specify rigid frames to achieve the same effect. You can also use both methods within a single structure should this be necessary.
How do I create a single timber brace?
1.
Click Model > Timber Brace ( )
2.
3.
Click where the brace is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
4.
Click where the brace is to end (Point 2).
A and V Braces should be modelled using special tools which can be found on the '’Timber Brace' drop list in the 'Timber' section on the 'Model' tab.
Although it is also possible to model the exact same brace arrangement using individual elements created using the simple 'Timber Brace' command, it is important to note that whilst the EHFs (Equivalent Horizontal Forces) calculated for models built using the A or V Brace tools are correct, this is not the case when the A or V braces are built up out of individual brace members. In this latter case, elements of the vertical loads that are supported by the bracing system are 'lost' and are not included in the EHF calculations with the result that the calculated EHFs are not correct.
How do I create an X, K, V or A brace?
1.
Click Model, then from the
K, V, or A).
drop list select the pattern required (X,
2.
3.
Click to identify the bottom corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 1).
232
User Guides
4.
Click to identify the opposite bottom corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 2).
5.
Click to identify the top corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 3). You will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the orientation is correct.
6.
Click to identify the opposite top corner of the bay to be braced, (Point 4).
7.
The brace pattern is created within the area you have selected.
How do I modify the position of a brace?
You can modify an individual brace’s position in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Select the brace to be moved.
The brace is highlighted in one colour, the brace end nodes in another.
2.
Now select the end node that is to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the
Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to one of the members connecting to the node.)
3.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the brace end node position.
The brace is redrawn spanning to the new end position.
Modeling Timber Trusses
Modeling Timber Trusses
Trusses are particular arrangements of members which Tekla Structural
Designer calculates automatically for you. Once you have created a truss you can copy this throughout your model as necessary, and you can pick a truss and move it to the location you require.
How do I use the Timber Truss Wizard?
1.
Click Model > Timber Truss ( )
2.
Choose the truss shape from the list of standard truss patterns.
3.
Click the truss Start Point.
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
233
User Guides (UK)
4.
Click the truss End Point, then click Next
5.
Specify the truss alignment parameters, then click Next
6.
Specify the truss details, then click Finish
How do I use the Timber Space Truss Wizard?
1.
Click Model > drop list.
2.
Select Space from the drop list.
3.
Choose either a linear or planar truss type and then specify the alignment and number of bays, then click Next
4.
In the 2D or 3D View, click the truss location points:
• for a linear truss - click the start and end points
• for a planar truss - click the four corners,
5.
Specify the height, then click Next
6.
Define either a straight or curved truss geometry then click Finish
7.
Specify the truss alignment parameters, then click Next
8.
Specify the truss details, then click Finish
How do I define a Free Form Timber Truss?
A free form timber truss can be created by placing a series of truss members in the shape required.
1.
Open a 2D Frame view in which the truss is to be created. (Note that free form trusses can not be created in a 3D view, or 2D level view).
2.
Click Model > drop list.
3.
Select Free Form from the drop list.
4.
Click where the first truss member is to start.
5.
Click where the first truss member is to end.
6.
Continue in the same way to pace each truss member until the truss geometry is complete.
7.
Press <Esc> to finish.
How do I edit the geometry of an existing timber truss?
234
User Guides
1.
Hover the cursor over the truss to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select ... from the dropdown menu.
The Truss Wizard is displayed.
3.
Edit the properties as required and then click OK
How do I edit the section sizes, material grades and section orientations in an existing timber truss?
1.
Hover the cursor over the truss to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Left click the truss to display the edit timber truss properties . Review the property
set, adjust as necessary and then click OK
Panel modeling
Topics listed here relate specifically to modelling each of the different panel types found on the Model tab.
Modeling Roof Panels
Roofs are the medium via which loads placed on a sloping plane are decomposed back to the supporting structure. Area loads on roofs can act either vertically or normal to the roof plane.
How do I create a roof panel?
In order to define a roof panel you must have already defined the grid points with which to define its outline, and you must identify these in order.
To create the roof panel:
1.
Click Model > Roof Panel ( )
2.
Click the grid point where the panel is to start.
3.
Click the grid point which identifies the next vertex of the panel.
4.
Continue to click the grid points which define the perimeter of your panel until you reach the final point. You now have two options:
• either double click this final point,
• or single click the final point, and then click the first point of the panel again.
5.
Tekla Structural Designer will create a roof panel between the points that you identified.
235
User Guides (UK)
You can not define a roof panel which does not lie in a single plane. If the
points you define do not so lie, then Tekla Structural Designer will fail the panel during validation.
How do I edit the properties of a roof panel?
You can edit roof panel properties in both 2D and 3D Views.
1.
Hover the cursor over the panel to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Left click to select it.
The selected Roof panel properties
are displayed in the Properties Window.
If required, at this point you can add further roof panels to the current selection by holding the Ctrl key whilst clicking on each subsequent panel.
3.
Edit these properties as required. Any changes are automatically applied to all the selected panels.
Modeling Wall Panels
Modeling Wall Panels
Wall panels (also referred to as Wind Walls) are the medium via which loads calculated by the Simple Wind Loading generator and Wind Wizard are applied to your structure.
Wall panels do not introduce any structural strength or stiffness of any kind to your structure. If you wish to introduce walls that resist gravity or lateral loads then you must model these by defining them as concrete walls.
How do I create a wall panel?
In order to define a wall panel you must have already defined the grid points which define the panel vertices, and you must identify these in order.
To create the wall panel:
1.
Click Model > Wall Panel ( )
2.
Click the grid point where the panel is to start.
3.
Click the grid point which identifies the next vertex of the panel.
4.
Continue to click the grid points which define the perimeter of your panel until you reach the final point. You now have two options:
• either double click this final point,
• or single click the final point, and then click the first point of the panel again.
236
User Guides
The minimum number of grid points to define a wall panel is 3.
5.
Tekla Structural Designer will create a wall panel between the points that you identified.
You can not define a wall panel which does not lie in a single plane. If the points you define do not so lie, then Tekla Structural Designer will fail the panel during validation.
How do I edit the properties of a wall panel?
You can edit wall panel properties in both 2D and 3D Views.
1.
Hover the cursor over the panel to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Left click to select it.
The selected Wall panel properties are displayed in the Properties Window.
If required, at this point you can add further wall panels to the current selection by holding the Ctrl key whilst clicking on each subsequent panel.
3.
Edit these properties as required. Any changes are automatically applied to all the selected panels.
How do I create a wall panel with a parapet?
A wall panel with a parapet should be modelled in two parts:
• An ordinary wall panel is created up to the roof level.
• A second wall panel is created above the roof level which is then marked as a parapet.
Modelling in this way ensures the wind analysis correctly accounts for the parapet.
To create the two parts of the wall panel:
1.
Open a Frame view in which the wall can be created.
2.
Create the wall panel below the roof level as an ordinary wall panel.
3.
Create the wall panel above the roof level as an ordinary wall panel. (A construction level may be required to define the top level of the parapet.)
To mark the upper wall panel as a parapet:
1.
To ensure no existing wall panels are currently selected, press the Esc key.
237
User Guides (UK)
2.
Hover the cursor over the panel to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
3.
Left click to select it.
The selected Wall panel properties are displayed in the Properties Window.
4.
In the Properties Window check the box to indicate the panel is a parapet wall.
How do I reverse a wall panel?
Wall panels are generally created so as to have their outer faces automatically pointing outwards. For certain complex building geometries, it may occasionally be necessary to alter the inner and outer face of the panel. Should this be necessary it is achieved using the Reverse option.
1.
Click Model > Reverse ( ) (in the Edit group).
2.
Click the wall panel to be reversed.
The selected panel changes colour to indicate it has been reversed.
Support, Analysis Element and Bearing Wall modeling
Modeling Supports
Supports allow you to constrain points in your structure vertically and rotationally. You can use supports to model connections to existing structures, so that you don’t need to incorporate these in your current model. The fixity provided at an existing support can
be changed by modifying the Support properties .
How do I create a single support?
Supports can only be placed at existing grid points.
To create the support:
1.
Click Model > Support ( )
2.
The support will adopt properties from the currently displayed Support properties .
Review the property set and adjust as necessary.
3.
Click the grid point where you want to create the support.
How do I create an inclined support?
A local coordinate system can be applied to your supports, allowing them to act in any direction.
1.
Click Model > Support ( )
238
User Guides
2.
Before placing the support, ensure that the 3 Grid Points option is checked in the
3.
Click the grid point where you want to create the support, then to define the support direction click a second point (to define the x direction) and click a third point (to define the y direction).
How do I create a spring support?
Linear and non linear supports are both created in a similar fashion.
1.
Click Model > Support ( )
2.
Before placing the support, edit its properties as follows:
• Ensure that in the direction the spring is required to act, the degree of freedom is set to Free
•
Enter the stiffness properties as described in the Support properties .
3.
Click the grid point where you want to create the support.
How do I edit the properties of supports?
You can edit support properties in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Hover the cursor over the support to be edited so that it becomes highlighted.
2.
Left click to select it.
The selected support’s Support properties are displayed in the Properties Window.
If required, at this point you can add further supports to the current selection by holding the Ctrl key whilst clicking on each subsequent support.
3.
Edit these properties as required. Any changes are automatically applied to all the selected supports.
Modeling Analysis Elements
Modeling Analysis Elements
How do I create an analysis element?
1.
Click Model > Element ( )
2.
The member will adopt properties from the currently displayed Element properties .
Review the property set and adjust as necessary.
239
User Guides (UK)
3.
Click where the member is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
If you are using a point along a member, then click the member first to see its points, then either click the point you want to use, or type the distance to the point from the start of the member.
4.
Click where the member is to end (Point 2).
How do I modify the position of an analysis element?
You can modify an individual analysis element’s position in both 2D and 3D views.
1.
Select the element to be moved.
The element is highlighted in one colour, the end nodes and middle node in another.
2.
Now select the element end node that is to be moved. (Ensure the node is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip when selecting, as opposed to any other member/element connecting to the node.)
3.
Click a grid or construction point to redefine the element end node position.
The analysis element is redrawn spanning to the new end position.
Modeling Bearing Walls
Modeling Bearing Walls
Bearing Walls are used to provide resistance to vertical compressive loads (but not lateral loads) and to support certain other member types. Unreinforced masonry walls, for example, could be modelled as bearing walls.
Bearing Walls do not perform the same function as Wall Panels, i.e. they do not act as a medium via which loads calculated by the Wind Wizard get applied to your structure.
Therefore, in order for these wind loads to be applied you should create additional ‘Wall
Panels’ in the same physical locations as the Bearing Walls.
How do I create a bearing wall in a 2D View?
1.
Ensure that you have defined the construction levels between which the wall will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
240
User Guides
2.
Click Model > Bearing Wall ( )
3.
The wall will adopt properties from the Bearing Wall properties set displayed in the
Properties Window.
4.
Check that the Base Level and the Top Level shown in the property set are correct, or adjust if necessary.
5.
Check that the Thickness and other properties shown in the property set are also correct, and again adjust if necessary.
6.
Click where the wall is to start (Point 1).
( What are the points I can click to create a member?
7.
Click where the wall is to end (Point 2).
Tekla Structural Designer creates the wall between the points clicked on.
How do I create a bearing wall in a Frame, or Structure View?
In order to define a wall in a frame-, or structure-view you must have already defined the construction levels between which the wall will run and the grid points between which it will lie.
To create the wall:
1.
Click Model > Bearing Wall ( )
2.
The wall will adopt its properties from the Bearing Wall properties displayed in the
Properties Window.
3.
Check that the Thickness and other properties shown in the property set are also correct, and again adjust if necessary.
4.
Click the first corner of the wall.
5.
Either click:
• the opposite corner of the wall to create it in a single click, or
• the adjacent, and then the opposite corner of the wall to create it in using two clicks
Tekla Structural Designer creates the wall between the points clicked on.
Sub Models
Structures can if required be sub-divided by horizontal planes between levels in order to create sub-models. Each sub-model can then be used to control the slab mesh parameters at the levels within it.
241
User Guides (UK)
Until further sub-models have been introduced a structure will initially be treated as a single sub model, so that the same mesh parameters are applied globally to all meshed slabs.
Additional sub-models are created automatically (for every level specified as a ‘Floor’ in the Construction Levels dialog) when either a grillage or FE chase-down analysis is
performed. They can also be defined manually from the Sub Models dialog .
The slab mesh parameters specified for a sub-model are then used in any analysis that requires the slabs to be meshed (i.e. load decomposition, building analysis with meshed floors, or FE chase-down analysis).
In both grillage and FE chase-down the analyses are performed one sub-model at a time. The topmost sub-model is analysed first, its support reactions are then applied as loads for the analysis of the sub-model below. This sequence continues until all submodels down to the foundation level have been analysed.
For both of these analysis types you can if required edit the default support conditions applied to the sub-models.
Sub Model Characteristics
Definitions
The following definitions are applied:
• Sub-model - part of the 3D model between two horizontal sub model divide planes.
Each sub model contains all members entirely between the two horizontal planes.
For those columns, wall and braces severed by a divide plane, the stacks and brace length above the top plane are included in the sub-model as are the stacks and brace length below the lower plane.
• Sub-model divide planes - are horizontal planes that can be positioned (added, deleted or moved) in the 3D structure. These sub-model divide planes are notional and ‘infinite’. They are only permitted to cut through the structure where they only
‘sever’
• Column stacks
• Walls stacks
• Steel Braces
Divide planes cannot sit between any two levels which lie within the depth of a horizontal beam or the thickness of a horizontal two way spanning slab. If they ‘sever’ any other member type they cannot be placed at that location.
• Sub model supports - the ‘artificial’ supports as defined by the system for the column and wall stack ends and braces that pass through the divide planes
• Structure supports - the supports in the 3D structure as defined by the user
• Column and Wall stacks - the span length of a column or wall
242
User Guides
• The volume of the sub-model - the 3D space that exists between any two adjacent sub-model divide planes
Basic rules of sub-models
There are a number of basic rules to assist understanding of sub-models.
All sub-models when considered together form the complete structure - only some column stacks, some wall stacks and some braces (those split by sub-model divide planes) are in more than one sub-model. So:
• Every member in the 3D model is in at least one sub-model.
• A sub-model cannot contain a member already in a sub-model unless that member is a column, wall or brace divided by a sub-model divide plane.
• A sub-model must contain at least one beam member, one truss member or one slab panel.
Sub Models dialog
This dialog is accessed from the Structure Tree . It is used to split the structure into a
continuous series of sub-models, working from the top of the building down to and including the foundations.
Fields
Level
Initially (before any analysis has been performed) only be two levels are displayed, one at a set distance (2m) above the top construction level and a second at the same distance below the base level. These can not be changed. At this point there is a single sub-model comprising the whole structure.
Active
Only active levels act to divide the structure into sub-models. The top and bottom levels must always remain active, as there must always be at least one sub model.
Once intermediate levels have been inserted, you can choose to inactivate them if required, in which case the sub-model immediately above and the sub-model immediately below the level in question are merged into a single sub-model.
243
User Guides (UK)
Auto Generate
If you have made any adjustments to the cutting planes, or cutting plane levels, or made any of them inactive you must also uncheck the Auto-Generate box - otherwise the changes you have made will be lost the next time the sub models are generated.
Buttons
Click this button to insert a new level between the selected level and the one above. It defaults to being exactly half way between them but can be edited manually, provided it remains between the two.
Click this button to insert a new level between the selected level and the one below. It defaults to being exactly half way between them but can be edited manually, provided it remains between the two.
Deletes the selected level.
This button can optionally be used to auto-generate default sub models for every level specified as a ‘Floor’ in the Construction Levels dialog. You may choose to do this if you want to review the sub models prior to the first run of the analysis. It is optional as default sub models will be generated for you automatically when you run the analysis (provided the Auto Generate box on the dialog is checked). The Generate button can also be used to revert back to the default sub models at any time.
If you have made any adjustments to the cutting planes, cutting plane levels, or made any of them inactive you should avoid clicking the Generate button
(even if the Auto Generate box is unchecked) - as you will lose the edits that you have made.
Working with Sub Models
Working with Sub Models
How do I open the Sub Models dialog?
To open from the Structure Tree :
• Double-click
To open from the ribbon:
• Click Model > Sub Models ( )
How do I create Sub Models?
244
User Guides
1.
In the Sub Models dialog click
Generate to automatically create the sub model levels, alternatively click Insert Above and/or Insert Below to manually create them.
2.
For each new level if necessary modify the height above the base in the Level field.
How do I delete Sub Models?
1.
In the Sub Models dialog select the sub model level to be removed then click
Delete
2.
Click OK to close the dialog.
How do I open a 3D view of an existing Sub Model?
1.
In the Project Workspace, expand the Sub Models branch of the Structure Tree, then:
2.
Double click a sub model
(or right click it to open a view of a particular type).
Sub Structures
If required, you can choose to place collections of elements into named sub-structures.
This can prove useful in large models as individual sub-structures can then be differentiated by colour and worked on in separate sub-structure views.
The purpose of sub structures is primarily to simplify modelling visualisation
- the sub structures themselves are never analysed. They are distinct from, and not to be confused with Sub Models.
Sub Structure Characteristics
The basic features of sub structures are:
• Elements can exist in more than one sub structure.
• Not every element has to be in a sub-structure.
• Deleting a sub-structure does not delete the elements within it.
Working with Sub Structures
Working with Sub Structures
How do I create a new sub structure?
245
User Guides (UK)
1.
On the status bar, click Review View
2.
Click Review > Sub Structures
3.
In the Review/Update dialog box in the Properties Window select Update Selected
4.
In the Update Sub Structure dialog box select --New--.
5.
In the Name dialog box enter a name for the sub structure.
6.
Choose a color for the substructure.
7.
In the Review View click or box around the members to be included in the sub structure.
8.
Change the Selection Mode to only Remove, or Add or Remove) if you need to remove members from the sub structure.
How do I add or remove existing elements in an existing sub structure?
1.
On the status bar, click Review View
2.
Click Review > Sub Structures
3.
In the Review/Update dialog box in the Properties Window select Update Selected
4.
In the Update Sub Structure dialog box select the sub structure to edit.
5.
In the Selection Mode dialog box choose the edit operation required.
6.
In the Review View click or box around the members to be edited.
How do I review all existing sub structures?
1.
On the status bar, click Review View
2.
Click Review > Sub Structures
3.
In the Review/Update dialog box in the Properties Window select Review All
Each sub structure is shown in a different color in the display.
How do I open a 3D view of an existing sub structure?
1.
In the Project Workspace, expand the Sub Structures branch of the Structure Tree, then:
246
User Guides
2.
Double click a sub structure
(or right click it to open a view of a particular type).
Measure commands
How do I Measure distances?
To measure the distance between any two points in the model:
1.
Click Model > Measure ( )
2.
Pick a node to define the start position.
3.
Pick a second node to measure to.
The distance between the nodes is displayed on the current view - to clear the measurement press [Esc].
How do I Measure Angles?
You can only measure angles in 2D Views:
1.
Click Model > Measure Angle ( )
2.
Pick a node to define the arc centre.
3.
Pick a second node to define the start position.
4.
Pick a third node to define the end position.
The clockwise angle between the start and end position is displayed on the current view
- to clear the measurement press [Esc].
What are the points I can click to create a member?
Beams, columns, braces, analysis elements etc. are collectively referred to as ‘members’.
In order to define any of these you must define the points between which they will lie.
The points that you click can be any combination of:
Point Note
247
User Guides (UK) grid or construction points,
To pick a grid or construction point that lies part way along, or at the end of an existing member; simply move the cursor along the member to the point required.
The dialog displays:
• CP when it finds a grid or construction point at the end of a member.
• Inters when it finds a grid or construction point part way along a member
To specifically use one or other of these points, press the down cursor key until the correct point is
highlighted (as shown above) in the dialog. standard points on elements which you have already defined,
Position the cursor over an existing element and the standard points will automatically appear along it.
These are at 0.250, 0.333, 0.500, 0.667, 0.750 of the span of the element.
248
User Guides special points on elements which you have already defined,
Special points are created automatically and allow you to create a member which is:
• perpendicular to the first element that you picked,
• perpendicular to the second element that you picked,
• perpendicular to the X axis (that is whose ends lie at the same X distance from the origin of your model),
• perpendicular to the Y axis (that is whose ends lie at the same Y distance from the origin of your model).
Having picked the first point at the end of an existing element, to use one of these special points position the cursor over the second existing element and a dotted line indicates the perpendicular standard point location. a point at a specific distance
(whose value you enter directly) along a member.
To pick a point at a specific distance, simply move the cursor along the element to the point required and click to specify it.
You can zoom in to achieve finer accuracy when moving along the element.
Alternatively, by pressing <F2> you can type the exact distance directly and then press <Enter> to use it.
This option creates a grid intersection point over the top of the element. If you want to use the point again, then you can pick it as any other grid intersection point.
Please note that this option does not create a new
249
User Guides (UK) point along the element.
Model Validation
The purpose of validation is to trap errors that will cause the Solver to fail before the model is submitted for analysis.
The checks can be run manually at any time, and are also performed automatically during design.
The actual checks that are performed can be set within Model Settings - Validation
How do I run model validation?
1.
On either the Model, or Load tab, click Validate ( )
The validation checks are performed and if any issues exist these are displayed as warning messages.
How do I control which conditions are considered during model validation?
1.
Click Home > Model Settings ( )
2.
On the Validation page check the validation conditions to be considered.
Edit commands
The Edit toolbar provides commands to copy, move, mirror and rotate the model (or a
part of it).
250
User Guides
It also has commands for splitting, joining, deleting and reversing the direction of members.
Edit toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Copy
Copy Loads
Move
Mirror
Copies existing selected objects to new locations in the model.
See: Copying, moving and mirroring objects
Copies existing selected loads to new locations or between loadcases.
Moves existing selected objects to new locations in the model.
See: Copying, moving and mirroring objects
Make a reflected copy of existing selected objects about a given plane.
See: Copying, moving and mirroring objects
This command is used to delete items. Delete
Join
Split
Reverse
Joins members to make a longer continuous member.
See: How do I Join Members (Make
Splits existing continuous members.
Reverses the front and back faces of a wind wall panel. The front of each wall should be facing outwards in order to correctly determine the wind direction relative to the wall.
Also reverses the local X-axis of a beam.
This can be useful for standardising output.
See: Reversing member axes and panel faces
251
User Guides (UK)
Beam Lines
Move DXF
Shadow
Create Infills
Cutting
Planes
Move Model
Joins existing concrete beams to make a continuous concrete beam.
See: How do I Automatically Join All Concrete
Cutting Planes are useful tools for temporarily hiding parts of the model that obscure the area that you require to work on.
By dragging a cutting plane so that it slices through your model everything that is on the positive side of the plane is hidden, leaving only items on the negative side still visible.
Moves the entire model to a new origin.
See: How do I move the model to a new location?
Moves the dxf shadow to a new origin.
See: How do I move the dxf shadow?
Creates a pattern of infill members in the selected bay.
Related topics
•
Commands on the ribbon toolbars
Copying, moving and mirroring objects
Copying, moving and mirroring objects
The Copy, Move and Mirror editing commands only becomes active after you have selected the objects that you want to edit.
How do I copy elements to a new location?
To copy existing elements to new locations in the model:
1.
Select the members to be copied.
2.
Click Edit > Copy
252
User Guides
Alternatively you can select ‘Copy’ from the right click context menu.
3.
Pick the Reference node.
4.
Pick the new position to move the members to.
5.
The selected members are copied to the new location.
How do I copy and rotate elements to a new location?
To copy and rotate existing elements to new locations in the model:
1.
Select the members to be copied.
2.
Click Edit > Copy
Alternatively you can select ‘Copy’ from the right click context menu.
3.
In the Properties Window enter the rotation required about the Z axis.
4.
Pick the Reference node.
5.
Pick the new position to move the members to.
6.
The selected members are copied to the new location.
How do I move elements to a new location?
To move elements to new locations in the model:
1.
Select the members to move.
2.
Click Edit > Move ( )
3.
Pick the Reference node.
4.
Pick the new position to move the members to.
5.
The selected members are moved to the new location.
How do I move and rotate elements to a new location?
To move and rotate elements to new locations in the model:
1.
Select the members to move.
253
User Guides (UK)
2.
Click Edit > Move ( )
3.
In the Properties Window enter the rotation required about the Z axis.
4.
Pick the Reference node.
5.
Pick the new position to move the members to.
6.
The selected members are moved and rotated to the new location.
How do I mirror elements to a new location?
To copy existing elements by mirroring them about a specified plane:
1.
Select the members to be mirrored.
2.
Click Edit > Mirror ( )
3.
In the Properties Window select the mirror mode:
• XZPlane - mirrors about a global XZ plane defined by a single reference node
• YZPlane - mirrors about a global YZ plane defined by a single reference node
• Z2Points - mirrors about a Z plane defined by two reference nodes
4.
Pick the reference nodes.
5.
The selected members are mirrored about the selected plane.
Copy Loads
Copy Loads
The Copy Loads command can be used to copy member, panel and structure loads to different locations. It can also be used to copy loads between loadcases.
How do I copy all member loads from one span to another?
1.
Click Edit > Copy Loads
2.
In the Properties Window, select the ‘Copy Span Loading’ mode.
3.
In the Properties Window, choose to either copy loads in ‘Current loadcase’ or ‘All loadcases’.
• If ‘Current loadcase’ - you must also select the required loadcase from the
A ‘Select loaded element span’ prompt is displayed.
4.
Click on the span containing the member loads to be copied.
254
User Guides
An ‘Apply loading onto span(s)’ prompt is displayed.
5.
Click on a span that you want to apply the loads to.
The member loads are copied to the chosen span.
The source span and the destination span do not need to be the same length
6.
Click on additional spans as required to continue applying the loads.
7.
Press <Esc> in order to select a different loaded element span to copy from, or press
<Esc> twice to exit the command.
How do I copy just one member load if several are applied to the same span?
1.
Click Edit > Copy Loads
2.
In the Properties Window, select the ‘Copy Member/Area Load’ mode.
A ‘Select load to be copied’ prompt is displayed.
3.
Click on the member load to be copied.
An ‘Apply load copy’ prompt is displayed.
4.
Click on a span that you want to apply the load to.
The member load is copied to the chosen span.
The source span and the destination span do not need to be the same length
5.
Click on additional spans as required to continue applying the load.
6.
Press <Esc> in order to select a different load to copy, or press <Esc> twice to exit the command.
How do I copy panel area, level and slab loads?
1.
Click Edit > Copy Loads
2.
Select the required load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
In the Properties Window, select the ‘Copy Member/Area Load’ mode.
A ‘Select load to be copied’ prompt is displayed.
255
User Guides (UK)
4.
Click on the Area, Slab or Level load to be copied.
An ‘Apply load copy’ prompt is displayed.
5.
Click on a panel where the load is to be applied.
The copied load is applied.
6.
Click on additional panels as required to continue applying the load.
7.
Press <Esc> in order to select a different load to copy, or press <Esc> twice to exit the command.
How do I copy panel point, line and patch loads?
1.
Click Edit > Copy Loads
2.
Select the required load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
In the Properties Window, select the ‘Copy Plane Loads’ mode.
A ‘Select load to be copied’ prompt is displayed.
4.
Click on the panel point, line or patch load to be copied.
At this point you can add to the selection if required by clicking on additional loads; you can also remove a load from the selection by clicking on it once more.
A red circle displays the original reference point for the selected loads.
5.
To apply the loads either:
• Click on a panel node to define a new reference point at that node - the loads are applied at the same offset from the new reference point.
• Click anywhere within a panel boundary at a different level to define a new reference point directly above/below the original reference point - the loads are applied at the same offset from the new reference point.
If you choose a new reference point that results in the loads being applied outside the panel area, they will not be applied to the model. In this situation a warning will be issued during validation
6.
Click as required to define further reference points to continue applying the loads.
7.
Press <Esc> in order to select different loads to copy, or press <Esc> twice to exit the command.
How do I copy structure loads?
1.
Click Edit > Copy Loads
256
User Guides
2.
In the Properties Window, select the ‘Copy Member/Area Load’ mode.
A ‘Select load to be copied’ prompt is displayed.
3.
Click on the structure load to be copied.
An ‘Apply load copy’ prompt is displayed.
4.
Click where you want to apply the load to.
The structure load is copied to the new location.
5.
Click on additional locations as required to continue applying the load.
6.
Press <Esc> in order to select a different load to copy, or press <Esc> twice to exit the command.
How do I copy loads to another loadcase?
1.
Click Edit > Copy Loads
2.
Select the loadcase to be copied from using the Loading drop list .
3.
In the Properties Window, select the ‘Copy Loads to another Loadcase’ mode.
4.
In the Properties Window, select the loadcase to ‘Copy loads to’.
A ‘Select load to be copied’ prompt is displayed.
5.
Click on the load to be copied.
At this point you can add to the selection if required by clicking on additional loads; you can also remove a load from the selection by clicking on it once more.
6.
To copy the loads to the loadcase displayed in the Properties Window press <Enter>
7.
Press <Esc> in order to select a different load to copy, or press <Esc> twice to exit the command.
Joining and splitting members
Joining and splitting members
The Join and Split commands are used for joining discontinuous members, and splitting continuous members of any material.
How do I Join Members (Make Continuous)?
Provided that the angle between two similar members is less than 45 degrees in both plan and elevation, you are able to join them to make a longer continuous member.
257
User Guides (UK)
The ‘Join’ command can be used to manually join concrete beams, even when the ‘Allow automatic join’ beam property is unchecked. This is because this property only applies to the automatic joining that occurs during design process or when the ‘Beam Lines’ command is run.
1.
Click Edit > Join ( )
2.
Hover the cursor over the member that is to be joined to another member.
3.
Both the original member and the member to which it will be joined become highlighted and the point at which they will be joined is indicated by a red dot. If the wrong end is being joined, move the cursor towards the other end of the member until the correct end is indicated.
The joined beams must have an end point in common. (If beams fail to join, they have probably been defined using different grid or construction lines at the end point in question).
4.
Click the highlighted members to join them.
5.
Pick additional members to join as required, or press <Esc> when complete.
How do I Split Members?
Members that have previously been joined can be split if required.
1.
Click Edit > Split ( )
2.
Hover the cursor over previously joined members that you want to split.
3.
The member is highlighted and the point where it will be split is indicated by a red dot.
Only those members that are valid for splitting are highlighted when you hover the cursor over them.
4.
Click the member to split it at the point indicated, or move the cursor further along the member to identify other points at which it could be split.
If the member being split is a concrete beam, it is split into two separate beams; the first one having the ‘Allow automatic join end 2’ beam property unchecked, the second one having the ‘Allow automatic join end 1’ beam property unchecked. This
258
User Guides prevents the two beams from being automatically made continuous once again when the model is designed.
Concrete Beam Lines
Concrete Beam Lines
Concrete beam lines are formed automatically as part of the combined analysis and design process. However, if you would prefer to have greater control, you can choose to run the Beam Lines command manually. In this way you can verify that continuous beam lines are formed as you intend before proceeding with the design.
When run manually, the Beam Lines command is applied to all concrete beam members in the model, irrespective of whether they are selected or not.
Discontinuous concrete beam ends can only be joined if the Allow automatic
join beam property is checked for the appropriate beam ends at the join.
The ends will then only be joined if all the following criteria are met:
• the angle in plan at which the two beams meet is less than the Limiting join angle
in plan specified in Model Settings > Beam Lines,
• the angle in elevation at which the two beams meet is less than the Limiting join
angle in elevation specified in Model Settings > Beam Lines,
• the amount by which the cross sectional areas of the two beams overlap is greater than the Minimum section overlap percentage specified in Model Settings >
Beam Lines.
In addition, if either of the two beam ends being joined is pinned, they will not be joined unless the Join pinned beam end box is checked in Model Settings > Beam Lines.
How do I Automatically Join All Concrete Beams (Make Continuous)?
1.
Click Edit > Beam Lines ( )
Reversing member axes and panel faces
Reversing member axes and panel faces
How do I reverse the local x axis of a beam?
You can easily end up with beams running forwards and backwards if a consistent approach has not adopted during model creation when clicking on start and end nodes.
This can result in confusing force diagrams in printed output.
The Reverse command can be used to manually standardise by flipping axes one beam at a time. In this way it is possible to force all beams to run left to right and bottom to top of a plan view.
To reverse a beam:
259
User Guides (UK)
1.
Click Edit > Reverse ( )
2.
Click a beam to reverse its direction.
How do I reverse the outward face of a wind panel?
The front of each wall should be facing outwards in order to correctly determine the wind direction relative to the wall. To check this is the case, ensure that all the outward faces are displayed in the colour assigned to ‘Wind Wall - Front’. If a wall is facing in the wrong direction you should reverse it.
1.
Click Edit > Reverse ( )
2.
Click a wind wall panel to reverse its direction.
Cutting Planes
Cutting Planes
Six cutting planes initially form a cube around the extents of each model. By activating a cutting plane it can be moved inwards so that it slices through the model, everything to the positive side of the plane is temporarily hidden from view, making it easier to work on areas inside the model.
How do I activate or deactivate a cutting plane?
To activate a cutting plane:
1.
Click Edit > Cutting Planes ( )
Six (initially deactivated) cutting planes are shown.
2.
Click on a plane to activate it.
The active cutting plane faces are shown in a different colour. (By default blue indicates the positive side of the plane and red the reverse side).
To deactivate a cutting plane:
1.
Click on an active plane to deactivate it.
Any part of the model that was previously hidden from view by the plane is redisplayed.
How do I move a cutting plane in order to hide part of the model?
When a cutting plane is active, a large arrow projects from it’s centre. The arrow is used to reposition the plane.
260
User Guides
To move an active cutting plane:
1.
Click on the arrow at the centre of the plane.
The arrow is replaced by a line indicating the direction in which the plane can move.
2.
Drag the plane to a new position, (or press <F2> to enter an exact distance).
The cutting plane is redrawn at the new position; if it slices through the model, everything to the positive side of the plane is hidden from view.
How do I reshow the hidden part of the model?
Once a cutting plane has been positioned, there is no need to move it in order to reshow the hidden part of the model - all you need to do is deactivate the plane (by clicking on it once more).
Moving the model, or the DXF shadow
Moving the model, or the DXF shadow
The Move Model command is used to relocate the entire model to a new co-ordinate in the XY plane.
Similarly, the Move DXF Shadow command is used to relocate a dxf shadow, (this command only becomes available once a shadow has been imported).
How do I move the model to a new location?
In order to move the model you first have to decide which reference point to use. The reference points are determined by drawing an imaginary box aligned to X and Y around the extents of the model as shown below:
261
User Guides (UK)
• Bounds Corner - equates to the lower left hand corner of the imaginary box.
• Bounds Centroid - equates to the centroid of the imaginary box.
1.
Click Edit > Move Model ( )
2.
Choose the reference point as either Bounds Corner or Bounds Centroid.
3.
Enter the required target co-ordinate of the reference point.
4.
Click Move
How do I move the dxf shadow?
1.
Click Edit > Move DXF Shadow
2.
Choose an existing point on the DXF Shadow as the reference point.
3.
Click on any other point to specify the new position of the reference point.
Creating infill members
262
User Guides
Creating infill members
The Create Infills command can be used to rapidly place a pattern of infill members into selected bays in a Level, Sloped Plane, or Frame.
Only those bays with members attached to all sides can be selected.
How do I create infills?
To define the infill member properties and pattern:
1.
Click Edit > Create Infills ( )
A ‘Select bay’ prompt appears and the bays in which infills can be placed (i.e those that have members attached to all sides) are identified by shading.
2.
Adjust the properties in the Properties Window -
Click Define Beams and choose:
• By Number - to specify the number of (equally spaced) members in the pattern
• By max spacing- to specify the spacing of members in the pattern
Click Direction and choose:
• Perpendicular - to have the members drawn perpendicular to the highlighted edge member
• Parallel with left - to have the members drawn parallel to the edge member that connects to end 1 of the highlighted edge member
• Parallel with right - to have the members drawn parallel to the edge member that connects to end 2 of the highlighted edge member
3.
Define the Element Parameters as required.
If you have saved properties to a named Property Set, these can be recalled simply by selecting the set from the droplist at the top of the Properties
Window.
See: How do I save properties to a named Property Set from the Properties
To place the pattern in a single bay:
1.
Hover the cursor over the required bay, adjacent to the required edge member.
A preview of the infill pattern (as it applies for the highlighted edge member) is displayed.
2.
To change the orientation, either move the cursor to a different edge member, or adjust the general parameters in the Properties Window.
263
User Guides (UK)
3.
When both the preview and the Element Parameters are as required, click within the bay to create the pattern.
To place the pattern in multiple bays:
1.
At the ‘Select bay’ prompt drag a box to select the required bays.
A ‘Select reference bay’ prompt appears.
2.
Hover the cursor over one of the selected bays, adjacent to the required edge member.
A preview of the infill pattern (as it applies for the highlighted edge member) is displayed.
3.
To change the orientation, either move the cursor to a different edge member, or adjust the general parameters in the Properties Window.
4.
When both the preview and the Element Parameters are as required, click within the bay to create the pattern in the selected bays.
264
User Guides
Loading Guide
Individual loads are applied to the model from the Load toolbar . The same toolbar is
used for creating loadcases and combinations and also for accessing the Wind and
Seismic Wizards.
Load toolbar
The groups listed below are displayed on the toolbar when a 2D or 3D View is active.
If any other view is active the ‘Panel Loads’, ‘Member Loads’, ‘Structure Loads’ and ‘Validate’ groups are hidden.
Structure group
The Structure group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Loadcases
Combination
Envelope
This command opens the Loading dialog at the Loadcases page. The same dialog is used to create either loadcases, combinations or envelopes.
This command opens the Loading dialog at the Combinations page. The same dialog is used to create either loadcases, combinations or envelopes.
See: Working with Combinations
This command opens the Loading dialog at the Envelopes page. The same dialog is used to create either loadcases, combinations or envelopes.
265
User Guides (UK)
Update Load
Patterns
If load patterns have been applied and the building geometry or loading is subsequently modified, to ensure the load patterns reflect theses changes you are required to update the pattern loads by clicking this button.
See: Working with Load Patterns
Wind Load group
The Wind Load group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Wind Wizard...
Update Zones
Wind Loadcases
The Wind Wizard dialog is used for defining the information that is required in order to calculate the wind loading on the structure.
See: How do I run the Wind Wizard?
The Wind Wizard requires at least one wall panel or roof panel to have been defined before it becomes available.
If it is necessary to change the roof type of your structure, or if you alter your structure dimensionally, then changes to the existing wind zoning do not occur automatically. This is intentional, since you may wish to make subsequent alterations before you recalculate the zoning. Once you have completed your changes the Update Zones button is used to incorporate the changes and recalculate the zoning details.
See: What happens if I make changes to my model?
The Wind Loadcases dialog is used for defining the details of each wind loadcase.
See:
•
How do I Define Wind Loadcases?
•
How do I add new Wind loadcases?
•
How do I delete Wind loadcases?
266
Delete Wind
Model
Decomposition
Deletes the wind model data previously defined using the Wind Wizard.
See: Working with the Wind Wizard
This command is used to decompose loads from 1-way and 2-way slabs onto supporting members.
See: Working with the Wind Wizard
Seismic Load group
The Seismic Load group contains the following command:
Button Description
Seismic Wizard... This wizard can be run to define the parameters required for determining the seismic loading and load cases on the structure.
See: Working with Seismic Loads
Horizontal Spectrum The Horizontal Spectrum is generated by the
Seismic Wizard.
This button displays the resulting spectrum for either direction 1 or direction 2, (the choice of direction being made in the Properties
Window).
Delete Seismic Deletes all the seismic data entered in the
Seismic Wizard along with Horizontal
Spectrum, the Seismic Loadcases and Seismic
Load Combinations.
Decomposition group
The Decomposition group contains the following command:
Button Description
User Guides
267
User Guides (UK)
Decomposition This command is used to decompose loads from 1-way and 2-way slabs onto supporting members.
See: How do I manually decompose slab loads for an individual construction level?
Panel Loads group
The Panel Loads group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Point Load
Line Load
Patch Load
Polygon Load
This command is used to apply a point load to any panel.
See: How do I create a point load?
This command is used to a apply line load to any panel.
See: How do I create a line load?
Point Loads and Line loads can only be applied in 2D views (not 3D).
This command is used to apply a patch load to any panel.
See: How do I create a patch load?
Patch loads can only be applied in 2D views (not 3D).
This command is used to apply a polygonal load to any panel.
See: How do I create a polygonal load?
Polygonal loads can only be applied in 2D views (not 3D).
Perimeter Load This command is used to apply a load around the external perimeter of all slabs at a given level.
See: How do I create a perimeter load?
268
Variable Patch
Load
Area Load
Variable Area
Load
This command is used to apply variable patch load to any panel.
See: How do I create a variable patch load?
Variable patch loads can only be applied in
2D views (not 3D).
This command is used to apply an area load to any panel. Area loads entirely cover an individual panel.
See: How do I create an area load?
This command is used to apply a variable area load to any panel. Area loads entirely cover an individual panel.
See: How do I create a variable area load?
Level Load
Slab Load
This command is used to apply a level load to all slabs at the current level.
See: How do I create a level load?
This command is used to apply a slab load to all slab panels that constitute an individual slab.
See: How do I create a slab load?
Member Loads group
The Member Loads group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Full UDL
UDL
This command is used to apply a full UDL to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a full UDL?
This command is used to apply a UDL to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a partial length UDL or
User Guides
269
User Guides (UK)
VDL
Point Load
Moment Load
This command is used to apply a VDL to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a partial length UDL or
Trapezoidal Load This command is used to apply a trapezoidal load to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a trapezoidal load?
This command is used to apply a point load to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a point or moment load?
This command is used to apply a moment load to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a point or moment load?
Torsion Full UDL
Torsion UDL
Torsion VDL
This command is used to apply a torsion full
UDL to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a torsion full UDL?
This command is used to apply a torsion UDL to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a partial length torsion
This command is used to apply a torsion VDL to a member (beam, column, brace etc.)
See: How do I create a partial length torsion
Structure Loads group
The Member Loads group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Nodal Load This command is used to apply a nodal load to a solver node.
See: How do I create a nodal load?
270
User Guides
Temperature
Load
Settlement Load
This command is used to apply a temperature load (a global rise in temperature) to individual elements/panels, selected elements/panels, or to all elements/panels.
See: How do I create a temperature load?
This command is used to apply a settlement load (a translation or a rotation) to a support.
See: How do I create a settlement load?
Validate
Button
Validate
Description
This command is used to perform the model validity checks.
Working with Load Cases
Applied loads are defined within load cases, with each load case being assigned to one of the following load types:
• Self weight -excluding slabs
• Slab wet
• Slab dry
• Dead
• Imposed
• Roof Imposed
• Wind
• Snow
• Snow Drift
• Temperature
• Settlement
• Seismic
Loading Dialog Loadcases Page
This Loading dialog page is used to define loadcases.
271
User Guides (UK)
Loadcases Pane
Within this pane you can:
• Click the Loadcases main branch to view a summary table of all the loadcases on the right hand side (as above).
• Click one of the loadcase name sub branches to edit the settings for the loadcase selected.
Loadcase Summary Table
Loadcase Title
Click to edit individual loadcase names.
Type
Select the type from the drop list.
Calc Automatically
Check this box and loads in this loadcase are calculated automatically.
Include in Generator
Check this box for the loadcase to be included in generated combinations.
Imposed Load Reductions
Check this box for imposed load reductions to be applied in this loadcase.
Pattern Load
Check this box for pattern loading to be applied for this loadcase.
Buttons
Displays the Loadcases Pane and Loadcase Summary Table (as above).
Displays the Loading Dialog Combinations Page .
Displays the Loading Dialog Envelopes Page .
Closes the dialog and saves changes.
272
User Guides
Closes the dialog without saving changes.
Adds a new loadcase. See: How do I create load cases?
Copies the selected loadcase.
Deletes the selected loadcase.
How do I create load cases?
When you create a new model a Self-weight - excluding slabs load case is automatically created. You cannot access this load case as the loads it contains are automatically calculated from the objects in your structure.
Three further load cases are defined, although these are initially empty - you must define the loading in each of these manually. You will almost certainly need to create other load cases to contain the loads that your building must withstand.
1.
Click Load > Loadcases ( )
This will display the Loading Dialog Loadcases Page listing the current load cases
which have been defined.
2.
Click Add to create a new load case.
3.
Enter the Loadcase Title and choose it's Type.
4.
Choose whether it should be included when load combinations are automatically generated.
5.
Click OK to create the load case.
6.
Your new load case will now appear in the list of load cases available in the Loading drop list .
How do I indicate that reductions apply to live (imposed) load cases?
When you create a load case of type Imposed, an option is provided to allow for imposed load reductions to be calculated in accordance with the reduction percentages specified in ‘Model Settings’.
This option is not provided if the type is set to ‘Roof Imposed’.
To activate reductions in an existing imposed load case:
1.
Click Load > Loadcases ( )
273
User Guides (UK)
This will display the Loading Dialog Loadcases Page listing the current load cases
which have been defined.
2.
Select the imposed load case to which the reductions are to be applied.
Provided that the ‘Type’ is Imposed a ‘Reductions’ check box is displayed on the dialog.
3.
Check the ‘Reductions’ check box.
4.
Click OK to close the dialog.
How do I renumber all loadcases?
When loadcases are deleted from the Loading dialog the remaining loadcases retain their original loadcase number.
To renumber the remaining loadcases in sequence (with no gaps):
1.
Right click on the Loadcases branch in the Loading tab of Project Workspace.
2.
From the right click menu, choose Renumber.
How do I add loads into a load case?
Loads can be defined from either a 2D, or a 3D view (depending on the load type).
Loads can not be defined in a solver view, or a solver model data view.
Working with Combinations
Combinations allow you to assemble sets of load cases, applying the appropriate factors for the strength and service condition. These factors are specific to the design code that is being worked to.
Combinations fall into five types with a number of options being available for each of these types:
Combination
Type
Description Active/Inactive Strength Service
Construction
Stage
Only required for design of composite beams
Not applicable Not applicable
Not applicable
274
User Guides
Gravity
Lateral
Seismic
Vibration Mass
Consists of gravity loads only (Self
Weight, Dead, Slab
Dry, Slab Wet,
Imposed, Roof
Imposed and Snow)
On/Off
In addition to gravity load contains lateral loads due to
Notional Loads or
Wind
Consists of gravity and/or lateral loads as well as seismic load cases
Only required if a vibration analysis is performed
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On
Not applicable
On/Off
On/Off
Not applicable
Not applicable
• Active/Inactive - switches the combination on/off for analysis/design and vibration
• Strength - If the Strength column is not ticked and the combination is active, it is not assessed for design
• Service - If the Service column is not ticked and the combination is active, the combination is not assessed for deflection.
Loading Dialog Combinations Page
This Loading dialog page is used to define load combinations.
275
User Guides (UK)
Combinations Pane
Within this pane you can:
• Click the Combinations main branch to view a summary table of all the combinations on the right hand side (as above).
• Click one of the combination name sub branches to edit the settings for the combination selected.
Combination Summary Table
Design Combination Title
276
User Guides
Click to edit individual combination names.
Camber
If camber has been applied to any steel beams as a proportion of the deflection, this box is used to specify the combination on which the camber calculations should be based.
Class
Select the class from the drop list.
Active
Switches the combination on/off for analysis/design.
Strength
If the Strength box is not ticked and the combination is active, it is not assessed for design.
Service
If the Service box is not ticked and the combination is active, the combination is not assessed for deflection.
Buttons
Displays the Loading Dialog Loadcases Page .
Displays the Combinations Page (as above).
Displays the Loading Dialog Envelopes Page .
Closes the dialog and saves changes.
Closes the dialog without saving changes.
Adds a new combination. See: How do I create load combinations
Copies the selected combination.
Deletes the selected combination.
Runs the load combination generator. See: How do I generate load combinations automatically?
How do I generate load combinations automatically?
The easiest way to create load combinations is to generate them automatically.
277
User Guides (UK)
If a Construction Stage combination is required it should be created manually.
1.
Click Load > Combination ( )
This will display the Loading Dialog Combinations Page listing any current
combinations which have been defined.
2.
Click Generate to initiate the combination generator.
3.
Specify the Initial Parameters as required then click Next
4.
Depending on the number of combination types that were requested on the initial parameters page, one or more pages of combinations are generated. Review each of these by clicking the Next/Previous buttons and amend if required.
5.
Click Finish to save the load combination.
6.
Your new load combination will now appear in the list of combinations available in
7.
To review the factors and options that have been applied, select the combination name from the list on the left side of the dialog.
How do I create load combinations manually?
Load combinations can be created manually if required, with a default factor being used for each load case as it is added to the combination.
1.
Click Load > Combination ( )
This will display the Loading Dialog Combinations Page listing any current
combinations which have been defined.
2.
Click Add to create a new combination.
3.
Enter the Combination Title and choose its Class.
4.
Choose whether it should be Active.
5.
Choose if it is a Strength combination.
6.
Choose if it is a Service combination.
7.
Click the combination name in the left hand panel of the dialog to display the available loadcases.
278
User Guides
8.
Select each load case in turn to be included and click the right arrow button to copy it into the combination.
9.
Click OK to save the load combination.
10.
Your new load combination will now appear in the list of combinations available in
11.
To review the factors and options that have been applied, re-display the
Loading dialog then select the combination name from the list on the left side of the dialog.
How do I create a Vibration Mass combination?
1.
Click Load > Combination ( )
This will display the Loading Dialog Combinations Page listing any current
combinations which have been defined.
2.
Click Add to create a new combination.
3.
Enter the Combination Title and choose Vibration Mass from the Class drop list.
4.
Choose whether it should be Active.
5.
Click the combination name in the left hand panel of the dialog to display the available loadcases.
6.
Select each load case in turn to be included and click the right arrow button to copy it into the combination.
7.
Click the Applied Directions tab to set the directions to be considered.
8.
Click the Second order effects tab to define the amplifier to be applied.
9.
Click OK to save the load combination.
10.
Your new load combination will now appear in the list of combinations available in
11.
To review the factors and options that have been applied, re-display the
Loading dialog then select the combination name from the list on the left side of the dialog.
How do I renumber all combinations?
When combinations are deleted from the Loading dialog the remaining combinations retain their original number.
To renumber the remaining combinations in sequence (with no gaps):
279
User Guides (UK)
1.
Right click on the Combinations branch in the Loading tab of Project Workspace.
2.
From the right click menu, choose Renumber.
Working with Envelopes
Envelopes allow you view analysis results for multiple combinations at the same time, with the maximum positive and negative values being displayed along each member from any combination included in the envelope.
If you have defined patterned load combinations, you only need to include the ‘base case’ pattern combination in the envelope - all pattern combinations derived from the ‘base case’ are automatically included.
‘Gravity’, ‘Lateral’ and ‘Seismic’ combination classes can all be included in the same envelope. ‘Seismic RSA’ combinations should not be included in envelopes as the result cannot currently be displayed.
Loading Dialog Envelopes Page
This Loading dialog page can be used to define envelopes.
Envelopes Pane
Within this pane you can:
• Click the Envelopes main branch to view a summary table of all the envelopes on the right hand side (as above).
• Click one of the envelope name sub branches to edit the settings for the envelope selected.
Envelope Summary Table
Design Envelope Title
Click to edit individual envelope names.
Buttons
280
User Guides
Displays the Loading Dialog Loadcases Page .
Displays the Loading Dialog Combinations Page .
Displays the Envelopes Page (as above).
Closes the dialog and saves changes.
Closes the dialog without saving changes.
Adds a new envelope. See: How do I create envelopes?
Copies the selected envelope.
Deletes the selected envelope.
How do I create envelopes?
Envelopes are created manually if required as follows:
1.
Click Load > Envelope ( )
This will display the Loading Dialog Envelopes Page listing any current envelopes
which have been defined.
2.
Click Add to create a new envelope.
3.
Enter the Envelope Title.
4.
Click the envelope name in the left hand panel of the dialog to display the available combinations.
5.
Select each combination in turn to be included and click the right arrow button to copy it into the envelope.
6.
Click OK to save the envelope.
7.
Your new envelope will now appear in the list of envelopes available in the Loading drop list .
If you have defined patterned load combinations, you only need to include the ‘base case’ pattern combination in the envelope - all pattern combinations derived from the ‘base case’ are automatically included.
‘Gravity’, ‘Lateral’ and ‘Seismic’ combination classes can all be included in the same envelope. ‘Seismic RSA’ combinations should not be included in envelopes as the result cannot currently be displayed.
281
User Guides (UK)
Working with Load Patterns
The factors for the loaded and unloaded spans when pattern loading is applied to imposed loads are specific to the design code being worked to.
Overview of Load Patterns
Basic Steps of the Load Patterning Process
The imposed loads patterning process in Tekla Structural Designer is applied as follows:
1.
Firstly, you must set the individual imposed load cases to be patterned as required - these are the ‘fully loaded’ pattern load cases.
(See: How do I set an imposed load case to be patterned?
2.
Next, set the gravity combinations containing imposed load cases to be patterned as required - these are the ‘base case’ pattern combinations.
(See: How do I set a combination to be patterned?
3.
With patterns set as above, then after load decomposition the building analysis will automatically set up the pattern cases for concrete beams in Dir1 and Dir2 directions - 10 pattern cases (beams imposed loads ‘on’/’off’ by span) for each pattern gravity combination - 5 for beams ‘along’ Dir1 and 5 for beams ‘along’ Dir2.
4.
By default, only beam loads, and slab loads that have been decomposed on to beams, are patterned. Loads applied to meshed slabs should be manually patterned using engineering judgement; this is achieved by toggling the loading status via
‘Update Load Patterns’.
(See: How do I update load patterns?
Clarification of the Slab and Beam Load Pattern Application Rules
Slab load patterning only applies where 2-way slabs have been meshed in the solver model, i.e.
• in FE Chasedown Analysis
• in 3D Building Analysis where 2-way slabs are set as meshed
This means that the slab load pattern setting has no affect on:
• 1-way spanning slabs
• 2-way slabs not meshed in 3D Building Analysis (because the slab loads are being decomposed to beams and walls prior to creation of the solver model)
• 2-way slabs in Grillage Analysis (again, because the slab loads are being decomposed to beams and walls prior to creation of the solver model)
Consequently in 3D Building and Grillage Analysis:
282
User Guides
• When a beam is set to ‘Full Load’ it will receive the full decomposed load from adjacent unmeshed 2-way slabs irrespective of whether the slabs themselves are set to ‘Full Load’ or ‘Min Load’
• When a beam is set to ‘Min Load’ it will receive the min decomposed load from adjacent unmeshed 2-way slabs irrespective of whether the slabs themselves are set to ‘Full Load’ or ‘Min Load’
How do I set an imposed load case to be patterned?
Load patterning is only applied to those imposed load cases in a combination that have individually been set to be patterned.
1.
Click Load > Loadcases ( )
This will display the Loading Dialog Loadcases Page .
2.
Select the imposed loadcase name to be patterned from the list on the left side of the dialog.
The factors and options that have been applied are displayed in the dialog.
3.
Ensure the Pattern Load option is checked.
4.
Click OK
How do I set a combination to be patterned?
Only Gravity combinations can consider pattern loading - lateral and seismic combinations do not consider pattern loading.
1.
Click Load > Combination ( )
This will display the Loading Dialog Combinations Page listing any current
combinations which have been defined.
2.
Select the combination name to be patterned from the list on the left side of the dialog.
3.
The factors and options that have been applied are displayed in the dialog.
4.
Ensure the Pattern option is checked.
5.
Click OK.
283
User Guides (UK)
You can, if you wish, use pattern loading for every gravity combination, however you should be aware that this could create many additional combinations.
Pattern Load Cases
The five load patterns are:
In effect, a pattern combination containing pattern imposed load cases results in 11 combinations - the "base case" combination and 10 pattern combinations derived from it.
If the building geometry or loading is subsequently modified, to ensure the load patterns reflect these changes you are required to update the pattern loads.
There are NOT separate pattern combinations for beams and slabs, there is just one set of 10 pattern combinations associated with each ‘fully loaded’ pattern combination.
How do I update load patterns?
284
User Guides
Beam load patterning is a completely automatic process; the only way you can influence whether a beam is subject to ‘full’ or ‘min’ load is by editing the continuous beam lines.
Conversely, slab load patterning is a completely manual process. Hence if slab load patterning is required, e.g. for slab design purposes, you are required to manually update the load patterns using engineering judgement.
To manually specify slab load patterning:
1.
Click Load > Update Load Patterns
2.
In the Properties Window, select each pattern in turn and review the loading status of the beams and slabs.
3.
Click a slab to toggle its loading status.
Working with the Wind Wizard
A Wind Wizard is used to automate the wind modelling process. This uses databases where appropriate (depending on the wind code) to determine the appropriate wind details for your structure location and then calculates the appropriate wind loading details for it in accordance with the chosen wind code.
The Wind Wizard is not currently available for the AS:1170.2 wind code variant.
Having defined the wind directions in which you are interested, the appropriate wind zones on the roofs and walls of your structure are automatically calculated. You can set the type of each roof to achieve the correct zoning, and can then tailor the zoning to account for particular features in more detail, if you so require.
The wind modelling process can automatically define standard wind loadcases for you based on the usual internal pressure coefficients, or you can define the loadcase information yourself. In both cases the appropriate wind pressures are calculated on each zone. You can then combine these wind loadcases into design combinations in the usual way.
You will find that the determination of the wind speeds, the pressures and the zones is rigorous but the final wind loads adopted are your responsibility.
Running the Wind Wizard
The Wind Wizard is run to define the information required for the wind analysis of the structure. It uses this information to automatically determine the wind zoning and external pressure coefficients for the roofs and walls.
285
User Guides (UK)
How do I run the Wind Wizard?
The Wind Wizard requires at least one wall panel or roof panel to have been defined before it becomes available.
The Wind Wizard guides you through the process of defining the information that is required in order to calculate the wind loading on the structure.
1.
Click Load > Wind Wizard... ( )
A Wind Wizard appropriate for the selected wind loading code will start, and you can use its pages to define the necessary information.
2.
Run through the various pages of the Wind Wizard by clicking Next>. When you reach the end of the Wind Wizard the Next> button will change to Finish. Click this button to terminate the Wind Wizard.
After running the Wind Wizard the roof and wall zones can be reviewed for each wind direction.
How do I add a new wind direction?
Simply run the Wind Wizard again. You will find that all the existing details are maintained. You can simply add the new direction in the Results page.
You will also need to add new wind loadcases and design combinations to incorporate the wind loading for the new direction into your calculations.
How do I delete a wind direction?
Simply run the Wind Wizard again. You will find that all the existing details are maintained. You can delete the line for the direction you no longer require in the
Results page.
You will also need to update your wind loadcases and design combinations to remove the details for the wind direction you have removed from your calculations.
How do I delete the entire wind model?
Occasionally you may require to delete the entire wind model and start the wind modelling process from scratch.
1.
Click Load > Delete Wind
All the previously defined wind directions and wind loadcases are removed.
Reviewing wind zones and wind zone loads
286
User Guides
Reviewing wind zones and wind zone loads
After the wind model has been established by the wind wizard, you can graphically display the wind zones and loading that apply for a particular wind direction by opening the appropriate Wind View.
Zone Loads toolbar
The Zone Loads toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Wind Direction This control is used to switch between the
Wind Direction displayed in the active Wind
View.
See How do I open a Wind View?
Wind Zones Graphically displays the Wind Zone information for the current direction.
See How do I view the Wind Zones?
Zone Loads Graphically displays the Zone load information for the current direction.
See How do I view the Wind Zone Loads?
Roof Type Graphically displays the Roof Type.
Std. Table No.
Graphically displays the Standard Table No.
Crosswind
Breadth
Graphically displays the Crosswind Breadth.
Multibay
Name
-ve Cpe
Graphically displays Multibay information.
Graphically displays the wind zone name.
+ve Cpe
Net Pressure
Area
Applied Load
Graphically displays the -ve Cpe values for the zones.
Graphically displays the +ve Cpe values for the zones.
Graphically displays the nett pressure in zones.
Graphically displays the area in zones on nett pressure diagrams.
Graphically displays the applied load in zones on nett pressure diagrams.
287
User Guides (UK)
Cpi
Cpe
Graphically displays the Cpi in zones on nett pressure diagrams.
Graphically displays the Cpe in zones on nett pressure diagrams.
How do I open a Wind View?
Wind Views are only available after the Wind Wizard has been run to establish the wind model.
In order to view the wind zones and loading that apply for a particular wind direction you have to first of all open the appropriate Wind View.
1.
On the Wind tab of the Project Workspace, right-click the Wind Direction in which you are interested.
2.
Click Open view from the context menu.
This simultaneously opens the chosen wind direction view and switches to the Zone
Loads ribbon from where you can review wind zone data graphically.
How do I view the Wind Zones?
1.
Open a Wind Direction view which shows the details for the wind direction in which you are interested.
2.
Click Show > Wind Zones
3.
The Wind Direction view shows the zones that are applied to the structure for this wind direction.
How do I edit a Wind Zone?
1.
Open a Wind Direction view which shows the details for the wind direction in which you are interested.
2.
From the Wind tab of the Project Workspace, expand the Wall Zones or Roof
Zones branch for the wind direction in question.
3.
In the required branch, right click the panel containing the zone to be edited and choose Edit Zones...
288
User Guides
4.
Initially the dialog shows the automatically calculated values for the particular wind zone. You can change these on a zone-by-zone basis by removing the check against
Std.
5.
Make the edits as required in the dialog and click OK.
How do I view the Wind Zone Loads?
Once you have defined your wind loadcases you can view the wind zone loading that is generated.
1.
Open a Wind Direction view which shows the details for the wind direction in which you are interested.
2.
Click Show > Zone Loads
3.
In the Loading drop list pick the particular wind loadcase in which you are interested
from the list of wind loadcases.
4.
The Wind Direction view shows the loads that are applied to the structure for this loadcase in this wind direction.
Related topics
•
How do I Define Wind Loadcases?
How do I change a Wind Zone Load?
To change a wind zone load:
1.
Open a Wind Direction view which shows the details for the wind direction in which you are interested.
2.
Click Zone Loads from the Show group.
3.
In the Loading drop list pick the particular wind loadcase in which you are interested
from the list of wind loadcases.
4.
The Wind Direction view shows the loads that are applied to the structure for this loadcase in this wind direction.
5.
Click the particular zone that you want to change and you will see the Wind Load
Zone Data dialog.
6.
Initially this dialog shows the automatically calculated values for the particular wind zone. You can change these on a zone-by-zone basis should this prove necessary.
289
User Guides (UK)
7.
Remove the check against Use Default Values, and the values used to determine the load and the Beneficial Load box (see below) become active.
8.
Enter the details that you require for these values, Once these settings meet with your approval click OK and the zone will be updated to show the result of your changes.
Beneficial Load
By checking this box you can reduce the net pressure for such loads to zero -see
Clause 7.1.2 (2) Note b.
What happens if I make changes to my model?
If it is necessary to change the roofs or walls of your structure, either because you change the face of a wall, or the type of a roof, or if you alter your structure dimensionally, then changes to the existing wind zoning do not occur automatically.
This is intentional, since you may wish to make subsequent alterations before you recalculate the zoning. Once you have completed your changes it is simple to incorporate them and recalculate the zoning details.
1.
Make the changes that you require to your model. If you can see existing zoning information, then this information will be removed for any walls or roofs you modify.
2.
To reinstate the zoning,
• Click Load > Update Zones ( )
3.
The wind zoning calculations run in the background. once these are complete the new zoning layout for your structure will be shown.
If you have defined your own zone layout for any roof or wall, and you make changes to that roof or wall, then the existing zones will be maintained. It is your responsibility to update these appropriately.
Wind loadcase definition
Wind loadcase definition
It is not practical to automatically determine critical combinations and thus required wind loadcases. Thus you control the generation of wind loadcases manually.
How do I Define Wind Loadcases?
290
User Guides
Once you have defined the basic wind data for your model, and calculated the wind zoning using the Wind Wizard, you can then define the wind loadcases you want to investigate.
1.
Click Load > Wind Loadcases
2.
Use the Wind Loadcases dialog to Add the details of each wind loadcase individually, or alternatively if you want to selectively generate standard wind loadcases for the wind directions you defined in the Wind Wizard, then click Auto
If you want to use the Auto option, then you must do so before you have defined any other wind loadcases. Once a wind loadcase exists Auto is dimmed.
How do I add new Wind loadcases?
Once you have defined wind loadcases it is an easy matter to create additional ones if you require them.
1.
Click Load > Wind Loadcases
2.
In the Wind Loadcases dialog click Add to create a line for your new loadcase in the table of wind loadcases.
3.
Enter the appropriate details directly into this line.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each new loadcase you wish to create.
5.
Once your list of loadcases is complete click OK to close the Wind Loadcases dialog.
6.
Don’t forget to update / augment your design combinations to take account of your new wind loadcases.
How do I delete Wind loadcases?
Once you have defined wind loadcases it is an easy matter to delete ones that you no longer require.
1.
Click Load > Wind Loadcases
2.
In the Wind Loadcases dialog click the line relating to the wind loadcase you want to delete.
3.
Click Delete to permanently delete this wind loadcase.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each loadcase you wish to delete.
5.
Once your list of loadcases is complete click OK to close the Wind Loadcases dialog.
291
User Guides (UK)
6.
Don’t forget to update your design combinations to take account of the wind loadcases you have deleted.
Working with Simple Wind
The Simple Wind loading method is an alternative to using the Wind Wizard. It allows you to input wind loads directly without having to construct a wind model.
In order access Simple Wind, you must first create and then select the loadcase in which the simple wind loads are to be added.
How do I manually create a loadcase for Simple Wind?
1.
Click Load > Loadcases
2.
Use the Loadcases dialog to Add a new loadcase, give it an appropriate name and ensure the Type is set as Wind, then click OK
How do I create a Simple Wind Load?
1.
Ensure you are in a 3D Structure View, not a 2D View.
2.
In the Loading toolbar, select a manually created loadcase of type Wind, (i.e not one that has been automatically created by the Wind Wizard).
The Simple Wind command should now be available.
3.
Click Load > Simple Wind
4.
Click to define the start point of the load width.
5.
Click to define the end point of the load width.
The Simple Wind Loading dialog is displayed - this is used to define a wind load profile within the width specified, up the height building.
The initial default enables you to specify a single area load from the lowest level of the building, up to the highest level that contains a rigid diaphragm.
6.
Enter the area load required.
7.
To create a stepped profile up the height of the building, use the buttons on the right of the dialog to specify the levels at which the load changes, (these do not have to coincide with actual levels in the building), then enter the load required at each level.
8.
Once your load is complete click OK to close the dialog.
292
User Guides
The load does not have to begin at the lowest level in the building. If you have one or more levels below ground, you can simply adjust the value of the lowest level in the dialog.
How do I edit Simple Wind load vertical properties?
The Simple Wind dialog can be redisplayed for an existing simple wind load as follows:
• Double click anywhere within the graphical representation of the simple wind load.
How do I edit Simple Wind load width?
1.
Select the Simple Wind Load to be edited.
The load becomes highlighted, and the two nodes that define the load width are shown.
2.
Select one of the two nodes, then click on a new location for the node.
The load is regenerated between the two nodes.
Working with Seismic Loads
A Seismic Wizard is provided to enable the definition of all the parameters required to determine the seismic loading and load cases so that a seismic analysis can be run on the structure.
The Seismic Wizard is not currently available for the AS:1170.4 code variant.
Running the Seismic Wizard
The Seismic Wizard guides you through the process of defining the information required for the seismic analysis of the structure. It uses this information to the seismic loading (a force and moment, applied to every floor and construction level).
How do I run the Seismic Wizard?
1.
Click Load > Seismic Wizard... ( )
293
User Guides (UK)
A wizard appropriate for the selected loading code will start, and you can use its pages to define the necessary information.
2.
Run through the various pages of the wizard by clicking Next>. When you reach the end the Next> button will change to Finish. Click this button to terminate the
Seismic Wizard.
3.
After running the Seismic Wizard the Combination Generator is displayed to allow you to set up the seismic load combinations.
Related topics
• ASCE7 Seismic Wizard
• Eurocode EN1998-1:2004 Seismic Wizard
How do I display the Horizontal Design Spectrum?
After running the Seismic Wizard the Horizontal Design Spectrum can be viewed.
1.
Click Load > Horizontal Design Spectrum
You can switch between the Dir 1 and Dir 2 spectrum via the Properties Window.
How do I delete Seismic Loads?
Occasionally you may require to delete the seismic loads and start the seismic modelling process from scratch.
1.
Click Load > Delete Seismic
All the previously defined seismic loads are removed.
Load Decomposition
The way in which load decomposition is performed (if at all) depends on the how the slabs are modelled and how they are spanning.
For 1-way spanning slabs:
• slab loads are always decomposed directly on to supporting members before 3D analysis is performed.
For 2-way spanning slabs:
294
User Guides
• load decomposition is not required at those levels where the option ‘mesh 2-way slabs in 3D Analysis’ is applied.
• at other levels, before 3D analysis can be performed, any loads applied to 2-way slabs have to be decomposed back on to the supporting members.
• to achieve this, a separate FE load decomposition is carried out automatically prior to the 3D analysis.
Where load decomposition has occurred, the resulting decomposed loads (rather than the original slab loads) get applied to the 3D analysis model.
For verification purposes you can elect to display the decomposed loads in the 3D views.
Although load decomposition is carried out automatically, (when you click to analyse the structure), the Decomposition command provides an optional way to perform the same task manually - you may elect to do this in order to manually check that loads are being decomposed as you intend prior to running the analysis. In the context of big/complex models this can be a useful time saver, particularly as manual decomposition can be carried out on a level by level basis.
How do I manually decompose slab loads for an individual construction level?
1.
Open a 2D view of the level required and display it in 3D.
Related topics
•
How do I display a 2D view in 3D?
2.
Click Load > Decomposition ( )
Provided the relevant Scene Content settings are activated, (i.e.
Slabs > Mesh and
Loading > Decomposed), you should then see an FE mesh generated within the slab panels and the resulting decomposed loads applied to the beams.
How do I manually decompose slab loads for all the required levels?
1.
Open the Structure 3D view.
2.
Click Load > Decomposition ( )
How do I view the decomposed loads (either with, or without load values)?
1.
Open a 3D view physical view of the model, (or a 2D view displayed in 3D).
2.
Loading group and check the box next to the
Decomposed option.
3.
To view the decomposed load values click in the cell to the right of the
Decomposed option and check both the Geometry and the Text boxes.
295
User Guides (UK)
4.
To view the decomposed load without values click in the cell to the right of the
Decomposed option and uncheck the Text box.
5.
Select the load case from the Loading drop list .
Decomposed loads do not exist at levels where the option ‘mesh 2-way slabs in 3D Analysis’ has been applied.
At levels where this is not the case you can view the decomposed loads, (but you cannot see any shell results from the FE load decomposition).
Working with Panel Loads
Panel loads are used to apply loads to slab panels (a.k.a ‘slab items’), roof panels and wall panels as follows:
• Point, Line, Patch and Polygonal Loads can be applied anywhere within individual or across multiple slab, roof or wall panels. They can only be applied in 2D views (not
3D).
• Area Loads entirely cover a slab, roof or wall panel.
• Slab Loads entirely cover all slab panels in a parent slab.
• Level Loads entirely cover all parent slabs in a level.
A parent slab can consist of slab panels that are physically separated from each other, however they must be on the same level.
How do I create a point load?
1.
Open a 2D view of the level in which you want to apply the load.
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
Click Load > Point Load ( ) (in the Panel Loads group).
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
5.
Click a reference node from which the load position can be offset - this can be the start/end point of any member at the level.
296
User Guides
To select a reference node, ‘Points’ must be switched on in Scene Content.
6.
Click again to specify the load position graphically, or press <F2> to enter the position via the keyboard.
If the slab/panel is moved by manually selecting & re-positioning the slab/panel nodes then the point load does not move with the slab/panel.
However, if any of the grid lines defining the reference node are moved then the load will move also. (LIMITATION OF THE FIRST RELEASE - this feature is not available yet).
How do I create a line load?
1.
Open a 2D view of the level in which you want to apply the load.
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
Click Load > Line Load ( )
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
5.
Click a reference node from which the load position can be offset - this can be the start/end point of any member at the level.
To select a reference node, ‘Points’ must be switched on in Scene Content.
6.
Click to specify the load start position graphically, or press <F2> to enter the position via the keyboard.
Note that this is an offset (X, Y) from the chosen reference node.
7.
Click, or press <F2> to specify the load end position.
Note that when entered via keyboard this is an offset (X, Y) from the load start position.
How do I create a patch load?
297
User Guides (UK)
1.
Open a 2D view of the level in which you want to apply the load.
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
Click Load > Patch Load ( )
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
5.
Click a reference node from which the load position can be offset - this can be the start/end point of any member at the level.
To select a reference node, ‘Points’ must be switched on in Scene Content.
6.
Click to specify a corner position of the load graphically, or press <F2> to enter the corner position via the keyboard.
7.
Click, or press <F2> to specify the size.
(Specified as the offset dimensions from the corner position.)
8.
Click, or press <F2> to define the rotation.
How do I create a polygonal load?
1.
Open a 2D view of the level in which you want to apply the load.
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
Click Load > Polygon Load
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
5.
Click a reference node from which the load position can be offset - this can be the start/end point of any member at the level.
To select a reference node, ‘Points’ must be switched on in Scene Content.
6.
Click to specify the load start position graphically, or press <F2> to enter the position via the keyboard.
Note that this is an offset (X, Y) from the chosen reference node.
298
User Guides
7.
Click to specify a corner position of the load graphically, or press <F2> to enter the corner position via the keyboard.
8.
Continue to specify the remaining corner positions in the same way.
9.
When the polygon is complete press <Enter> (or, click once more on the first corner defined) to create the load.
Once a polygonal load has been created, its shape can subsequently be graphically edited by:
- selecting the load,
- clicking on one of its vertices,
- clicking again to move the vertex to a new position
How do I create a perimeter load?
1.
Open a 2D or 3D view showing the level at which you want to apply the load.
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
Click Load > Perimeter Load
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary, note in particular:
• ‘Create as line loads’ - check this box to create the load as series of separate line loads along each external edge. (Leave unchecked to created as a single load object.)
• ‘Ignore openings’ - check this box to create the load around external perimeters only but not around internal opening perimeters.
5.
Click on any slab or mat item.
The load is created around the external perimeter of every continuous area of slabs at the identified level.
How do I create a variable patch load?
Variable patch loads are not just restricted to quadrilaterals - they can be any polygonal shape.
1.
Open a 2D view of the level in which you want to apply the load.
299
User Guides (UK)
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
Click Load > Variable Patch Load ( )
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary. (At this point you are only required to specify three load values to describe the variable load, their locations are picked graphically at a later stage.)
5.
Click a reference node from which the load position can be offset - this can be the start/end point of any member at the level.
To select a reference node, ‘Points’ must be switched on in Scene Content.
6.
Click to specify the load start position graphically, or press <F2> to enter the position via the keyboard.
Note that this is an offset (X, Y) from the chosen reference node.
7.
Click to specify a corner position of the load graphically, or press <F2> to enter the corner position via the keyboard.
8.
Continue to specify the remaining corner positions in the same way.
9.
When the polygon is complete press <Enter> (or, click once more on the first corner defined).
10.
Click on one of the corners of the polygon to pick the position of Load 1.
11.
Click on another corner to pick the position of Load 2.
12.
Click on another corner to pick the position of Load 3.
Once a variable patch load has been created, its shape can subsequently be graphically edited by:
- selecting the load,
- clicking on one of its vertices,
- clicking again to move the vertex to a new position.
How do I create an area load?
1.
Open a 2D view of the level in which you want to apply the load.
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
300
User Guides
3.
Click Load > Area Load ( )
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
5.
Click the panel to which the load will be applied.
How do I create a variable area load?
1.
Open the 3D view, frame view or sloped plane view in which you want to apply the load.
Variable Area Load can only be applied to non-horizontal slab and roof panels, as well as wall panels and concrete walls - hence they can’t be applied in a 2D view.
2.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
3.
Click Load > Variable Are Load ( )
4.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
5.
Click the panel to which the load will be applied.
How do I create a slab load?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Slab Load ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Click any slab panel within the parent slab in order to apply the load to all panels within the parent slab.
How do I create a level load?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Level Load ( )
301
User Guides (UK)
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Click any slab panel in order to apply the load to all slabs within the level.
How do I edit a load?
1.
Select the load to be edited.
2.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
How do I delete a load?
1.
Ensure the load case containing the load is displayed in the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Delete ( ) on the Quick Access toolbar.
3.
Select the load to be deleted and click to delete it.
Working with Member Loads
Member Loads are used to apply loads to one dimensional members (beams, columns, braces etc.)
How do I create a full UDL?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Full UDL ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Click anywhere along the element to apply the load.
How do I create a partial length UDL or VDL?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > UDL ( ), or VDL ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
302
User Guides
4.
Hover the cursor over the element until it is displayed with a number of special points along it.
5.
Pick the load start position either by clicking on one of the special points, or by clicking at any given distance along the element, or by pressing <F2> to enter the position by the keyboard.
6.
Click again, or press <F2> to specify the load length.
How do I create a trapezoidal load?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Trapezoidal Load ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Hover the cursor over the element until it is displayed with a number of special points along it.
5.
Pick the load position either by clicking on one of the special points, or by clicking at any given distance along the element, or by pressing <F2> to enter the position by the keyboard.
The load position defines the point at which the trapezoidal load (which is symmetrical) reaches its maximum intensity.
How do I create a point or moment load?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Point Load ( ), or Moment load ( ) (on the Member
Loads panel).
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Hover the cursor over the element until it is displayed with a number of special points along it.
5.
Pick the load position either by clicking on one of the special points, or by clicking at any given distance along the element, or by pressing <F2> to enter the position by the keyboard.
303
User Guides (UK)
How do I create a torsion full UDL?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Torsion Full UDL ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Click anywhere along the element to apply the load.
How do I create a partial length torsion UDL or torsion VDL?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Torsion UDL ( ), or Torsion VDL ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Hover the cursor over the element until it is displayed with a number of special points along it.
5.
Pick the load start position either by clicking on one of the special points, or by clicking at any given distance along the element, or by pressing <F2> to enter the position by the keyboard.
6.
Click again, or press <F2> to specify the load length.
Working with Structure Loads
The following Structure Loads can be applied:
• Nodal load - applied at solver node locations.
• Temperature load - a global rise in temperature applied to individual elements/panels, selected elements/panels, or to all elements/panels .
• Settlement load - a translation or a rotation applied to a support (in the support UCS system).
How do I create a nodal load?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
304
User Guides
2.
Click Load > Nodal Load ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Pick the load position by clicking on a node.
How do I create a temperature load?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Temperature Load ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Click anywhere along the element to apply the load.
How do I create a settlement load?
1.
Select an appropriate load case from the Loading drop list .
2.
Click Load > Settlement Load ( )
3.
Review the load details displayed in the Properties Window and adjust as necessary.
4.
Pick the load position by clicking on a supported node.
305
User Guides (UK)
Analysis Guide
Analyze toolbar
The Analyse toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Options Opens the Analysis Options dialog.
1st Order Linear Runs a linear static analysis.
This analysis type is suitable for structures where secondary effects are negligible. Any nonlinear springs or nonlinear elements present are constrained to act linearly.
Loadcases and Combinations to be considered in the analysis can be pre-selected.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: No
• Material: No
See: How do I run a 1st order linear analysis?
1st Order
Non-linear
Runs a nonlinear analysis with loading applied in a single step.
This analysis type is suitable for structures where secondary effects are negligible and nonlinear springs/elements are present.
Loadcases and Combinations to be considered in the analysis can be pre-selected.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: No
• Material: Yes
See: How do I run a 1st order nonlinear analysis?
306
User Guides
1st Order
Vibration
2nd Order
Linear
2nd Order Nonlinear
Runs an unstressed vibration analysis to determine the structure's natural frequencies.
The structure is assumed to be in an unstressed state and nonlinear elements are constrained to act linearly.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: No
• Material: No
See: How do I run a 1st order vibration analysis?
Runs a 2-stage P-Delta analysis.
This analysis type is suitable for structures where secondary effects are of comparable magnitude to primary effects. Any nonlinear springs or nonlinear elements present are constrained to act linearly.
Loadcases and Combinations to be considered in the analysis can be pre-selected.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: Yes
• Material: No
See: How do I run a 2nd order linear analysis?
Runs a nonlinear analysis with loading applied in a single step.
This analysis type is suitable for structures where secondary effects are of comparable magnitude to primary effects and nonlinear springs/elements are present.
Loadcases and Combinations to be considered in the analysis can be pre-selected.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: Yes
• Material: Yes
See: How do I run a 2nd order nonlinear analysis?
307
User Guides (UK)
2nd Order
Buckling
1st Order RSA
Seismic
2nd Order RSA
Seismic
Tabular Data
Mesh Slabs
Runs a linear buckling analysis to determine a structure's susceptibility to buckling.
The stressed state of the structure is determined from linear analysis; therefore nonlinear elements are constrained to act linearly.
Loadcases and Combinations to be considered in the analysis can be pre-selected.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: Yes
• Material: No
See: How do I run a 2nd order buckling analysis?
Runs Modal Response Spectrum Analysis to determine the peak response of the structure to earthquakes. Any nonlinear springs or nonlinear elements present are constrained to act linearly. For RSA Seismic Combinations, the peak responses are enveloped around the static results for 1st Order Linear
Analysis.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: No
• Material: No
See: How do I run a 1st order RSA seismic analysis?
Runs Modal Response Spectrum Analysis to determine the peak response of the structure to earthquakes. Any nonlinear springs or nonlinear elements present are constrained to act linearly. For RSA Seismic Combinations, the peak responses are enveloped around the static results for 2nd Order Linear
Analysis.
Nonlinearity Included:
• Geometric: Yes
• Material: No
See: How do I run a 2nd order RSA seismic analysis?
Displays the analysis model data in spreadsheets for review/editing.
See: Tabular data (Solver Model Data)
Slabs are meshed automatically for FE Load Decomposition, FE
Chasedown, and also if specified in the 3D Building Analysis.
This command is only used if you need to mesh slabs manually.
308
User Guides
See: Working with FE meshed slabs
Update Wall
Beams
Analyse All
(Static)
Update
Result Type
(1st drop list in the Result
Type group)
Wall Beams are created automatically as internal 1D elements within walls in the analysis model. Their analytical properties are determined automatically from the geometry of the wall.
If the model has been changed wall beams are updated automatically when you run the analysis.
This command is only used if you need to update wall beams manually.
See: Working with FE meshed walls
Runs all the analyses required (for all loadcases and combinations) to enable design to proceed:
• 3D Building Analysis - (either first or second order, as specified in Design Options > Analysis)
• Grillage Chasedown
• FE Chasedown
Once analysis is complete, individual members can be checked or designed.
See: Running FE chase-down and Grillage chase-down analysis
Diaphragms are updated to reflect the latest model changes every time the model is analysed or designed. They can also be updated manually after the model has been edited by clicking the Update.
See: Working with rigid and semi-rigid diaphragms
The above command is only available in Solver Views.
It is not displayed in the Solver Model Data View.
This drop list is used to select the Analysis for which tabular results are to be displayed in the Solver Model Data View.
See: Tabular data (Solver Model Data)
This drop list is only displayed when the Solver Model Data
View is made active (by clicking Tabular Data).
309
User Guides (UK)
Mode
(2nd drop list in the Result
Type group)
View Type
(the drop list in the View
Type group)
If the Result Type is set to 1st Order Vibration, or 2nd Order
Buckling, and an appropriate loadcase or combination is selected in the Loading drop list, the Mode drop list becomes active.
It is used to select the vibration mode for which results are to be displayed:
See: Tabular data (Solver Model Data)
This drop list is only displayed when the Solver Model Data
View is made active (by clicking Tabular Data).
This drop list is used to select the type of data to be displayed in the Solver Model Data View for the chosen Result Type.
See: Tabular data (Solver Model Data)
This drop list is only displayed when the Solver Model Data
View is made active (by clicking Tabular Data).
Related topics
•
Commands on the ribbon toolbars
Analysis Options
How to apply and manage Analysis Options
To modify analysis options in the current project
1.
Click Analyse > Options... ( )
2.
Review and edit the settings as required.
3.
If you change any of the settings, click:
• OK - to apply the changes directly to the current project, or
• Save... - to save the changes back to the active settings set (to act as defaults for future projects), or
• Cancel... - to cancel the changes
You can also click:
• Load... - to revert to the analysis options specified in the active settings set.
310
User Guides
To modify analysis option defaults for future projects
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
In the Analysis Options page of the dialog, select the settings set to be updated, then review and edit the settings as required.
You can update any settings set simply by selecting it from the droplist, it does not need to be active.
3.
If you change any of the settings, click:
• OK - to save the changes to the selected settings set (to act as defaults for future projects when that set is active), or
• Cancel - to cancel the changes
1st Order Non-Linear Options
Convergence Criteria
Maximum number of iterations default = 100
Tolerance default = 0.0001
Relative default = on
Relaxation Factors
Relaxation factors control an amount of nominal compression tension-only braces can undergo while remaining active during analysis iteration. This improves convergence for rare problematic models/ loading situations in which otherwise most or all braces may experience compression and become inactive, causing instability and preventing solution. When converged tension-only braces will still have only either zero or tension force. The process is entirely automatic by default and it is anticipated the factors will not require manual editing for most circumstances.
Use relaxation factors for tension only elements default unchecked
311
User Guides (UK)
Minimum relaxation factor default = 0.1
Maximum relaxation factor default = 0.5
If the model still fails to converge when using relaxation factors, expanding the allowable range (by changing the above minimum and maximum values) may produce convergence.
Relaxation factors are not activated by default as it is anticipated they will not be required for the majority of models. In addition, since the solution process is necessarily more complex, their use can increase the analysis time to a degree.
2nd Order Non-Linear Options
The options available are identical to those for 1st order non-linear.
1st Order Vibration Options
Extraction Method
Jacobi
An iterative transformation method used to calculate all Eigen values and Eigen
Vectors. Good for small models but unsuitable for medium to large models
Subspace
An iterative simultaneous vector method to calculate the smallest Eigen values and corresponding Eigen Vectors. Suitable for quickly finding the lowest frequencies in medium to large models.
FEAST uses the FEAST algorithm to effectively calculate all the eigenvalues within a specific range. Suitable for any size structure. See: http://www.ecs.umass.
Ledu/~polizzi/feast/ for more information.
Automatic
Initially uses Subspace to find the lowest modes. If the criteria (either mass, or number of modes) FEAST is then automatically used to find higher modes until the stopping criteria is fulfilled.
Stopping Criteria
Stopping criteria prevent analysis continuing forever. If either of these criteria are met the analysis will not look for any more modes
Modes
Automatic number of modes
312
User Guides
If this option is checked you then specify the mass participation required in each direction. You can optionally specify an initial number of modes, (which should be close to the actual number required in order to speed up the analysis process).
Total number of modes
If ‘Automatic number of modes’ is unchecked you specify the total number of modes required, (default 10).
Jacobi Settings
Max number of sweeps
A sweep is a transformation of every off-diagonal in the global matrices. This sets the maximum number of sweeps allowed.
Sweep tolerance
At the end of each sweep values are checked against the previous sweeps results. If the difference is less than this tolerance the result is converged, and the analysis is complete.
Subspace Settings
Maximum number of iterations
The number of iterations to perform.
Tolerance
At the end of each iteration values are checked against the previous iterations results. If the difference is less than this tolerance the result is converged, and the analysis is complete.
FEAST
Initial search range
Specifies the initial range of values FEAST will search for Eigen values in.
Overestimation multiplier
Within each range specifies the initial guess for the subspace dimension. to be used: an overestimate of the predicted number of modes in the range.
Maximum modes in range
The maximum allowable modes in the range. If more modes are found in a range the range is split into several smaller ranges.
Minimum search range
When a range is smaller than this it will no longer be split, even if the maximum number of modes is greater than that allowed.
2nd Order Buckling Options
313
User Guides (UK)
Maximum number of iterations default = 1000
Tolerance default = 0.00001
Max number of sweeps default = 50
Sweep tolerance default = 1.0E-12
Modes default = 10
Show negative buckling factors default = no
Extraction method
The Jacobi method is more suited for small models and Subspace method more suited for large models. Choose Automatic for the program to determine the most appropriate method for your structure.
1st Order Seismic Options
Extraction Method
Jacobi
An iterative transformation method used to calculate all Eigen values and Eigen
Vectors. Good for small models but unsuitable for medium to large models
Subspace
An iterative simultaneous vector method to calculate the smallest Eigen values and corresponding Eigen Vectors. Suitable for quickly finding the lowest frequencies in medium to large models.
FEAST uses the FEAST algorithm to effectively calculate all the eigenvalues within a specific range. Suitable for any size structure. See: http://www.ecs.umass.
Ledu/~polizzi/feast/ for more information.
Automatic
Initially uses Subspace to find the lowest modes. If the criteria (either mass, or number of modes) FEAST is then automatically used to find higher modes until the stopping criteria is fulfilled.
Stopping Criteria
314
User Guides
Stopping criteria prevent analysis continuing forever. If either of these criteria are met the analysis will not look for any more modes
Modes
Initial number of modes
In order to speed up the analysis process you can specify an initial number of modes you expect to be required to achieve the required participation, (this should be close to the actual number required; if you enter too few, or too many, the analysis may take longer.)
Mass participation for RSA you specify the mass participation required in each direction. (If this isn’t achieved before the stopping criteria apply, the RSA analysis will still be performed but a warning will be issued.
Min. Mass participation for RSA
If the minimum participation isn’t achieved before the stopping criteria apply, the
RSA analysis is not performed.
The parameters in the stopping criteria supersede both the number of modes and mass percentage.
Jacobi Settings
Max number of sweeps
A sweep is a transformation of every off-diagonal in the global matrices. This sets the maximum number of sweeps allowed.
Sweep tolerance
At the end of each sweep values are checked against the previous sweeps results. If the difference is less than this tolerance the result is converged, and the analysis is complete.
Subspace Settings
Maximum number of iterations
The number of iterations to perform.
Tolerance
At the end of each iteration values are checked against the previous iterations results. If the difference is less than this tolerance the result is converged, and the analysis is complete.
FEAST
Initial search range
Specifies the initial range of values FEAST will search for Eigen values in.
Overestimation multiplier
315
User Guides (UK)
Within each range specifies the initial guess for the subspace dimension. to be used: an overestimate of the predicted number of modes in the range.
Maximum modes in range
The maximum allowable modes in the range. If more modes are found in a range the range is split into several smaller ranges.
Minimum search range
When a range is smaller than this it will no longer be split, even if the maximum number of modes is greater than that allowed.
Modal Combination Method
To determine the representative maximum ‘response’ of interest for a loadcase, the relevant values for each Relevant Mode are combined by using the method specified. Note that once modes have been combined the relative signs are lost.
CQC
Suitable for models where modes are closely spaced or well-spaced
SRSS
Suitable only for models where modes are well-spaced
Modification Factors
Different factors can be applied for each of the different materials in the model in order to adjust the following properties:
• E - Youngs Modulus
• G - Shear Modulus
• I torsion
- Section Inertia about local X
• I major
- Section Inertia about local Y
• I minor -
Section Inertia about local Z
• Area - Section Area in compression/tension
• A parallel to minor
- Section Shear Area in local Y
• A parallel to major
- Section Shear Area in local Z
• t - shell thickness (applicable to concrete only)
These factors also vary according to the member types, (and in the case of concrete members whether they are cracked or not).
For concrete members in particular, design codes can require that analysis stiffness adjustment factors are applied since the appropriate properties to use in analysis are load and time dependent.
For various other investigations it is also possible that you will want to apply an adjustment to material properties. One suggested example is the assessment of
316
User Guides structures subject to corrosion. Another classic requirement in this regard relates to torsion, it is common engineering practice to assume that if it will work without assuming any torsional strength, then torsion can be ignored.
Although default modification factors for each material are provided in the settings sets to reflect the design code being worked to, you should check that these are appropriate for your particular analysis model.
If you make changes to any of these factors, analysis must be repeated.
Meshing
These parameters can be adjusted in order to fine tune the meshes that are produced in slabs and walls. The default settings are generally appropriate, but they could potentially be adjusted if 2D element quality errors are being created during validation.
Composite Steel Beams
Inertia used for loading analysis
Allows the engineer to specify the inertia to be used in the global analysis of the model for a composite steel beam:
• Steel beam (default)
• Long term composite
• Short term composite
US Head Code:
When long or short term inertia is selected, this only applies to the following sections:
• Rolled symmetric I sections
For all other sections the standard steel beam inertia is used regardless of the analysis option selected.
EC Head Code:
When long or short term inertia is selected, this only applies to the following sections:
• Symmetric I rolled sections
• I plated sections
• Westok plated sections
• Fabsec sections
For all other sections the standard steel beam inertia is used regardless of the analysis option selected.
317
User Guides (UK)
BS Head Code:
When long or short term inertia is selected, this only applies to the following sections:
• Symmetric I rolled sections
• Asymmetric I rolled sections
• I plated sections
• Westok plated sections
• Fabsec sections
For all other sections the standard steel beam inertia is used regardless of the analysis option selected.
Aus Head Code:
Design of composite beams is not currently supported for the Australian Head Code.
IS Head Code:
Design of composite beams is not currently supported for the Indian Head Code.
Working with FE meshed slabs
At those levels where 2-way spanning slabs exist, FE meshing is applied as follows:
• If a level has the option ‘Mesh 2-way Slabs in Analysis’ unchecked, then the slabs at that level are only meshed in order to allow load decomposition to occur prior to analysis. In the analysis itself the slabs are not meshed. This is the default setting.
• If a level has the option ‘Mesh 2-way Slabs in Analysis’ checked, then load decomposition is not performed for the 2-way slabs at that level and they are meshed in the analysis.
• 2-way spanning slabs are always meshed in the FE Chasedown that occurs as part of the static design process.
In all of the above situations, the meshes are created according to the defined mesh parameters.
How do I specify whether a level uses meshed slabs in analysis or FE load decomposition?
A level based setting is used to control whether 2 way slabs are meshed in the building analysis, or FE load decomposition is carried out instead.
You can choose to use FE meshed slabs at certain levels only and FE decomposition at the remaining levels if you so require.
To use meshed 2 way slabs in building analysis at all levels:
318
User Guides
1.
Highlight
2.
In the Properties Window , check
Mesh 2-way Slabs in 3D Analysis.
To use FE decomposed slab loads at all levels:
1.
Highlight
2.
In the Properties Window , uncheck
Mesh 2-way Slabs in 3D Analysis.
To use meshed 2 way slabs at specific levels and FE decomposed slab loads at others:
1.
Expand
2.
Click each construction level in turn and check/uncheck Mesh 2-way Slabs in 3D
Analysis as required.
How do I control the mesh parameters to be used?
Mesh parameters are held as properties of the structure so that initially the same mesh parameters are applied globally on all floors.
The parameters are specified as follows:
1.
Select the Structure branch in the Structure Tree .
2.
You will see the Structure properties in the Properties Window .
3.
Adjust the Shell Mesh Size and Shell Uniformity Factor as required.
Although the default size and uniformity (1.000m and 50%) are likely to be conservative, the degree of mesh refinement applied remains the users responsibility.
To optimise solution time consider using a coarser mesh during design development before switching to a more refined mesh at the final design stage.
Different mesh parameters can be applied at specific floors, by introducing additional sub models.
How do I apply different mesh parameters at different levels?
319
User Guides (UK)
1.
If you require different mesh parameters at a specific level, you will firstly need to introduce an additional sub model at that level.
(See: How do I create Sub Models?
2.
Once the new sub model has been created, expand the Sub Models branch in the
3.
You will see the properties of the selected sub model in the Properties Window .
4.
Check the Override Model’s box.
5.
Adjust the shell mesh size and uniformity as required.
How do I review the slab mesh prior to running the analysis?
1.
Open a Solver View.
2.
Right click anywhere in the view and choose ‘Solver Models’ from the context menu.
3.
From the sub-menu choose the solver model appropriate to the analysis to be run.
The slab mesh will be displayed if it is applicable to the ‘Solver Model’ selected.
The slab mesh is not displayed in the Working Solver Model as this shows the model in its form prior to any analysis and 2D elements are only formed at the point of analysis.
Slab mesh groups
To facilitate meshing, slab panels and features are gathered together automatically into
‘mesh groups’ and meshed as a single entity. Mesh groups cannot be edited directly.
A mesh group contains one or more panels with identical analysis attributes. Since panel thickness is a key analysis attribute, by definition a slab step (or column drop) will produce an additional mesh group.
Example of mesh groups at a slab step
Consider the following three slab panels with thicknesses as shown:
320
User Guides
Although there are 3 panels, there are only two slab depths, so only two mesh groups are required:
Related topics
•
Discontinuity of force contours at slab steps (and column drops)
Discontinuity of force contours at slab steps (and column drops)
321
User Guides (UK)
As a consequence of slab panels to either side of a step being placed into different mesh groups, the solver nodes along the boundary are shared by both groups. Each node on the boundary reports a single value of deflection, but two values of force, (one for each group) - hence there will be a discontinuity of force contours along the boundary.
Deflection contours (no discontinuity):
Moment contours (discontinuity along boundary):
322
User Guides
This force discontinuity is a genuine result - the slabs share the same curvature at the step and have the same elastic modulus, so the moment must be directly proportional to the inertia of each panel.
Other programs may choose to average the value across the boundary when generating the contours, but the approach adopted by Tekla Structural
Designer is to be preferred since averaging would result in an unrealistically high design of the thinner slab.
Mesh group boundary warnings
Meshing may fail or produce undesirable results when there is challenging mesh group boundary geometry. In this case warnings that point towards the source of meshing issues are provided.
Examples of possible warning triggers are:
• short edges
• distance between a hole and an edge
• small area enclosed by mesh group
323
User Guides (UK)
Working with FE meshed walls
By default, (unless they are edited to use a mid-pier model), concrete walls adopt an FE meshed model when the building is analysed.
Meshed walls default to the model’s mesh parameters, but these can be overridden to allow a user defined mesh to be applied to an individual wall.
How do I specify whether the wall is to be meshed or mid-pier?
The model to be adopted for each wall is specified as part of the wall properties.
1.
In the Properties Window leave the
Use Mid-Pier property unchecked to adopt a meshed wall, or check it for a mid-pier wall.
How do I control the global wall mesh parameters to be used?
Mesh parameters are held as properties of the structure so that initially the same mesh parameters are applied globally to all meshed walls.
The parameters are specified as follows:
1.
Select the Structure branch in the Structure Tree .
2.
You will see the Structure properties in the Properties Window .
3.
Use the Wall mesh type property to control the shape of mesh applied:
• QuadDominant
• QuadOnly
• Triangular
4.
Adjust the Wall mesh horizontal size and Wall mesh vertical size as required.
How do I override the global wall mesh parameters for an individual wall?
If you require different wall mesh parameters to be applied to specific walls, this is achieved by editing the wall properties.
1.
Select the walls to be edited.
2.
In the Properties Window use the Wall mesh type property to control the shape of mesh applied.
3.
Adjust the Wall mesh horizontal size and Wall mesh vertical size as required.
How do I review the wall mesh prior to running the analysis?
1.
Open a Solver View.
324
User Guides
2.
Right click anywhere in the view and choose ‘Solver Models’ from the context menu.
3.
From the sub-menu choose the solver model appropriate to the analysis to be run.
The wall mesh will be displayed if it is applicable to the ‘Solver Model’ selected.
The wall mesh is not displayed in the Working Solver Model as this shows the model in its form prior to any analysis and 2D elements are only formed at the point of analysis.
Working with rigid and semi-rigid diaphragms
Diaphragms are formed in every slab panel of a parent slab when the ‘Diaphragm option’ in the slab properties is set to Rigid, or Semi-Rigid.
• When a rigid diaphragm is specified, nodal constraints are automatically applied to the associated slab nodes.
• When a semi-rigid diaphragm is specified, a mesh of semi-rigid 2D elements is created within the slab.
How do I activate rigid diaphragm action within a slab?
By default slabs are initially created with rigid diaphragm option already set.
You can review and edit this setting for specific slabs as follows:
1.
From the Slabs branch of the Structure Tree , select the slab which contains the
diaphragm.
2.
In the Properties Window , set the
Diaphragm option as required.
Setting the Diaphragm option in the properties of a Slab Item has the same effect as setting it in the properties of the parent Slab. Either way all Slab
Items in the Slab adopt the new Diaphragm option setting.
How do I activate semi-rigid diaphragm action within a slab?
Semi-rigid diaphragms can be formed in both one-way and two-way spanning slabs, their properties can be reviewed and edited by selecting the slab in which they are contained:
1.
From the Slabs branch of the Structure Tree , select the slab
2.
In the Properties Window set the Diaphragm option to ‘Semi-rigid’
3.
If required use the ‘Divide stiffness by’ to adjust the flexibility of the diaphragm.
325
User Guides (UK)
4.
The meshing parameters that are adopted for the semi-rigid diaphragms are controlled in the ‘Structure’ properties. (Displayed by selecting the ‘Structure’ branch in the Structure Tree).
Setting the Diaphragm option in the properties of a Slab Item has the same effect as setting it in the properties of the parent Slab. Either way all Slab
Items in the Slab adopt the new Diaphragm option setting.
How do I identify which nodes are constrained by rigid diaphragms?
In order to see which nodes are constrained by diaphragms you must firstly open a
Solver View. (See How do I open a Solver View?
In the Solver View, rigid and semi-rigid diaphragms are represented as different coloured shaded planes .
Nodes constrained by a rigid diaphragm can be identified as follows:
• Firstly they must lie within, or be on the edge of, the shaded rigid diaphragm plane.
326
User Guides
• Secondly, they must not be excluded nodes (i.e they should be solid, rather than hollow).
The following are therefore not constrained by a rigid diaphragm:
• Solid nodes that lie outside the shaded rigid diaphragm plane.
• Excluded (i.e. hollow) nodes.
How do I intentionally exclude individual nodes from a rigid diaphragm?
1.
In order to exclude specific nodes from a rigid diaphragm you must firstly open a
Review View.
2.
Click Review > Diaphragm On\Off
3.
Nodes are then displayed as follows:
• Included nodes - these are only constrained if they lie within, or on the edge of a rigid diaphragm. If they are outside the rigid diaphragm they are not constrained by it.
• Excluded nodes - these are always unconstrained.
4.
Click a node to toggle its state between included and excluded.
How do I intentionally exclude a slab panel from a diaphragm?
By default, a rigid diaphragm is formed in all the individual slab panels within a slab, however it is then possible to indicate that specific slab panels should be excluded as follows:
1.
In the Structure View, select the slab panel to be excluded.
2.
In the Properties Window , uncheck the
Include in diaphragm box.
Individual slab panels can also be excluded graphically using the ‘Diaphragm
On\Off command in the Review View. Clicking a slab panel toggles its inclusion in the diaphragm.
Running the analysis
Running 1st order analysis
How do I run a 1st order linear analysis?
327
User Guides (UK)
1.
Click Analyse > 1st Order Linear
2.
In the Select loading dialog, choose the combinations and loadcases to be analysed, then click OK.
At the end of the analysis the active view switches to a Results View and the tab switches from Analysis to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
How do I run a 1st order nonlinear analysis?
1.
Click Analyse > Options ( )
Review the 1st order non-linear convergence criteria and adjust if required.
2.
Click Analyse > 1st Order Non-linear
3.
In the Select loading dialog, choose the combinations and loadcases to be analysed, then click OK.
At the end of the analysis the active view switches to a Results View and the tab switches from Analysis to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
How do I run a 1st order vibration analysis?
Note that this type of analysis requires an active Vibration Mass combination.
( How do I create a Vibration Mass combination?
1.
Click Analyse > Options ( )
Review the 1st order vibration analysis options and adjust if required.
2.
Click Analyse > 1st Order Vibration
At the end of the analysis process the active view is switched to a Results View and the active tab is switched to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
Running 2nd order analysis
Running 2nd order analysis
How do I run a 2nd order linear analysis?
1.
Click Analyse > 2nd Order Linear
2.
In the Select loading dialog, choose the combinations and loadcases to be analysed, then click OK.
At the end of the analysis process the active view is switched to a Results View and the active tab is switched to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
How do I run a 2nd order nonlinear analysis?
328
User Guides
1.
Click Analyse > Options ( )
Review the 2nd order non-linear convergence criteria and adjust if required.
2.
Click Analyse > 2nd Order Non-linear
3.
In the Select loading dialog, choose the combinations and loadcases to be analysed, then click OK.
At the end of the analysis process the active view is switched to a Results View and the active tab is switched to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
How do I run a 2nd order buckling analysis?
1.
Click Analyse > Options ( )
Review the 2nd order buckling options and adjust if required.
2.
Click Analyse > 2nd Order Buckling
3.
In the Select loading dialog, choose the combinations and loadcases to be analysed, then click OK.
At the end of the analysis process the active view is switched to a Results View and the active tab is switched to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
Running seismic analysis
Running seismic analysis
How do I run a 1st order RSA seismic analysis?
1.
Click Analyse > Options ( )
Review the 1st order seismic analysis options and adjust if required.
2.
Click Analyse > 1st Order RSA Seismic
At the end of the analysis process the active view is switched to a Results View and the active tab is switched to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
How do I run a 2nd order RSA seismic analysis?
1.
Click Analyse > Options ( )
Review the seismic analysis options and adjust if required.
2.
Click Analyse > 2nd Order RSA Seismic
At the end of the analysis process the active view is switched to a Results View and the active tab is switched to Results - ready for reviewing the results graphically.
Running FE chase-down and Grillage chase-down analysis
329
User Guides (UK)
Running FE chase-down and Grillage chase-down analysis
These analyses are run (in addition to the 1st or 2nd order 3D building analysis) by selecting Analyse All (Static).
They are also be run when required as part of the combined analysis and design process:
• Grillage chasedown is performed if one or more concrete members exist.
• FE Chasedown is performed if two-way slabs exist, or by user option (i.e. if in the
Design Options dialog you have opted to design the concrete beams, columns, or walls for FE Chasedown results).
Both these analyses are run for loadcases only and not for combinations.
How do I run a Analyze All (Static)?
1.
Click Analyse > Analyse All (Static)
All the analyses required to enable the static design to proceed are performed for all loadcases and combinations as follows:
• 3D Building Analysis - (either first or second order, as specified in Design Options >
Analysis)
• Grillage Chasedown - if one or more concrete members exist.
• FE Chasedown - if two-way slabs exist, or by user option.
At the end of the above analyses the active view switches to a Review View and the tab switches from Analysis to Review - ready for individual members to be checked or designed.
Graphical display of the solver model (Solver View)
The Solver Model used for each analysis type can be viewed in 2D or 3D from an appropriate Solver View.
The following entities are not part of the Solver Model: grid and construction lines, dimensions, slabs and slab openings, wind wall and roof panels.
Consequently they are never displayed in Solver Views.
Conversely, when diaphragms exist in the Solver Model, they are only displayed in Solver Views, but are not displayed in the other view types.
How do I open a Solver View?
330
User Guides
To open a Solver View as a new view:
1.
Duplicate an existing 2D or 3D view by right clicking its tab and selecting ‘Duplicate
View’ from the right-click menu.
2.
Change the view type of the newly opened duplicate view:
• either by right clicking its tab and selecting ‘Solver View’ from the right-click menu,
• or by clicking the ‘Solver View’ button on the Status Bar.
To change an existing view to a Solver View:
1.
Select an appropriate existing 2D or 3D view.
2.
Change the view type of the view:
• either by right clicking its tab and selecting ‘Solver View’ from the right-click menu,
• or by clicking the ‘Solver View’ button on from the Status Bar.
How do I display the Solver Model used for a particular analysis type?
1.
Open a Solver View.
2.
Right click anywhere in the view and choose ‘Solver Models’ from the context menu.
3.
From the sub-menu choose the solver model required.
How do I see Solver Node and Solver Element properties?
1.
Open a Solver View
2.
Display the appropriate Solver View
3.
Select the node or element required.
4.
The selected node or element’s properties are displayed in the Properties Window.
Tabular data (Solver Model Data)
The Solver Model Data View provides a tabular means to view the raw analysis data and results for the different analysis types that have been performed.
How do I view tabular results in the Solver Model Data View?
1.
Click Analyse > Tabular Data
A Solver Model Data View opens in a new tab.
331
User Guides (UK)
2.
From the Result Type droplist choose the analysis type.
3.
From the View Type droplist choose the data or results to be displayed.
4.
If the result being displayed is load dependant, select the load case, combination, or
envelope required from the Loading drop list .
The results displayed are the ‘raw’ analysis results; the Element End Forces results have not had any axial load reductions applied.
What does the asterisk next to certain nodes signify in the Element End Forces table?
When displaying the table of element end forces, if you have modelled rigid arms then you may see asterisks against the start or end nodes of certain element numbers.
If the node number has an asterisk next to it, it signifies that the results are actually output at the end of the rigid arm rather than at the node itself.
Graphical display of the analysis results (Results View)
Once you have defined and analysed your model you can review the results of the analysis graphically in 2D or 3D
Results Views using the Results toolbar .
In addition, by activating the Model Data view from the Analyse toolbar you are able to view and export tabular results.
Results toolbar
Result Type group
The Result Type group contains two drop lists and two buttons:
Button Description
332
Analysis Type
(1st drop list)
Use the Analysis Type drop list to choose which analysis type to display results for:
User Guides
Mode
(2nd drop list)
If the Analysis Type is set to 1st
Order Vibration, or 2nd Order
Buckling, and an appropriate loadcase or combination is selected in the Loading drop list, the
Mode drop list becomes active.
It is used to select the vibration mode for which results are to be displayed:
Reduce Axial Force When axial forces are displayed, click this button to display the reduced values.
This only applies to imposed loadcases which have been defined with Reductions applied, (and to any combinations which include the same loadcases).
SLS Deflections When deflections are displayed for a combination, click this button to display them using the serviceability
(as opposed to the strength) load factors.
333
User Guides (UK)
Scale Settings group
Button Description
1D Forces Scale Use the slider to increase/decrease the diagram scales for 1D force results.
2D Forces Scale Use the slider to increase/decrease the diagram scales for 2D force results.
Deflections
Scale
Use the slider to increase/decrease the diagram scales for deflection results.
1D Results group
Click these controls to display analysis results for 1D elements: beams, columns, trusses etc. (Walls modelled using the ‘mid-pier’ option also fall into this category.)
Button Description
Displays the axial force diagrams (in local x).
Displays the major axis shear force diagrams
(along local z).
Displays the minor axis shear force diagrams
(along local y).
Displays the torsion diagrams (about local x).
Displays the major axis moment diagrams
(bending about local y).
Displays the minor axis moment diagrams
(bending about local z).
334
User Guides
Deflections group
Click these controls to display deflection results for 1D members: beams, columns, trusses etc. (Walls modelled using the ‘mid-pier’ option also fall into this category.)
Whole structure absolute global deflections are shown which are relative to the undeformed model.
Button Description
View model deflections in the global X direction
View model deflections in the global Y direction
View model deflections in the global Z direction
View model deflections in building direction 1
View model deflections in building direction 2
View Total (resultant) model deflections
Sway group
Click these controls to display sway results.
Button Description
View sway in the global X direction
View sway in the global Y direction
View relative sway in the X direction
335
User Guides (UK)
View relative sway in the Y direction
Storey Shear group
Click these controls to display storey shear results.
Button Description
View storey shear in direction 1
View storey shear in direction 2
Support Reactions group
Click these controls to display support reactions in the support’s local user co-ordinate system.
Button Description
Displays the local Fx reactions, (Fx corresponds to Fminor in the
Foundation Reactions Report).
Displays the local Fy reactions, (Fy corresponds to Fmajor in the
Foundation Reactions Report).
Displays the local Fz reactions, (Fz corresponds to Fvert in the
Foundation Reactions Report).
Displays the local Mx reactions, (Mx corresponds to Mmajor in the
Foundation Reactions Report).
Displays the local My reactions, (My corresponds to Mminor in the
Foundation Reactions Report).
Displays the local Mz reactions, (Mz corresponds to Mtor in the
Foundation Reactions Report).
336
User Guides
Displays the local reactions in Fx and Fy and Fz
Displays the local reactions in Mx and My and Mz
Displays all the local reactions ( Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
Notional Horizontal Forces
Button Description
Displays the calculated equivalent horizontal forces for the selected combination.
Displays the calculated equivalent lateral forces/torsions for the selected loadcase or combination.
Fx
Fy
Fxy
Fxz
Fyz
Mx
2D Results group
Click these controls to display FE contours for two dimensional elements (i.e. FE slabs and FE walls).
Note that contours are always in the panel axis system and based on the shell nodal forces.
Button Description
Axial force in panel x axis
Axial force in panel y axis
Complementary in-plane shear
Shear in panel z axis in the panel xz plane
Shear in panel z axis in the panel yz plane
Bending along panel x axis
337
User Guides (UK)
My
Mxy
Bending along panel y axis
Plate torsional moment
Mdx top Wood Armer top bending along panel x axis
Mdx bottom Wood Armer bottom bending along panel x axis
Mdy top Wood Armer top bending along panel y axis
Mdy bottom Wood Armer bottom bending along panel y axis
AsReq group
Click these controls to display FE contours for two dimensional elements (i.e. FE slabs and FE walls).
Note that contours are always in the panel axis system and based on the shell nodal forces.
Button Description x top
(1st drop list) x bottom
(1st drop list) y top
(1st drop list) y bottom
(1st drop list)
Required steel area contours in the top face of the slab along panel x axis (Wood-Armer effects included)
Required steel area contours in the bottom face of the slab along panel x axis (Wood-
Armer effects included)
Required steel area contours in the top face of the slab along panel y axis (Wood-Armer effects included)
Required steel area contours in the bottom face of the slab along panel y axis (Wood-
Armer effects included)
For the AsReq effect chosen from the 1st drop list contours are displayed as values.
Value
(2nd drop list)
Pass/Fail
(2nd drop list)
For the AsReq effect chosen from the 1st drop list, the pass/fail threshold contours are displayed.
338
User Guides
2D Deflections group
Click these controls to display FE deflection contours for two dimensional elements (i.e.
FE slabs and FE walls).
Whole structure absolute global deflections are shown which are relative to the undeformed model.
Button Description
View meshed area deflections in the global X direction
View meshed area deflections in the global Y direction
View meshed area deflections in the global Z direction
View Total (resultant) meshed area deflections
2D Strip Results group
After using the Create Strip command in a 2D view to define your strips, click the remaining buttons in the group to see results displayed along the strip - (best displayed in a 3D view).
Button Description
Click Create Strip to place a strip across a mesh. Results for the strip can then be displayed and used for design purposes.
Create Strip is only available when a 2D view is active.
Displays a Deflection diagram along the strip.
Displays a Shear Force diagram along the strip.
339
User Guides (UK)
Displays a Moment diagram along the strip.
Displays a Design Moment diagram along the strip.
Displays an Area of Steel Required diagram along the strip.
2D Wall Results group
FE Wall results can be collated and displayed on Result Lines that are created automatically within FE walls. (The resulting display being similar to that for 1D results in
‘mid-pier’ walls.)
Button Description
Displays an Axial Force diagram along the result line.
Displays a Shear Force Major diagram along the result line.
Displays a Shear Force Minor diagram along the result line.
Displays a Torsion diagram along the result line.
Displays a Moment Major diagram along the result line.
Displays a Moment Minor diagram along the result line.
Text group
Click these controls to display numerical values on the diagrams for the selected result.
Button Description
340
User Guides
Displays the Deflection value on deflection diagrams.
Displays the Axial Force value on axial force diagrams.
Displays the Shear Force value on shear force diagrams.
Displays the Support Reaction value on support reaction diagrams.
Displays the Torsion value on torsion diagrams.
Displays the Moment value on moment diagrams.
Cross checking the sum of reactions against the load input
Cross checking the sum of reactions against the load input
Once an analysis has been performed the Loading Tree
can be used to quickly check that the Total Reaction from each analysis equates to the Total Load on Structure.
This allows you to quickly establish that none of the applied load has gone missing.
The status of each loadcase and combination is indicated as follows:
- Total Reaction in equilibrium with the Total Load on Structure
- Total Reaction not in equilibrium with the Total Load on Structure
- Total Reaction not available
Loadcase Properties
When you select a loadcase in the Loading Tree, the following properties are displayed in the Properties Window.
General
This section provides summations (in global X, Y & Z) of the different load types applied to the structure, from these the total applied load is determined.
341
User Guides (UK)
The total reaction from the 3D Building Analysis result is also reported.
Property Description
Member Loads Sum of all loads applied that have been as Member
Loads to the structure.
Nodal Loads
Total NHF Dir 1
Total NHF Dir 2
Decomposable
Loads
1 way Decomp
Results
2 way Decomp
Results
Total User
Applied Load
Total Load on
Structure
Total Reaction
Sum of all loads applied that have been as Nodal Loads to the structure.
Sum of NHFs in Dir 1.
Sum of NHFs in Dir 2.
Sum of all loads applied as Panel Loads to the structure
(prior to load decomposition).
After load decomposition - this is the sum of loads decomposed on to members from one way spanning panels.
After load decomposition - this is the sum of loads decomposed on to members from two way spanning panels.
Sum of all loads applied to the structure (prior to load decomposition).
Sum of the 1 way and 2 way Decomp results.
Sum of reactions from the 3D Building Analysis.
The reported Total User Applied Load should be compared to the Total Load on
Structure, then the reported Total Load on Structure should also be cross checked against the Total Reaction.
FE Chasedown
Property Description
Total Reaction Overall sum of reactions from the FE Chasedown process.
[-] Each
Submodel
342
Load from above Sum of all vertical load applied to this sub model from the sub model directly above it.
Load Applied Sum of vertical load applied within the sub model.
User Guides
Reaction Sum of reactions from the analysis of the FE sub model.
The Total User Applied Load (from the General section) should be cross checked against the Total Reaction.
In addition, for each sub-model the Load Applied when added to the Load from above should equate to the Reaction.
Grillage Chasedown
Property Description
Total Reaction Overall sum of reactions from the Grillage Chasedown process.
[-] Each
Submodel
Load from above Sum of all vertical load applied to this sub model from the sub model directly above it.
Load Applied Sum of vertical load applied within the sub model.
Reaction Sum of reactions from the analysis of the grillage sub model.
The Total User Applied Load (from the General section) should be cross checked against the Total Reaction.
In addition, for each sub-model the Load Applied when added to the Load from above should equate to the Reaction.
Displaying 1D and 2D results, deflections and reactions
Displaying 1D and 2D results, deflections and reactions
343
User Guides (UK)
Once the analysis type, and the loadcase, combination, or envelope have been chosen, the result can be displayed simply by selecting the required effect from the appropriate group on the Results ribbon.
• 1D groups show results for 1D elements - i.e. beams, columns, trusses etc, and also for walls modelled using the ‘mid-pier’ option.
• 2D groups show results for 2D elements - i.e. FE slabs and FE walls.
How do I choose which analysis to see the results for?
When several analysis types have been performed, the results of each one are held separately, hence there is no need to re-perform a particular analysis to recall its results.
1.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list in the Result Type group of the
Results tab.
2.
Select the diagrams to display for this analysis type as required.
How do I choose the loadcase, combination, or envelope to see the results for?
1.
First click the Loadcase, Combination, or Envelope button on the Loading drop
list.
2.
Then select the specific loadcase, combination, or envelope name required from the drop list.
How do I display Support Reactions?
1.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list in the Result Type group of the
Results tab.
2.
Select the load case or combination to display from the Loading drop list .
3.
From the Support Reactions group choose the reaction required.
4.
From the Text group choose Support Reaction.
344
User Guides
How do I display 1D Results and 1D Deflections?
1.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list in the Result Type group of the
Results tab.
2.
Select the load case or combination to display from the Loading drop list .
To view 1D Results:
• From the 1D Results group choose the effect required
To view 1D Deflections:
• From the Deflections group choose the effect required
To show values on the diagrams:
• From the Text group choose the effects required
How do I display 2D Results and 2D Deflections?
1.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list in the Result Type group of the
Results tab.
2.
Select the load case or combination to display from the Loading drop list .
To view 2D Results:
• From the 2D Results group choose the effect required
To view 2D Deflections:
• From the 2D Deflections group choose the effect required
How do I display AsReq contours?
AsReq contours can either be displayed as:
• values, or,
• as a pass/fail threshold
Displaying as a pass/fail threshold helps to visualise minimum patch sizes when optimising panel and patch reinforcement as it highlights the specific areas in which the existing reinforcement is not sufficient.
1.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list in the Result Type group of the
Results tab.
2.
Select the load case or combination to display from the Loading drop list .
345
User Guides (UK)
3.
In the AsReq group choose the effect that you want to be displayed from the first drop list.
To view AsReq contours as values:
• From the second drop list in the AsReq group choose Value
To view AsReq contours as values:
• From the second drop list in the AsReq group choose Pass/Fail
What are 2D Wall Results and how do I display them?
By post-processing the FE meshed wall nodal analysis results, it is possible to determine forces and moments along Result Lines automatically created within the walls - these results can then be used for design purposes.
The sign convention for Result Line output follows that of the mid pier wall model.
To view the 2D Wall Results:
1.
Open a 3D View containing the walls to be viewed.
2.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list in the Result Type group of the
Results tab.
3.
Select the load case or combination to display from the Loading drop list .
4.
From the 2D Wall Results group on the Results tab, choose the effect that you want to be displayed.
5.
Tekla Structural Designer will display the chosen effect on the Result Line.
How do I increase the amplitude of the diagrams?
The Forces and Deflections sliders on the settings pane are used to adjust the diagrams.
Minimum Amplitude Maximum Amplitude
346
User Guides
How do I see a 3D display of the results in a 2D view?
Because the diagrams are plotted on each element in the planes in which they act, when you are working in a 2D view you will need switch on an isometric display to see the out of plane forces.
2D Frame View 2D Frame View displayed isometrically
1.
If the 2D view is currently displayed in plan, the 3D/2D toggle button in the Status
at the bottom right of the screen will be labelled 3D.
2.
Click the 3D/2D toggle button.
347
User Guides (UK)
3.
The 2D view is now displayed isometrically (and the 3D/2D toggle button changes to
2D.
4.
To change back to a plan view click the 3D/2D toggle button once more.
How do I customise the display of 2D contours?
By default all contour diagrams comprise of 10 evenly sized contours, each accounting for 10% of the total range. You can increase or decrease the number of contours, and also change the size and the color of individual contours.
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
The ‘active’ settings set is displayed on the Settings Sets page - in order to change the contour configuration for the current work session this is the set that should be edited.
3.
Expand the Scene page and click Contours.
• Click Split to add new contours
• Click Delete to remove contours
• Edit the Size of each contour as required.
• You can also change the Color of each contour.
• To revert to the default contour configuration click Reset
Displaying Mode Shapes
Displaying Mode Shapes
Mode shapes can be displayed for 1st Order Vibration, 2nd Order buckling, 1st Order
RSA Seismic and 2nd Order RSA Seismic analyses.
How do I display mode shapes?
When several analysis types have been performed, the results of each one are held separately, hence there is no need to re-perform a particular analysis to recall its results.
1.
On the Results ribbon, select the analysis type required (either 1st Order Vibration,
2nd Order buckling, 1st Order RSA Seismic, or 2nd Order RSA Seismic) from the drop list in the Result Type group.
2.
Select the loadcase or combination required from the Loading drop list.
348
User Guides
For RSA Seismic analysis only loadcases should be selected, as mode shapes are not applicable for combinations and hence cannot be viewed.
3.
Select the mode required from the Mode drop list in the Result Type group.
4.
Select the diagram to be displayed.
Displaying Notional Forces and Seismic Equivalent Lateral Forces
Displaying Notional Forces and Seismic Equivalent Lateral
Forces
EHF
(Applicable to Eurocode only) To see the magnitude of EHF in a particular combination:
1.
Select the combination required from the Loading drop list.
2.
On the Results ribbon, click EHF in the Notional Horizontal Forces group.
Notional Loads
(Applicable to United States (ACI/AISC) only) To see the magnitude of notional loads in a particular combination:
1.
Select the required combination which includes notional loads from the Loading
drop list.
2.
On the Results ribbon, click NL in the Notional Horizontal Forces group.
NHF
(Applicable to BS and Australian codes only) To see the magnitude of NHF in a particular combination:
1.
Select the combination required from the Loading drop list.
2.
On the Results ribbon, click NHF in the Notional Horizontal Forces group.
Seismic
To see the magnitude of equivalent lateral forces in a seismic loadcase or combination:
1.
Select the required seismic loadcase or combination from the Loading drop list.
2.
On the Results ribbon, click Seismic in the Notional Horizontal Forces group.
Displaying RSA Seismic Results
349
User Guides (UK)
Displaying RSA Seismic Results
Result Type
When the Result Type is set to 1st or 2nd Order RSA Seismic, the results that can be displayed depend on the type of the currently selected Loadcase or Combination.
Mode Shapes
Mode Shapes can be displayed for:
• RSA Seismic Loadcases
• Combined (CQC) or Combined (SRSS) - depending on your choice in Analysis
Options
• Plus all relevant modes for this loadcase
• Effective Seismic Weight Combination
• List of all modes returned by the Vibration Analysis
Mode Shapes are not displayed for:
• RSA Torsion Loadcases
• Static Loadcases included in the RSA Seismic Combination
• RSA Seismic Combinations
1D Element Results
1D Element Results are displayed as follows:
• RSA Seismic Loadcases
• Combined (CQC) or Combined (SRSS) - depending on your choice in Analysis
Options
Absolute values are determined at various points along each member and then plotted on both the positive and negative side of the diagram, (so that the diagrams are always symmetrical about the base line).
• All relevant modes
A standard enveloped diagram is displayed
• RSA Torsion Loadcases - displayed as per 1st order linear analysis
• Static Loadcases included in the RSA Seismic Combination - displayed as per 1st order linear analysis
• Effective Seismic Weight Combination - not available
• RSA Seismic Combinations
An envelope is drawn showing the seismic results above and below the static result.
• Base line is through the static values
• Top line is static value + seismic value
• Bottom line is static value - seismic value
350
User Guides
Story Shear
Story Shears are displayed as follows:
• RSA Seismic Loadcases
• Combined (CQC) or Combined (SRSS) - depending on your choice in Analysis
Options
Absolute values are determined at each position of interest and the result is then shown as both positive and negative.
351
User Guides (UK)
• All relevant modes
A standard diagram with a single value at each point of interest is displayed
• RSA Torsion Loadcases - displayed as per 1st order linear analysis
• Static Loadcases included in the RSA Seismic Combination - displayed as per 1st order linear analysis
• Effective Seismic Weight Combination - not available
• RSA Seismic Combinations
The diagram displays two values at each point of interest:
• static value + seismic value
• static value - seismic value.
352
User Guides
Support Reactions
Support Reactions are displayed as follows:
• RSA Seismic Loadcases
• Combined (CQC) or Combined (SRSS) - depending on your choice in Analysis
Options
Absolute values are determined at each support and the result is then shown as both positive and negative.
• All relevant modes - a standard diagram is displayed
• RSA Torsion Loadcases - a standard diagram is displayed
• Static Loadcases included in the RSA Seismic Combination - a standard diagram is displayed
• Effective Seismic Weight Combination - not available
• RSA Seismic Combinations
The diagram displays two values at each support:
• static value + seismic value
• static value - seismic value.
353
User Guides (UK)
2D Wall Results
2D Wall Results are displayed as follows:
• RSA Seismic Loadcases
• Combined (CQC) or Combined (SRSS) - depending on your choice in Analysis
Options
Absolute values are determined at points along the wall line and then plotted on both the positive and negative side of the diagram, (so that the diagrams are always symmetrical about the wall line).
• All relevant modes - a standard diagram is displayed
• RSA Torsion Loadcases - a standard diagram is displayed
• Static Loadcases included in the RSA Seismic Combination - a standard diagram is displayed
• Effective Seismic Weight Combination - not available
• RSA Seismic Combinations
An envelope is drawn showing the seismic results above and below the static result.
• Base line is through the static values
• Line above is static value + seismic value
• Line below is static value - seismic value
354
User Guides
Working with 2D Strips and displaying Strip Results
Working with 2D Strips and displaying Strip Results
Result Strip Overview
User defined Result Strips can be placed across 2D element meshes. From these strips, force and moment results are determined from the shell/plate/membrane nodal analysis results - these can then be used for design purposes, (typically for slab design).
Engineering judgement is required when positioning the strips to ensure suitable design forces are obtained. By default they have parallel edges, but tapering strips can also be defined as shown below:
355
User Guides (UK)
How do I create a Result Strip?
You must first open a 2D view of the FE mesh where the strip is to be placed and then display the Results tab.
To display the Results tab:
1.
In the Status Bar,
• Click Results View
To create the strip:
1.
Click Results > Create Strip ( )
2.
The Result Strip property set is displayed in the Properties Window. Adjust the properties in this set to specify:
• The start and end width of the strip
• The result type (Average, Centreline, or Maximum)
• The number of stations per metre along the strip
• The number of points per metre across the strip at each station
3.
Click a point where the strip is to start.
4.
Click a 2nd point where the strip is to end.
(Neither start or end points have to match nodes in the mesh.)
5.
Tekla Structural Designer will create a strip between the points that you identified.
6.
Either continue to place further strips, or if done, press [Esc] to exit.
356
User Guides
How do I delete a Result Strip?
To be able to delete a strip you must first ensure that ‘Result Strips’ are switched on in Scene Content.
1.
Open a View containing the strips to be deleted.
2.
Click Delete
3.
Click the strip to be deleted.
How do I view the results for a Result Strip?
Once a Result Strip has been defined in the model you can obtain results for it without having to re-run the analysis (providing an analysis has been run previously):
1.
Open a 3D View containing the strips to be viewed.
2.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list in the Result Type group of the
Results tab.
3.
Select the load case or combination you want to display should be selected from the
4.
From the 2D Strip Results group on the Results tab, choose the effect that you want to be displayed.
5.
Tekla Structural Designer will display the chosen effect on the strip along with the maximum positive and negative values (calculated in accordance with the method specified in the strip properties).
How are the strip results calculated?
Along the strip centre line there are a user defined number of stations. At each station there is a transverse line with a user defined number of points along it.
357
User Guides (UK)
Final results are always given by station and obtaining them may or may not use
points.
There are three alternative ways to calculate the results:
• Normal - the results on the centre of the Result Strip are calculated at each station
The shell elements local to each station are considered and a weighted average force is calculated based on the distance of the element nodes from the station.
This is repeated for all stations along the centre line of the strip to give the results for the strip.
• Maximum - results on the transverse line across the strip are calculated for each station along the strip.
The shell elements local to each point are considered and a weighted average force is calculated based on the distance of the element nodes from the point. The maximum result across the strip from all points is taken as the result for the station on the strip centre line. Note that maximum values include nodes within the strip.
The values calculated at points are always weighted averages of results at adjacent nodes - hence they are always less than the peak nodal values.
This is repeated for all stations along the centre line of the strip to give the results for the strip.
• Average - average over strip width
The results are obtained in the same way as for the maximum above but in this case are averaged to give the results for each station.
This is repeated for all stations along the centre line of the strip to give the results for the strip.
All forces in the results are rotated to be in the axis system of the Result Strip.
How do I review tabular analysis results?
Nodal Forces, Nodal Deflections and Element End Forces can all be displayed in tables.
1.
Click Analyse > Tabular Data
A Solver Model Data View opens in a new view.
2.
Select the analysis type required from the drop list on the Result Type group of the ribbon.
3.
Select the loadcase or combination to display from the Loading drop list .
4.
Select the result type to be displayed as a table from the View Type drop list.
358
User Guides
Displaying analysis results for individual members (Loading Analysis View)
Displaying analysis results for individual members (Loading
Analysis View)
The Loading Analysis toolbar is used to view the loading and analysis result diagrams
for individual members.
It is activated by right clicking on a member and selecting Open Load Analysis
View from the context menu that is displayed.
Loading Analysis toolbar
The Loading Analysis toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Refresh Loading If any changes have been made to the structure while the loading view has remained open, you must click Refresh Loading in order to update the display accordingly.
Result Type
(drop list)
Use the drop list to choose the analysis type for which results are to be displayed.
Axial
Major
Minor
Next
Prev
View the element loading and results for axial and torsion.
View the element loading and results for the major axis.
View the element loading and results for the minor axis.
Move the cursor to the next set of results along the element.
Move the cursor to the previous set of results along the element.
How do I open a Loading Analysis View?
1.
Right click the member you want to view and select Open Load Analysis View from the context menu that is displayed.
2.
Select the load case or combination you want to display from the Loading drop list .
3.
Select the analysis type for which you want to see the results from the Result
Type drop list on the ribbon.
359
User Guides (UK)
4.
If displaying results for a load combination - select whether to view the results based on Strength or Service Factors.
5.
Select the axis type to view (Axial, Major, or Minor) from the Direction group on the ribbon.
The results are displayed accordingly and can then be further controlled using the
Displaying RSA Seismic Results in a Loading Analysis View
Loading Analysis Views for 1st or 2nd Order RSA Seismic result types use the same rules as those applied to multi-member Results Views for the same result types, i.e. as follows:
RSA Seismic Loadcases
• Combined (CQC) or Combined (SRSS) - depending on your choice in Analysis Options
Absolute values are determined at various points along each member and then plotted on both the positive and negative side of the diagram, (so that the diagrams are always symmetrical about the base line).
• All relevant modes - a standard enveloped diagram is displayed
• RSA Torsion Loadcases - displayed as per 1st order linear analysis
• Static Loadcases included in the RSA Seismic Combination - displayed as per 1st order linear analysis
• Effective Seismic Weight Combination - not available
RSA Seismic Combinations
A droplist is provided to allow you to view:
• Design Profile - derived from the Static+Seismic result, the Design Profile is always plotted on the same side of the base line as the Static Only result
• Static Only - displayed as per 1st order linear analysis
• Seismic Only - absolute values are determined at various points along each member and then plotted on both the positive and negative side of the diagram
• Static+Seismic - an envelope is drawn showing the seismic results above and below the static result.
• Base line is through the static values
• Top line is static value + seismic value
• Bottom line is static value - seismic value
360
User Guides
Loading Analysis View Properties for Columns
The properties displayed in the Properties Window vary depending on the element type
being viewed, for columns the properties are as follows:
Property Description
General
361
User Guides (UK)
Distance
Stack
The distance along the member at which the results are displayed.
For concrete columns only: If rigid zones have been applied, only the non-rigid length of the column is displayed in the loading analysis view.
Specifies the stack for which results are displayed.
Axial force above
Axial force below
Axial force reduced above
Axial force reduced below
The axial force in the column immediately above the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
The axial force in the column immediately below the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
The axial force in the column immediately above the cross section at the distance specified, taking into account imposed load reductions.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
The axial force in the column immediately below the cross section at the distance specified, taking into account imposed load reductions.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Torsion moment above
Torsion moment below
The torsion in the column immediately above the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
The torsion in the column immediately below the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Shear above The major or minor shear force immediately above the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
362
Shear below The major or minor shear force immediately below the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Moment above
Moment below
The major or minor moment immediately above the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The major or minor moment immediately below the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Ecc. Moment above
Ecc. Moment below
The major or minor moment due to eccentricity immediately above the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The major or minor moment due to eccentricity immediately below the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Relative deflection
Load above
Load below
The relative deflection in the major or minor direction at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The applied distributed load in the major or minor direction immediately above the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The applied distributed load in the major or minor direction immediately below the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
User Guides
363
User Guides (UK)
Force
Moment
Show axial force
The applied point load in the major or minor direction at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The applied moment in the major or minor direction at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
If unchecked, the axial force diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Show axial force reduced
If unchecked, the axial force diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Show torsion moment
If unchecked, the torsion diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Show loading If unchecked, the loading diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Show shear If unchecked, the shear diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Show moment
If unchecked, the moment diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Show dimensions
Show
If unchecked, the dimensions are removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
If unchecked, the max and min values are removed from
364
User Guides extremes the view.
Loading Analysis View Properties for Beams
The properties displayed in the Properties Window vary depending on the element type
being viewed, for beams the properties are as follows:
Property Description
General
Distance The distance along the member at which the results are displayed.
For concrete beams only: If rigid zones have been applied, only the non-rigid length of the beam is displayed in the loading analysis view.
Specifies the span for which results are displayed. Span
Axial force left
Axial force right
Torsion moment left
The axial force in the beam immediately to the left of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
The axial force in the beam immediately to the right of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
The torsion in the beam immediately to the left of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Torsion moment right
The torsion in the beam immediately to the right of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Shear left The major or minor shear force immediately to the left of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
365
User Guides (UK)
Shear right
Moment left The major or minor moment immediately to the left of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Moment right The major or minor moment immediately to the right of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Relative deflection
The major or minor shear force immediately to the right of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Load left
Load right
Force
The relative deflection in the major or minor direction at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The applied distributed load in the major or minor direction immediately to the left of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The applied distributed load in the major or minor direction immediately to the right of the cross section at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
The applied point load in the major or minor direction at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Moment
Show axial force
The applied moment in the major or minor direction at the distance specified.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
If unchecked, the axial force diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is
366
User Guides selected.)
Show torsion moment
If unchecked, the torsion diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
Show loading If unchecked, the loading diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
Show shear
Show moment
Show dimensions
Show extremes
If unchecked, the shear diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
If unchecked, the moment diagram is removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Major or Minor direction is selected.)
If unchecked, the dimensions are removed from the view.
(This property is only displayed if the Axial direction is selected.)
If unchecked, the max and min values are removed from the view.
Analysis results sign conventions
Introduction
Axis Systems
The following axis systems are relevant in the software:
•
Global Coordinate System - the axis system within which all other systems exist
•
Building Directions 1 and 2 - the principle axes of the building - Dir 1 being rotated at
an angle to global X in the horizontal plane.
•
User Coordinate System - a coordinate system defined by the system or a user local
to a node in the model
•
1D Member Local Coordinate System - the coordinate system applicable to all 1D
members - beams, columns, braces etc
367
User Guides (UK)
•
Mid Pier Coordinate System - the coordinate system applicable to walls modelled as
mid piers
•
2D Member Local Coordinate System - the coordinate system applicable to all 2D
members - walls and slabs
•
Result Line Coordinate System - the coordinate system applicable to Result Lines
•
Result Strip Coordinate System - the coordinate system applicable to Result Strips
•
Foundation Reaction Coordinate System - the coordinate system applicable to
foundations
General
All axis systems follow the right hand rule
• X-axis = pointing index finger
• Y-axis = crooked middle finger
• Z-axis = extended thumb
And the directions of +ve rotation
• +ve rotation about x: the y-axis moves toward the z-axis.
• +ve rotation about y: the z-axis moves toward the x-axis.
• +ve rotation about z: the x-axis moves toward the y-axis.
Object Orientation
SolveFastrak Building Designer takes account of an object’s orientation when displaying the analysis results. Therefore, to apply the sign convention correctly you need to know which is end 1 and which is end 2 for beams/walls and you also need to know which is Face A for columns.
If you switch the Scene Content option to show the Element Direction on, then
SolveFastrak Building Designer shows an arrow on all beams, walls and columns.
This arrow points from the start to the end of beams/walls and from the bottom to the top of columns along Face A.
Diagram Conventions
All arrows should point in the direction of the force or moment - and so are reversed for
-ve forces and moments - eg
368
User Guides
Global Coordinate System
Global Coordinate System
Global Axis System and Applied Load Directions
Resulting Deflection Directions
369
User Guides (UK)
Building Directions 1 and 2
Building Directions 1 and 2
Building Directions and Applied Load Directions
Global axes (+ve Z vertically up) and angle between X and Dir 1 = θ where θ is +ve in RH rule about Z
Resulting Deflection Directions
User Coordinate System
User Coordinate System
UCS Axis System and Applied Load Directions
A UCS can be at any angle to the Global Coordinate System
370
User Guides
Every support is given a UCS. Automatically created supports under certain objects default to the method below. All other supports default to the global coordinate system.
- Support under a single column/wall rotates the foundation forces to align with the y/z axes of the column/wall
- Support under a mat foundation - uses the global coordinate system
Resulting Deflection Directions
1D Member Local Coordinate System
1D Member Local Coordinate System
General case for 1D members
Local Axis System and Applied Load Directions
• Local x along member - end 1 to end 2
• When γ = 0,
• Local z lies in the plane created by the local x axis and the global Z axis. The global Z component of the local z axis is always negative
371
User Guides (UK)
• Local y according to RH rule
• γ = +ve clockwise rotation of y and z about x looking towards +ve x
Applied force directions as above
• z= Major (Fz and My)
372
User Guides
• y= Minor (Fy and Mz)
• x= Axial
373
User Guides (UK)
Result Axis System and Directions
In the Major Axis:
• Moment Major = bending about y
• Shear Major = shear along z
In the Minor Axis:
• Moment Minor = bending about z
• Shear Minor = shear along y
374
User Guides
In the axial direction
Resulting Member End Forces and Directions
Member End Forces are the forces applied to the rest of the structure by the member - based on loading applied above:
375
User Guides (UK)
Special case for 1D members
Local Axis System and Applied Load Directions
Local x aligns with global Z (i.e vertical)
• When γ = 0,
• Local y aligns with global X
• Local z according to RH rule
• γ = +ve clockwise rotation of y and z about x looking towards +ve x
376
User Guides
Applied Force directions as above
• z = Major
• y = Minor
• x = Axial
Result Axis System and Directions
In the Major Axis:
• Moment Major = bending about y
• Shear Major = shear along z
377
User Guides (UK)
In the Minor Axis:
• Moment Minor = bending about z
• Shear Minor = shear along y
In the axial direction
378
User Guides
Mid Pier Coordinate System
Mid Pier Coordinate System
Wall Axis System and Applied Load Directions
Centred on the centroid of the cut section
• x axis lies along the stem mid pier element (+ve lowest to highest)
• z axis in the plane of the wall (+ve end 2 to end 1)
• y axis follows the RH rule and is normal to the wall
379
User Guides (UK)
The results from a mid pier model are in the same axis system as the Result
Line in a meshed wall.
Result Axis System and Directions
In the Major Axis
• bending about y
380
• and shear along z
User Guides
381
User Guides (UK)
In the Minor Axis
• bending about z
382
User Guides
• and shear along y
383
User Guides (UK)
Axial and torsion
• force in x and bending about x
2D Member Local Coordinate System
2D Member Local Coordinate System
Horizontal Panel Local Axis System and Applied Load Directions
Horizontal panel local axes are -
Local z is normal to the plane of the panel
When θ = 0,
• Local x is in the plane of the panel, aligned with global X and +ve in +ve global X Local
• Local y is in the plane of the panel and follows the RH rule
• θ = +ve clockwise rotation of x and y about z looking towards +ve z
384
User Guides
Vertical and Sloped Plane Local Axis System and Applied Load Directions
Vertical and Sloped panel local axes are -
• Local z is normal to the plane of the panel
• When θ = 0,
• Local x is in the plane of the panel and in a horizontal plane
• Local y is in the plane of the panel and follows the line of greatest slope of the plane
(+ve in the direction of +ve global)
• θ = +ve clockwise rotation of x and y about z looking towards +ve x
Sloped panel (axes at θ)
Vertical panel (axes when θ = 0)
385
User Guides (UK)
Result Line Coordinate System
Result Line Coordinate System
Centred on the centroid of the cut section
• z axis lies along the Result Line (+ve - end 2 to end 1)
• y axis normal to plane of mesh (generally +ve in the +ve Z direction, special case +ve x towards +ve Z)
• x axis follows the RH rule and lies in the mesh - x is therefore perpendicular to the cut line
The results from a Result Line are exactly as that for a mid pier model when the cut is horizontal and the cut direction matches the direction required.
Result Axis System
• In the Major Axis = bending about y and shear along z
• In the Minor Axis = bending about z and shear along y
• Axial and torsion = force in x and bending about x
386
General Case
Special Case
User Guides
Result Strip Coordinate System
Result Strip Coordinate System
387
User Guides (UK)
Centred at each station along the strip centre line (single or several continuous strips)
• z axis normal to plane of mesh (generally +ve in the -ve Z direction, special case +ve x towards +ve Z)
• x axis lies along the Result Strip (+ve - end 1 to end 2)
• y axis lies along the transverse line to the strip and follows the RH rule - y is therefore perpendicular to the strip line
Result Axis System
• Deflection - in the z axis
• Out of plane moment about the y axis
• Shear in the z axis
General Case
Special Case
388
User Guides
Foundation Reaction Coordinate System
Foundation Reaction Coordinate System
Result Axis System and Directions
The foundation reaction coordinate system is aligned with the coordinate system for the support node whether that is the Global Coordinate System or a User Coordinate
System.
Reactions are the forces applied to the structure by the foundation.
389
User Guides (UK)
Reactions
390
User Guides
Design Guide
Combined analysis and design is performed from the Design toolbar
by running:
• Design Steel - to design all steel beams and columns
• Design Concrete - to design all concrete beams, columns and walls (Not available for
Australia Head Code)
• Design All - to design all steel beams and columns; concrete beams, columns and walls (Not available for Australia Head Code)
By selecting Gravity, Static, or RSA you control which classes of combination are considered.
Slabs require a certain amount of user interaction and are therefore designed separately by running:
• Design Slabs - to design all slab panel areas that lie outside patches
• Design Patches - to design all slab panel areas that lie inside patches
• Design Punching Shear - to design all punching check items
Floor vibrations can also be checked by running:
• Check Floor Vibration - to establish the response of the floor to dynamic excitation
Design toolbar
The Design toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Options
Validate
Design Steel
(Gravity)
Opens the Design Options dialog.
Validates the model for any design issues which might exist.
Initiates an analysis-design process for steel members for gravity combinations only.
391
User Guides (UK)
Design Steel
(Static)
Design Steel
(RSA)
Design Concrete
(Gravity)
Initiates a complete static analysis-design process for all steel members in the structure.
Initiates a complete RSA analysis-design process for all steel members in the structure.
Initiates an analysis-design process for all concrete members in the structure for gravity combinations only.
Design Concrete
(Static)
Design Concrete
(RSA)
Initiates a complete static analysis-design process for all concrete members in the structure.
Initiates a complete RSA analysis-design process for all concrete members in the structure.
Design All
(Gravity)
Design All
(Static)
Design All (RSA)
Patch Column
(on drop list)
Patch Beam
(on drop list)
Initiates an analysis-design process for all members in the structure for gravity combinations only.
Initiates a complete static analysis-design process for all members in the structure.
Initiates a complete RSA analysis-design process for all members in the structure.
Creates a column patch which adopts the
specified Column Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a column patch?
Creates a beam patch which adopts the
specified Beam Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a beam patch?
392
Patch Wall
(on drop list)
Patch Panel
(on drop list)
Design Patches
Design
Punching Shear
Add Check
Design Slabs
Add Check
Check Floor
Vibration
Creates a wall patch which adopts the specified
Wall Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a wall patch?
Creates a panel patch which adopts the
specified Panel Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a panel patch?
Designs or checks slab reinforcement in all slab areas inside patches.
See Patches, Slabs and Punching Shear
Designs or checks slab reinforcement in all slab areas that are not inside patches.
See Patches, Slabs and Punching Shear
Used to add a punching shear check around a column or wall perimeter.
See How do I create a Punching Check item?
Performs the punching shear checks.
See How do I check punching for all Punching
Used to add a floor vibration check for a slab area.
See How do I create a Floor Vibration Check item?
Performs the floor vibration checks.
See How do I check vibration for all Floor
Related topics
•
Commands on the ribbon toolbars
Design Options
How to apply and manage Design Options
User Guides
393
User Guides (UK)
To modify design options in the current project
1.
Click Design > Options... ( )
2.
Review and edit the settings as required.
3.
If you change any of the settings, click:
• OK - to apply the changes directly to the current project, or
• Save... - to save the changes back to the active settings set (to act as defaults for future projects), or
• Cancel... - to cancel the changes
You can also click:
• Load... - to revert to the design options specified in the active settings set.
To modify design option defaults for future projects
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
In the Design Options page of the dialog, select the settings set to be updated, then review and edit the settings as required.
You can update any settings set simply by selecting it from the droplist, it does not need to be active.
3.
If you change any of the settings, click:
• OK - to save the changes to the selected settings set (to act as defaults for future projects when that set is active), or
• Cancel - to cancel the changes
Design Options-General
This page is only displayed when the design settings are accessed from the
Settings dialog on the Home toolbar.
General
Use multi-core processors for design leave this option checked to take advantage of multi-core processing.
394
User Guides
Gravity Design
Fix column nodes horizontally
When checked, this option automatically applies lateral translational fixed supports to column nodes for the 3D building analysis performed during the gravity design processes. This is useful at the early design stage when lateral systems have not been established. The automatic lateral supports can remove unwanted lateral displacements that may prevent the analysis from completing and/ or produce unrealistic forces.
The ‘Fix Column nodes horizontally’ setting does not apply to:
- Column nodes that are in a rigid floor diaphragm,
- Analysis run as a separate process,
- Analyse All (Static),
- 3D Building Analysis performed during Design...(Static).
Design Options-Analysis
Analysis
The Analysis options on this page allow you choose whether a first or second order 3D
Building Analysis is performed.
For steel structures in particular you should consider running a first-order analysis for the initial gravity design before switching to a second-order analysis for the final design.
Solve lateral loadcases in isolation if non-linear analysis is required during design
In non-linear analysis, lateral loadcases will often fail to solve at all or take a long time to converge when considered in isolation - this is especially true for compression only foundation mats. Hence it is suggested that this option is left unchecked.
If you need to see the results for the individual lateral loadcases you can either run the analysis directly from the Analyses ribbon, (or if you know that the analysis does not fail, you can check this option.)
Stability Coefficient Tolerance
If very small deflections were to be used in the calculation of the Stability Coefficient. then potentially very high Stability Coefficients could erroneously be reported.
To prevent this, the Stability Coefficient Tolerance provides you with a means to control the value of deflection that can safely be ignored. setting the analysis to first-order If the second order drift is less than the tolerance defined here (default stack height/10000), the Stability Coefficient is returned as 'N/A' with a note to say that the 'Drift is small enough to be ignored'.
395
User Guides (UK)
Reduced Stiffness Factor
This factor is only exposed once the analysis is set to second-order. For correct design to the AISC Specification using the DAM, this should be set to 0.8. setting the analysis to first-order.
As an alternative to setting the analysis to first-order to explore the reason for the second order analysis failure, it is possible to alter this factor. If you set it to a value of say 10, this will stiffen both the Modulus of elasticity (E) and the shear modulus of elasticity (G) by a factor of 10 in the second order analysis. Although the results will not be able to be used for a valid design, it should now be possible to run the analysis to see which member might fail a design and hence be the cause of the analysis instability.
This factor can then be reduced towards 0.8 for further investigation.
Design Options-Concrete-Reinforcement Parameters
Reinforcement anchorage length parameters
These parameters are used in the calculation of the ultimate bond stress, from which the anchorage lengths are determined.
Eurocode:
Plain Bars Bond Quality Modifier
Allowable range 0.1 - 1.0; default 0.5
Type-1 Bars Bond Quality Modifier
Allowable range 0.1 - 1.0; default 0.8
Type-2 Bars Bond Quality Modifier
Allowable range 0.1 - 1.0; default 1.0
ACI:
Plain Bars Bond Quality Modifier
Allowable range 0.1 - 1.0; default 0.5
Deformed Bars Bond Quality Modifier
Allowable range 0.1 - 1.0; default 1.0
Design Options-Concrete-Beam
Design Options-Concrete-Beam
This page has several sub-pages for setting up the options that are used in the beam design.
Concrete - Beam - Reinforcement Settings
396
User Guides
This page is used to set limits on the ranges and spacings of bars used in the design.
General
Country
Used to specify the country used for the reinforcement data.
Longitudinal bars
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum side bar size
Sets the minimum allowable side bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum top steel clear spacing
Sets the minimum allowable top steel clear spacing that can be used in the design process.
Minimum bottom steel clear spacing
Sets the minimum allowable bottom steel clear spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum tension steel spacing
Sets the maximum allowable tension steel spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum compression steel spacing
Sets the maximum allowable compression steel spacing that can be used in the design process.
Use single bars when beam width <=
Single bars are only permitted in beams less than the width specified.
Steel overstrength factor (ACI only)
This factor is used in seismic design to account for the reinforcement steel yielding overstrength.
Short Span
Short Span maximum length
Spans smaller than the value set here are treated as short spans. Support bars of short spans are merged with the span bars.
Concrete - Beam - Detailing Options
397
User Guides (UK)
Settings on this page relate to the detail that is produced, but have no effect on the design.
Longitudinal Bars
Use same size bars in multilayer arrangements
Check this option to use the same bar size in each layer.
Use same number of bars in each layer
Check this option to use the same number of bars in each layer.
Cut Length
Cut length rounding increment
Cut lengths are rounded to the value specified.
Longitudinal Bar Curtailment
Merge identical longitudinal bars if appropriate
Merging is only possible in some of the standard bar patterns - top bar patterns 1 and 2 don't have any bars that can merge.
In other patterns, bars of the same size, number and position can be merged, provided that the total length of the merged bar does not exceed the max allowable bar length.
The max bar length can be verified from Home > Materials >
Reinforcement by clicking an available bar size and then clicking the
View… button.
Extend top longitudinal support bars symmetrically
Extends the support bars symmetrically to both spans based on the larger effective span length; but only if the spans vary by less than the percentage specified.
Extend top longitudinal support bars by anchorage length
Adds an anchorage lengths to the calculated extension lengths.
Eurocode:
Min anchorage length {value} x dia
The minimum anchorage length as a multiple of bar diameter is controlled with this setting.
ACI:
Min anchorage length of plain bars {value} x dia
The minimum anchorage length as a multiple of bar diameter is controlled with this setting (only used when the rib type is ‘Plain’).
End Support Curtailment
398
User Guides
Extend top span bars to end support
Extends the top span bars of the first and last spans to the end supports.
Use ‘U’ bars at end support if appropriate
Under certain conditions this option replaces the top and bottom bars at the end support region with 'U' bars. The bars that are joined/merged to create the 'U' bars depend on the top and bottom patterns chosen for the beam.
The anchorage lengths for the resulting 'U' bars are taken as the lengths required for the pair of bars that made the 'U' bar.
Links
Select same bar size in support region and in the span
Check this option to use the same bar size in the support and span regions.
Select symmetrical link in support region
Check this option to use same link arrangement (bar size and spacing) in both supports.
Concrete - Beam - Top Longitudinal Bar Pattern
This page is used to configure the patterns used for the top bars.
Standard Pattern Setup
Longitudinal Bar Pattern
This drop list is used to select a pattern to be viewed/modified in the Design Options dialog.
Default Pattern
Longitudinal Default Pattern
This drop list is used to select the pattern that gets applied to new beams when they are first created.
The ‘Default Pattern’ cannot be used to change the pattern associated with existing beams. This can only be achieved by editing the beam properties.
Continuous Span + Cantilever (Backspan)
This tab is used to define how the selected Longitudinal Bar Pattern gets applied to continuous spans and cantilever backspans. An interactive diagram is also displayed which updates as changes are made.
Bar Checkboxes
Checked bars that are also greyed out are mandatory for the selected pattern. Other bars can optionally be included in the pattern according to your preference.
Region Fields
399
User Guides (UK)
The regions in which bars are applied are defined as a percentage of the span length.
Single Span
This tab is used to define how the selected Longitudinal Bar Pattern gets applied to single spans. An interactive diagram is also displayed which updates as changes are made.
Cantilever
This tab is used to define how the selected Longitudinal Bar Pattern gets applied to cantilevers. An interactive diagram is also displayed which updates as changes are made.
Concrete - Beam - Bottom Longitudinal Bar Pattern
This page is used to configure the patterns used for the bottom bars.
Standard Pattern Setup
Longitudinal Bar Pattern
This drop list is used to select a pattern to be viewed/modified in the Design Options dialog.
Default Pattern
Longitudinal Default Pattern
This drop list is used to select the pattern that gets applied to new beams when they are first created.
The ‘Default Pattern’ cannot be used to change the pattern associated with existing beams. This can only be achieved by editing the beam properties.
Continuous Span + Cantilever (Backspan)
This tab is used to define how the selected Longitudinal Bar Pattern gets applied to continuous spans and cantilever backspans. An interactive diagram is also displayed which updates as changes are made.
Bar Checkboxes
Checked bars that are also greyed out are mandatory for the selected pattern. Other bars can optionally be included in the pattern according to your preference.
Region Fields
The regions in which bars are applied are defined as a percentage of the span length.
Bar Lapping
400
User Guides
• Inside Support - select this option to lap the bottom bars in the middle of the support region.
• Outside Support - select this option to lap the bottom bars at the face of the support region.
Single Span
This tab is used to define how the selected Longitudinal Bar Pattern gets applied to single spans. An interactive diagram is also displayed which updates as changes are made.
Cantilever
This tab is used to define how the selected Longitudinal Bar Pattern gets applied to cantilevers. An interactive diagram is also displayed which updates as changes are made.
Concrete - Beam - Link Settings
Shear Design Regions - Normal
When considering shear, the design shear checks are performed in each of 3 regions S
1
S
2
and S
3
as shown below. In each region, the maximum vertical shear from all load combinations is determined and this maximum value used to determine the shear reinforcement required in that region.
,
Region S
1 ,
S
2 ,
S
3
The regions are defined as fixed proportions of the clear span of the beam. By defining the extent of the S
1
region, the other regions are determined automatically.
Link Type
Select either open, or closed links from the drop list.
Shear Design Regions - Cantilever
In cantilevers, the design shear checks are performed in 2 regions S
1 below. and S
2
as shown
401
User Guides (UK)
Link bars
This tab is used to define how the selected Longitudinal Bar Pattern gets applied to single spans. An interactive diagram is also displayed which updates as changes are made.
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum spacing
Sets the minimum allowable link spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum spacing
Sets the maximum allowable link spacing that can be used in the design process.
Spacing increment
The designed link spacings are multiples of this value.
Maximum link leg spacing across the beam
This value is used to determine if single links, double links, or more are required, depending on the width of the beam.
Use single outside link
This option uses a single outside link, with additional links added as required, (as per link ‘d’ shown dotted below).
Accept single leg internal link
This option allows the use of single leg internal links, (as per link ‘c’ shown dotted below).
402
User Guides
Optimise link design regions where possible
In this case in the central region S
2
, shear reinforcement is provided to meet the minimum of the code requirement or user preference whilst in regions S
1
and S
3
, designed shear reinforcement is required.
The position and length of region S
2
is determined from considerations of the shear resistance of the concrete cross-section and this then enables the lengths of regions
S
1
and S
3
to be determined.
Concrete - Beam - General Parameters
Eurocode:
Reinforcement anchorage length parameters
These parameters are used in the calculation of the ultimate bond stress, from which the anchorage lengths are determined.
Maximum Bond Quality Coefficient
Allowable range 0.5 - 1.0;default 0.7.
Aggregate
Maximum nominal aggregate size
This value is used in the calculation to determine the minimum clear horizontal distance between individual parallel bars.
Allowance for deviation
This value is used in the calculation to determine the limiting nominal concrete cover, c nom, lim
• c nom, lim
= c min
+
Δ c dev
ACI:
Fixity
Fixity Coefficient β
1
This coefficient is applied to the maximum positive moment in the beam span
(excluding support positions) to set a user defined minimum design moment for beam support regions.
Allowable range 0.0 - 1.0; default 0.25
403
User Guides (UK)
Deflection
Long term deflection period
Allowable range 3 - 60 months; default 60
Time at which brittle finishes are introduced
Allowable range 1- 6 months; default 1
All Codes:
FE Chasedown
Design Beams for FE Chasedown analysis results
Provided an FE Chasedown has been performed (which requires the model to contain two way spanning slabs) this option can be used to specify that beams are designed for the forces obtained from the FE Chasedown analysis in addition to the forces obtained from the 3D Building and Grillage analyses.
Effective flanges calculation
Tolerance on rectilinearity
The calculation of the effective width is only carried out for concrete beams if they lie within the tolerance on rectilinearity set here. The default tolerance is 15 degrees; at greater angles you will be prompted to enter the effective width manually.
Design Options-Concrete-Column
Design Options-Concrete-Column
This page has several sub-pages for setting up the options that are used in the column design.
Concrete - Column - Reinforcement Layout
This page is used to set limits on the ranges and spacings of bars used in the design.
General
Country
Used to specify the country used for the reinforcement data.
Vertical bars
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum bar spacing
404
User Guides
Sets the minimum allowable bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar spacing
Sets the maximum allowable bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Minimum reinforcement ratio
Sets the minimum allowable area of reinforcement as a ratio of the concrete section area.
Maximum reinforcement ratio
Sets the maximum allowable area of reinforcement as a ratio of the concrete section area.
Steel overstrength factor (ACI only)
This factor is used in seismic design to account for the reinforcement steel yielding overstrength.
Link bars
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable link size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable link size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum bar spacing
Sets the minimum allowable link spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar spacing
Sets the maximum allowable link spacing that can be used in the design process.
Spacing increment
The designed link spacings are multiples of this value.
Containment reinforcement
These options are used to limit the range of containment link options that are applied to rectangular sections, depending upon the aspect ratio of the section.
Aspect ratio change point
The value entered here determines which rectangular sections are considered to have a low aspect ratio and which are considered to have a high aspect ratio.
Use double links for low aspect ratio
Check this option to use double links where applicable in preference to single links for sections with a low aspect ratio.
Use double links for high aspect ratio
405
User Guides (UK)
Check this option to use double links where applicable in preference to single links for sections with a high aspect ratio.
Use triple links for low aspect ratio
Check this option to use triple links where applicable in preference to double or single links for sections with a low aspect ratio.
Use cross links for low aspect ratio
Check this option to use cross links where applicable in preference to triple, double or single links for sections with a low aspect ratio.
Concrete - Column - Detailing Options
Settings on this page relate to the detail that is produced, but have no effect on the design.
Longitudinal Bars
Cut length rounding increment
Cut lengths are rounded to the value specified.
The overall steel bar cut length is stored in the Material data on the Home tab. For existing bars it can be verified by clicking Materials >
Reinforcement. Then click an available bar size and click the View… button.
Kicker dimension
The height of column kicker cast above the slab level.
Join identical bars where possible
When this option is checked, bars are merged only if the bar size and layout in the current and adjacent stack are identical and proving that the max bar length is not exceeded.
Links
Number of span region links required to use separate regions
The column design may have utilised span regions to economise on the link requirements, however, if these only exist over a short length you may prefer to standardise the link spacing on the detail. This setting allows you to specify the minimum number of span region links that are necessary for a span region to be indicated on the detail.
Provide links through full foundation depth
Check this option to draw links through the full depth of the foundation.
Foundation penetration depth of links
406
User Guides
If the Provide links through full foundation depth option is unchecked this field becomes accessible; allowing for the penetration depth of links into the foundation to be specified.
Provide links through floor depth for internal columns
• For columns restrained by flat slabs - links are always provided through the floor depth irrespective of this setting.
• For columns restrained by beam and slab - links are always provided through the beam depth for edge columns but are only provided for internal columns when the option is checked. When unchecked, links are provided up to the soffit of the shallowest beam depth.
Concrete - Column - General Parameters
General
Bar sizes no smaller than stack above
Check this option to ensure that bar sizes do not reduce in lower stacks.
Match bar position to stack above
Check this option to have the starting arrangement for longitudinal bars match the arrangement of the bars in the stack above, if the section geometry matches.
Increase main bar size preferentially
Check this option to have the corner bars increased in preference to the intermediate bars. All bars start off at the same size (unless the initial bar size is driven by the current arrangement or the stack above), but when the check fails the corner bars will be increased in size if all bar sizes are the same, otherwise the intermediate bars will be increased in size. This means that when the final design is produced, either all bars will be the same size or the corner bars will be one size larger than the intermediate bars.
Alternatively, if you require all bar sizes to be the same, unchecking this option results in all bar sizes being increased together.
Reinforcement anchorage length parameters (Eurocode only)
These parameters are used in the calculation of the ultimate bond stress, from which the anchorage lengths are determined.
Maximum Bond Quality Coefficient
Allowable range 0.5 - 1.0.
Aggregate
Maximum nominal aggregate size
This value is used in the calculation to determine the minimum clear horizontal distance between individual parallel bars.
407
User Guides (UK)
Allowance for deviation (Eurocode only)
This value is used in the calculation to determine the limiting nominal concrete cover, c nom, lim c nom, lim
= c min
+
Δ c dev
FE Chasedown
Design Columns for FE Chasedown analysis results
Provided an FE Chasedown has been performed (which requires the model to contain two way spanning slabs) this option can be used to specify that columns are designed for the forces obtained from the FE Chasedown analysis in addition to the forces from the other analyses that have been performed.
Design Options-Concrete-Wall
Design Options-Concrete-Wall
This page has several sub-pages for setting up the options that are used in the wall design.
Concrete - Wall - Reinforcement Layout
This page is used to set limits on the ranges and spacings of bars used in the design.
General
Country
Used to specify the country used for the reinforcement data.
Vertical bars
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum bar spacing
Sets the minimum allowable bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar spacing
Sets the maximum allowable bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Spacing increment
The designed bar spacings are multiples of this value.
Minimum reinforcement ratio
Sets the minimum allowable area of reinforcement as a ratio of the concrete section area.
408
User Guides
Maximum reinforcement ratio
Sets the maximum allowable area of reinforcement as a ratio of the concrete section area.
Vertical bars in end zone
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum reinforcement ratio
Sets the minimum allowable area of reinforcement as a ratio of the end zone area.
Maximum reinforcement ratio
Sets the maximum allowable area of reinforcement as a ratio of the end zone area.
Horizontal bars
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum reinforcement ratio
Sets the minimum allowable area of reinforcement as a ratio of the end zone area.
Link/horizontal bars
Minimum bar spacing
Sets the minimum allowable bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar spacing
Sets the maximum allowable bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Spacing increment
The designed bar spacings are multiples of this value.
Link/containment bars
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Containment bars in end zone
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum bar size
409
User Guides (UK)
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be used in the design process.
Substitute loose bars if mesh inadequate
Check this option to use additional loose bars in the end zones when the mesh is inadequate.
Concrete - Wall - Detailing Options
Settings on this page relate to the detail that is produced, but have no effect on the design.
Longitudinal Bars
Cut length rounding increment
Cut lengths are rounded to the value specified.
The overall steel bar cut length is stored in the Material data on the Home tab. For existing bars it can be verified by clicking Materials >
Reinforcement. Then click an available bar size and click the View… button.
Kicker dimension
The height of column kicker cast above the slab level.
Join identical bars where possible
When this option is checked, bars are merged only if the bar size and layout in the current and adjacent stack are identical and proving that the max bar length is not exceeded.
Links
Number of span region links required to use separate regions
The wall design may have utilised span regions to economise on the link requirements, however, if these only exist over a short length you may prefer to standardise the link spacing on the detail. This setting allows you to specify the minimum number of span region links that are necessary for a span region to be indicated on the detail.
Provide links through full foundation depth
Check this option to draw links through the full depth of the foundation.
Foundation penetration depth of links
If the Provide links through full foundation depth option is unchecked this field becomes accessible; allowing for the penetration depth of links into the foundation to be specified.
Provide links through floor depth for internal walls
410
User Guides
• For walls restrained by flat slabs - links are always provided through the floor depth irrespective of this setting.
• For walls restrained by beam and slab - links are always provided through the beam depth for edge walls but are only provided for internal walls when the option is checked. When unchecked, links are provided up to the soffit of the shallowest beam depth.
Concrete - Wall - General Parameters
Reinforcement anchorage length parameters
These parameters are used in the calculation of the ultimate bond stress, from which the anchorage lengths are determined.
Maximum Bond Quality Coefficient
Allowable range 0.5 - 1.0.
Aggregate
Maximum nominal aggregate size
This value is used in the calculation to determine the minimum clear horizontal distance between individual parallel bars.
Allowance for deviation
This value is used in the calculation to determine the limiting nominal concrete cover, c nom, lim c nom, lim
= c min
+
Δ c dev
FE Chasedown
Design Columns for FE Chasedown analysis results
Provided an FE Chasedown has been performed (which requires the model to contain two way spanning slabs) this option can be used to specify that walls are designed for the forces obtained from the FE Chasedown analysis in addition to the forces obtained from the other analyses that have been performed.
Design Options-Concrete-Slab
Design Options-Concrete-Slab
This page has two sub-pages for setting up the options that are used in the slab and flat slab design.
Concrete - Slab - Reinforcement Layout
This page has two tabs for setting limits on the range and spacing of bars for slabs on beams and flat slabs.
411
User Guides (UK)
General
Country
Used to specify the country used for the reinforcement data.
Principal/secondary bars
Minimum loose bar size
Sets the minimum allowable loose bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum loose bar size
Sets the maximum allowable loose bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum clear spacing
Sets the minimum allowable clear bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Minimum spacing (slab auto-design)
Sets the minimum allowable clear bar spacing used in the panel auto-design process. As this only applies to panels, it allows panel design to more readily select bars at a wider spacing, while allowing patch design to more readily pass by reducing min spacing check failures in the patches.
Maximum principal bar spacing distance
Sets the maximum allowable bar spacing as a distance.
Maximum principal bar spacing x slab depth
In addition to the above maximum distance - this sets the maximum allowable bar spacing as a function of the slab depth.
Maximum secondary bar spacing distance
Sets the maximum allowable bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum principal bar spacing x slab depth.
Maximum secondary bar spacing x slab depth
In addition to the above maximum distance - this sets the maximum allowable bar spacing as a function of the slab depth.
Bar spacing increment
The bar spacings are multiples of this value.
Maximum bar length
Sets the maximum length of bar.
Bar length increment
The bar lengths are multiples of this value.
Slab edge clearance
412
User Guides
Sets the clearance from the reinforcement to the slab edge.
Reinforcement
Auto selection of outer bars
Check this option to have the bars in the outer layer selected automatically.
Make bob for top steel of cantilevers
Check this option to apply a bob to the end of the top steel in cantilevers.
Use mesh where possible
Check this option to use mesh where possible.
Concrete - Slab - Patches
This page has separate tabs for setting default properties for each path type.
Reinforcement
Use mesh where possible
Check this option to use mesh where possible.
Patch Size
Width, Lx, Ly
Sets the default patch size to be used.
Strip Proportions
Edge strip width as proportion of patch width for column patches this ratio controls how the patch width is split between edge and centre strips.
Centre strip width for beam patches this sets the width of the centre strip.
Concrete - Slab - General Parameters
Reinforcement anchorage length parameters
These parameters are used in the calculation of the ultimate bond stress, from which the anchorage lengths are determined.
Maximum Bond Quality Coefficient
Allowable range 0.5 - 1.0.
Cover and Spacing check parameters
Maximum nominal aggregate size
This value is used in the calculation to determine the minimum clear horizontal distance between individual parallel bars.
413
User Guides (UK)
Allowance for deviation (Eurocode only)
This value is used in the calculation to determine the limiting nominal concrete cover, c nom, lim c nom, lim
= c min
+
Δ c dev
Detailing
Allowance for additional detailing bars
The total mass of bars for slabs/mats shown in material listing reports and on slab/mat detailing drawings will be increased by the percentage specified here.
Design Options-Concrete Punching Shear
This page sets up the parameters for punching shear stud rail design.
General
Country
Used to specify the country used for the reinforcement data.
Reinforcement bars
Minimum bar size
Sets the minimum allowable bar size that can be welded to the rail in the design process.
Maximum bar size
Sets the maximum allowable bar size that can be welded to the rail in the design process.
Diagonal spacing between rails
Sets the maximum allowable diagonal spacing for radial layouts.
Spacing along rail
Minimum spacing
Sets the minimum allowable bar spacing along each rail.
Maximum spacing
Sets the maximum allowable bar spacing along each rail.
Spacing increment
The bar spacing adopted will be a multiple of this value.
Spacing to the first reinforcement line
Minimum spacing
Sets the minimum spacing from the column face to the first reinforcement line.
414
User Guides
Maximum spacing
Sets the maximum spacing from the column face to the first reinforcement line.
Spacing increment
The spacing from the column face will be a multiple of this value.
Auto-design
Method
Auto-design can either be set to minimise the bar size, or minimise the number of rails.
Starting number of studs per face
Applies when auto-designing from minima.
Diagonal spacing between rails (for circular arrangements)
Maximum spacing
Sets the maximum diagonal spacing between the outermost studs in the last critical perimeter.
Spacing between rails in the Y direction
Minimum spacing
Sets the minimum allowable rail spacing in Y.
Maximum spacing
Sets the maximum allowable rail spacing in Y.
Spacing increment
The rail spacing in Y adopted will be a multiple of this value.
Spacing between rails in the Z direction
Minimum spacing
Sets the minimum allowable rail spacing in Z.
Maximum spacing
Sets the maximum allowable rail spacing in Z.
Spacing increment
The rail spacing in Z adopted will be a multiple of this value.
Design Options-Concrete Isolated Foundations
Design Options-Concrete Isolated Foundations
415
User Guides (UK)
This page has several sub-pages for setting up the options that are used in pad base and pile cap design.
Concrete - Isolated Foundations - Reinforcement Layout
This page has two tabs for setting limits on the range and spacing of bars for pad bases and pile caps.
General
Country
Used to specify the country used for the reinforcement data.
Principal/secondary bars
Minimum loose bar size
Sets the minimum allowable loose bar size that can be used in the design process.
Maximum loose bar size
Sets the maximum allowable loose bar size that can be used in the design process.
Minimum clear spacing
Sets the minimum allowable clear bar spacing that can be used in the design process.
Maximum principal bar spacing
Sets the maximum allowable principal bar spacing as a distance.
Maximum secondary bar spacing
Sets the maximum allowable secondary bar spacing as a distance.
Bar spacing increment
The bar spacings are multiples of this value.
Reinforcement
Use mesh where possible
Check this option to use mesh where possible.
Concrete - Isolated Foundations - Foundation Size
This page has two tabs for setting the size parameters used in the design process for pad bases and pile caps.
Minimum depth
Sets the minimum allowable depth.
Maximum depth
Sets the maximum allowable depth.
Auto-design depth increment
416
User Guides
Sets the depth increment.
Minimum side length
Sets the minimum allowable side length.
Maximum side length under columns
Sets the maximum side length under columns as a distance.
Maximum side length ratio under columns
Sets the maximum side length ratio under columns.
Rounding increment for footing dimensions and pile spacing
The overall footing size is rounded to this value.
Default 3-pile cap shape the default shape when 3 piles are used can be set to either triangular or rectangular.
Concrete - Isolated Foundations - General Parameters
Reinforcement anchorage length parameters
These parameters are used in the calculation of the ultimate bond stress, from which the anchorage lengths are determined.
Maximum Bond Quality Coefficient (Eurocode only)
Allowable range 0.5 - 1.0.
Cover and Spacing check parameters
Maximum nominal aggregate size
This value is used in the calculation to determine the minimum clear horizontal distance between individual parallel bars.
Allowance for deviation (Eurocode only)
This value is used in the calculation to determine the limiting nominal concrete cover, c nom, lim c nom, lim
= c min
+
Δ c dev
Design parameters
Tolerance for pile position
The allowable deviation of the pile position from its original plan position which is used in the design moment calculations.
Concrete - Isolated Foundations - Piles
Minimum and maximum number of piles for pile caps under columns
These parameters apply when a pile cap under a column has been set to auto design the piles.
417
User Guides (UK)
Minimum spacing option sets whether the minimum spacing check uses the a set value, or a multiple of the pile width/circumference.
Minimum spacing of piles
Sets the minimum spacing (either as a value, or as multiple of the pile width/circumference).
Minimum pile edge distance minimum distance from the pile face to edge of foundation.
Pile auto-design method when a pile cap has been set to auto design, you can choose to use the smallest number of high capacity piles or more piles of lowest capacity.
Design Options-Concrete Mat Foundations
The options displayed here are identical to those applied to slabs.
Design Options-Composite Beams
Effective flange width calculation
Tolerance on rectilinearity
The calculation of the effective width is only carried out for composite beams if they lie within the tolerance on rectilinearity set here. The default tolerance is 15 degrees; at greater angles you will be prompted to enter the effective width manually.
Design Options-Design Forces
Ignore Forces Below
A full 3D analysis may expose small forces that are normally ignored in the design of members. The options for ignore forces below on the Design Forces page of the Design
Options dialog simply provide you with a way of setting negligible/nominal force levels with which you are comfortable. When the small forces from the 3D analysis are below the specified threshold levels they are ignored so that design can proceed automatically. If the forces are above these limits, then you will be warned during the design process but the forces will still be ignored.
Concrete Beams
Torsion force % of concrete resistance
418
User Guides
For Eurocode design only, this defines a user specified ignorable torque limit. If the maximum torsional moment acting on the beam is less than this limit then design for torsion is not performed.
This setting is only applicable for design to Eurocodes. For all other Head
Codes it is not used and can be ignored.
Design Options-Design Groups
Check those member types for which grouped design is to be applied.
When grouped, only one member in the group is designed. This design is then copied to the remaining members in the group so that they can be checked. Any failing member in the group is redesigned, and the process repeated until all members pass, or a design is not possible.
Design Options-Autodesign
This option controls what happens to individual steel and concrete member autodesign settings, and isolated foundation autodesign settings at the end of the design process.
The first two options need little explanation:
• Always - The autodesign setting is automatically cleared at the end of the design process - putting every member into check mode.
• Never - The autodesign setting (either checked, or unchecked) is always retained at the end of the design process.
The third option When check status is at worst makes the change from autodesign conditional upon the design status as follows:
• Pass - The autodesign setting is only automatically cleared at the end of the design process for members with design status: Pass
• Warning - The autodesign setting is only automatically cleared at the end of the design process for members with design status: Pass, or Warning
• Fail - The autodesign setting is only automatically cleared at the end of the design process for members with design status: Pass, Warning, or Fail
• Invalid - The autodesign setting is only automatically cleared at the end of the design process for members with design status: Pass, Warning, Fail or Invalid
• Beyond Scope - The autodesign setting is only automatically cleared at the end of the design process for members with design status: Pass, Warning, Fail, Invalid or
Beyond Scope.
The most practical use of the When check status is at worst option would be to set it to Pass and start with all members in autodesign mode. At the end of the first design run passing members would be set to check mode, allowing you to focus on the remaining members still in autodesign mode.
419
User Guides (UK)
Design Options-Design Warnings
Concrete Seismic Warnings
Warnings used as guidance during the design of a structure to US seismic provisions are in effect by default. These can be de-activated as found useful.
The following selection is available:
Specified concrete grade is too low
• Compliance with ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 Section 21.1.4.2, "(..) f'c, shall not be less than 3000 psi."
• Applies to normal weight reinforced concrete columns and beams part of Special
Moment Frames
• Applies to normal weight reinforced concrete walls assigned as Special
Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls
• Prompts the user to increase the concrete grade of the member
Specified longitudinal reinforcement grade too high
• Compliance with ACI 318-11 Section 21.1.5.2, "(..) reinforcement resisting earthquake induced flexure, axial force, or both, shall comply with ASTM A706, Grade
60.";
• Applies to normal weight reinforced columns and beams part of Special Moment
Frames
• Applies to normal weight reinforced concrete walls assigned as Special
Reinforced Concrete Structural Walls
• Prompts the user to use lower longitudinal reinforcement grades
Column at the end of the beam is not in the same seismic frame
• Used to validate if the frame of which the beam is part off is correctly set-up as a seismic frame
• Applies to normal weight reinforced concrete beams part of a seismic force resisting system
• Applies to both SRFS type and direction
• Checks both ends of each beam span
• Prompts the user to set up a consistent SFRS type and direction between all members of the frame
Beam at the end of the column is not in the same seismic frame
• Used to validate if the frame of which the column is part off is correctly set-up as a seismic frame
• Applies to normal weight reinforced concrete columns part of a seismic force resisting system
• Checks the top of each column stack
420
User Guides
• Prompts the user to set up a consistent SFRS type and direction between all members of the frame
Beam support region size is too small
• Compliance with ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 Section 21.3.4.2, "(..) hoops shall be provided over lengths not less than 2h measured from the face of the supported member toward the midspan"
• Applies to normal weight reinforced concrete beams part of Intermediate and
Special Moment Frames
• Comes into effect if the length of the end shear design regions is smaller than the requirement
• Prompts the user to review the shear design regions - Design options
High seismic to conventional demand on non-SFRS beams / High seismic to conventional demand ratio of non-SFRS columns / High seismic to conventional demand of non-SFRS walls
• Used to recognize when a member has a significant contribution to the building's lateral force resistance but has not been assigned to the SFRS with the required ductility properties
• Specifically apply to each member type
• The highest non-seismic design ratio from bending and shear design is obtained
• The highest seismic design ratio from bending and shear design is obtained
• Comes into effect when the ratio between seismic and non-seismic values is higher than a given threshold (default = 1.0)
• The maximum seismic/non-seismic ratio threshold that triggers the warning is set through the "Seismic to conventional minimum demand ratio" field on the same page
• Prompts the user to either include the member in the SFRS or review the structure layout to reduce the contribution of the member to the lateral force resistance
Non-SFRS design requirements applicable in SDC D-F
• Compliance with ACI 318-08 and ACI 318-11 Sections 21.13.1, "Requirements of section 21.13 apply to members not designated as part of the seismic-forceresisting system in structures assigned to SDC D, E and F"
• Applies to normal weight reinforced concrete beams, column and walls not included in the SFRS
• Comes into effect in Seismic Design Category, SDC D or above
• Prompts the user to apply code prescribed requirements on top of current design
Steel Static Warnings
Additional notional loads required when alpha Pr/Py > 0.5, C2.3
421
User Guides (UK)
• Compliance with 7.3 (3) of AISC 360-05 and C2.3 of AISC 360-10 requires the stiffness of certain members to be reduced. When the ratio of the required axial compressive force (Pr) and the axial yield strength (Py = Fy Ag) is > 0.5 then this stiffness must be reduced further
• As an alternative which is the approach adopted in TSD, an additional notional load of 0.001 Yi can be applied instead
• When the program identifies that the ratio of Pr/Py exceeds 0.5 a warning is given to alert the designer
• If this additional notional load has been dealt with by the designer then this warning is no longer relevant and this option allows you to switch off the warning
Concrete Seismic
Seismic to conventional minimum demand ratio
This ratio is used to set the threshold above which the ‘High seismic to conventional demand‘ warnings come into effect.
Design Options-Steel Joists
The loading pattern on each joist is assessed and classified as Uniform (or near uniform), Equivalent Uniform or Non-Uniform taking into account user defined tolerances.
Uniform load tolerance if the calculated percentage load tolerance is less than this value, the load is classified as
‘Uniform’.
Equivalent load tolerance if the calculated percentage load tolerance is greater than this value, the load is classified as ‘Non-uniform’.
If 0% equivalent load tolerance is specified then only pure uniform loading is accepted.
Maximum eccentricity of zero shear
In the equivalent uniform load method the position of the point of zero shear relative to the centre span point of the joist is determined. If this is located outside this maximum eccentricity of zero shear value then the load is classified as 'Non-uniform'.
Deflection increase to allow for shear
Deflections due to live load are calculated using the following effective inertia value:
I effective
= I gross
/ (1 + R) where
R = the deflection increase to allow for shear effects (defaulted to 15%) and applied to KCS only.
422
User Guides
Static Analysis & Design
Member design modes
Before you start the analysis and design process, every design member in your model will be set into one of two possible modes:
• Check design mode - you assign your desired section size (steel members) or section size and reinforcement (concrete members) and the program then determines if the section/reinforcement is sufficient.
• Autodesign mode - you select the desired section type and the program then automatically determines a suitable size of the chosen section type (steel members); or you assign your desired section size and the program then automatically determines a suitable reinforcement configuration (concrete members).
You can quickly review (and update) the mode applied to every member in the model using the ‘Auto\Check design’ toggle on the Review toolbar.
Once the autodesign\check design modes have been set appropriately you can then begin the member design process.
Your choice of which analysis-design process to run will be affected by the materials used (steel, concrete, or both) and also the combination types that you want to consider
(gravity, or all) - steel structures in particular may require an initial ‘gravity design’.
Do I run Design Steel, Design Concrete or Design All?
Do I run Design Steel, Design Concrete or Design All?
Your choice will depend on the materials used in the model.
In simple terms:
• if your model consists of steel members only, you can run the design from the
Analysis & Design Steel group on the Design toolbar. (i.e. Design Steel (Gravity) and
Design Steel (Static)
• if your model consists of concrete members only, you can run the design from the
Analysis & Design Concrete group on the Design toolbar. (i.e. Design Concrete
(Gravity) and Design Concrete (Static)
• if your model consists of a mix of both concrete and steel members, you can run the design from the Analysis & Design group on the Design toolbar. (i.e. Design All
(Gravity) and Design All (Static)
423
User Guides (UK)
For structures that are mostly steel but have a few concrete members: instead of running Design All, you could run Design Steel (in order to focus on the steel design) before switching to Design Concrete for the remaining members. In this way during the steel design phase you are not running grillage and FE chasedown analyses when they are not required .
The processes that get initiated reflect your choice as follows:
Design Steel
• performs a 3D analysis,
• does not perform Grillage or FE Chasedown analysis,
• designs/checks all steel elements and shear walls,
• does not design/check concrete beams or columns.
Design Concrete
• performs a 3D analysis and a Grillage analysis,
• may also be required to perform an FE Chasedown analysis,
• designs/checks all concrete beams, columns and shear walls,
• does not design/check steel elements.
Design All
• performs a 3D analysis and a Grillage analysis,
• may also be required to perform an FE Chasedown analysis,
• designs/checks all concrete beams, columns and shear walls,
• design/checks all steel elements.
Do I run Design...(Gravity), or Design...(Static)?
Do I run Design...(Gravity), or Design...(Static)?
Design (Gravity)
Although your final design should consider all combinations, designing for gravity combinations can be a useful way to rapidly pre-size those members in the structure that are not subjected to lateral loads.
Designing members for gravity combinations is a technique more likely to be employed for steel rather than concrete structures.
This technique involves the use of first-order analysis on a limited set of design combinations.
•
Design Steel (Gravity) - rapid gravity sizing of the majority of steel members
424
User Guides
•
Design Concrete (Gravity) - design of concrete members for gravity combinations
only
•
Design All (Gravity) - design of all steel and concrete members for gravity
combinations only
Because lateral systems may not have been established at this stage, those column nodes that are not in a rigid floor diaphragm are by default fixed horizontally. (This default can be changed if required in Home > Settings > Design Options > General)
Design (Static)
Once initial member sizes have been adequately sized, you should make a Sway sensitivity assessment (ACI/AISC), as this can affect the Choice of analysis type (ACI/AISC) used in the final static design.
This final static design is invoked by selecting the Design (Static) process applicable to the type of material involved:
•
Design Steel (Static) - full design of all steel members
•
Design Concrete (Static) - full design of all concrete members
•
Design All (Static) - full design of all steel and concrete members
For each of the above, a 3D analysis is performed (first, or second order as specified in
Design Options > Analysis) for all active combinations to establish a set of design forces.
If the model contains concrete members, a grillage chasedown and potentially an FE chasedown are performed to establish additional sets of design forces.
All members are checked or designed for the appropriate design requirements. Gravity members are checked for gravity combinations, lateral members are checked for all combinations. Only active combinations are checked.
Design Steel (Gravity)
Design Steel (Gravity)
Performs analysis of all active gravity load combinations and then designs or checks steel members.
Overview:
• A 3D analysis is run (excluding pattern loading) to establish a set of design forces for the steel members.
• For the above analysis, lateral translational fixed supports can optionally be applied to column nodes in order to remove unwanted lateral displacements that may prevent the analysis from completing and/ or produce unrealistic forces (controlled via Settings> Design Options> General on the Home ribbon).
• Each ‘gravity only’ steel member is then either checked, or designed - according to its autodesign setting - for gravity combinations only.
425
User Guides (UK)
• Remaining steel members set to auto-design are designed for gravity combinations, to give them a reasonable start size prior to consideration of the lateral load combinations. (Remaining steel members set to check-design are not checked.)
• On completion of the gravity sizing process all steel members are set to checkdesign mode. At this point it is possible that the lateral members are under-sized
(having been designed for the gravity combinations only) so it is recommended that you reset them to auto-design mode before continuing the design process.
• No design forces are established for concrete elements in a multi-material building.
How do I run Design Steel (Gravity)?
1.
Prior to running the design you should have assigned appropriate
Autodesign settings to the steel members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new section sizes will be designed
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing section sizes will be checked
2.
You should also be aware of the Design Options ( ) that are in place, in particular:
•
Design Options-Analysis - which sets the analysis type to be run,
•
Design Options-Design Forces - which sets the levels at which forces can be
ignored,
•
Design Options-Autodesign - which controls how Autodesign settings will be reset
after the design
3.
To run the design:
Click Design Steel (Gravity)
4.
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
Design Steel (Static)
Design Steel (Static)
Performs analysis of all active static load combinations (gravity, lateral, and ELF seismic) then designs or checks every steel member.
Overview:
• A first-order 3D analysis of all unfactored loadcases is carried to establish
Serviceability Limit State requirements such as deflections.
• EHF's are determined for every active combination in which they have been included.
426
User Guides
• Having established the EHF's, their contributions to frame deflections are determined using a first-order analysis. α cr
values are also established.
• A 3D analysis is performed (first, or second order as specified in Design Options >
Analysis) for all active combinations to establish a set of design forces.
• All steel members set to autodesign mode are designed for the appropriate design requirements. Gravity members are designed for gravity combinations, lateral members are designed for all combinations. Only active combinations are checked.
If section sizes are changed the analysis-design cycle is repeated.
• All steel members set to check mode are checked for the appropriate design requirements. Gravity members are checked for gravity combinations, lateral members are checked for all combinations. Only active combinations are checked.
• At the end of the process, all autodesign settings are typically cleared - putting every
member into check mode. You can change this if required via Design Options-
How do I run Design Steel (Static)?
1.
Prior to running the design you should have assigned appropriate
Autodesign settings to the steel members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new section sizes will be designed
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing section sizes will be checked
2.
You should also be aware of the Design Options ( ) that are in place, in particular:
•
Design Options-Analysis - which sets the analysis type to be run,
•
Design Options-Design Forces - which sets the levels at which forces can be
ignored,
•
Design Options-Autodesign - which controls how Autodesign settings will be reset
after the design
3.
To run the design:
Click Design Steel (Static)
4.
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
Design Concrete (Gravity)
Design Concrete (Gravity)
Performs analysis of all active gravity load combinations and then designs or checks every concrete member (but not concrete slabs).
427
User Guides (UK)
Concrete Design is not currently available for the Australian Head Code.
Overview:
• A 3D analysis is run to establish a set of design forces for the concrete members.
• For the above analysis, lateral translational fixed supports can optionally be applied to column nodes in order to remove unwanted lateral displacements that may prevent the analysis from completing and/ or produce unrealistic forces (controlled via Settings> Design Options> General on the Home ribbon).
• A grillage chasedown analysis is performed to establish a second set of design forces.
• If the model contains flat slabs, or slabs on beams, an FE chasedown analysis is also performed. The results being (optionally) used to establish a third set of design forces for concrete beams, columns and walls.
• Every concrete member is then either checked, or designed - according to its autodesign setting - for gravity combinations only.
• No design forces are established for steel elements in a multi-material building.
How do I run Design Concrete (Gravity)?
1.
Prior to running the design you should have assigned appropriate
Autodesign settings to the concrete members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new reinforcement will be designed
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing reinforcement will be checked
2.
You should also review the Design Options that are in place - to do this:
Click Design > Options ( )
3.
To run the design:
Click Design Concrete (Gravity)
4.
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
Design Concrete (Static)
Design Concrete (Static)
Performs analysis of all active static load combinations (gravity, lateral, and ELF seismic) then designs or checks every concrete member.
428
User Guides
Concrete Design is not currently available for the Australian Head Code.
Overview:
• A first-order 3D analysis of all unfactored loadcases is carried to establish
Serviceability Limit State requirements.
• EHF's are determined for every active combination in which they have been included.
• Having established the EHF's, their contributions to frame deflections are determined using a first-order analysis. α cr
values are also established.
• A 3D analysis is performed (first, or second order as specified in Design Options >
Analysis) for all active combinations to establish a set of design forces.
• A grillage chasedown analysis is performed to establish a second set of design forces.
• If the model contains flat slabs, or slabs on beams, an FE chasedown analysis is also performed. The results being (optionally) used to establish sets of design forces for concrete beams, columns and walls.
• All concrete members set to auto-design mode are designed for the appropriate design requirements. Only active combinations are checked.
• All concrete members set to check mode are checked for the appropriate design requirements. Only active combinations are checked.
• At the end of the process, all autodesign settings are typically retained - however you
can change this if required via Design Options-Autodesign .
How do I run Design Concrete (Static)?
1.
Prior to running the design you should have assigned appropriate
Autodesign settings to the concrete members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new reinforcement will be designed
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing reinforcement will be checked
2.
You should also review the Design Options that are in place - to do this:
Click Design > Options ( )
3.
To run the design:
Click Design Concrete (Static)
4.
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
429
User Guides (UK)
Design All (Gravity)
Design All (Gravity)
Performs analysis of all active gravity load combinations and then designs or checks every member (but not concrete slabs).
Design All is not currently available for the Australian Head Code.
Overview:
• A 3D analysis is run - excluding pattern loading - to establish a set of design forces for the steel and concrete members.
• For the above analysis, lateral translational fixed supports can optionally be applied to column nodes in order to remove unwanted lateral displacements that may prevent the analysis from completing and/ or produce unrealistic forces (controlled via Settings> Design Options> General on the Home ribbon).
• A grillage chasedown analysis is performed to establish a second set of design forces
(for concrete members only).
• If the model contains flat slabs, or slabs on beams, an FE chasedown analysis is also performed. The results being (optionally) used to establish a third set of design forces for concrete beams, columns and walls.
• Each member is then either checked, or designed - according to its autodesign setting - for gravity combinations only.
• On completion of the gravity sizing process all steel members are set to checkdesign mode. At this point it is possible that the lateral members are under-sized
(having been designed for the gravity combinations only) so it is recommended that you reset them to auto-design mode before continuing the design process.
How do I run Design All (Gravity)?
1.
Prior to running the design you should have assigned appropriate
Autodesign settings to all members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new section sizes will be designed for steel members and new reinforcement will be designed for concrete members
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing section sizes will be checked for steel members and existing reinforcement will be checked for concrete members
2.
You should also review the Design Options that are in place - to do this:
Click Design > Options ( )
3.
To run the design:
430
User Guides
Click Design All (Gravity)
4.
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
Design All (Static)
Design All (Static)
Performs analysis of all active static load combinations (gravity, lateral, and ELF seismic) then designs or checks every member (but not concrete slabs).
Design All is not currently available for the Australian Head Code.
Overview:
• A first-order 3D analysis of all unfactored loadcases is performed to establish
Serviceability Limit State requirements such as deflections.
• EHF's are determined for every active combination in which they have been included.
• Having established the EHF's, their contributions to frame deflections are determined using a first-order analysis. α cr
values are also established.
• A 3D analysis is performed (first, or second order as specified in Design Options >
Analysis) for all active combinations to establish a set of design forces.
• A grillage chasedown analysis is performed to establish a second set of design forces
(for the design of concrete members only).
• If the model contains flat slabs, or slabs on beams, an FE chasedown analysis is also performed. The results being (optionally) used to establish sets of design forces for concrete beams, columns and walls.
• All steel members set to auto-design mode are designed for the appropriate design requirements. Gravity members are designed for gravity combinations, lateral members are designed for all combinations. Only active combinations are checked.
If section sizes are changed the analysis-design cycle is repeated.
• All steel members set to check mode are checked for the appropriate design requirements. Gravity members are checked for gravity combinations, lateral members are checked for all combinations. Only active combinations are checked.
• All concrete members set to auto-design mode are designed for the appropriate design requirements. Only active combinations are checked.
• All concrete members set to check mode are checked for the appropriate design requirements. Only active combinations are checked.
431
User Guides (UK)
• At the end of the process, all autodesign settings are typically cleared for steel members but retained for concrete members - you can change this if required via
How do I run Design All (Static)?
1.
Prior to running the design you should have assigned appropriate
Autodesign settings to all members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new section sizes will be designed for steel members and new reinforcement will be designed for concrete members
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing section sizes will be checked for steel members and existing reinforcement will be checked for concrete members
2.
You should also review the Design Options that are in place - to do this:
Click Design > Options ( )
3.
To run the design:
Click Design All (Static)
4.
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
How can I check if Autodesign is on or off?
1.
Select the members for which you want to review or change the Autodesign property.
2.
Check the current Autodesign setting shown in the Properties Window is correct - adjust if necessary.
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new reinforcement will be designed
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing reinforcement will be checked
Alternatively, edit the member to do the same thing:
1.
Highlight the member and right click it to display the context menu.
2.
Choose Edit from the context menu.
3.
Review the Automatic design setting in the dialog - adjust if necessary.
432
User Guides
RSA Analysis & Design
RSA load combinations should be set up in advance of RSA Design by running the Seismic Wizard (choosing the option to use Modal Response
Spectrum Analysis). The Seismic Wizard is not currently available for the
AS:1170.4 code variant.
Design Steel (RSA)
Performs analysis of all active RSA load combinations and then designs steel members.
Overview:
• Validation - standard model and analysis validation plus additional seismic specific checks are performed
• 1st Order Vibration Analysis - performed for the Effective Seismic Weight
Combination only, which determines the fundamental periods for directions 1 & 2
• Pre-Analysis for Seismic - (seismic weight and seismic torque calculations)
• Static Analysis - 1st Order Linear or 2nd Order Linear for all RSA Seismic
Combinations and all their relevant loadcases, i.e. included Static Loadcases, but not
RSA Seismic or and RSA Torsion Loadcases.
• RSA Analysis - a set of results are generated for a sub-set of vibration modes for each RSA Seismic Loadcase. The results for each mode are then combined into a single set
• Accidental Torsion Analysis - nodal loads are generated for each RSA Torsion
Loadcase, these are then analysed using 1st Order Linear analysis.
• All steel members set to autodesign mode are designed taking the current size that has been determined from static design as a starting point. If section sizes are changed the analysis-design cycle is repeated.
• All steel members set to check mode are checked for the appropriate design requirements.
How do I run Design Steel (RSA)?
1.
First, check the Autodesign property is correctly set for all members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new section sizes will be designed
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing section sizes will be checked
( How can I check if Autodesign is on or off?
2.
Next, review the Design Options and adjust if required:
• Click Design > Options ( )
3.
Then:
433
User Guides (UK)
• Click Design Steel (RSA)
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
Design Concrete (RSA)
Design Concrete (RSA)
Performs analysis of all active RSA load combinations and then designs concrete members.
Overview:
• Validation - standard model and analysis validation plus additional seismic specific checks are performed
• 1st Order Vibration Analysis - performed for the Effective Seismic Weight
Combination only, which determines the fundamental periods for directions 1 & 2
• Pre-Analysis for Seismic - (seismic weight and seismic torque calculations)
• Static Analysis - 1st Order Linear or 2nd Order Linear for all RSA Seismic
Combinations and all their relevant loadcases, i.e. included Static Loadcases, but not
RSA Seismic or and RSA Torsion Loadcases.
• RSA Analysis - a set of results are generated for a sub-set of vibration modes for each RSA Seismic Loadcase. The results for each mode are then combined into a single set
• Accidental Torsion Analysis - nodal loads are generated for each RSA Torsion
Loadcase, these are then analysed using 1st Order Linear analysis.
• All concrete members set to autodesign mode are designed taking the current reinforcement that has been determined from static design as a starting point.
• All concrete members set to check mode are checked for the appropriate design requirements.
How do I run Design Concrete (RSA)?
1.
First, check the Autodesign property is correctly set for all members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new reinforcement will be designed for concrete members
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing reinforcement will be checked for concrete members
( How can I check if Autodesign is on or off?
2.
Next, review the Design Options and adjust if required:
• Click Design > Options ( )
3.
Then:
434
User Guides
• Click Design Concrete (RSA)
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
Design All (RSA)
Design All (RSA)
Performs analysis of all active RSA load combinations and then designs all members.
Overview:
• Validation - standard model and analysis validation plus additional seismic specific checks are performed
• 1st Order Vibration Analysis - performed for the Effective Seismic Weight
Combination only, which determines the fundamental periods for directions 1 & 2
• Pre-Analysis for Seismic - (seismic weight and seismic torque calculations)
• Static Analysis - 1st Order Linear or 2nd Order Linear for all RSA Seismic
Combinations and all their relevant loadcases, i.e. included Static Loadcases, but not
RSA Seismic or and RSA Torsion Loadcases.
• RSA Analysis - a set of results are generated for a sub-set of vibration modes for each RSA Seismic Loadcase. The results for each mode are then combined into a single set
• Accidental Torsion Analysis - nodal loads are generated for each RSA Torsion
Loadcase, these are then analysed using 1st Order Linear analysis.
• All steel members set to autodesign mode are designed taking the current size that has been determined from static design as a starting point. If section sizes are changed the analysis-design cycle is repeated.
• All concrete members set to autodesign mode are designed taking the current reinforcement that has been determined from static design as a starting point.
• All steel and concrete members set to check mode are checked for the appropriate design requirements.
How do I run Design All (RSA)?
1.
First, check the Autodesign property is correctly set for all members:
• Autodesign ‘on’ - new section sizes will be designed for steel members and new reinforcement will be designed for concrete members
• Autodesign ‘off’ - existing section sizes will be checked for steel members and existing reinforcement will be checked for concrete members
( How can I check if Autodesign is on or off?
2.
Next, review the Design Options and adjust if required:
435
User Guides (UK)
• Click Design > Options ( )
3.
Then:
• Click Design All (RSA)
At the end of the analysis-design process the active view switches to a Review
View and the tab switches from Design to Review - ready for reviewing the design graphically.
Patches, Slabs and Punching Shear
In order to design slabs, these commands should generally be performed in the following sequence:
• Slab patches can be placed over columns, beams, walls or panels as required. (See:
•
) command is used to design slab panel areas that lie outside of these patch areas.
•
The patches themselves are designed using the Design Patches (
) command.
•
Once Punching Shear checks have been placed, these can be performed using the
Design Punching Shear ( ) command.
Patch Creation and Editing
Rectangular patches of reinforcement can be applied to a slab panel to act in addition to the background reinforcement.
After selecting the required patch type from the drop down menu, patches are placed in the model by clicking or boxing around elements in either 2D or 3D Views.
What is a patch?
Patches are used during the design of concrete slabs as a way of managing the physical and design data. They each define a rectangular area of slab within which FE Analysis results are collected enabling a design to be performed. Design moments are calculated along Result Strips embedded within each patch. Depending on the patch type it can contain up to 6 result strips, catering for up to 3 strips of reinforcement in each of two perpendicular directions.
The following patch types are available:
• column patch - at column stack heads
• beam patch - along beams
• wall patch - along walls
436
User Guides
• panel patch - at a specified position within the panel boundary
• not restricted to a ‘centralised’ position and also not restricted to existing purely within one panel
• might also be positioned under loads
These patches are either in the top or the bottom of the slab and may or may not have reinforcement defined in them. If no reinforcement is defined then the background reinforcement is used. If reinforcement is defined then for the top/bottom, x/y direction, you have the option to use the sum of the background + patch reinforcement
- if reasonably aligned.
Note that patches may overlap on the plan view, there is no restriction on this, even patches relating to the same layer of reinforcement are allowed to overlap. This situation is handled conservatively during design by simply ignoring the overlap.
How do I create a column patch?
1.
Click Design
Then from the Patch drop list ( ) select Patch Column
2.
The Column Patch (unsaved) Properties set is displayed.
• Use the Lx and Ly properties to specify the patch size.
• Use the Surface property to specify the layer.
• Check the Autodesign property in order to have the reinforcement automatically designed.
• Only check the Consider patch surface moments only property if you want to consider the opposite surface (except where a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Situations when you need to check this option should be very rare.
To place the patch over a specific column:
1.
Click a column node within the slab. Tekla Structural Designer will add a patch to the selected column.
To create multiple patches by windowing:
1.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the columns for which you want to define patches.
437
User Guides (UK)
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating patches).
4.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the creation area release the mouse button and Tekla Structural Designer will create patches to all columns which are totally within the rubber rectangle.
How do I create a beam patch?
1.
Click Design
Then from the Patch drop list ( ) select Patch Beam
2.
The Beam Patch (unsaved) Properties set is displayed.
• Use the Surface property to specify the layer.
• Check the Autodesign property in order to have the reinforcement automatically designed.
• Define the required Patch Width perpendicular to the beam span.
• Define the required Centre Strip Width.
The two end strips are recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
• Only check the Consider patch surface moments only property if you want to consider the opposite surface (except where a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Situations when you need to check this option should be very rare.
438
User Guides
To place the patch over a specific beam span:
1.
Click the required beam span. Tekla Structural Designer will add a patch centred on and orientated to the beam centre line.
To create multiple patches by windowing:
1.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the beams for which you want to define patches.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating patches).
4.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the creation area release the mouse button and Tekla Structural Designer will create patches to all beams which are totally within the rubber rectangle.
How do I create a wall patch?
1.
Click Design
Then from the Patch drop list ( ) select Patch Wall
439
User Guides (UK)
2.
The Wall Patch (unsaved) Properties set is displayed.
• Use the Surface property to specify the layer.
• Check the Autodesign property in order to have the reinforcement automatically designed.
• Only check the Consider patch surface moments only property if you want to consider the opposite surface (except where a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Situations when you need to check this option should be very rare.
3.
Define the required Patch Width perpendicular to the wall.
To place a single patch along a specific wall:
1.
Choose the Create Mode
• Single Patch Along Wall
2.
Click the required wall. Tekla Structural Designer will add a patch centred on and orientated to the wall centre line.
To place an internal patch and two end patches along a specific wall:
1.
Choose the Create Mode
• Internal with End Patches
2.
Click the required wall. Tekla Structural Designer will add one internal patch and two end patches centred on and orientated to the wall centre line.
To place an end patch at one end of a specific wall:
1.
Choose the Create Mode
• End Patch at Wall End
2.
Click near to the required end of the wall. Tekla Structural Designer will add a patch at the end of the wall closest to the point clicked on.
440
User Guides
To place an internal patch part way along a specific wall:
1.
Choose the Create Mode
• Internal Patch
2.
Move the cursor along the required wall and then click to define the required start point.
3.
Move the cursor further along the wall and click again to define the required end point.
4.
Tekla Structural Designer will add a patch between the two points clicked on.
To create patches along multiple walls by windowing:
1.
Choose one of the following Create Modes as required:
• Single Patch Along Wall
• Internal with End Patches
2.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the walls for which you want to define patches.
3.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
4.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating patches).
5.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the creation area release the mouse button and Tekla Structural Designer will create patches to all walls which are totally within the rubber rectangle.
How do I create a panel patch?
1.
Click Design
Then from the Patch drop list ( ) select Patch Panel
2.
The Panel Patch (unsaved) Properties set is displayed.
• Use the Lx and Ly properties to specify the patch size.
• Use the Surface property to specify the layer.
• Check the Autodesign property in order to have the reinforcement automatically designed.
441
User Guides (UK)
• Only check the Consider patch surface moments only property if you want to consider the opposite surface (except where a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Situations when you need to check this option should be very rare.
To place the patch at the centroid of a specific panel:
1.
Ensure the Create Patch at Centroid property is checked.
2.
Click anywhere within the required panel. Tekla Structural Designer will add a patch at the panel centroid.
To place the patch elsewhere within a specific panel:
Ensure the Create Patch at Centroid property is unchecked.
• To define the patch by its corners, leave the Define corner points property checked and click to select the first, and then the second corner of the patch. Tekla Structural
Designer will add a patch at the chosen position.
• To define the patch by its centre, uncheck the Define corner points property and click where you want the centre of the patch to be within the required panel. Tekla
Structural Designer will add a patch at the chosen position.
To create multiple centroid patches by windowing:
1.
Ensure the Create Patch at Centroid property is checked.
2.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the panels within which you want to define patches.
3.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
4.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating patches).
5.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the creation area release the mouse button and Tekla Structural Designer will create patches at the centroids of all the panels that are totally within the rubber rectangle.
How do I edit the properties of an existing patch?
442
User Guides
1.
Hover the cursor over the patch to be edited.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
Press the <down arrow> cursor key until the patch name is highlighted in the
Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Press <Enter>
One of the below property sets should be displayed, (appropriate to the type of patch selected).
•
•
•
•
4.
Edit the properties as required.
• Use the Lx and Ly properties to specify the patch size.
• Use the Surface property to specify the layer.
• Check the Autodesign property in order to have the reinforcement automatically designed.
• Use the Consider Strips property to specify the directions of reinforcement to be designed.
• Use the Reinforcement property to specify the type and direction of reinforcement to be designed.
• Define the required Width of each strip.
• Specify whether each strip is to be designed for the average, or maximum
Design Force within it.
How do I resize an existing patch?
1.
Hover the cursor over the patch to be resized.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
Press the <down arrow> cursor key until the patch name is highlighted in the
Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Press <Enter>
4.
Hover the cursor the patch edge, or patch corner to be adjusted.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
5.
Press the <down arrow> cursor key until the Edge #, or Node # is highlighted in the
Select Entity tooltip.
443
User Guides (UK)
6.
Press <Enter>
7.
Click and drag to move the selected edge or corner.
Design Patches
Design Patches
Assuming the slab panel designs resulting from the Design Slabs
process are satisfactory you can then proceed to Design Patches.
Patch design should follow panel design as the additional patch reinforcement requirement takes account of the existing background level of reinforcement provided by the panels.
For each strip within each patch, A s,reqd
is determined and compared with A s,prov
- the patch reinforcement + the background reinforcement (when requested and allowed).
How do I design or check all patches in the model?
1.
Click Design
Then click Design Patches ( )
All patches in the model are designed or checked automatically (in accordance with their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I check all patches in a single floor?
1.
Open a 2D View of the floor to be designed.
2.
Right click and choose Check Patches.
All patches in the floor have their reinforcement checked (regardless of their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I design all patches in a single floor?
1.
Open a 2D View of the floor to be designed.
2.
Right click and choose Design Patches.
All patches in the floor are designed - potentially picking new reinforcement,
(regardless of their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
444
User Guides
How do I check an individual patch?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the patch to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the patch name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Check Slab Patch.
The results of the check are displayed in a dialog on screen.
How do I design an individual patch?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the patch to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the patch name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Design Slab Patch.
The results of the design are displayed in a dialog on screen.
Design Slabs
Design Slabs
Once any required patches have been placed, you can determine the top and bottom reinforcement requirements in all the slab panel areas that lie outside of the patch areas. (Because patch areas are excluded from panel design, patches should be placed before slab panels are designed.)
Before the slabs can be checked you need to have run an analysis to establish the slab design moments - this can be achieved by running any of the design processes ( Design
Concrete, Design All etc.)
How do I design or check all slab panels in the model?
1.
Click Design
Then click Design Slabs ( )
All panels in the model are designed or checked automatically (in accordance with their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I check all slab panels in a single floor?
445
User Guides (UK)
1.
Open a 2D View of the floor to be designed.
2.
Right click and choose Check Slabs.
All slab panels in the floor have their reinforcement checked (regardless of their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I design all slab panels in a single floor?
1.
Open a 2D View of the floor to be designed.
2.
Right click and choose Design Slabs.
All slab panels in the floor are designed - potentially picking new reinforcement,
(regardless of their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I check an individual slab panel?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the panel to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the slab panel name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Check Panel.
The results of the check are displayed in a dialog on screen.
How do I design an individual slab panel?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the panel to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the slab panel name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Design Panel.
The results of the design are displayed in a dialog on screen.
Punching Shear
Punching Shear
In Tekla Structural Designer the Add Check command can be used to apply punching shear checks at any:
• column/supported slab intersection
• wall/supported slab intersection
• transfer column/supporting slab intersection
• transfer wall/supporting slab intersection
446
User Guides
• slab point load
The Design Punching Shear command is then used to calculate an applied load on the slab accounting for the difference in column/wall axial load and bending, and check the slab shear stresses accounting for the reinforcement present (background and column/general patches).
Additionally for checks at columns, or at point load positions, provided the Head Code is
Eurocode or ACI the punching reinforcement can be designed as an orthogonal or circular arrangement of stud rails.
Column head drops and the presence of openings within a certain distance of the punching shear boundary are taken into account in the calculations.
Since the checks are dependent on using the correct levels of slab reinforcement,
(typically provided by patch reinforcement) - punching should only be checked after the patches have been designed.
Punching Check axis orientation
When a Punching Check is applied to a column, the check Y and Z axes are automatically orientated to align with the column Major and Minor axes. (The two axis systems are locked together; if the column is rotated, the punching check axes also rotate).
When a Punching Check is applied to a point load, you must manually define the punching check Z axis orientation by specifying the ‘Point Load Orientation’ in relation to Global Y.
447
User Guides (UK)
Point Load Orientation (along with Point Load Breadth, and Depth) are not applicable when the check is applied to a column.
How do I create a Punching Check item?
Punching Check items, (the objects to which the punching shear information and calculations are attached), are created using the Add Check command. They can be created in both 2D and 3D Views.
1.
Click Design
Then click Add Check ( )
2.
The Punching Check (unsaved) Properties
set is displayed
- check that the location for the slab tension reinforcement is correctly specified, then set the remaining properties as required.
(The Point Load properties are irrelevant unless you are adding the check to a point load position).
3.
To create the check, either:
• Hover the cursor over the required column node, wall node, or point load, until a
‘Pick Punch Check Location’ tool tip appears, then click to add the Punching Check item at the selected node, or
• Click and drag a box to add Punching Check items to all potential check locations within the box.
How do I specify stud rail reinforcement?
For checks at columns or under slab point loads; provided the Head Code is Eurocode or ACI, then an orthogonal or circular arrangement of stud rails can be specified and then either checked or designed as required.
1.
Create a punching check item.
2.
In the Punching Check (unsaved) Properties
set, check the option to use reinforcement
- choose whether to autodesign the reinforcement, then set the reinforcement properties as required.
Once the check has been placed, by right clicking on the punching check item you can choose Edit Reinforcement in order to graphically modify the punching reinforcement arrangement.
How do I edit the properties of an existing Punching Check item?
448
User Guides
1.
Hover the cursor over the punching check item to be edited.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
Press the <down arrow> cursor key until the punching check item name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
• Press <Enter>
The Punching Check Properties set for the item should be displayed.
• Alternatively, right click and choose Edit Reinforcement. (Not available for checks applied to walls.)
The same properties are displayed graphically in a dialog.
3.
Edit the properties as required.
How do I check punching for all Punching Check items?
1.
Click Design
Then click Design Punching Shear ( )
Punching shear checks are performed for all Punching Check items in the model.
Punching Shear will be flagged as beyond scope if the Punching Check item does not connect to a Flat Slab.
How do I check punching for an individual Punching Check item?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the Punching Check item to be checked.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the Punching Check item name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Check Punching.
The results of the check are displayed in a dialog on screen.
How do I design stud rail reinforcement for an individual Punching Check item?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the Punching Check item to be checked.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the Punching Check item name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Design Punching.
The results of the design are displayed in a dialog on screen.
449
User Guides (UK)
Floor Vibration
The Add Check ( ) command in the Floor Vibration Group can be used to apply a floor vibration check over a user defined rectangular or polygon shaped slab area.
In order to create the check a primary beam, secondary beam, and critical slab item have to be identified; associated data also has to be specified before the Check Floor
Vibration command can be used to perform the calculation.
How do I create a Floor Vibration Check item?
Floor Vibration Check items, (the objects to which the floor vibration check information and calculations are attached), are created using the Add Check command. They can only be created in 2D Views.
1.
Click Design
Then from the Floor Vibrations group click Add Check ( )
2.
The Floor Vibration Check Properties set is displayed, in the set:
• Choose to define a Rectangular or Polygon area of slab,
• If rectangular - accept the angle of 0 degrees if the area is orthogonal to the global axes, or enter the angle at which the rectangle is to be drawn.
• create and - check that the location for the slab tension reinforcement is correctly specified, then set the remaining properties as required.
(The Point Load properties are irrelevant unless you are adding the check to a point load position).
3.
To create the check area, either:
• If rectangular - click once to define the first corner, then drag, then click a second time to define the opposite corner
• If polygon - click as required to define the polygon, (ensuring that you close the shape by clicking on the first point a second time).
4.
The prompt changes to ‘Create Vibration Check: PrimaryBeam’
• Hover the cursor over the required beam, until it becomes highlighted, then click to select it.
(the beam reference should appear in the Properties window)
5.
The prompt changes to ‘Create Vibration Check: SecondaryBeam’
• Hover the cursor over the required beam, until it becomes highlighted, then click to select it.
(again, the beam reference should appear in the Properties window)
6.
The prompt changes to ‘Create Vibration Check: CriticalSlab’
450
User Guides
• Hover the cursor over the required slab, until it becomes highlighted, then click to select it.
(the slab reference should appear in the Properties window)
• Provided that a composite slab item has been identified as the critical slab, the critical slab item properties are automatically defined, for other slab item types you are required to input these values manually.
7.
The prompt changes to ‘Create Vibration Check: ConfirmCreate’
• Before confirming the check, you should review the check data in the Properties
Window.
8.
Once all the properties are displayed as required, left click anywhere in the Scene
View in order to create the check.
• The primary beam, secondary beam and critical slab are shown highlighted and the prompt changes to allowing you to continue creating further checks if required:
• If no further checks are required, press [Esc] to exit from the command.
How do I create a check which considers two or three adjoining spans?
The process is identical to that required for single spans, except that in the Primary, and/or Secondary Beam Adjoining Spans droplist you should select Two Span, or Three
Span as required.
If the Two Span option is selected:
• When you hover the cursor to select the beam, only beams of two or more spans are available to be highlighted,
• When a beam is highlighted, note that it is the beam directly under the cursor that will be nominated as the ‘critical beam’, the second highlighted beam will be nominated as the ‘adjoining beam’.
• Note also that the second highlighted beam (the ‘adjoining beam’) will be the beam closest to the cursor position, hence to highlight the adjoining beam at a particular end of the critical beam, simply move the cursor toward that end of the critical beam.
If the Three Span option is selected:
• When you hover the cursor to select the beam, only beams of three or more spans are available to be highlighted,
• When a beam is highlighted, note that it is the beam directly under the cursor that will be nominated as the ‘critical beam’, the second highlighted beam will be nominated as the ‘adjoining beam’.
• Note also that the second highlighted beam (the ‘adjoining beam’) will be the beam closest to the cursor position, hence to highlight the adjoining beam at a particular end of the critical beam, simply move the cursor toward that end of the critical beam.
451
User Guides (UK)
How do I edit the properties of an existing Floor Vibration Check item?
In order to select the check for editing, ensure that Floor Vibration Checks have been set to be displayed in Scene Content.
1.
Hover the cursor over the slab area where the Floor Vibration Check item exists.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
Press the <down arrow> cursor key until the floor vibration check item name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Press <Enter>
The Floor Vibration Check Properties set for the item should be displayed.
4.
Edit the properties as required.
How do I check vibration for all Floor Vibration Check items?
1.
Click Design
Then click Check Floor Vibration ( )
Floor vibration checks are performed for all Floor Vibration Check items in the model.
How do I check floor vibration for an individual Floor Vibration Check item?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the Floor Vibration Check item to be checked.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the Floor Vibration Check item name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Check Floor Vibration.
The results of the check are displayed in a dialog on screen.
452
User Guides
Foundations Guide
The Foundations toolbar contains the commands necessary to model and design both
isolated and mat foundations.
Foundations toolbar
The Foundations toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Options
Catalogue
Pad Base
Column
Strip Base Wall
Pile Cap Column
Design Pad
Bases
Creates a pad base under a column.
See How do I create a pad base column?
Creates a strip base under a wall.
How do I create a strip base wall?
Creates a pile cap under a column.
See How do I create a pile cap?
Performs the design of all pad bases in the model.
See How do I design or check all pad and strip bases in the model?
Design Pile Caps Performs the design of all isolated foundations in the model.
See How do I design or check all pile caps in the model?
453
User Guides (UK)
Strip
Area
Bays
Minimum Area
Rectangular
Column Drop
(on drop list)
Mat Opening
(on drop list)
Creates a minimum area mat foundation under selected columns/walls.
See How do I create a minimum area or rectangular mat?
Creates a rectangular mat foundation under selected columns/walls.
See How do I create a minimum area or rectangular mat?
Creates a strip mat foundation.
See How do I create a strip mat?
Creates an area mat foundation.
See How do I create an area mat?
Creates a mat foundation within an enclosed area defined by grids.
See How do I create a mat within bays?
Creates a column drop which adopts the
specified column drop properties
Mat Overhang
Mat Split
Mat Join
Pile
Pile Array
(on drop list)
Creates a mat opening which adopts the
specified slab opening and mat opening properties
Creates a mat overhang which adopts the
specified slab overhang and mat overhang properties
This command is used to split an existing mat.
This command is used to join an existing mat.
Creates a single pile which adopts the specified
Creates a pile array which adopts the specified
454
Design Mats
Design Patches
Design
Punching Shear
Add Check
Patch Column
(on drop list)
Patch Beam
(on drop list)
Patch Wall
(on drop list)
Patch Panel
(on drop list)
Designs or checks reinforcement in all mats that are not inside patches.
Designs or checks slab reinforcement in all slab areas inside patches.
Creates a column patch which adopts the
specified Column Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a column patch?
Creates a beam patch which adopts the
specified Beam Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a beam patch?
Creates a wall patch which adopts the specified
Wall Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a wall patch?
Creates a panel patch which adopts the
specified Panel Patch (unsaved) Properties
See How do I create a panel patch?
Performs the punching shear checks.
See How do I check punching for all Punching
Used to add a punching shear check around a column or wall perimeter.
See How do I create a Punching Check item?
Related topics
•
Commands on the ribbon toolbars
Foundation Options
Pile Type Catalogue
In order to use piles, you must first set up a catalogue of pile types.
User Guides
455
User Guides (UK)
How do I set up the pile type catalogue?
1.
Click Foundations > Catalogue ( )
2.
The Pile Catalogue is displayed - from here you can add, edit or delete individual pile types.
3.
Click
Add... to enter the Pile Type Properties
Pad and Strip Base modelling
• pad base - an isolated foundation that supports a single column
• strip base - an isolated foundation that supports a single wall
How do I create a pad base column?
1.
Click Foundations > Pad Base Column ( )
2.
The Pad Base Column Properties set is displayed - specify the properties as
required.
To place a pad base under a specific column:
1.
Click anywhere on the required column. Tekla Structural Designer will add a pad base under the column.
To create multiple pad bases by windowing:
1.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the columns under which you want to define bases.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating bases).
4.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the creation area release the mouse button and Tekla Structural Designer will create bases under all columns which are totally within the rubber rectangle.
How do I create a strip base wall?
1.
Click Foundations > Strip Base Wall ( )
2.
The Strip Base Wall Properties set is displayed - specify the properties as required.
To place a strip base under a specific wall:
456
User Guides
1.
Click anywhere on the required wall. Tekla Structural Designer will add a strip base under the wall.
To create multiple strip bases by windowing:
1.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the walls under which you want to define bases.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating bases).
4.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the creation area release the mouse button and Tekla Structural Designer will create bases under all walls which are totally within the rubber rectangle.
Pile Cap modelling
• pile cap - an isolated piled foundation that supports a single column
How do I create a pile cap?
Before a pile cap can be placed, the Pile Type Catalogue must contain at least
one pile type.
1.
Click Foundations > Pile Cap Column ( )
2.
The Pile Cap Column Properties set is displayed - specify the properties as required.
To place a pile cap under a specific column:
1.
Click anywhere on the required column. Tekla Structural Designer will add a pile cap under the column.
To create multiple pile caps by windowing:
1.
Move the cursor to one corner of an imaginary box which will encompass the columns under which you want to define pile caps.
2.
Click and hold the left mouse button.
3.
Drag to the diametrically opposite corner of the box (you will see a rubber rectangle on the screen which follows your mouse movements and helps you to check the area in which you are creating bases).
457
User Guides (UK)
4.
Once the rubber rectangle encompasses the creation area release the mouse button and Tekla Structural Designer will create pile caps under all columns which are totally within the rubber rectangle.
User Defined Pile Arrangement
User Defined Pile Arrangement
The Pile Arrangement dialog is used to modify the pile arrangement in a pile cap.
If required a ‘user defined’ arrangement can be specified, (which can be particularly useful for checking a pile cap where the pile positions on site do not exactly match the originally specified arrangement).
Pile Arrangement dialog
Fields
User Defined Arrangement
When checked, you have full control to define the pile configuration you require; when unchecked, the number of piles specified are arranged at the defined spacing with the pile cap length and width being determined accordingly.
Number of piles
For standard arrangements you can select the number of piles required from the drop list. For user defined arrangements use the ‘Add’ button instead.
Pile type
Select an existing type from the catalog, or create a new pile type.
Principal direction
The pile cap is aligned to the X or Y direction of the support underneath the column.
458
User Guides
Spacing
The pile spacing determines the arrangement, but does not apply to user defined arrangements.
Length
Length of the pile cap
Width
Width of the pile cap
Eccentricity Y
Eccentricity in Y of the pile cap centroid from the centroid of the column it supports.
Eccentricity X
Eccentricity in X of the pile cap centroid from the centroid of the column it supports.
Pile Positioning Table (only editable for user defined arrangements)
Ref
The individual pile references as displayed on the accompanying diagram.
X
Eccentricity in X of the pile centroid from the centroid of the pile cap.
Y
Eccentricity in Y of the pile centroid from the centroid of the pile cap.
Buttons
Adds a new pile to the Pile Positioning Table.
Deletes the pile currently highlighted in the Pile Positioning Table.
How do I open the Pile Arrangement dialog?
1.
Select the pile cap to be edited.
2.
In the Pile Cap Properties, click ‘Pile Arrangement’
3.
Click the box.
button located at the right side of the ‘Pile Arrangement’ property
4.
The Pile Arrangement dialog is displayed.
How do I create a user defined pile arrangement?
1.
Select the pile cap to be edited.
2.
Open the Pile Arrangement dialog .
459
User Guides (UK)
3.
Click ‘User Defined Arrangement’.
4.
If the selected pile cap had ‘auto-design piles’ turned on, you will be prompted to turn it off - click ‘Yes’ to do this and proceed.
5.
Specify the pile configuration as required - when the preview picture displays the arrangement as required, click ‘OK’.
Isolated Foundation design
Before bases and pile caps can be designed you need to have run an analysis to establish the base design forces - either by running Analyse All (Static), or by running any of the design processes ( Design Concrete, Design All etc.).
Once this is complete, isolated foundations can then be batch designed from the toolbar, or designed individually from the right click context menu. Grouping can be employed to rationalie the designs produced.
How do I design or check all pad and strip bases in the model?
• Click Foundations > Design Pad Bases
All pad and strip bases in the model are designed or checked automatically (in accordance with their individual ‘auto-design’ settings). All active Static and RSA combinations are considered.
How do I design or check all pile caps in the model?
• Click Foundations > Design Pile Caps
All pile caps in the model are designed or checked automatically (in accordance with their individual ‘auto-design’ settings). All active Static and RSA combinations are considered.
How do I check an individual isolated foundation?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the foundation to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the foundation name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Check Member.
The results of the check are displayed in a dialog on screen.
How do I design an individual isolated foundation?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the foundation to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
460
User Guides
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the foundation name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Design Member.
The results of the design are displayed in a dialog on screen.
Mat Foundation modelling
Mat foundations support multiple columns and walls - they can be ground bearing, supported on piles, or both. The following different tools for creating mat foundations are provided:
• minimum area - creates an overhanging polygonal mat so as to minimise the area required
• rectangular - creates an overhanging rectangular mat by one of two methods
• at a specified angle to the global axes, or
• smallest rectangular area (aligned to the global axes)
• strip - creates a constant width mat along a series of points that are not restricted to being in the same line
• area - creates an overhanging polygonal mat by identifying points around its outline
• bay - creates a mat with no overhang by clicking within a closed grid area
• pile - creates a individual piles underneath existing mats
• pile array - creates an array of piles underneath existing mats
How do I create a minimum area or rectangular mat?
1.
Click Foundations > Minimum Area ( ), or Rectangular ( ),
2.
The create foundation mat properties set is displayed - specify the properties as
required.
To create a mat in a 3D view:
1.
Click anywhere on the first column or wall to be supported.
2.
Continue clicking on subsequent columns or walls as required.
3.
Either click on one of the supported members, or press <Enter> to create the mat.
To create a mat in a 2D view:
1.
To select multiple walls - click and drag from right to left to encompass those walls under which you want to define the mat.
461
User Guides (UK)
2.
To select multiple columns - click and drag from left to right to encompass those columns under which you want to define the mat.
3.
To add individual columns and wall - click on each member individually.
4.
Either click on one of the supported members, or press <Enter> to create the mat.
How do I create a strip mat?
1.
Open a 2D view at the base level where the strip is to be placed.
2.
Click Foundations > Strip( )
3.
The create foundation mat properties set is displayed - specify the strip width and
other properties as required.
4.
Pick the strip start point
5.
Click on subsequent points to define the strip as required.
6.
Either click once again on the last point, or press <Enter> to create the strip.
How do I create an area mat?
1.
Click Foundations > Area ( )
2.
The create foundation mat properties set is displayed - specify the properties as
required.
3.
Pick a construction point at a corner of the area.
4.
Pick subsequent construction points for each remaining corner.
5.
Either click once again on the last point, or press <Enter> to create the mat.
How do I create a mat within bays?
1.
Click Foundations > Bays
2.
The create foundation mat properties set is displayed - specify the properties as
required.
462
User Guides
3.
Select a bay by either by clicking within an enclosed area defined by grids; or by dragging around the area required.
How do I create a piled mat?
How do I create a piled mat?
A piled mat can either be supported on piles alone, or by a combination of ground springs and piles.
Piles can either be placed individually at specific locations within the mat, or an array of equally spaced piles can be created.
How do I specify if a piled mat is ground bearing?
1.
Define the slab mat using any of the existing mat creation methods.
2.
In the slab item properties, review the ‘Soil Parameters’ that have been applied.
Either uncheck ‘Use Ground Bearing Springs’ if the mat is to be supported on piles alone, or leave it checked to support the mat by a combination of ground springs and piles.
How do I place an individual pile in a mat?
1.
Click Foundations > Pile
2.
In the 2D or 3D View, click on the slab mat in which the pile is to be placed.
3.
If defining an inclined pile; specify the pile direction in the pile properties window.
4.
In the 2D or 3D View, select the pile position.
How do I place a pile array in a mat?
1.
Click Foundations > Pile Array
2.
Specify the Pile Array Properties to define the pile type, spacing and, for raking piles
the pile direction.
You can graphically preview the array by hovering the cursor over a mat.
3.
Click on an individual mat, or box around multiple mats to apply the pile array.
The array is displayed on the mats that have been selected.
4.
If required, continue to add further mats to the selection, or to finish selecting, click once more on one of the mats that have already been selected.
5.
Select the reference point from which piles in the array are laid out.
463
User Guides (UK)
The piles are placed in the mat. At this point you can either press Esc to finish the command, or you can continue to place the same array on additional mats.
How do specify the pile direction of an inclined pile?
The pile direction is specified in the pile properties window in using one of the following methods:
To specify the direction as a vector:
Whilst any values can be entered, the Z value of the vector must be a negative number, as this ensures that the highest point of the pile is at the node where it connects to the mat foundation.
1.
Enter the X component of the vector, (or leave it as 0 if you don’t want the pile to slope in the global X direction).
2.
Enter the Y component of the vector, (or leave it as 0 if you don’t want the pile to slope in the global Y direction).
3.
Enter the Z component of the vector, (must be negative).
For an incline of 45 degrees in positive X:
X= 1.0, Y= 0.0, Z= -1.0
For an incline of 30 degrees in negative Y:
X= 0.0, Y= 0.5, Z= -1.0
To specify the direction as an angular measurement:
The direction can only be entered in this way when a pile is first positioned, (when a pile is edited its direction can only be defined as a vector).
464
User Guides
1.
In the pile properties window, check the ‘Direction by Angles’ box.
2.
Enter the inclination of the pile from vertical.
3.
Enter the azimuth, (i.e. the as a horizontal angle measured clockwise about positive global Z).
4.
Enter the rotation about the piles longitudinal axis. (Since the pile is only checked for axial capacity, the rotation angle has no effect on the pile checks, but you could still use this to vary how the moment and shear force values are shown.)
For an incline of 45 degrees in positive X: inclination = 45 degrees, azimuth = 90 degrees
For an incline of 30 degrees in negative Y: inclination = 30 deg, azimuth = 0.0 degrees
Mat Foundation design
Since a mat foundation is simply a type of slab - once it has been created, the same procedures applied to slab design can be followed:
• Patches should first be placed over columns, beams, walls or panels as required.
(See: Patch Creation and Editing )
•
) command is used to design mat panel areas that lie outside of these patch areas. If the mat is supported on piles these will also be designed at this stage.
•
The patches themselves are designed using the Design Patches (
) command.
•
Once Punching Shear checks have been placed under columns supported by the
mat, these can be checked via the Design Punching Shear ( ) command.
465
User Guides (UK)
Design Mats
Once any required patches have been placed, you can determine the top and bottom reinforcement requirements in the mats that lie outside of the patch areas. (Because patch areas are excluded from panel design, patches should be placed before mats are designed.)
Before the mats can be designed you have to run an analysis to establish the design moments - either by running Analyse All (Static), or by running any of the design processes ( Design Concrete, Design All etc.).
All active Static and RSA combinations are considered in the design process.
How do I design or check all mats in the model?
1.
Click Foundations
Then click Design Mats ( )
All mats in the model are designed or checked automatically (in accordance with their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I check all mats in a single floor?
1.
Open a 2D View of the floor to be designed.
2.
Right click and choose Check Slabs.
All slab panels in the floor have their reinforcement checked (regardless of their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I design all mats in a single floor?
1.
Open a 2D View of the floor to be designed.
2.
Right click and choose Design Slabs.
All mats in the floor are designed - potentially picking new reinforcement,
(regardless of their individual ‘auto-design’ settings).
How do I check an individual mat?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the mat to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the mat name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Check Panel.
The results of the check are displayed in a dialog on screen.
466
User Guides
How do I design an individual mat?
1.
Hover the cursor over the top of the mat to be designed.
The Select Entity tooltip should appear.
2.
If necessary press the <down arrow> cursor key until the mat name is highlighted in the Select Entity tooltip.
3.
Right click and from the context menu pick Design Panel.
The results of the design are displayed in a dialog on screen.
Design Review Guide
The Review View opens automatically at the end of the structure design process, it can also be accessed at any time by clicking in the Status Bar.
In this view by selecting from the Review toolbar , you can graphically display the design
status for members or slabs; you can also interrogate, and/or modify a variety of model parameters and properties.
In addition, by clicking (Tabular Data) from this toolbar, you can open a Review
Data view, from where by making appropriate selections from the Review Data toolbar
you can display tables of Sway Results, Design Summaries and Material Lists.
Review toolbar
The Review toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Design Type
(1st drop list)
Status
Use the Design Type drop list to choose which design type to display results for: Static, RSA, or
Combined.
Each member is colour coded to indicate its design status (Pass, Fail, Warning, Error,
Beyond Scope, Unknown.)
467
User Guides (UK)
Ratio
Depth Ratio
Foundation
Design Status
Each member is colour coded to indicate its design utilisation ratio.
Each beam is colour coded to indicate its span to depth utilisation ratio.
Each foundation is colour coded to indicate its design status (Pass, Fail, Warning, Error,
Beyond Scope, Unknown.)
See Foundation Design and Pile Design Status
Each foundation is colour coded to indicate its design utilisation ratio.
See Foundation Design and Pile Design Ratios
Foundation
Design Ratio
Piles Status
Piles Ratio
Slab/Mat Design
Status
Slab/Mat Design
Ratio
Each pile is colour coded to indicate its design status (Pass, Fail, Warning, Error, Beyond
Scope, Unknown.)
See Foundation Design and Pile Design Status
Each pile is colour coded to indicate its design utilisation ratio.
See Foundation Design and Pile Design Ratios
Each slab panel is colour coded to indicate its design status (Pass, Fail, Warning, Error,
Beyond Scope, Unknown.) for the selected condition chosen from the droplist.
Each slab panel is colour coded to indicate its design utilisation ratio (for the selected condition chosen from the droplist).
Slab/Mat Design
droplist
By default the overall slab design status or ratio is displayed, however by selecting a different option from the droplist the status or ratio can be displayed for a specific condition instead (Reinforcement, Top X, Top Y, Bottom
X, Bottom Y, Span Depth.)
468
SFRS Members
Diaphragm
On\Off
Fixed\Pinned
Auto\Check
Design
Restrained
\Unrestrained
Braced \Bracing
Each member is colour coded to indicate the
SFRS settings indicated in the Properties
Window.
Clicking on a member updates its SFRS settings to match what you have set in the Properties
Window.
See Reviewing Seismic Force Resisting Systems
Each member is colour coded to indicate its
Autodesign setting (On, or Off).
Clicking on a member toggles its setting.
Each diaphragm node is colour coded to indicate its setting (Excluded, or Included).
Clicking on a diaphragm node toggles its setting.
Each member is colour coded to indicate its restraints setting (N/A, Unrestrained, Partially
Restrained, Fully Restrained).
Clicking on a member toggles its setting between those that are applicable.
Each concrete wall and column is colour coded to indicate its braced setting (Braced, Bracing) in the direction indicated in the Properties
Window.
Clicking on a concrete wall or column toggles its setting between those that are applicable.
Each member is colour coded to indicate its end fixity setting (N/A, Pinned, Fixed, Moment,
Mixed, Cantilever).
Clicking on a member toggles its fixity setting between those that are applicable.
User Guides
469
User Guides (UK)
BIM Status
Report Filter
Sub Structures
Slab
Reinforcement
Steel
Copy Properties
Each member is colour coded to indicate its
BIM status.
Each slab or mat is colour coded to indicate the reinforcement provided in the layer/direction indicated in the Properties Window.
Clicking on a slab updates its reinforcement to match what you have set in the Properties
Window.
Each steel member is colour coded to indicate its section and grade.
Clicking on a steel member updates its section and/or grade to match what you have set in the Properties Window.
After firstly selecting a parameter in the
Properties Window you are able to copy it from a designated source member to valid target members.
This command is only accessible once member filters have been defined.
Each member is colour coded to indicate if it is included in the currently selected filter.
Clicking a member toggles its inclusion status.
Each member is colour coded to indicate if it is included in any Sub Structures.
By making selections in the Properties
Window, new sub structures can be created and existing ones edited.
470
Punch Check
Position
Concrete Beam
Flanges
Each punching check item is colour coded to indicate its Loaded Perimeter position (Corner,
Edge Z, Edge Y, Internal).
Clicking on a punching check item or boxing around it toggles its setting.
Each concrete beam is colour coded to indicate its if flanges are considered and flange widths determined.
See Use of beam flanges
Column Splices Potential splice locations in steel columns are colour coded to indicate where splices exist.
Gravity Only
Property Sets
UDA
Tabular Data
Each steel beam and column is colour coded to indicate where its gravity only setting.
Each member or panel is colour coded to indicate if it has had a saved Property Set applied to it.
Each member and panel is colour coded to indicate the value of the chosen attribute in the Properties Window.
Displays the Review Data toolbar
which allows spreadsheets to be displayed for further review.
See Working with the Review Data view
Review Data toolbar
The Review Data toolbar contains the following groups:
Button Description
User Guides
471
User Guides (UK)
View Type
(drop list)
Material Type
Characteristic
Construction
Fabrication
Content
Filter
(drop list)
Choose the spreadsheet to be displayed by selecting from this drop list:
•
How do I display Sway Results in a Review
•
How do I display a Design Summary in a
•
How do I display a Material List in a Review
Choose the material type to be displayed, (only one material at a time).
Choose the member type to be displayed, (only one member at a time).
For steel members only - choose the construction type to be displayed.
Choose the fabrication type to be displayed.
The choices available depend on the material and characteristic selections.
For the Material List spreadsheet for concrete only - Choose the content to be displayed.
Use the drop lists to apply group based or geometric filters to the data.
Working with the Review View
Setting the Design Type to Review
The Design Type drop list on the Review toolbar enables you to focus on a specific design type (Static, RSA, or Combined) when reviewing the member, foundation and slab designs.
Reviewing Member Design
Reviewing Member Design
Member Design Status
Colour codes are used to graphically display the design status of each member.
472
User Guides
The following classifications are applied:
Status
Unknown
Beyond
Scope
Error
Description
Prior to being designed, the member status is set to unknown.
Design of this member is beyond the scope of the program.
Warning
Fail
Pass
The member can not currently be designed because an error has occurred.
Although the member has passed the design checks, one or more warnings have been issued.
The user should review these warnings before deciding if any further action is required.
The member has failed one or more design checks.
The member has passed all design checks.
Member Design Ratio
Colour codes are used to graphically display the design ratio of each member. The ‘N/A’ colour code is assigned to those members that are either beyond scope or have yet to be designed.
473
User Guides (UK)
Depth Ratio
All steel and concrete beams are colour coded to indicate their span to depth utilisation ratios.
Reviewing Foundation and Pile Design
Reviewing Foundation and Pile Design
Foundation Design and Pile Design Status
Colour codes are used to graphically display the design status.
The following classifications are applied:
Status Description
Unknown
Beyond
Scope
Error
Prior to being designed, the status is set to unknown.
Design of this foundation/pile is beyond the scope of the program.
Warning
The foundation/pile can not currently be designed because an error has occurred.
Although the design checks have passed, one or more warnings have been issued.
The user should review these warnings before deciding if any further action is required.
474
User Guides
Fail
Pass
The design checks have failed.
All design checks have passed.
Foundation Design and Pile Design Ratios
Colour codes are used to graphically display the design ratios. The ‘N/A’ colour code is assigned to those foundations or piles that are either beyond scope or have yet to be designed.
Reviewing Slab Design
Reviewing Slab Design
Slab/Mat Design Status
Colour codes are used to graphically display the design status of each slab panel.
The following classifications are applied:
Status Description
Unknown
Beyond
Scope
Error
Prior to being designed, the slab panel status is set to unknown.
Design of this slab panel is beyond the scope of the program.
Warning
Fail
Pass
The slab panel can not currently be designed because an error has occurred.
Although the slab panel has passed the design checks, one or more warnings have been issued.
The user should review these warnings before deciding if any further action is required.
The slab panel has failed one or more design checks.
The slab panel has passed all design checks.
Slab/Mat Design Ratio
Colour codes are used to graphically display the design ratio of each slab panel. The
‘N/A’ colour code is assigned to those slab panels that are either beyond scope or have yet to be designed.
Slab/Mat Design droplist
The droplist is used in combination with the Slab Design Status and Ratio buttons to filter the review information.
475
User Guides (UK)
• Overall - the governing Top X, Top Y, Bottom X, Bottom Y, or span depth result is displayed
• Reinforcement - the governing Top X, Top Y, Bottom X, or Bottom Y result is displayed
• Top X - the result is only displayed for top reinforcement in the X direction
• Top Y - the result is only displayed for top reinforcement in the Y direction
• Bottom X - the result is only displayed for bottom reinforcement in the X direction
• Bottom Y - the result is only displayed for bottom reinforcement in the Y direction
• Span Depth - the span to depth result is displayed
Reviewing Seismic Force Resisting Systems (SFRS)
The SFRS Members command provides a means to graphically review and modify any seismic force resisting systems (SFRS) that have been defined in the model.
To review the direction of existing SFRS members:
1.
In the Properties Window, choose the Review Direction mode.
The SFRS direction assigned to each member in each SFRS is displayed.
To review the SFRS type of existing SFRS members:
1.
In the Properties Window, choose the Review Type mode.
The SFRS type assigned to each member in each SFRS is displayed.
To toggle the direction of existing SFRS members:
1.
In the Properties Window, choose the Toggle Direction mode.
If you require to toggle an individual stack/span of the member, rather than all stacks/spans; uncheck ‘whole element’ in the Properties Window.
2.
Either click on an individual member, or box around multiple members to toggle the
SFRS direction assigned to the next direction in the list.
To update the direction of existing SFRS members:
1.
In the Properties Window, choose the Update Direction mode, then choose the direction required.
If you require to update the direction for an individual stack/span of the member, rather than all stacks/spans; uncheck ‘whole element’ in the Properties Window.
2.
Either click on an individual member, or box around multiple members to assign the chosen SFRS direction.
476
User Guides
To set, or update the type of SFRS members:
1.
In the Properties Window, choose the Update Type mode, then choose the
SFRSType required.
If you require to update the type for an individual stack/span of the member, rather than all stacks/spans; uncheck ‘whole element’ in the Properties Window.
2.
Either click on an individual member, or box around multiple members to assign the chosen SFRS type.
To set, or update both the type and direction of SFRS members:
1.
In the Properties Window, choose the Update Type & Direction mode.
2.
Choose the Direction required.
3.
Choose the SFRSType required.
If you require to update the type for an individual stack/span of the member, rather than all stacks/spans; uncheck ‘whole element’ in the Properties Window.
4.
Either click on an individual member, or box around multiple members to assign the chosen SFRS type and direction.
To remove members from SFRS:
1.
In the Properties Window, choose the Remove from SFRS mode.
If you require to remove an individual stack/span of the member, rather than all stacks/spans; uncheck ‘whole element’ in the Properties Window.
2.
Either click on an individual member, or box around multiple members to remove them from the SFRS.
Show and Alter State
Show and Alter State
Auto\Check Design
The autodesign setting for members can be toggled graphically as follows:
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Auto\Check Design
Members and slabs are colour coded to show their autodesign setting.
The Properties Window shows the currently selected ‘toggle’ mode.
• Toggle - clicking on a member/slab switches auto design on/off
477
User Guides (UK)
• SetOn - clicking on a member/slab only sets auto design on
• SetOff - clicking on a member/slab only sets auto design off
The Properties Window also has a ‘Stud Auto Layout’ check box for composite beams.
[M] on the keyboard is also a shortcut key for changing the toggle mode in the Properties Window.
3.
To modify autodesign settings, first choose the appropriate mode in the properties window, then either:
• Click on an individual member to toggle/set its Autodesign setting.
• Drag a box from left to right to toggle/set the Autodesign setting for all members totally enclosed by the box.
• Drag a box from right to left to toggle/set the Autodesign setting for all members that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
4.
For composite beams only, check the ‘Stud Auto Layout’ box in the Properties
Window if you want to toggle/set the connector Auto-layout setting in addition to the
Autodesign setting.
Diaphragm On\Off
The ‘Include in diaphragm’ setting for slab panels and nodes can be toggled graphically as follows:
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Diaphragm On\Off
Slab panels and nodes are colour coded to show their ‘Include in diaphragm’ setting.
The Properties Window shows the currently selected ‘toggle’ mode.
• Toggle - clicking on a slab/node switches it between included/excluded
• Include - clicking on a slab/node includes it
• Exclude - clicking on a slab/node excludes it
[M] on the keyboard is also a shortcut key for changing the toggle mode in the Properties Window.
To toggle the diaphragm settings for entire slab panels:
First ensure ‘Change Area Items’ is checked in the Properties Window, then either:
• Click on an individual panel.
478
User Guides
• Drag a box from right to left to toggle the setting for all panels that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
• Drag a box from left to right to toggle the setting for all internal panels totally enclosed by the box. (Panels at the edge of the diaphragm are not toggled when dragging left to right.)
To include/remove individual nodes the diaphragm:
First ensure ‘Change Nodes’ is checked in the Properties Window, then either:
• Click on an individual node to change its state (according to the selected mode).
• Drag a box to change the state for all nodes enclosed by the box (according to the selected mode).
Restrained\Unrestrained
This command provides a means to graphically assess and modify the lateral restraint settings for all steel beams and columns in the model.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Restrained\Unrestrained Design
Members are colour coded to show their restraint setting.
3.
To modify lateral restraint settings, either:
• Click on an individual member to toggle its restraint setting between the types applicable to the member.
• Drag a box from left to right to toggle the restraint setting for all members totally enclosed by the box.
• Drag a box from right to left to toggle the restraint setting for all members that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
Braced\Bracing
This command provides a means to graphically assess and modify the slenderness settings in each direction for concrete columns and walls.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Braced\Bracing
3.
In the Properties Window, choose the direction under consideration.
Members are colour coded to show their slenderness setting in the chosen direction.
• Clicking on an individual concrete column or wall toggles its slenderness setting between the braced and bracing.
479
User Guides (UK)
• Dragging a box from left to right toggles the restraint setting for all concrete columns and walls totally enclosed by the box.
• Dragging a box from right to left toggles the restraint setting for all concrete columns and walls that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
If you required to toggle an individual stack, rather than all stacks; uncheck ‘whole element’ in the Properties Window.
Fixed\Pinned
This command provides a means to graphically assess and modify the end fixity for all members in the model.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Fixed\Pinned
• Clicking on an individual member toggles its end fixity settings between the types that are valid for the member.
• Dragging a box from left to right toggles the end fixity settings for all members totally enclosed by the box.
• Dragging a box from right to left toggles the end fixity settings for all members that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
Where the end fixity is shown as ‘Mixed’ this indicates that the fixity at end 1 differs from that at end 2. ‘Mixed’ end fixity can only be specified by editing the member properties directly.
BIM Status
This command provides a means to graphically assess the BIM Status, and also to exclude members and panels from the import/export process.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > BIM Status
• Click on an individual member\panel to exclude it, click on it once more to re-include it.
• Drag a box from left to right to toggle the exclude setting for all members totally enclosed by the box.
• Drag a box from right to left to toggle the exclude setting for all members that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
Status Description
New If newly created in Tekla Structural Designer
480
User Guides
Imported
Exported
Updated
Deleted
Mixed
Excluded
If created externally
If exported
If modified by an import
If the member appears to have been deleted in the other system
If the status varies from span to span in multi-span beams, or lift to lift in multi-lift columns.
Indicates those parts of the model that have been excluded from the BIM process.
Indicates those parts of the model that have not been modified by the last BIM import.
Not modified
Slab Reinforcement
This command provides a means to graphically review and modify slab panel and patch reinforcement, allowing you to update the bar size and spacing applied in each layer and direction.
If you arrange your screen to have two Review Views open side by side - you can then use the first of these to modify the slab reinforcement whilst displaying the design status in the second. With this arrangement, each change you make to the reinforcement immediately updates the design status.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
First click Review > Auto\Check Design and ensure that the slab panels you intend to modify have Autodesign off.
3.
Then click Review > Slab Reinforcement
To modify slab reinforcement:
1.
In the Properties Window, select the Slab Reinforcement you want to modify,
(Panel, or Patch).
2.
Select the Reinforcement Direction you want to modify, (BarsX, BarsY or Mesh).
3.
Select the Slab Layer you want to modify, (Top or Bottom).
4.
If modifying bars, select the Bar Parameters you want to modify, (Bar Size, Spacing, or Bar Size & Spacing).
481
User Guides (UK)
5.
Use the Apply drop list to select the Bar Parameters that you want to apply.
6.
Click an individual slab to update the reinforcement to that specified.
7.
Use Review > Status to check that the updated reinforcement is sufficient.
To graphically copy reinforcement between panels or patches:
1.
In the Properties Window, select the Slab Reinforcement you want to modify,
(Panel, or Patch).
2.
Select the Reinforcement Direction you want to modify, (BarsX, BarsY or Mesh).
3.
Select the Slab Layer you want to modify, (Top or Bottom).
4.
Click the panel or patch containing the reinforcement to be copied.
5.
Click the panels or patches to which you want to apply the reinforcement.
To change the source of the reinforcement being copied press [Esc] and select a different panel or patch.
6.
Use Review > Slab Design Status to check that the updated reinforcement is sufficient.
Steel
This command provides a means to graphically review and modify the section size and or grade applied to steel members.
To graphically copy the section size and grade between members:
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Firstly click Review > Auto\Check Design and ensure that Autodesign is off for the members in question.
3.
Then click Review > Steel
4.
In the Properties Window, select the parameter to copy (Section, Grade or Both).
5.
Click the member containing the steel to be copied.
To change the source being copied from press [Esc] and select a different member.
482
User Guides
6.
Click the members to which you want to apply the steel.
The member clicked on has to be of the same type (beam, column, or brace) as the source member.
To modify the section size and grade:
1.
If you intend to change the section size, first ensure Autodesign is off for the member in question.
To check - click Review > Auto\Check Design
2.
Click Review > Steel
3.
In the Properties Window, select the Characteristic of the member you want to modify, (Beam, Column or Brace).
4.
Select the Parameters you want to modify, (Section, Grade or Both).
5.
Use the Apply drop list to select the Parameters that you want to apply.
6.
Click an individual member to update its section, and/or grade to that specified.
Copy Properties
This command provides a means to graphically copy a specified element parameter
(e.g. web openings, connectors or transverse reinforcement) from a source member to other valid target members.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Copy Properties
3.
In the Properties Window, select the parameter of the member you want to be copied (e.g. web openings, connectors or transverse reinforcement).
4.
Next click the source member that contains the property to be copied. The color coding should update accordingly:
• Source - this color identifies the member that was clicked on. (If this is incorrect, press [Esc] in order to reselect.)
• Same as Source - this color identifies those members in which the selected parameter already matches the Source.
• Valid Target - this color identifies those members to which it is possible to copy the selected parameter.
483
User Guides (UK)
• NA - this color identifies those members to which it is not possible to copy the selected parameter.
• Either click an individual target member, or box around a series of target members to copy the selected parameter to them.
Report Filter
This command provides a means to graphically review and modify any member filters that have been defined.
The Report Filter command remains greyed out until a member filter has been defined. (A members filter is defined by clicking Members in the
Filters group on the Report toolbar).
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Report Filter
• Clicking on an individual member toggles its inclusion in the selected member filter between ‘on’ and ‘off’.
• Dragging a box from left to right toggles the inclusion setting for all members totally enclosed by the box.
• Dragging a box from right to left toggles inclusion setting for all members that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
Sub Structures
This command provides a means to graphically create, review and modify sub structures for modelling purposes.
These can prove useful in large models as individual sub-structures can then be differentiated by colour and worked on in separate sub-structure views.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Sub Structures
Punch Check Position
This command provides a means to graphically modify the assumed punching check position for determining the loaded perimeter when the perimeter is close to a free edge.
How do I modify the assumed punch check position in the Review View?
1.
Open a Review View
484
User Guides
2.
Click Review > Punch Check Position
3.
Click or box around punching check items to change their positions:
• Click a punch check item on a Z edge to toggle its position between ‘Edge Z’ and
‘Internal’.
• Click a punch check item on a Y edge to toggle its position between ‘Edge Y’ and
‘Internal’.
• Click a punch check item on a corner to toggle its position between ‘Corner’, ‘Edge
Z’ ‘Edge Y’ and ‘Internal’.
• Clicking an internal punch check item does not toggle its position.
• Dragging a box from left to right toggles the position setting (as described above) for all punch check items totally enclosed by the box.
• Dragging a box from right to left toggles the position setting (as described above) for all punch check items that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
Concrete Beam Flanges
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Concrete Beam Flanges
Each concrete beam is colour coded to indicate its if flanges are considered and flange widths determined.
Column Splices
This command provides a means to graphically assess and modify splice positions within steel columns.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Column Splices
All potential splice locations are colour coded to indicate if they are on or off.
3.
Click on a potential splice location to toggle its setting between on and off.
Gravity Only
This command provides a means to graphically assess and modify the ‘Gravity Only’ setting for steel beams and columns.
1.
Open a Review View
2.
Click Review > Gravity Only
485
User Guides (UK)
All members are colour coded to indicate their ‘Gravity Only’ setting.
• Clicking on a steel beam or column toggles its Gravity Only’ setting between on and off.
• Dragging a box from left to right toggles the on/off setting for all steel beams and columns totally enclosed by the box.
• Dragging a box from right to left toggles the on/off setting for all steel beams and columns that are either enclosed by the box, or cut by the box perimeter.
Property Sets
This command provides a means to graphically review or apply property sets to members, slab items and roof panels.
UDA
This command provides a means to graphically review and modify the values of attributes that have been attached to the model.
Working with the Review Data view
Clicking the Tabular Data button displays the Review Data view from where Sway
Results, Design Summaries and Material Lists can be displayed in tables.
How do I display a Design Summary in a Review Data table?
1.
To display a Design Summary in a Review Data table you must first have a scene
view open in Review View mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Design Summary.
4.
Make selections from the other groups on the toolbar in order to filter to the specific results required.
How do I display Sway Results in a Review Data table?
1.
To display Sway Results in a Review Data table you must first have a scene view
mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Sway.
486
User Guides
4.
Make selections from the other groups on the toolbar in order to filter to the specific results required.
How do I display Storey Shear in a Review Data table?
1.
To display Storey Shear in a Review Data table you must first have a scene view
mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Storey Shear
4.
From the Loading drop list choose the loadcase or combination required.
How do I display Drift Results in a Review Data table?
Drift Results are only relevant to models in which the United States (ACI/AISC)
Head code has been selected.
1.
To display Drift Results in a Review Data table you must first have a scene view open
mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Drift.
4.
Make selections from the other groups on the toolbar in order to filter to the specific results required.
How do I display Seismic Drift Results in a Review Data table?
1.
To display Seismic Drift Results in a Review Data table you must first have a scene
view open in Review View mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Seismic Drift.
4.
Make selections from the other groups on the toolbar in order to filter to the specific results required.
How do I display Wind Drift Results in a Review Data table?
487
User Guides (UK)
1.
To display Wind Drift Results in a Review Data table you must first have a scene view
mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Wind Drift.
4.
Make selections from the Material Type and Fabrication groups to identify the column results required.
5.
From the Loading drop list choose the wind loadcase or combination to be checked.
How do I display Connection Resistance checks in a Review Data table?
The connection resistance check compares the maximum vertical shear from the gravity combinations against a pre-defined resistance for the supporting member.
This check requires you to have specified a set of resistances for each section serial size, composite\non composite, for the current head code. These are specified from the Materials dialog on the Home ribbon.The resistances are saved to the database and can subsequently be used for checking other structures.
1.
To display Connection Resistances in a Review Data table you must first have a
scene view open in Review View mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Connection Resistance
4.
Make selections from the other groups on the toolbar in order to filter to the specific results required.
How do I display a Material List in a Review Data table?
The material list displayed in a Review Data table is not suitable for printing - to obtain a formatted list that can be output you should display a Material
Listing Report instead.
1.
To display a Material List as a Review Data table you must first have a scene view
mode.
2.
Then click Review > Tabular Data
488
User Guides
(A Review Data View opens in a new tab.)
3.
From the drop list on the View Type toolbar group choose Material List.
4.
Make selections from the other groups on the toolbar in order to filter to the specific results required.
For example, to display the loose bar estimate in a flat slab you would choose:
- ‘Concrete’ from the ‘Material Type’ group
- ‘Slabs’ from the ‘Characteristic’ group
- ‘Loose Bars’ from the ‘Content’ group.
Reporting Guide
A wide range of reports which can be tailored to meet your specific requirements can
be created from the Report toolbar .
Report toolbar
The ‘Contents’ and ‘Filters’ groups described below are always displayed, but the ‘Appearance’, ‘Navigation’ and ‘Export’ groups are hidden until a Report view is active.
Contents group
The Contents group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Select
Model Report...
Use the drop list to select the report to be created. The chosen report can then be viewed by clicking Show Report.
Opens a dialog which can be used to:
• setup a new Model Report,
• edit and filter the content for an existing
489
User Guides (UK)
Model Report.
Member Report... Opens a dialog which can be used to:
• setup a new Member Report,
• edit and filter the content for an existing
Member Report.
Show Report Displays the selected Model Report (i.e. the one that is shown in the Select drop list) on screen.
Clicking Show Report also activates other groups on the toolbar to enable:
• the appearance of the report to be controlled,
• navigation around the report,
• export of the report.
Filters Group
The Filters group contains the following commands:
Button Description
Levels
Frames
Planes
Loadcases
Combinations
Opens a dialog for creating a new Model
Filter which can be used to output selected levels only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Model
Filter which can be used to output selected frames only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Model
Filter which can be used to output selected planes only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Loading
Filter which can be used to output selected loadcases only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Loading
Filter which can be used to output selected
490
User Guides
Members
Design Groups
Trusses
Portal Frames combinations only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Model
Filter which can be used to output selected members only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Model
Filter which can be used to output selected design groups only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Model
Filter which can be used to output selected trusses only.
Opens a dialog for creating a new Model
Filter which can be used to output selected portal frames only.
Appearance group
Use the commands in this group to control the appearance of the currently displayed report.
Button Description
Settings
Page Setup
Edit Header
Edit Footer
Opens the Settings dialog which can be used to configure paragraph styles and other report display options.
Opens the Page Setup dialog which can be used to configure page size and orientation.
Opens the Document headers/footers dialog which can be used to configure the layout and content of the page header and footers.
Opens the Document headers/footers dialog which can be used to configure the layout and content of the page headers and footers.
Navigation group
Use the commands in this group to move through the currently displayed report.
491
User Guides (UK)
Button
Previous Page, First
Page, Next Page,
Last Page
Report Index
Description
Use the commands in this group to move around the currently open report.
Displays the report index in the Project
Workspace. This can be used to navigate through the report.
Export group
The commands in this group can be used to export the currently open report to other programs.
Button Description
PDF Exports the report to a pdf document.
Word Exports the report to a word document.
Excel
Tedds
Exports the report to an Excel document.
Exports the report to a Tedds document.
Reports and Report Terminology Explained
This topic provides background information to improve your understanding of the report creation process and the terminology involved.
Model Reports
Model Reports are used to set up the printed output for the entire structure, (or a part of it). These reports are configured by choosing specific output categories (‘chapters’) from a list of all the available output categories. You can include entire chapters, or just those headings within the chapter you require. The resulting subset of chapters is referred to as a Report Structure. Filters can then be applied to individual headings in the Report Structure to limit the output that is produced.
Model Report chapters include:
• Structure
Structure data under headings such as ‘Loadcases’, ‘Wind Data’ etc.
492
User Guides
• Analysis
Analysis model properties and results.
• Concrete, Steel, Timber, Cold Formed, Cold Rolled, General Material
• Member Reports for each of the different member types. Each of these can be set up to contain as much or as little output as you require. This is achieved by configuring a separate Member Report for each member type that you have included.
• Design Summary Tables can also be included for those members that can be designed.
• Beam End Forces, Bracing Forces, Foundation Reactions
Chapters for specific sets of analysis results.
• Picture
A 3D view of the whole structure, or by applying a Model Filter you can choose selected sub structures in 3D, or 2D views of selected frames or levels.
Applied loads can also be displayed on the picture by applying a Loading Filter.
• View
The current display in any 2D or 3D Scene View can be saved at any time as a View
Configuration. Each of these view configurations can then be included in the Model
Report as required by including a separate View chapter for each configuration required.
• Analysis Diagram
A 3D diagram of the whole structure, or by applying a Model Filter you can choose selected sub structures in 3D, or 2D diagrams of selected frames or levels.
The analysis results to be displayed are configured by applying a Loading Filter and choosing the Analysis Method.
• Material Listing
Tabulated quantities of materials.
• Revision History
The revision history that has been recorded in the Project Wiki.
Member Reports
Member Reports are not output directly from the Report toolbar, they are only output as part of the Model Report, (or, by right clicking on an individual member and clicking
‘Report for member’).
They are set up in a similar way to the Model Report itself with chapters including:
• Picture
This is the 3D view you obtain by right clicking on a member and clicking ‘Open member view’.
• Drawing
This is the dxf you obtain by right clicking on a member and clicking ‘Generate Detail
Drawing’.
493
User Guides (UK)
• Loading
This is the table you obtain by right clicking on a member and clicking ‘Show Member
Loading’.
• Force and Deflected Shape Diagrams
These are the diagrams you obtain by right clicking on a member and clicking ‘Open load analysis view’.
Available Styles
A number of sample reports are available for selection from the Available Styles list.
These reports serve as templates and can be modified to suit the model in question.
If there isn’t already a report that can be customised to meet your needs you can add further reports to the list.
If you start a new project, the same default reports will be available, but they are reset to the default report structures. It is not currently possible to save customised reports from the Report Contents dialog in order to apply them to other projects.
Active Model Report
The active model report is simply the default report shown on the drop list on the
Report toolbar - unless a report view is already active, (in which case the view’s report is shown n the drop list instead.)
The active model report can be specified by clicking the ‘>> Active’ button in the Report
Contents dialog for Model Reports.
Active Member Report
When you right click on a member in a 2D or 3D View and choose Report for Member; the member report that has been specified as being active is the one that is generated.
The active member report can be specified by clicking the ‘>> Active’ button in the
Report Contents dialog for Member Reports.
Active and Inactive Chapters
When the Report Contents dialog is displayed each chapter in the current report structure can be marked as either active, or inactive. Only those chapters that are marked as active get included when the report is generated.
Filters
Filters can be employed to limit the amount of output produced, different filters being applicable for different data types:
• Model Filters - By default output is produced for the entire structure, but if required it can be filtered for selected levels, frames, or planes. For certain data types (e.g.
Foundation Reactions) output can be filtered for selected beams, columns or walls. If
494
User Guides user defined attributes (UDAs) have ben applied, these can also be used to filter the output.
• Loading Filters - By default output is produced for all loadcases and all combinations, but if required it can be filtered for selected loadcases and combinations.
Creating Reports
How do I configure a Model Report?
1.
Click Report > Model Report... ( )
2.
Choose a report as follows:
•
To choose an existing report, use the Available Styles
list.
• To add a new report, click
Active Style box.
, then type a name for the new report in the
3.
Review the Report Structure and modify it if required.
(See: How do I modify the Report Structure?
4.
To limit the amount of output to selected levels, frames, planes, or sub structures only; apply a model filter.
(See: How do I apply a filter?
5.
For ‘Loadcases’ and ‘Combinations’ sub-chapters you can further limit the output by applying a loading filter.
(See: How do I apply a filter?
6.
If you have created specific view configurations of the model and want to include these in the report you must include a separate View chapter for each view configuration required.
7.
If the Report Structure includes any member chapters (Beams, Columns, Walls etc.):
• for each chapter ensure the appropriate Member Report style is selected.
(See: How do I select the Member Report style to use in the Model Report?
• ensure the selected Member Report style for each chapter is configured as required.
(See: How do I configure a Member Report?
8.
Click OK
9.
Click Show Report ( )
The chosen report should now be displayed in a new window from where it can be reviewed.
495
User Guides (UK)
If it contains loading analysis views of individual members (e.g. force diagrams or pictures) these are displayed for each member type according to the Member
Report style that was selected above.
When the model report is displaying the information as required it can then printed.
(See: How do I display a Model Report?
If you have included a Drawing in the Report Structure, you should specify appropriate settings for it:
- Right click the Drawing in the Report Structure
- Click Settings...
- Select the Drawing Type and Style from the drop lists
- Specify the Scale and Text Block Spacing
How do I display a Model Report?
1.
Select the report to display from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
How do I configure a Member Report?
1.
Click Report > Member Report... ( )
2.
Choose the member type required from the drop list.
3.
Choose a report style for the member type.
•
To choose an existing report, use the Available Styles
list.
• To add a new report style, click
Active Style box.
, then type a name for the new report in the
4.
Review the Report Structure for this style and modify it if required.
(See: How do I modify the Report Structure?
5.
To control the level of output, apply settings and loading filters where applicable as required.
(See: How do I apply a filter?
6.
Click OK
496
User Guides
If you have included a Drawing in the Report Structure, you should specify appropriate settings for it:
- Right click the Drawing in the Report Structure
- Click Settings...
- Select the Drawing Type and Style from the drop lists
- Specify the Scale and Text Block Spacing
How do I display an individual Member Report?
Firstly ensure you have configured the member report style and made it active.
(See: How do I configure a Member Report?
How do I select the Member Report style to use in an individual Member Report?
Then:
1.
Hover the cursor over the member until its outline is highlighted, then right click.
2.
From the context menu select Report for member
The report for the chosen member is displayed in a report view.
How do I select the Member Report style to use in the Model Report?
Each member type can have a number of ‘member report styles’ available, (each being configured to produce a different level of output). You therefore need to specify which one to use if the member type is included in the Model Report.
With the required Model Report selected in the Report Contents dialog; to select the
Member Report Style to be used in the Model Report:
1.
Locate the specific member chapter, (Beams, Columns etc.) in the report structure.
2.
Right click the chapter and select the required member report style from the ‘Style’ option.
How do I select the Member Report style to use in an individual Member
Report?
To control the report that gets generated when you right click on a member in a 2D or
3D View and choose ‘Report for Member’, the active member report needs to be set correctly.
1.
Click Report > Member Report... ( )
2.
Choose the member type required from the drop list.
3.
In the list of available styles, one will be marked ‘(active)’.
497
User Guides (UK)
• if this is the style you want to use simply click OK to close the dialog,
• or, choose a different style and click , then click OK.
How do I modify the Report Structure?
Having selected a report from the Available Styles list you can modify its structure as follows:
1.
Drag the chapters and options to be included from the left to right. To permanently remove unwanted chapters and options drag them back from right to left.
2.
Re-arrange the report order as required by dragging selected chapters up or down.
3.
To exclude a specific chapter from the report, whilst maintaining the report structure; make it inactive by right clicking on the chapter and unchecking the ‘Active’ option. (It can subsequently be re-introduced if required by rechecking the ‘Active’ option.)
4.
Right click each chapter to specify any filtering requirements. (See: How do I apply a filter?
5.
Click OK
To aid the report structuring process, an option is provided to display the structure as either a Flat, or a Hierarchical layout.
How do I print a Report?
The report displayed in the active Report View is printed as follows:
1.
2.
Click
Filtering Reports
What are the different types of filter?
There are two main categories of filter that can be applied to chapters in the Report
Structure, each chapter having different filters available according to its content.
Model Filters are available to enable selective output based on:
• Selected levels
• Selected frames
• Selected planes
498
User Guides
• Selected groups
• Selected members
• Selected trusses
• Selected portal frames
• Selected levels
• Selected sub structures
• Selected UDAs
Loading Filters are available to enable selective output based on:
• Selected loadcases
• Selected combinations
• Selected envelopes
How do I create and edit a filter?
Filters can be created and edited either directly from the Report toolbar as described below; or at the same time as they are applied to a chapter in the Report Structure, by right clicking on the chapter and then clicking Edit\New... from the relevant filter menu.
1.
Click the type of filter required from the Filters group on the Report toolbar.
A dialog is displayed listing any existing filters of the chosen type.
2.
Click , then enter a name for the new filter.
3.
In the Selected items area of the dialog, check the boxes as required to define the content of the filter.
4.
Click OK
If a Members filter is created, it can subsequently be reviewed and edited graphically via the Report Filter button on the Review toolbar.
5.
Once a filter has been created, it then has to be applied to a specific report.
How do I apply a filter?
Filters are applied to reports as follows:
1.
Click Report > Model Report... , or Member Report... to open the appropriate
Report Contents dialog.
2.
Choose the report to be filtered.
499
User Guides (UK)
In the Report Structure any chapters that can be filtered will always show the currently applied filter in blue text.
3.
Right click a chapter and choose the required filter type and filter name from the right click menu.
If the available filters do not meet your requirements, choose ‘Edit/New...’ from the right click menu, then:
1.
Click
2.
Enter a name to describe the filter.
3.
Check the boxes as required under ‘Selected Items’ to define the filter requirements.
4.
Click OK
If a filter type is not applicable for the selected chapter it will be greyed out.
Members filters specifically, can subsequently be reviewed and edited graphically via the Report Filter button on the Review toolbar.
Formatting Reports
Tekla Structural Designer allows you to customise the appearance of the reports in a number of ways.
Report Settings
These settings are used to control (for the settings set selected at the top of the page) the appearance of the reports. The various options allow you to configure paragraph styles, page margins and numbering, tables, headers/footers and other options.
Unlike other ‘settings set’ settings, changes to report settings are instantly applied to the current work-session when you click OK to close the Settings dialog (provided the edits were made to the ‘active’ set).
How do I apply report settings?
500
User Guides
1.
Click Report > Settings ( )
2.
Use the Report sub-pages to format the report.
The various options allow you to set:
• Styles - customise the paragraph styles to be applied to the different areas of the report.
• Page Options - specify page margins and numbering.
• Table Options - control the appearance of tables.
• Document Options - control display of header/footer and other options.
• Picture Fonts - control the appearance of fonts used in pictures and force diagrams.
3.
Having configured the report format as required, click OK to apply it to the current project.
The specified report settings are applied to the current project and continue to apply in future work-sessions for all models.
Report Settings-Styles
Report Styles
The list displays the styles that are used in reports.
The selected style’s appearance can modified by adjusting the font, color and other parameters as required
Report Settings-Page Options
Page margins, numbering and frame
Adjust as required.
Report Settings-Table Options
Table style, border and width
Adjust as required.
Report Settings-Document Options
Header/footer
Show document header
Check this option to include the header at the top of each report page.
Show border in document header
Check this option to draw a border around each field cell in the header.
Show document footer
Check this option to include the footer at the bottom of each report page.
501
User Guides (UK)
Show border in document footer
Check this option to draw a border around each cell in the footer.
Show document field description in line with the value
Check this option to display the field descriptions in line with the field values in each cell, or leave unchecked to display the field values on a new line.
Underline document field cell
Check this option to underline each field cell value.
Image width
Percentage of page width
Specify the width for all images that are included in reports.
Paragraphs
Spacing
Specify the paragraph spacing in reports.
Page breaks
Start each item on a new page
Check this option to start each chapter of the report on a new page.
Start each member report on a new page
Check this option to start each member on a new page.
Report Settings-Picture Fonts
If you have included any pictures in your reports, you can use these settings to control the fonts that are used within them.
Headers and Footers
Headers and Footers
How do I set up page headers and footers?
To customise report headers and footers you must first display a report on screen, then:
• Click Edit Header ( )
The Document headers/footers dialog is displayed allowing you to create new headers and footers, or modify existing ones.
To create a new header or footer layout:
502
User Guides
1.
Click either ‘Headers’ or ‘Footers’ at the top left of the dialog as appropriate.
2.
Click
3.
In the ‘Name’ field, give the new layout a more descriptive name if required.
To modify the number of rows and columns in the layout:
1.
A preview of the current layout is displayed in the dialog, position the cursor over one of the cells in the layout and then right click to display a menu as below:
2.
Use the ‘Insert’ and ‘Remove’ commands on this menu to: insert rows, (above the selected cell); insert columns, (to the left of the selected cell); remove rows; remove columns.
To join cells together in the layout:
1.
Click and drag within the layout to join cells together, vertically or horizontally.
(If you subsequently require to unjoin previously joined cells you can do so from the right click menu.)
To modify column widths in the layout:
1.
Click then specify the widths as required.
To assign a field to a cell:
1.
Select from the ‘Available fields’ list the field required.
2.
Click a cell in the layout to assign it.
503
User Guides (UK)
To add a company logo and assign it to a cell:
1.
Click ‘Fields’ at the top left of the dialog.
2.
Select ‘Company Logo’ from the ‘Available fields’ list
3.
Click (adjacent to ‘Image path’) and browse to locate the logo file required.
4.
Click ‘Headers’ at the top left of the dialog to re-display the layout.
5.
Assign the ‘Company Logo’ field to the cell required.
6.
If further images are required return to the ‘Fields’ pane, click repeat the above process.
To modify the field alignment within a cell:
1.
Right click the required cell in the layout and set the horizontal and vertical alignment options as required.
and
To review the new layout:
1.
Once the changes have been made click OK to re-display the report and review their effect.
Exporting Reports
How do I export a report to PDF?
1.
Set up your report so that it contains the information you require.
2.
Click PDF ( )
(in the Export group).
3.
Click OK.
How do I export a report to Word?
1.
Set up your report so that it contains the information you require.
2.
Click Word ( )
(in the Export group).
3.
Click OK.
504
User Guides
How do I export a report to Excel?
1.
Set up your report so that it contains the information you require.
2.
Click Excel ( )
(in the Export group).
3.
Click OK.
How do I export a report to Tedds?
1.
Set up your report so that it contains the information you require.
2.
Click Tedds ( )
(in the Export group).
3.
Click OK.
Example Reports
A number of standard reports are installed by default. Although these are unlikely to match your exact needs, in many cases they can serve as templates which can then be edited to suit your individual requirements.
Solver Model Data Report
By default this report will include a picture of the model and then list the following tables of analysis model input data:
• Nodes
• Node support Details
• Elements
• Element-Members
• Element Properties
• contains to PDF?
How do I show a Solver Model Data Report?
1.
Select Solver Model Data from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Building Loading Report
505
User Guides (UK)
Building Loading Report
By default this report will include a picture of the model and then list the following tables of loading related input data:
• Action Codes
• Resistance Codes
• Combinations
• Wind Data
How do I show a Building Loading Report?
1.
Select Building Loading from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Building Analysis Checks Report
Building Analysis Checks Report
By default this report will list the following tables:
• Loadcase Summary
• Analysis Drift Results
• Analysis Sway Results
How do I show a Building Analysis Checks Report?
1.
Select Building Analysis Checks from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Building Design Report
Building Design Report
By default this report displays the design results for the building at a summary level.
How do I show a Building Design Report?
1.
Select Building Design from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
506
User Guides
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Material Listing Report
Material Listing Report
By default the material listing report is displayed for all members in the building.
How do I show a Material Listing Report?
1.
Select Material Listing from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Beam End Forces Report
Beam End Forces Report
For steel buildings this report can be generated in order to provide beam connection design forces in one of the following configurations:
• End 1/End 2
• End 1/End 2 + Coincident
• Higher End Only
• Higher End Only + Coincident (initial default)
Choose an End 1/End 2 configuration if you intend to design the connections at both ends of each beam independently, otherwise choose Both Ends to standardise your connection designs and employ the same connection at both ends of the beam where possible.
For each of the above, if you choose + Coincident, the maximum and minimum for each of the 6 forces is reported in a separate row in the table along with the coincident forces in the other directions, (potentially generating many more pages of output).
What data is output in each Beam End Forces Report configuration?
Six columns of forces, (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz) are output for each configuration as follows:
End 1/End 2
For each end of each steel beam: A single row of data is output for those loadcases/combinations/envelopes in the chosen loading filter:
• Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz,
507
User Guides (UK)
End 1/End 2 + Coincident
For each end of each steel beam: A separate row is output for each loadcase, combination, or envelope (according to the loading filter applied) for the maximum and the minimum of each of the 6 forces, along with the coincident forces in the other directions.
Potentially up to 12 rows of data could theoretically be output for loadcase, combination, or envelope as follows:
• maximum: Fx, (+ coincident Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• minimum: Fx, (+ coincident Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• maximum: Fy, (+ coincident Fx, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• minimum: Fy, (+ coincident Fx, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• maximum: Fz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Mx, My, Mz)
• minimum: Fz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Mx, My, Mz)
• maximum: Mx, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, My, Mz)
• minimum: Mx, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, My, Mz)
• maximum: My, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, Mz)
• minimum: My, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, Mz)
• maximum: Mz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My)
• minimum: Mz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My)
The loadcases/combination/envelope names in which these maximums/minimums occur are also reported.
Higher End Only
For each steel beam: Two rows of data are output for the chosen loading filter:
• max (end 1, end 2): Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz,
• min (end 1, end 2): Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz.
Loadcase/combination/envelope names are not included for this configuration as they could vary for each of the 6 values.
Higher End Only + Coincident (initial default)
For each steel beam: Potentially up to 12 rows of data could theoretically be output for the loading filter applied. A separate row is output for the maximum and the minimum of each of the 6 forces, along with the coincident forces in the other directions.
• max (end 1, end 2): Fx, (+ coincident Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• min (end 1, end 2): Fx, (+ coincident Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• max (end 1, end 2): Fy, (+ coincident Fx, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• min (end 1, end 2): Fy, (+ coincident Fx, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
• max (end 1, end 2): Fz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Mx, My, Mz)
508
User Guides
• min (end 1, end 2): Fz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Mx, My, Mz)
• max (end 1, end 2): Mx, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, My, Mz)
• min (end 1, end 2): Mx, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, My, Mz)
• max (end 1, end 2): My, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, Mz)
• min (end 1, end 2): My, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, Mz)
• max (end 1, end 2): Mz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My)
• min (end 1, end 2): Mz, (+ coincident Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My)
The loadcases/combination/envelope names in which these maximums/minimums occur are also reported.
How do I change the default Beam End Forces Report configuration?
1.
Click Report > Model Report
2.
Select Beam End Forces from the Available Styles list.
3.
Expand the Beam End Forces group under Chapters and Options.
4.
Drag the required configurations in/out of the Report Structure as required.
5.
Click OK
How do I show a Beam End Forces Report?
1.
Select Beam End Forces from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Bracing Forces Report
Bracing Forces Report
For steel buildings provides the bracing design forces for all loadcases and combinations.
How do I show a Bracing Forces Report?
1.
Select Bracing Forces from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Foundation Reactions Report
509
User Guides (UK)
Foundation Reactions Report
This report summarises the foundation design forces.
How do I show a Foundation Reactions Report?
1.
Select Foundation Reactions from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Seismic Design Report
Seismic Design Report
By default this report will list the following tables:
• Seismic Loading Summary
• Analysis Seismic Drift Results
How do I show a Seismic Design Report?
1.
Select Seismic Design from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Member Design Report
Member Design Report
By default this report displays the design results for each member at a summary level.
How do I show a Member Design Report?
1.
Select Member Design from the drop list on the Report toolbar.
2.
Click Show Report ( )
3.
If the resulting report is displaying too little, or too much information, you can adjust the content by re-configuring the report.
Setting up the Report Page Header and Footer
510
User Guides
Default page header and footer layouts are provided, but you can also create and save your own layouts as required.
Topics in this section
•
How do I enter company details (logo, address etc.) in the header?
•
How do I enter project specific details (job ref, structure etc.) in the header?
•
How do I create a new header layout?
Related video
• Report Headers and Footers
How do I enter company details (logo, address etc.) in the header?
1.
Click Show Report ( ) on the Report toolbar
2.
Click Edit Header ( )
Assuming you have not already created your own header layouts, there will only be a ‘Default Header’ layout available, (you can rename this if you wish, by over-typing the displayed name).
Note that the default layout already contains a field for the address.
First select the Fields to be included:
1.
Highlight ‘Address’ in the left hand Available fields list, then click the Edit... button
(the one below the Available fields list).
The ‘Address’ field comprises up to 11 individual fields, only those listed in the
‘Included fields’ will be shown in the header.
2.
In the Field properties area of the dialog, move fields between ‘Included’ and
‘Available’ as required.
Next define the text to be displayed:
1.
In the left hand Available fields list, highlight the first text field (e.g. Company Name) that appears as an ‘Included field’.
2.
In the Field properties area, type in the text that you want to appear for this field.
3.
Highlight the next text field (e.g. Address Line 1) that appears as an ‘Included field’.
4.
Type in the text that you want to appear for this field.
5.
Repeat until all the text fields included in the address have been defined.
511
User Guides (UK)
Finally select the logo:
By default there is only one image field (Company Logo) available
1.
In the left hand Available fields list, highlight ‘Company Logo’.
2.
In the Field properties area, click the [...] button to browse to the image you want to use as the logo.
The logo must already exist at the correct size that you want it to be displayed before you select it.
If you want to include additional images in the header/footer simply click
‘Add Image Field’ to create extra place holders for each one.
How do I enter project specific details (job ref, structure etc.) in the header?
1.
Click Project Wiki ( ) on the Home toolbar
2.
On the Project Summary page of the Project Wiki dialog, type the text that you want to appear for each field that appears in the header.
How do I create a new header layout?
1.
Click Edit Header ( )
2.
Click New
3.
Move the cursor over the Current Layout area in the dialog.
The cell under the cursor will be highlighted in red.
To join multiple cells into a single merged cell:
Left click and drag over the cells to be joined.
To place a field into an empty cell (or replace an existing field):
Drag the field required from the ‘Available fields’ list into the cell.
To insert or remove rows or columns in the layout, or change the alignment:
Right click over the layout and select the command required from the context menu.
512
To change the column widths in the layout:
Click Edit... under the Current Layout and adjust the widths as required.
Drawing Guide
User Guides
Drawings of individual levels and frames are created directly from the Draw toolbar ,
whilst single member drawings are created for selected members from the right-click menu.
Alternatively drawings can be created in batch via Drawing Management .
Draw toolbar
The Draw toolbar contains the following commands:
Button Description
Edit... Opens the Model Settings dialog at the
Drawings page.
Drawing
Management...
Opens a dialog for the generation and laying out of multiple drawings on to a single drawing sheet. The dialog can also be used to manage drawing revisions.
Schedule
Management...
Opens a dialog for the generation of schedules on drawing sheets. The dialog can also be used to manage schedule revisions.
Beam
Schedule
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a beam schedule.
513
User Guides (UK)
Column
Schedule
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a column schedule.
Wall Schedule Opens a dialog to configure and then create a wall schedule.
General
Arrangement
Beam End
Forces
Column Splice
Loads
Foundation
Reactions
Loading Plan
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a general arrangement drawing.
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a beam end forces drawing.
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a column splice loads drawing.
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a foundation reactions drawing.
Slab/Mat
Detailing
Foundation
Layout
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a loading plan drawing.
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a slab or mat detail drawing.
Opens a dialog to configure and then create a foundation layout drawing.
Overview of Drawings
In Tekla Structural Designer there are five main drawing categories, each containing a number Drawing Variants (see table below).
Each variant has a number of specific Drawing Options available to further configure
the drawing appearance.
514
User Guides
Each variant contains a set number of Drawing Layers. These are switched on or off as
required. Whether each layer is on or off is controlled by the Layer Configuration that is
selected. You can either use the default layer configurations or add your own.
The appearance of each layer (color, linestyle, font etc.) is controlled by the Layer Style .
Again, you can either use the default layer styles or add your own.
Drawing Options, Drawing Layers and Layer Styles are all managed via Drawing Settings .
Drawing Variants
Category Drawing Variant Description
General Arrangement General Arrangement (GA) of 2D levels and frames.
Foundation Reactions A GA that also contains support reactions (to assist foundation design).
Loading Plan
Beam End Forces
A GA that also contains applied loads for the selected loadcase.
A GA that also contains forces at the ends of steel beams (to assist steel connection design).
Column Splice Loads A Frame GA that also contains the splice loads at splice locations in steel columns (to assist steel connection design).
Concrete Beam Detail Beam reinforcement in elevation and section for each span. A reinforcement quantity table can optionally be included.
Concrete Column
Detail
Column reinforcement in elevation and section. A reinforcement quantity table can optionally be included.
Concrete Wall Detail Wall reinforcement in elevation and section. A reinforcement quantity table can optionally be included.
Non-concrete Beam
Detail
Individual details for non-concrete beams.
Non-concrete Column
Detail
Individual details for non-concrete columns.
515
User Guides (UK)
Concrete Beam
Schedule
Concrete Column
Schedule
Concrete Wall
Schedule
Slab/Mat Layout
Punching Check
Detail
Isolated Foundation
Detail
Foundation Layout
Tabular data created by building, by floor, or by selected beams. The information shown in the schedule is based on the design groups.
A table containing cross sections through each stack for the selected columns. A reinforcement quantity table is optionally included.
A table containing cross sections through each stack for the selected walls. A reinforcement quantity table is optionally included.
Slab panel, patch and punching shear reinforcement requirements.
A quantity table for the reinforcement displayed with a detailing allowance added is optionally included.
Punching shear reinforcement details for individual punching check locations.
Individual foundation details in plan, with options to show the detail in cross section and a reinforcement quantities table.
A GA at foundation level showing isolated bases, pile layouts, and mats.
Isolated foundation details, a reinforcement quantities table and an isolated foundation schedule can optionally be included.
Drawing Settings
How to apply and manage Drawing Settings
To modify drawing settings in the current project
1.
Click Draw > Edit... ( )
(alternatively you could also click Home > Model Settings ( ) > Drawings)
2.
Review and edit the settings as required.
516
User Guides
3.
If you change any of the settings, click:
• OK - to apply the changes directly to the current project, or
• Save... - to save the changes back to the active settings set (to act as defaults for future projects), or
• Cancel... - to cancel the changes
You can also click:
• Load... - to revert to the drawing settings specified in the active settings set.
To modify drawing setting defaults for future projects
1.
Click Home > Settings ( )
2.
In the Settings Sets page of the dialog select the settings set to be updated.
You can update any settings set simply by selecting it from the droplist, it does not need to be active.
3.
In the Drawings page of the dialog, review and edit the settings as required.
4.
If you change any of the settings, click:
• OK - to save the changes to the selected settings set (to act as defaults for future projects when that set is active), or
• Cancel - to cancel the changes
Export Preferences
Export Preferences
This page is only displayed when the drawing settings are accessed from the
Settings dialog on the Home toolbar.
Drawing Variant
Use the drop list to select the drawing variant to be configured.
Minimum Text Block Spacing
The value entered here is used to adjust the distance between independent drawing blocks.
517
User Guides (UK)
Caution should be applied when adjusting this value - if it is set too large, text labels can be displaced away from the objects to which they refer.
Scale
Controls the scale of the drawing.
How do I add a new drawing scale?
If the drawing scale you want to use is not listed you can add new scales as follows:
1.
Click Home > Settings
2.
On the Drawings page select the settings set to be edited from the drop list.
3.
Enter the scale required then click Add
The new scale is shown in the Available Scales list and will apply to all projects that use this settings set.
5. Click OK
Layer Configuration
Layer Configuration
A layer configuration controls which layers are displayed when the drawing is created.
Several default layer configurations have been pre-loaded in the Settings Sets - these
can be modified if required from the Settings dialog . Alternatively if you only want to
change layer configurations in the current project this can be done by clicking Draw >
Edit
When editing layer configurations via either of the above methods, you should first select the main drawing category on the left side of the dialog, the following fields are then displayed:
Drawing Variant
Use the drop list to select the drawing variant to be configured.
Available Configurations
The available configurations that are displayed depend on the drawing variant selected. You can Add a new configuration and set up the layers within it accordingly. Alternatively you can Add Copy... in order to copy an existing configuration and modify it to suit your particular requirements.
Active Configuration - Name
518
User Guides
Having selected one of the available configurations, you can edit its name if required.
Active Configuration - Layers
Having selected one of the available configurations, you can then proceed to specify the layers that are to be displayed for it when the drawing is created.
If you access and edit layer configurations in the current project by clicking
Draw > Edit, you should consider saving the changes to a Settings Set so that they can be applied to other projects also.
How do I add, modify, copy or remove a layer configuration?
1.
Click Draw > Edit... ( )
This opens the Model Settings at the Drawings page.
2.
Expand the Layer Configurations page and select a drawing category sub-page
(Planar Drawings, Member Details, or Member Schedules).
3.
From the dropdown list choose the Drawing Variant required, then:
To add a new configuration:
1.
Click Add...
2.
Enter a name for the new layer configuration.
3.
Check/uncheck the layers as required.
4.
Click OK
To modify an existing configuration:
1.
Select the available configuration to be modified.
2.
Check/uncheck the layers as required.
3.
Click OK
To copy an existing configuration:
1.
Select the available configuration to copy from.
2.
Click Copy
3.
Enter a name for the new layer configuration.
4.
Check/uncheck the layers as required.
5.
Click OK
519
User Guides (UK)
To remove an existing configuration:
1.
Select the available configuration to be removed.
2.
Click Remove
3.
Click OK
Layer Style
Layer Style
In order to control how a drawing is displayed (line types, fonts, colours etc.) you will need to apply a drawing Style.
Several default layer styles have been pre-loaded in the Settings Sets - these can be
modified if required from the Settings dialog . Alternatively if you only want to change
layer styles in the current project this can be done by clicking Draw > Edit
When editing layer styles via either of the above methods, you should first select the main drawing category on the left side of the dialog, the following fields are then displayed:
Drawing Variant
Use the drop list to select the drawing variant to be configured.
Available Styles
The available styles that are displayed depend on the drawing variant selected. You can Add a new style and set up the layers within it accordingly. Alternatively you can
Add Copy... in order to copy an existing style and modify it to suit your particular requirements.
Active Style - Name
Having selected one of the available styles, you can edit its name if required.
Active Style - Layers
Having selected one of the available styles, you can then proceed to specify the appearance of layers within it when the drawing is created.
How do I add, modify, copy or remove a drawing style?
1.
Click Draw > Edit... ( )
This opens the Model Settings at the Drawings page.
2.
Expand the Layer Styles page and select a drawing category sub-page (Planar
Drawings, Member Details, or Member Schedules).
3.
From the dropdown list choose the Drawing Variant required, then:
520
User Guides
To add a new style:
1.
Click Add...
2.
Enter a name for the new drawing style.
3.
Configure the colours, line types, fonts etc. for each of layers as required.
4.
Click OK
To modify an existing style:
1.
Select the available style to be modified.
2.
Modify the colours, line types, fonts etc. as required.
3.
Click OK
To copy an existing style:
1.
Select the available style to copy from.
2.
Click Copy
3.
Enter a name for the new drawing style.
4.
Modify the colours, line types, fonts etc. as required.
5.
Click OK
To remove an existing style:
1.
Select the available style to be removed.
2.
Click Remove
3.
Click OK
Drawing Options
You must expand the Options page and select the sub-page for an individual drawing variant in order to see the applicable options for that particular variant.
Options - Planar Drawings
Options - Planar Drawings
521
User Guides (UK)
After selecting the appropriate Planar Drawings sub-page (General Arrangement,
Foundation Reactions, Loading Plan, Slab/Mat Detail, or Beam End Forces), use the menu tabs to configure the options as required.
General tab
Hatching
Show upper column and wall stacks as hatched
Check this option to hatch columns and walls that continue above the current level.
Show transfer column and walls as cross hatched
Check this option to cross hatch transfer columns and walls.
Reaction Values (Foundation Reactions and Beam End Forces Variants only)
Current Loading Values values are displayed for the loadcase or combination currently selected in the
Loading drop list.
Max/Min Values by Loadcase/Combination max and min values are displayed for each loadcase/combination.
Max Absolute Value by Loadcase/Combination the max absolute value is displayed for each loadcase/combination.
Force & Moment Values (Foundation Reactions and Beam End Forces Variants only)
Factor by for the current drawing variant, the values displayed are factored by the amount specified.
A factor can be applied to the forces and moments that are displayed if required.
Moment Values, Shear Force Values and Axial Force Values (Foundation Reactions and Beam End Forces Variants only)
None values are not displayed.
Only greater than moments/forces are only displayed if the absolute value is greater than the value specified.
All values are always displayed, (even if zero).
Enveloped Reaction Values (Beam End Forces Variant only)
522
User Guides
Include coincident forces when a beam end forces drawing is created for a loading envelope and this option is checked, further options are presented allowing you to choose the max/min values and coincident forces to display.
Beams tab
Grouped Beam Labelling
These two options only apply when the beams have been designed using groups.
Use detail group name
Check this option to use the detail group name, or uncheck to use the design group name in the label.
Include the beam name
Check this option to include the beam name in the label for grouped beams.
Beam Labelling Position
Above, Inside, Below
Sets the location of the beam label in relation to the beam.
Beam Attributes
Show beam size in parentheses check to place brackets around the beam size in the label.
Camber
Append camber to section displays the amount of camber specified for steel beams.
Camber prefix specifies the camber prefix used in the label.
Composite Properties
Stud separator for composite beams the number of studs are displayed inside the chosen separator.
Columns tab
Grouped Column Labelling
523
User Guides (UK)
These two options only apply when the columns have been designed using groups.
Use detail group name
Check this option to use the detail group name, or uncheck to use the design group name in the label.
Include the column name
Check this option to include the column name in the label for grouped columns.
Column Labelling Position
The column size is either included at the right of the label, or on the line below the label.
Column Attributes
Show column size in parentheses check to place brackets around the column size in the label.
Steel Columns
2x scale for steel columns
Check this option to draw steel columns at double the drawing scale.
Walls tab
Wall Labelling Position
Above, Inside, Below
Sets the location of the wall label in relation to the wall.
Wall Attributes
Show wall size in parentheses check to place brackets around the wall size in the label.
Slabs and Mats tab
Panel Labeling
524
User Guides
Include panel reference
Check this option to include the slab panel reference in the label.
Include panel thickness
Check this option to include the slab panel thickness in the label.
Include surface offset (if non zero)
Check this option to include any surface offset that has been applied to the slab panel in the label.
Include border around label
Check this to add a border around the label.
Align label to panel reinforcement
Check this to align the label to the slab panel span direction.
- When checked the label is displayed as below left
- When unchecked the label is displayed as below left
Slab/Mat Geometry
Include panel span direction symbol
Check this option to include the symbol
525
User Guides (UK)
Loads tab
(Loading Plan Variant only)
Display size
Width of line/UDL/VDL loads on plan
Each of these load types is drawn as a hatched rectangle of fixed width when drawn in plan - this setting controls the width.
Height of line/UDL/VDL loads on elevation
Each of these load types is drawn as a hatched rectangle of fixed height when drawn in elevation - this setting controls the height.
Point load marker size
This setting controls the drawn size of point loads.
Options
Show dimensions for panel loads
Check this option to include the dimensions of panel loads.
Include dimensions to reference points
Check this option to include the dimensions from panel loads to the reference points that were used to set them out.
Show dimensions for member loads
Check this option to include the dimensions of member loads.
Options - Member Details
These are used to further control the appearance of the different drawing categories.
Beam Detail - Content
Beam Detail - Content
526
User Guides
These settings are used to control the content of the beam detail drawings.
Grouped Beams tab
Show grouped beam number
Provided the beams in the model have been arranged into detailing groups - checking this option causes the Detailing Group to be used as the member label instead of the beam reference.
If detailing groups have not been used, this option has no effect - the beam reference is always used as the member label.
Levels tab
Show span levels
Check this option to show the span levels on the elevation.
Cross sections tab
Spans
Choose which cross sections to display from the drop list:
• None
• First Span
(i.e. for multi-span beams, cross-sections are not shown for 2nd and subsequent spans)
• All Spans
Positions
If cross sections are displayed, choose where they are to be positioned from the drop list:
• Span Only
• Support
• Support and Span
Bar annotation
Choose the cross section annotation from the drop list:
• None
• Standard
• IStructE
Display bar marks
For Standard and IStructE annotation you have the option to display bar marks in the cross section labels.
Show slab lines in section
Check this option to display slab lines in sections, as shown below:
:
527
User Guides (UK)
When the option is unchecked the slab lines are not displayed:
Bar Labels tab
Show bar marks in elevation
Check this option to include bar marks in the bar labels on the elevation. They will also be displayed on the cross-sections provided the Cross-sections > Display bar
marks option is also checked.
If this option is unchecked, bar marks are not displayed on cross-sections - irrespective of the Cross-sections > Display bar marks option.
Show steel bar layer information
Check this option to show steel bar layer information, ( B1, B2, T1, T2 etc.)
Dimensions tab
Laps
Where laps exist these are either dimensioned, not dimensioned, or the dimension is replaced by a standard label ( TL) according to the drop list selection.
Anchorage lengths
Where anchorage lengths are required these are either dimensioned, not dimensioned, or the dimension is replaced by a standard label ( AL) according to the drop list selection.
Axes
Axes are either not shown, shown above the beam with dimensions, or shown below the beam with dimensions.
Additional bottom span bar positioning dimensions
When optional 2nd span bars have been employed, these can be dimensioned from the face of the support by checking this option.
Support region length
Where different link regions has been employed along a beam span, the length of the support regions is dimensioned on the elevation by checking this option.
528
User Guides
First and last links
Check this option to add dimensions from the face of the supports to the first and last links.
Support columns and clear spans
Check this option to add dimensions showing the width of each supporting column and the clear beam span between supports.
Beam section
Check this option to dimension the beam depth and width on the cross section.
Slabs in beam sections
Check this option to dimension the slab depth on the cross section.
Quantities tab
Show reinforcement quantities table check this option to include reinforcement quantity tables on the drawings.
Beam Detail - Style
Beam Detail - Style
These settings are used to control the style of the beam detail drawings.
Beam Labels tab
Print beam labels below the detail
Check this option to show the beam label centrally below each span. When unchecked the label is positioned immediately above each span.
Underline beam labels
Check this option to underline the beam label on the elevation.
Cross sections tab
Section label style
Choose the label naming style to be applied to the cross sections from the drop list.
Restart section labels in each beam line
When multiple beam lines are displayed on the same drawing sheet, check this option to restart the section labels for each line.
Add beam name label as prefix to section labels
Check this option to prefix each section label with the beam name.
529
User Guides (UK)
Longitudinal Bars tab
Draw bar groups in same elevated layer at different levels
Check this option to draw the bars displaced vertically (although they are in the same elevated layer), to enhance the display.
Display elevated bobs at same position as shifted
Check this option to draw bobs displaced vertically (when they are bent at the same position), to enhance the display.
Display only a single side bar in detail
If multiple side bars are required in each face, when this option is checked only a single side bar is drawn full length. When unchecked, all side bars are drawn full length.
Stirrups/Links tab
Draw link labels in line
Check this option to show link labels in line on the elevation:
When unchecked the labels are drawn above the line.
Print link labels inside beam
Check this option to show the link labels inside the beam; uncheck to show below the beam.
Link label distance from bottom edge
When link labels are positioned inside the beam this setting is used to control their vertical position.
Dimensions tab
Draw lap dimensions outside the detail
Check this option to draw lap dimensions outside the detail.
Lap and anchorage rounding increment
This option is used to control the rounding increment of lap and anchorage dimensions.
530
User Guides
Column Detail - Content
Column Detail - Content
These settings are used to control the content of the column detail drawings.
Grouped Columns tab
Show grouped column number
Check this option to display column groups
Levels tab
Show levels
Check this option to label the construction levels
Cross sections tab
Show sections
Check this option to show cross sections through each stack
Bar annotation
Choose the cross section annotation from the drop list (None, Standard, IStructE).
Display bar marks
For Standard and IStructE annotation you have the option to display bar marks in the cross section labels
Dimensions tab
Laps
Where laps exist these are either dimensioned, not dimensioned, or given a standard label according to the drop list selection
Support region length
Check this option to dimension the support regions on the elevation
Levels
Check this option to add dimensions between levels
Grid line offsets
Check this option to add dimensions from the grid to the column face on the elevation
Connecting elements and clear heights
Check this option to add dimensions connecting elements and clear heights
Column section
531
User Guides (UK)
Check this option to add column dimensions on the section
Column Detail - Style
Column Detail - Style
These settings are used to control the style of the column detail drawings.
Column Labels tab
Underline column labels
Check this option to underline the column label on the elevation
Cross sections tab
Section label style
Choose the label style to be applied to the cross sections from the drop list
Restart section labels in each column line
When multiple columns are displayed on the same drawing sheet, check this option to restart the section labels for each column
Add column name label as prefix to section labels
Check this option to as a prefix each section label with the column name
Longitudinal Bars tab
Show hidden bar ends
Check this option to show hidden bar ends
Ties/Links tab
Draw link labels in line
Check this option to show link labels in line on the elevation, (as below left), or leave unchecked to display above the line (as below right):
Dimensions tab
532
User Guides
Lap dimension rounding increment
This option is used to control the rounding increment of lap dimensions
Wall Detail - Content
Wall Detail - Content
These settings are used to control the content of the wall detail drawings.
Levels tab
Show levels
Check this option to label the construction levels
Cross sections tab
Show sections
Check this option to show cross sections through each stack
Bar annotation
Choose the cross section annotation from the droplist (None, Standard, IStructE).
Display bar marks
For Standard and IStructE annotation you have the option to display bar marks in the cross section labels
Dimensions tab
Laps
Where laps exist these are either dimensioned, not dimensioned, or given a standard label according to the droplist selection
Support region length
Check this option to dimension the support regions on the elevation
Levels
Check this option to add dimensions between levels
Grid line offsets
Check this option to add dimensions from the grid to the column face on the elevation
Connecting elements and clear heights
Check this option to add dimensions connecting elements and clear heights
Wall section
Check this option to add wall dimensions on the section
533
User Guides (UK)
Wall Detail - Style
Wall Detail - Style
These settings are used to control the style of the wall detail drawings.
Wall Labels tab
Underline wall labels
Check this option to underline the wall label on the elevation
Cross sections tab
Section label style
Choose the label style to be applied to the cross sections from the drop list
Add wall name label as prefix to section labels
Check this option to as a prefix each section label with the wall name
Horizontal & Vertical Bars tab
Show hidden bar ends
Check this option to show hidden bar ends
Horizontal Bars and Ties/Links tab
Draw link labels in line
Check this option to show link labels in line on the elevation, (as below left), or leave unchecked to display above the line (as below right):
Dimensions tab
Lap dimension rounding increment
This option is used to control the rounding increment of lap dimensions
Options - Member Schedules
534
User Guides
Beam Schedule Options
Beam Schedule Options
These settings are used to control the appearance of the concrete beam schedule.
General tab
Texts
Item
Select an item in the list to see the text label that will applied to it in the schedule.
Text
If required you can edit the text to be displayed in the schedule for the selected item.
Columns
Size Column Format
Choose whether to display the width of the beam or its height first in the size column.
Use single column for size
Check to display both the width and height in a single column.
Use single column for bottom bars
Check to display the bottom bars in a single column.
Omit top middle bars column
Check to omit the top middle bars from the schedule.
Use single column for links
Check to display the links in a single column.
Show only design group name
Check to display only the design group name in the mark column.
Bar Key tab
Reference
Every reference that can potentially appear in the bar bending details table is listed.
Hover the cursor over a reference to see the bar and its associated note.
Use Custom Name
Check the box against a reference in order to apply a custom name.
535
User Guides (UK)
Custom Name any text entered here will replace the original reference in the bar bending details table.
Column Schedule Options
These settings are used to control the content of the concrete column schedules.
General
Show grouped column number
Check this option to show column groups
Include starter bars
Check this option to include starter bars
Show reinforcement quantities table
Check this option to include the quantities table
Cross sections
Bar annotation
Choose the cross section annotation from the drop list (Standard, IStructE).
Display bar marks
Check this option to display bar marks in the cross section labels.
Show outline of stack below
Check this option to show the outline of the stack below.
Dimension column section
Check this option to add column dimensions on the section.
Dimension levels
Check this option to add dimensions between levels.
Wall Schedule Options
These settings are used to control the content of the concrete wall schedules.
General
Include starter bars
Check this option to include starter bars
536
User Guides
Show reinforcement quantities table
Check this option to include the quantities table
Cross sections
Bar annotation
Choose the cross section annotation from the drop list (Standard, IStructE).
Display bar marks
Check this option to display bar marks in the cross section labels.
Show outline of panel below
Check this option to show the outline of the panel below.
Dimension wall section
Check this option to add wall dimensions on the section.
Dimension levels
Check this option to add dimensions between levels.
Options - Slabs and Mats
Layout
Layout
Slabs and Mats tab
Panel Labeling
Include panel reference
Check this option to include the slab panel reference in the label.
Include panel thickness
Check this option to include the slab panel thickness in the label.
Include surface offset (if non zero)
537
User Guides (UK)
Check this option to include any surface offset that has been applied to the slab panel in the label.
Include border around label
Check this to add a border around the label.
Align label to panel reinforcement
Check this to align the label to the slab panel span direction.
- When checked the label is displayed as below left
- When unchecked the label is displayed as below left
Slab/Mat Geometry
Include panel span direction symbol
Check this option to include the symbol
Reinforcement Display
Extend loose bar panel reinforcement lines across full panel
Leave this option unchecked to display the loose bar reinforcement as above, otherwise the bars are drawn across the entire panel.
Reinforcement Labelling
Always show main bar layer for rectangular mesh
538
User Guides
If the mesh is not a square mesh it is normal practice to put the main bars in the outer layer, (no text is required on the drawing in this situation). However, when this is not the case this is indicated on the drawing by adding B2 (if bottom mesh) or T2
(if top mesh) aligned to the main bar direction.
Anchorage rounding increment
Specifies the rounding value applied to the anchorage length.
If a square mesh (i.e. if it does have the same size and spacing of bars in both directions) is applied then a square mesh symbol is used which indicatively shows bars equally spaced in both directions.
If the mesh is not a square mesh (i.e. if it does not have the same size and spacing of bars in both directions) then a rectangular mesh symbol is used which indicatively shows bars in both directions but with closer spacing for the more closely spaced bars in the mesh.
Patches tab
General
Show patches with no reinforcement
If a patch has no reinforcement specified you can choose not to show it on the drawing by unchecking this option.
Anchorage Length
You are given the option to either draw the bars with full anchorage lengths, or to draw curtailed (indicative) anchorage lengths instead.
Punching Shear tab
Show punching reinforcement details
Check this option to include a detail to the side of the layout showing the punching shear reinforcement provided.
Don’t show area of steel requirement where rails have been designed
When checked: the area of steel requirement is shown for punching check items where rails are not provided (e.g. walls and column drops), but is not shown elsewhere.
When unchecked: the area of steel requirement is shown for all punching check items.
Hide punching reinforcement on the main layout
539
User Guides (UK)
Check this option to hide the punching reinforcement on the main layout. It will still be shown in the detail (provided that the above ‘Show punching reinforcement details’ is checked).
Punching Check Detail - Content
Punching Check Detail - Content
These settings are used to control the content of the beam detail drawings.
Dimensions tab
Show column to first stud spacing
Check this option to add a dimension from the column face to the first stud.
Show stud spacing
Check this option to add dimensions showing the stud spacings along the rail.
Show rail spacing
Check this option to add dimensions showing the rail spacings.
Include schematic showing stud dimensions
Check this option to add a schematic showing the stud width and height above the rail.
Quantities tab
Show reinforcement quantities table
Check this option to include reinforcement quantity tables on the drawings.
Punching Check Detail - Style
Punching Check Detail - Style
These settings are used to control the style of the beam detail drawings.
General tab
Show column as hatched
Check this option to hatch the column.
Underline punching check label
Check this option to underline the punching check label on the detail.
Options - Foundations
Foundation Layout
540
User Guides
Foundation Layout
Slabs and Mats tab
Panel Labeling
Include panel reference
Check this option to include the slab panel reference in the label.
Include panel thickness
Check this option to include the slab panel thickness in the label.
Include surface offset (if non zero)
Check this option to include any surface offset that has been applied to the slab panel in the label.
Include border around label
Check this to add a border around the label.
Align label to panel reinforcement
Check this to align the label to the slab panel span direction.
- When checked the label is displayed as below left
- When unchecked the label is displayed as below left
Slab/Mat Geometry
Include panel span direction symbol
Check this option to include the symbol
541
User Guides (UK)
Mats
Show pile location table
Check this option to include a table showing the pile locations.
Show pile references
Check this option to show the pile references on the layout.
Isolated Foundations tab
Drawing Content
Show pile type name
Check this option to include the pile type names in the footing attributes displayed for each pile cap on the layout.
Show foundation details
Check this option to include pad/strip base and pile cap details to the side of the layout (showing the designed reinforcement).
Show reinforcement quantities table
Check this option to include the reinforcement quantities table for the pad/strip bases and pile caps shown on the layout.
Show pad/strip base schedule
Check this option to include the reinforcement schedule for the pad/strip bases on the layout.
Show pile cap schedule
Check this option to include the reinforcement schedule for the pile caps on the layout.
Show allowable pile capacity
Check this option to include the allowable pile capacity table for the piles under pile caps on the layout.
542
User Guides
Dimensions on plan
Show overall dimensions
Check this option to include the overall dimensions of the pad/strip bases and pile caps on the layout.
Show pile spacings
Check this option to include the pile cap pile spacing dimensions on the layout.
Grouped Foundation Labelling
Include the foundation name
Check this option to include the pad/strip base or pile cap name in the footing mark for grouped footings on the layout.
Labelling Position
Above/Below controls where the footing mark and attributes are displayed for isolated foundations on the layout.
Isolated Foundation Detail-Content
These settings are used to control the content of the base detail drawings.
Grouped Foundations: Show number of foundations in group
Check this option to display the number of bases/pile caps in the group
Cross sections: Positions
Choose ‘None’ to exclude, or choose ‘Length’ for a length-wise section or ‘Length and
Width’ to display cross sections in both directions.
Pile Labels: Show pile type name
Check this option to include the pile type name in the label.
Dimensions: Show overall dimensions
Check this option to include the overall dimensions of the base/pile cap.
Dimensions: Show overall dimensions
Check this option to include dimensions of the column/wall being supported.
Dimensions: Show pile spacings
For pile caps, check this option to include dimensions from center to center of each pile.
Quantities: Show reinforcement quantities table
Check this option to show the reinforcement quantities table for the base.
543
User Guides (UK)
Isolated Foundation Detail-Style
These settings are used to control the style of the column detail drawings.
General: Show supported member as hatched
Check this option to hatch columns and walls that are supported on the base pile cap.
General: Underline foundation label
Check this option to underline the foundation label on the detail
Cross-sections: Section label style
Choose the label style to be applied to the cross sections from the drop list
Cross-sections: Restart labels in each foundation
When multiple foundations are included on the same drawing, checking this option causes the labelling to restart from the beginning on each section.
Planar Drawings
The following drawing variants fall into this category:
General Arrangement
General Arrangement drawings show the member layouts for 2D levels and frames.
Beam End Forces
Beam End Force drawings are similar to General Arrangements but also display the forces at the ends of steel beams for the purpose of connection design.
Column Splice Loads
This drawing should be created from a Frame View in order to display the splice loads at splice locations in steel columns.
Foundation Reactions
Foundation Reaction drawings include support reactions to assist foundation design.
Loading Plan
Loading Plan drawings show the applied loads for individual loadcases.
Prior to creating any of these drawings you should ensure that the Options -
Planar Drawings have been configured to meet your requirements.
How do I create a General Arrangement drawing?
544
User Guides
1.
Open a 2D scene view displaying the part of the model to be included on the drawing. For example a particular construction level, frame, or sloped plane.
2.
Click Draw > General Arrangement ( )
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
3.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog
choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a Beam End Forces drawing?
Beam End Force drawings are typically created to assist connection design in steel structures. These forces are not relevant in concrete structures and therefore do not get displayed for concrete beams.
1.
Open a 2D view in Results View mode displaying the part of the model to be included on the drawing. For example a particular construction level, frame, or sloped plane.
2.
From the Loading drop list select the loadcase or combination to be displayed.
3.
Click Draw > Beam End Forces ( )
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
4.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog
choose the Layer Configuration
5.
Specify the drawing scale.
545
User Guides (UK)
6.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
7.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
8.
Click OK
How do I create a Column Splice Loads drawing?
Column Splice drawings are typically created to assist connection design in steel structures. These forces are not relevant in concrete structures.
1.
Open a Frame view containing the steel frame for which you want to see the column splice loads.
2.
Put the view into Results View mode.
3.
From the Loading drop list select the loadcase or combination to be displayed.
4.
Click Draw > Column Splice Loads
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
5.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog
choose the Layer Configuration
6.
Specify the drawing scale.
7.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
8.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
9.
Click OK
How do I create a Foundation Reactions drawing?
1.
Open a 2D Results View displaying the part of the model to be included on the drawing. (Typically the base construction level).
2.
From the Loading drop list select the loadcase or combination to be displayed.
3.
Click Draw > Foundation Reactions ( )
546
User Guides
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
4.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog
choose the Layer Configuration
5.
Specify the drawing scale.
6.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
7.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
8.
Click OK
How do I create a Loading Plan drawing?
1.
Open a 2D scene view displaying the part of the model to be included on the drawing. For example a particular construction level, frame, or sloped plane.
2.
From the Loading drop list select the loadcase to be displayed.
3.
Click Draw > Loading Plan ( )
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
4.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog
choose the Layer Configuration
5.
Specify the drawing scale.
6.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
7.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
8.
Click OK
DXF Export Preferences dialog
From this dialog you can specify the drawing location and control both its content and appearance
547
User Guides (UK)
Use automatic file name
Leave the box checked in order to create the drawing with an automatically generated file name in the same folder as the model. Uncheck to specify an alternative file name and location.
Layer Configuration
The Layer Configuration drop list is used to specify which layers are included in the dxf.
Layer Style
The Layer Style drop list is used to specify the appearance of the text and lines in the
included layers.
Scale
Controls the scale of the drawing.
Minimum Text Block Spacing
The Minimum Text Block Spacing is used in order to adjust the distance between independent drawing blocks.
Caution should be applied when adjusting this value - if it is set too large, text labels can be displaced away from the objects to which they refer.
Member Details
The following drawing variants fall into this category:
Concrete Beam Detail
This drawing displays the beam reinforcement in elevation and section for each span. A reinforcement quantity table can optionally be included.
Concrete Column Detail
This drawing displays the column reinforcement in elevation and section. A reinforcement quantity table can optionally be included.
Concrete Wall Detail
This drawing displays the wall reinforcement in elevation and section. A reinforcement quantity table can optionally be included.
Non-concrete Beam Detail
Non-concrete beam detail drawings are used to display individual steel beam details.
548
User Guides
Non-concrete Column Detail
Non-concrete column detail drawings are used to display individual steel beam details.
Prior to creating any of these drawings you should ensure that the Options -
Member Details have been configured to meet your requirements.
How do I create a concrete beam detail?
Prior to creating your beam detail drawings you should ensure that both the
and the Beam Detail - Style options have been
configured to meet your requirements.
To create a beam detail:
1.
Hover the cursor over the beam to be detailed until its outline becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select Generate Detailing Drawing... from the context menu to
display the DXF Export Preferences dialog .
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a concrete column detail?
Prior to creating your column detail drawings you should ensure that both
and the Column Detail - Style options have been
configured to meet your requirements.
To create a column detail:
1.
Hover the cursor over the column to be detailed until its outline becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select Generate Detailing Drawing... from the context menu to
display the DXF Export Preferences dialog .
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
549
User Guides (UK)
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a concrete wall detail?
Prior to creating your column detail drawings you should ensure that both
and the Wall Detail - Style options have been
configured to meet your requirements.
To create a wall detail:
1.
Hover the cursor over the wall to be detailed until its outline becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select Generate Detailing Drawing... from the context menu to
display the DXF Export Preferences dialog .
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a non concrete beam detail?
Prior to creating your beam detail drawings you should ensure that both the
and the Beam Detail - Style options have been
configured to meet your requirements.
To create a beam detail:
1.
Hover the cursor over the beam to be detailed until its outline becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select Generate Detailing Drawing... from the context menu to
display the DXF Export Preferences dialog .
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
550
User Guides
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a non concrete column detail?
Prior to creating your column detail drawings you should ensure that both
and the Column Detail - Style options have been
configured to meet your requirements.
To create a column detail:
1.
Hover the cursor over the column to be detailed until its outline becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select Generate Detailing Drawing... from the context menu to
display the DXF Export Preferences dialog .
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
Slabs and Mats
The following drawing variants fall into this category:
Slab/Mat Layout
Slab and mat detail drawings are used to convey slab panel reinforcement and patch reinforcement requirements, (which may take the form of either loose bars or mesh).
The drawings also include a quantity table for the reinforcement displayed with a detailing allowance added.
An option is provided to also show punching check reinforcement details at the side of the main layout.
Punching Check Detail
551
User Guides (UK)
This drawing shows an individual punching check detail in plan, with an option to show the reinforcement quantities table
How do I create a Punching Check Detail drawing?
To create a punching check detail:
1.
Hover the cursor over the punching check to be detailed until its outline becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select Generate Detailing Drawing... from the context menu to
display the DXF Export Preferences dialog .
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a Slab or Mat Layout drawing?
1.
Open a 2D scene view displaying the slabs/mats to be included on the drawing.
2.
Click Draw > Slab/Mat Detailing ( )
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
The DXF Export Preferences dialog is displayed.
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
Foundations
552
User Guides
The following drawing variants fall into this category:
Isolated Foundation Detail
This drawing shows an individual foundation detail in plan, with options to show:
• the detail in cross section
• reinforcement quantities table
Foundation Layout
This drawing shows the piling layout and also the layout of isolated foundations, with options to show:
• isolated foundation details
• reinforcement quantities table
• isolated foundation schedule
• pile location table
How do I create a Base or Pile Cap Detail drawing?
Prior to creating your base detail drawings you should ensure that both the
Isolated Foundation Detail-Content
and the Isolated Foundation Detail-
Style options have been configured to meet your requirements.
To create a base/pile cap detail:
1.
Hover the cursor over the base/pile cap to be detailed until its outline becomes highlighted.
2.
Right click and select Generate Detailing Drawing... from the context menu to
display the DXF Export Preferences dialog .
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a Foundation Layout drawing?
1.
Open a 2D scene view displaying the piles/bases/pile caps to be included on the drawing.
2.
Click Draw > Foundation Layout ( )
553
User Guides (UK)
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
The DXF Export Preferences dialog is displayed.
3.
Choose the Layer Configuration
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
Drawing Management
Although individual drawings can be created as and when required, it is often more efficient to create a batch of drawings in a single operation. This becomes an almost essential requirement when working in large models.
The Drawing Management... command facilitates this process allowing you to:
• Select the drawing variant
• Either manually add a drawing sheet, or generate a series of drawing sheets
• Select the frames, levels or members for which drawings are to be created
• Arrange the drawings on the drawing sheet, (either in a linear or grid arrangement)
• For load dependant drawing variants, select the loadcases/combinations
• Create drawing revisions
• View the revision history
• Reset bar marks on concrete detail drawings (in order to remove gaps in the bar mark numbering)
How do I add new drawings and specify their content?
For all drawing variants this can be done manually as follows:
1.
Click Draw > Drawing Management...
2.
Specify the drawing variant.
3.
Click Add
4.
Enter a Name for the new drawing sheet
554
User Guides
5.
Click Content...
6.
To choose from a list of only those items not already placed on a drawing: pick
‘Show unassigned only’, else pick ‘Show all’
7.
Drag the items to be included from the left pane to the right pane of the Drawing
Content dialog.
8.
Click OK
For concrete beam and column detail variants the drawings can also be generated automatically:
1.
Click Draw > Drawing Management...
2.
Select either the Concrete Beam Detail or Concrete Column Detail drawing variant as required.
3.
Click Generate
Drawings are created with their content automatically generated: one drawing will contain containing typical beams or columns, additional drawings are also created which contain any ungrouped beams or columns
4.
If necessary you can click on the available drawings in order to rename them.
How do I specify the layout?
1.
Select the drawing name from the available drawings list.
2.
Click Layout...
3.
Choose the direction and arrangement of the layout as required
4.
Click OK
For load dependant drawing variants, how do I specify the loading?
1.
Select the drawing name from the available drawings list.
2.
Click Loading...
3.
Choose the loadcases and combinations required
4.
Click OK
How do I view a drawing?
1.
Select the drawing name from the available drawings list.
2.
Click View Drawing...
555
User Guides (UK)
3.
In DXF Export Preferences choose the drawing type and style required.
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Click OK
How do I consolidate the bar marks used on concrete detail drawings?
Each bar geometry that has ever been used in the model has an associated mark - and this information is not automatically deleted. That means if a model is designed and some of the bars fall out of use, their bark mark assignment is still retained.
Consequently there is the potential for gaps in the bar marks and bar marks starting at high numbers. To avoid this a Reset ALL Marks button is provided.
It is envisaged that this consolidation feature is used as follows:
Phase 1 - During initial design development you would want to continually consolidate. In this stage things can change a lot and the bar marks used will climb quickly leaving lots of gaps. Nothing is being issued so there is no problem consolidating.
Phase 2 - At later stages (once information starts to be issued/shared with others) it becomes increasingly preferable not to consolidate.
To consolidate the bar marks on all drawing sheets:
1.
Click Draw > Drawing Management...
2.
Select the Concrete Beam Detail or Concrete Column Detail drawing variant as required.
3.
Click Reset ALL Marks
How do I apply a revision to a drawing?
To apply a revision:
1.
Click Draw > Drawing Management...
2.
Select the drawing
3.
Click Create Revision...
4.
Enter a revision name
5.
Enter the revision note.
6.
Click OK
How do I view the revision history of a drawing?
556
User Guides
To view revision history:
1.
Click Draw > Drawing Management...
2.
Select the drawing
3.
Click History...
Concrete Member Schedules
The following drawing variants fall into this category:
Concrete Beam Schedule
A beam schedule (not to be confused with a bar bending schedule) is a particular form of output which is generated by the Engineer in which the reinforcement is listed on a span by span basis. The beam schedule is used by other parties (such as a specialist detailing firm or a contractor) to produce the bar bending schedules that are necessary for the construction to proceed.
Beam schedules are created by building, by floor or by selected beams. The information shown in the schedule is based on the design groups.
Beam schedules are created in dxf format even though they don't include graphical information, so that they can be added to the beam detail drawings.
Concrete Column Schedule
Column schedules display a cross section through each stack for the selected columns.
A reinforcement quantity table is optionally included.
Concrete Wall Schedule
Wall schedules display a cross section through each stack for the selected walls. A reinforcement quantity table is optionally included.
Prior to creating any of these drawings you should ensure that the Options -
Member Schedules have been configured to meet your requirements.
How do I create a concrete beam schedule?
1.
Open a 2D scene view displaying the beams to be included on the schedule. For example a particular construction level, frame, or sub model.
2.
Click Draw > Beam Schedule ( )
557
User Guides (UK)
The above button is only available when the current view is displayed in 2D.
If the button is greyed out, check that you are not in a Structure view or in a
2D scene view displayed in 3D.
3.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog choose the drawing
type and style required.
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
7.
Click OK
How do I create a concrete column schedule?
1.
Open a 3D View or Frame View displaying the columns to be included on the schedule.
2.
Click Draw > Column Schedule ( )
3.
Select the columns to be included, then click OK
4.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog choose the drawing
type and style required.
5.
Specify the drawing scale.
6.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
7.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
8.
Click OK
How do I create a concrete wall schedule?
1.
Open a 3D View or Frame View displaying the walls to be included on the schedule.
2.
Click Draw > Wall Schedule ( )
3.
Select the walls to be included, then click OK
4.
In the DXF Export Preferences dialog choose the drawing
type and style required.
5.
Specify the drawing scale.
558
User Guides
6.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
7.
Either accept the automatic file name, or enter the name directly.
8.
Click OK
Schedule Management
Although individual schedules can be created as and when required, it is also possible to create a batch of schedules in a single operation.
The Schedule Management... command facilitates this process allowing you to:
• Select the drawing variant
• Add the drawing
• Select members to be included
• Arrange the drawing layout, (either in a linear or grid arrangement)
• Create revisions
• View the revision history
• Reset bar marks (in order to remove gaps in the bar mark numbering)
How do I add new drawings and specify their content?
1.
Click Draw > Schedule Management...
2.
Specify the drawing variant.
3.
Click Add
4.
Enter a Name for the new drawing
5.
Click Content...
6.
To choose from a list of only those items not already placed on a drawing: pick
‘Show unassigned only’, else pick ‘Show all’
7.
Drag the members to be included from the left pane to the right pane of the
Drawing Content dialog.
8.
Click OK
How do I specify the layout?
1.
Select the drawing name from the available drawings list.
2.
Click Layout...
3.
Choose the direction and arrangement of the layout as required
559
User Guides (UK)
4.
Click OK
How do I view a drawing?
1.
Select the drawing name from the available drawings list.
2.
Click View Drawing...
3.
In DXF Export Preferences choose the drawing type and style required.
4.
Specify the drawing scale.
5.
If required modify the Minimum Text Block Spacing, (in order to adjust the distance between independent lines of text).
6.
Click OK
How do I consolidate the bar marks?
Each bar geometry that has ever been used in the model has an associated mark - and this information is not automatically deleted. That means if a model is designed and some of the bars fall out of use, their bark mark assignment is still retained.
Consequently there is the potential for gaps in the bar marks and bar marks starting at high numbers. To avoid this a Reset ALL Marks button is provided.
It is envisaged that this consolidation feature is used as follows:
Phase 1 - During initial design development you would want to continually consolidate. In this stage things can change a lot and the bar marks used will climb quickly leaving lots of gaps. Nothing is being issued so there is no problem consolidating.
Phase 2 - At later stages (once information starts to be issued/shared with others) it becomes increasingly preferable not to consolidate.
To consolidate the bar marks on all drawings:
1.
Click Draw > Schedule Management...
2.
Select the Concrete Beam, Column , or Wall Schedule drawing variant as required.
3.
Click Reset ALL Marks
How do I apply a revision to a drawing?
To apply a revision:
1.
Click Draw > Drawing Management...
2.
Select the drawing
3.
Click Create Revision...
4.
Enter a revision name
560
5.
Enter the revision note.
6.
Click OK
How do I view the revision history of a drawing?
To view revision history:
1.
Click Draw > Drawing Management...
2.
Select the drawing
3.
Click History...
User Guides
561
User Guides (UK)
Object Properties
The topic links below list the properties for the different object types that can be selected in Scene Views, or the Project Workspace.
Structure, Level, Frame and Slope Properties
Topics in this section
•
•
•
•
Structure Properties
When Structure is selected in the Structure Tree ,
properties for defining the building’s principal direction and default meshing are displayed:
Property Description
General
562
Building
Direction
Rotation
User Guides
All buildings are set out in Global X, Y and Z coordinates in
Tekla Structural Designer. However, a building may have its
"principal axes" orientated at an angle to the global axes (in plan). There are certain processes that require this knowledge in order to orientate themselves correctly for the building - these include
• Slenderness calculations
• Direction of continuous beams
• Equivalent horizontal forces/notional loads
• Seismic loading
• Natural frequencies
• Deflection results
• Drift results
The default (0 degrees) aligns the building direction 1 arrow with the global X axis and the direction 2 arrow with the global Y axis.
Entering a positive value rotates the Building Direction arrows anti-clockwise. A negative value rotates anticlockwise. The limiting values are +45 degrees and -45 degrees. (If you enter larger values they will be capped at these limits).
The building direction arrows are always at 90 degs to each other.
• Checked - the building direction arrows are displayed in all the 2D and 3D Views
Show
Building
Direction
Arrows
Building
Direction
Labels
Choose the labels to be used for the building direction arrows.
• Dir 1/2
• Dir H/V
• Dir X/Y
Meshing
563
User Guides (UK)
Shell Mesh
Size
Shell
Uniformity
Factor
Semi-Rigid
Mesh Size
Semi-Rigid
Uniformity
Factor
Semi-Rigid
Mesh Type
Wall Mesh
Horizontal
Size
Wall Mesh
Vertical Size
Specifies the shell mesh size for two way spanning slabs.
(Default 1.000m).
Although the above default is likely to be conservative, the degree of mesh refinement applied remains the users
responsibility.
To optimise solution time consider using a coarser mesh during design development before switching to a more refined mesh at the final design stage.
Specifies the shell uniformity factor for two way spanning slabs.
(Default 50%).
Although the above default is likely to be conservative, the degree of mesh refinement applied remains the users responsibility.
To optimise solution time consider using a coarser mesh during design development before switching to a more refined mesh at the final design stage.
Specifies the mesh size for roof panels, and any one way spanning slabs modelled as semi-rigid diaphragms.
(Default 1.000m).
Specifies the semi-rigid uniformity factor for roof panels, and any one way spanning slabs modelled as semi-rigid diaphragms. (Default 100%)
Specifies the semi-rigid mesh type (QuadDominant,
QuadOnly, or Triangular) for roof panels, and any one way spanning slabs modelled as semi-rigid diaphragms.
Specifies the horizontal mesh size for all meshed walls in the model - but can be overridden in individual wall properties. (Default 1.000m)
Specifies the vertical mesh size for all meshed walls in the model - but can be overridden in individual wall properties.
(Default 1.000m)
564
Wall Mesh
Type
Used to specify the mesh type for all meshed walls in the model, (but can be overridden in individual wall properties):
QuadDominant
User Guides
QuadOnly
Triangular
Level Properties
565
User Guides (UK)
When a level is selected in the Structure Tree
the following properties are displayed:
Name Description
General
Level
Floor
Type
Mesh Slabs in
3D Analysis
Short Name
Long Name
Name
User Name
Grid Line
Visibility
The height of the construction level above the base level.
By setting a construction level to be a Floor you are indicating that it is a major level in the building. Floor levels are used to determine items such as your inter story height and positions from which column splices are laid out. If a level is not set to be a floor then no live load reductions will be accounted for in the beams at that level, or in the columns supporting that level.
There will certainly be a number of levels that are clearly floor levels, but there could be many others that are not. For example you create intermediate levels in order to define:
• half landing levels and stairs,
• K Bracing - you require a construction level for the intermediate bracing connection points,
• steps in the building floor levels.
Where you define a level which is clearly not a floor, then you should not check the floor box.
Select the type from the drop down menu: T.O.S, S.S.L, or F.F.L
• Checked - the slabs are meshed in the 3D Analysis.
The Sub Model in which the Level is contained determines the mesh parameters that are applied.
• Unchecked - the slabs are not meshed in the 3D Analysis.
Each construction level should be given a unique reference.
Typically this might be a storey number, 1, 2 , 3 etc.
Each construction level can also be given a name to further assist identification. ‘First Floor’, or ‘Mezzanine’ etc.
Automatically generated from the short and long name. By default
this will be used as the name in the Structure Tree .
You can use this to replace the name displayed in the Structure
Tree.
Check this box to display grid lines at this level.
566
User Guides
Decomposition
Keep solver model
The is recreated each time the analysis is performed - this setting simply controls whether you will be able to review the model between analyses:
• Checked - the solver model is retained to allow you to visually review the meshing etc.
• Unchecked (Default) - the solver model is discarded immediately after analysis has been performed.
Frame Properties
When a frame is selected in the Structure Tree
the following properties are displayed:
Name Description
Name
User Name
Grid Line
Visibility
The automatically generated name for the frame is derived from the grid line selected.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Uncheck to switch off the grid line display in the Frame View.
Slope Properties
When a slope is selected in the Structure Tree
the following properties are displayed:
Name Description
Type
Mesh Slabs in
3D Analysis
Name
User Name
Select the type from the drop down menu: T.O.S, S.S.L, or F.F.L.
• Checked - the slabs in the Sloped Plane are meshed in the 3D
Analysis.
The Sub Model in which the plane is contained determines the mesh parameters that are applied.
• Unchecked - the slabs in the Sloped Plane are not meshed in the
3D Analysis.
The automatically generated name for the slope.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
567
User Guides (UK)
Grid Line
Visibility
Decomposition
Keep solver model
Uncheck to switch off the grid line display in the Slope View.
The is recreated each time the analysis is performed - this setting simply controls whether you will be able to review the model between analyses:
• Checked - the solver model is retained to allow you to visually review the meshing etc.
• Unchecked (Default) - the solver model is discarded immediately after analysis has been performed.
Steel, Concrete and Timber Member Properties
Topics in this section
•
•
•
•
•
•
Definition of rotation angle and gamma angle
Steel Member Properties
Topics in this section
•
create steel column properties set
•
create steel beam properties set
•
create composite steel beam properties set
•
create steel brace properties set
•
create steel joist properties set
•
create gable post properties set
•
create parapet post properties set
•
edit steel column properties set
•
edit steel beam properties set
•
edit composite steel beam properties set
568
User Guides
•
edit steel brace properties set
•
edit steel joist properties set
•
edit gable post properties set
•
edit parapet post properties set
•
edit steel truss properties set
create steel column properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a steel column.
Property Description
Top Level
Base Level
Define the vertical position of the column top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the column base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Continuous Indicates if all stacks have the same properties.
• Checked - all stacks have the same properties
• Unchecked - allows splices to be positioned; enabling different stacks to have different properties.
(This property is only displayed in Structure, or Frame
Views)
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material for the column.
Construction Define type of construction.
Composite column construction is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Fabrication
Linearity
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Define the type of fabrication.
Plated, concrete filled and concrete encased fabrication, is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Although beams can be curved, columns are restricted to straight.
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
569
User Guides (UK)
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Concrete class
Autodesign
Design section order
Define the steel grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Define the concrete grade for concrete filled, or concrete encased columns.
The concrete grades that are available are set from the
Materials button on the Home ribbon.
(This property is only displayed if the fabrication type is set to concrete filled, or concrete encased).
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only Indicates if the column is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Section The section initially applied to the column that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design
570
section order if the member is auto-designed.
Encasing section
The encasing section.
(This property is only displayed for concrete encased fabrication).
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Define alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
[+] Lateral
Restraints
Define lateral restraints and factors.
See: Restraints
[+] Strut restraints
Define strut restraints and factors.
See: Restraints
[+]
Eccentricity
[+] Size constraints
Define eccentric beam end connections to the column faces.
Size Constraints are only applicable when Autodesign is checked. They allow you to impose upper and lower limits to the section depth and width.
See: Size Constraints
User Guides
571
User Guides (UK)
Lambda crit check or drift check
Wind drift check
[+] Seismic
[+] UDA
By default all stacks of all columns are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this calculation being accessed from
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular column stacks from these calculations to avoid spurious results associated with very small stack lengths. You can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed from
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Indicates if the column is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create steel beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a steel beam.
Property Description
Continuous Define if the beam is single or multi-span.
• Unchecked - creates a single span beam
• Checked -creates a multi-span continuous beam.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material of the beam.
572
User Guides
Construction Define the type of construction:
• Non composite
• Composite - the beam acts compositely with a concrete slab
Fabrication Define the type of fabrication:
• Rolled
• Plated
• Westok cellular
• Westok plated
• Fabsec
Westok cellular and Fabsec are beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Linearity
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Indicates if the beam is straight or curved.
Design of curved steel beams is beyond the scope of the current release.
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
Define the steel grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
573
User Guides (UK)
Design section order
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only Indicates if the beam is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Section
Major
Alignment
The section initially applied to the beam that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Minor
Alignment
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
[+] Lateral
Restraints
Define if either the top or bottom flange are continuously restrained.
[+] Strut
Restraints
Define strut restraints and factors.
Deflection limits
Camber
Define the deflection limits for specific load types.
See: Deflection Limits
Used to specify a camber to the beam if required.
See: Camber
574
User Guides
Natural frequency
[+] Size constraints
Used to specify a natural frequency limit to the beam if required.
See: Natural frequency
Define upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
Seismic Indicates if the beam is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create composite steel beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a composite steel beam.
Property Description
Continuous Define if the beam is single or multi-span.
• Unchecked - creates a single span beam
• Checked -creates a multi-span continuous beam.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material of the beam.
Construction Define the type of construction:
• Composite beam - the beam acts compositely with a concrete slab
575
User Guides (UK)
Fabrication
Linearity Indicates if the beam is straight or curved.
Design of curved steel beams is beyond the scope of the current release.
Use Automatic
Grouping
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
Rotation Angle To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to
‘Angle’.
Grade
Define the type of fabrication:
• Rolled
• Plated
• Westok cellular
• Westok plated
• Fabsec
Westok cellular and Fabsec are beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Autodesign
Define the steel grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
Design section order
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
576
User Guides
Gravity only
Section
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
[+] Releases
[+] Lateral
Restraints
Indicates if the beam is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
The section initially applied to the beam that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
Define if either the top or bottom flange are continuously restrained.
Top flange cont. rest.
(perpendicular metal deck)
Defines the restraint condition of the composite beam top flange if attached to a perpendicular composite deck.
See: Restraints
Top flange cont. rest.
(parallel metal deck)
Top flange cont. rest.
(precast deck)
Defines the restraint condition of the composite beam top flange if attached to a parallel composite deck.
See: Restraints
Defines the restraint condition of the composite beam top flange if attached to a precast deck.
See: Restraints
577
User Guides (UK)
Bottom flange cont. rest.
[+] Strut
Restraints
Defines the restraint condition of the composite beam bottom flange.
See: Restraints
Define strut restraints and factors.
Deflection limits
Camber
Natural frequency
[+] Size constraints
Floor construction
Metal deck
Define the deflection limits for specific load types.
See: Deflection Limits
Used to specify a camber to the beam if required.
See: Camber
Used to specify a natural frequency limit to the beam if required.
See: Natural frequency
Define upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints
Used to specify the shear connector type.
See: Floor construction
Used to specify the minimum lap distance.
See: Metal deck
Stud strength Used to specify the stud properties.
See: Stud strength
Connector layout
Used to specify the stud layout.
See: Connector layout
Transverse reinforcement
Used to specify the transverse reinforcement.
See: Transverse reinforcement
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
578
User Guides
Seismic
[+] UDA
Indicates if the beam is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create steel brace properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a steel brace.
Property Description
Type Define the brace pattern to be applied.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material of the brace.
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
Design section order
Define the steel grade of the brace.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
579
User Guides (UK)
Section
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
The section initially applied to the brace that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Brace Releases
Compression Expands to allow the definition of effective length factors.
See: Compression
Tension Expands to allow the definition of net area of the section for tension checks.
See: Tension
[+] Size constraints
Seismic
[+] UDA
Define upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints
Indicates if the brace is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create steel joist properties set
580
User Guides
Steel joists are a specific type of member used in the United States. They are constrained to standard types specified by the US Steel Joist Institute. They are standardized in terms of span, depth and load carrying capacity.
The following properties are displayed when you create a steel joist.
Property Description
Characteristic Steel joist
Material type Define the material of the joist.
Rotation The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade Define the steel grade of the joist.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon..
Autodesign
Design section order
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only Indicates if the joist is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Section Define the section applied to the joist that is created.
581
User Guides (UK)
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the fixity and torsional load releases at each end.
[+] Size constraints
Expands to allow the definition of upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints create gable post properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a gable post.
Property Description
Top Level
Base Level
Define the vertical position of the post top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the post base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material for the post.
Construction Define type of construction.
Composite column construction is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Fabrication Define the type of fabrication.
Plated, concrete filled and concrete encased fabrication, is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
582
User Guides
Linearity
Rotation
Although beams can be curved, posts are restricted to straight.
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade Define the grade of the post.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Autodesign
Design section order
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only Indicates if the post is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Section The section initially applied to the column that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section order if the member is auto-designed.
583
User Guides (UK)
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
[+]
Eccentricity
Deflection limits - Wind
Load
[+] Size constraints
Define eccentric beam end connections to the column faces.
Define the relative (span/factor), and absolute deflection limits required.
Size Constraints are only applicable when Autodesign is checked. They allow you to impose upper and lower limits to the section depth and width.
See: Size Constraints
Lambda crit check or drift check
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Define alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Wind drift check
By default posts are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results
of this calculation being accessed from the Review toolbar .
This parameter provides a facility to exclude gable posts from these calculations.
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed from
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
584
User Guides
Seismic
[+] UDA
Indicates if the post is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create parapet post properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a parapet post.
Property Description
Top Level
Base Level
Define the vertical position of the post top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the post base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material for the post.
Construction Define type of construction.
Composite column construction is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Fabrication Define the type of fabrication.
Plated, concrete filled and concrete encased fabrication, is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Linearity
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Although beams can be curved, posts are restricted to straight.
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
585
User Guides (UK)
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
Define the grade of the post.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
This setting is ignored - Parapet posts are not designed in Tekla Structural Designer.
Design section order
Section
This setting is ignored - Parapet posts are not designed in Tekla Structural Designer.
The section initially applied to the column that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section order if the member is auto-designed.
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Define alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
[+] Define eccentric beam end connections to the column
586
User Guides
Eccentricity faces.
[+] Size constraints
Lambda crit check or drift check
Wind drift check
Instability factor
Seismic
[+] UDA
Size Constraints are only applicable when Autodesign is checked. They allow you to impose upper and lower limits to the section depth and width.
See: Size Constraints
By default posts are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results
of this calculation being accessed from the Review toolbar .
This parameter provides a facility to exclude parapet posts from these calculations.
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed from
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Check the box to indicate that out of plane instability is prevented.
Indicates if the post is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit steel column properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing steel column.
Property Description
[-] General
Name The automatically generated name for the column.
587
User Guides (UK)
User Name Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the column belongs. Group
Top Level
Base Level
Plane
Define the vertical position of the column top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the column base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Indicates the grid along which the column is placed.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material for the column.
Construction Define type of construction.
Composite column construction is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Fabrication
Autodesign
Design section order
Define the type of fabrication.
Plated, concrete filled and concrete encased fabrication, is beyond the scope of the current release for design.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only Indicates if the column is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
588
User Guides
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
•
Alignment of the minor properties:
Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the minor axis.
Assume extra floors supported
The number of extra floors assumed to be supported by the column.
See: Load Reductions
Simple
Column
[-] All stacks
Indicates if the column is to be designed as a simple column.
See: Simple Columns
Section The section initially applied to the column that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section order if the member is auto-designed.
589
User Guides (UK)
Grade
Encasing section
Concrete class
Define the steel grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The encasing section.
(This property is only displayed for concrete encased fabrication).
Define the concrete grade for concrete filled, or concrete encased columns.
The concrete grades that are available are set from the
Materials button on the Home ribbon.
(This property is only displayed if the fabrication type is set to concrete filled, or concrete encased).
Face A cont. rest.
Face C cont. rest.
Indicates continuous restraint to Face A.
See: Restraints
Indicates continuous restraint to Face C.
See: Restraints
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
[+] Size constraints
Size Constraints are only applicable when Autodesign is checked. They allow you to impose upper and lower limits to the section depth and width.
See: Size Constraints
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. [+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
Lambda crit check or drift check
By default all stacks of all columns are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this calculation being accessed from
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular column stacks from these calculations to avoid spurious results associated with very small stack lengths. You can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by
590
unchecking the box located under that stack only.
User Guides
Wind drift check
[+] Stack
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed from
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
See also [-] All Stacks
Gamma
Angle
Splice
[+] Level
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
Indicates splice positions.
[+] Load
Reductions
Count the floor as being supported
(Head Code
Eurocode or
BS)
[+] Load
Reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+]
Eccentricity
If checked, the floor will be treated as supported when calculating the imposed load reductions.
See: Load Reductions
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
Define eccentric beam end connections to the column faces.
591
User Guides (UK)
[+] Seismic
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
Define if the column is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit steel beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing steel beam.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
Group
Plane
The automatically generated name for the beam.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the beam belongs.
Indicates the level at which the beam is placed.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material of the beam.
Construction Define the type of construction:
• Non composite
• Composite - the beam acts compositely with a concrete slab
592
User Guides
Fabrication
Autodesign
Design section order
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only
Rotation
Indicates if the beam is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
Rotation Angle To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to
‘Angle’.
Major snap level
Define the type of fabrication:
• Rolled
• Plated
• Westok cellular
• Westok plated
• Fabsec
Westok cellular and Fabsec are beyond the scope of the current release for design.
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
593
User Guides (UK)
Major offset
Minor snap level
Minor offset
[-] Spans
(All/Individual)
Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the major axis.
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the minor axis.
Section
Grade
The section initially applied to the beam that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section
Define the steel grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Linearity Indicates if the beam is straight or curved.
Design of curved steel beams is beyond the scope of the current release.
Gamma Angle Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
Top flange cont. rest.
Define if the top flange is continuously restrained.
Restraints and their factors can also be managed from the Steel Beam Properties Dialog by right clicking on the beam and selecting Edit from the context menu.
Bottom flange cont. rest.
Define if the bottom flange is continuously restrained.
Restraints and their factors can also be managed from the Steel Beam Properties Dialog by right clicking on the beam and selecting Edit from the context menu.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
594
User Guides
[+] Load reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+] Deflection limits
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
[+] Camber
[+] Natural frequency
[+] Size constraints
[+] Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
Used to specify a camber to the beam if required.
See: Camber
Used to specify a natural frequency limit to the beam if required.
See: Natural frequency
Define upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints
Define if out of plane stability is prevented.
[-] Seismic
Define the deflection limits for specific load types.
See: Deflection Limits
In a seismic force resisting system
Indicates if the beam is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head
Code in the current release.
See: Seismic
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit composite steel beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing composite steel beam.
Property Description
595
User Guides (UK)
[-] General
Name
User Name
Group
Plane
The automatically generated name for the beam.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the beam belongs.
Indicates the level at which the beam is placed.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material of the beam.
Construction
Allow noncomposite design
Fabrication
Autodesign
Design section order
Define the type of construction:
• Composite beam- the beam acts compositely with a concrete slab
Check this option to allow the beam to be designed noncompositely when a composite design cannot be achieved.
See: Allow non-composite design
Define the type of fabrication:
• Rolled
• Plated
• Westok cellular
• Westok plated
• Fabsec
Westok cellular and Fabsec are beyond the scope of the current release for design.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
596
User Guides
Gravity only Indicates if the beam is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
Rotation Angle To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to
‘Angle’.
Major snap level
Major offset
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
Minor offset
[-] Spans
(All/Individual)
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the minor axis.
Section The section initially applied to the beam that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section
597
User Guides (UK)
Grade
Linearity
Define the steel grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Indicates if the beam is straight or curved.
Design of curved steel beams is beyond the scope of the current release.
Gamma Angle Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
Top flange cont. rest.
Define if the top flange is continuously restrained.
Restraints and their factors can also be managed from the Steel Beam Properties Dialog by right clicking on the beam and selecting Edit from the context menu.
.
Bottom flange cont. rest.
[+] Releases
[+] Load reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+] Deflection limits
Define if the bottom flange is continuously restrained.
Restraints and their factors can also be managed from the Steel Beam Properties Dialog by right clicking on the beam and selecting Edit from the context menu.
Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
[+] Camber
[+] Natural frequency
[+] Size constraints
Define the deflection limits for specific load types.
See: Deflection Limits
Used to specify a camber to the beam if required.
See: Camber
Used to specify a natural frequency limit to the beam if required.
See: Natural frequency
Define upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints
598
User Guides
Floor construction
Metal deck
Stud strength
Used to specify the shear connector type.
See: Floor construction
Used to specify the minimum lap distance.
See: Metal deck
Used to specify the stud properties.
See: Stud strength
Connector layout
Transverse reinforcement
[+] Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
[-] Seismic
Used to specify the stud layout.
See: Connector layout
Used to specify the transverse reinforcement.
See: Transverse reinforcement
Define if out of plane stability is prevented.
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
Indicates if the beam is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head
Code in the current release.
See: Seismic
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit steel brace properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing steel brace.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the brace.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
599
User Guides (UK)
Group
Plane
The name of the group to which the brace belongs.
Indicates the level at which the brace is placed.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material of the brace.
Autodesign
Design section order
Rotation
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
Rotation
Angle
[+]
Alignment
Major snap level
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
600
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the minor axis.
[-] All spans
Section
Grade
The section initially applied to the brace that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section
Define the steel grade of the brace.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Compression only
Specify if the brace is compression only.
Tension only Specify if the brace is tension only.
Relaxation factor
Only displayed if the brace is tension only (default 0.0).
Any value entered is not used unless you also check the
‘Use relaxation factors for tension only elements’ box in
Analysis Options.
It is highly unlikely that you would ever need to set a specific release factor for an individual brace.
Gamma
Angle
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Brace Releases
Compression
(Head Code
BS/EC)
Expands to allow the definition of effective length factors.
See: Compression
User Guides
601
User Guides (UK)
Tension
[+] Load reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+] Size constraints
Expands to allow the definition of net area of the section for tension checks.
See: Tension
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
[-] Seismic
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
Define upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints
Indicates if the brace is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit steel joist properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing steel joist.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
Group
Plane
The automatically generated name for the joist.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the joist belongs.
Indicates the level at which the joist is placed.
602
User Guides
Characteristic Steel joist
Material type Define the material of the joist.
Steel joist type
Autodesign
Define the joist type.
Design section order
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process
See: Autodesign (steel)
Specifies the order file from which the designed sections will be selected.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only Indicates if the joist is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Rotation The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the joist from the snap point in the major axis.
603
User Guides (UK)
Minor snap level
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the joist from the snap point in the minor axis.
[-] All spans
Section The section applied to the joist that is created.
Grade The steel grade of the joist.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon..
[+] Releases Define the fixity and torsional load releases at each end.
[+] Load reductions
KLL
[+]
Deflection limits
[+] Size constraints
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
Define the deflection limits for specific load types.
See: Deflection Limits
Define upper and lower limits to the section depth and width when it is being autodesigned.
See: Size Constraints
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. [+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability edit gable post properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing steel gable post.
Property Description
[-] General
604
User Guides
Name
User Name
Top Level
Base Level
Plane
The automatically generated name for the column.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Define the vertical position of the column top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the column base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Indicates the grid along which the column is placed.
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material for the column.
Construction Define type of construction.
Fabrication Define the type of fabrication.
Autodesign
Design section order
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Gravity only Indicates if the column is designed for gravity combinations only.
• Checked - designed for gravity combinations
• Unchecked - designed for gravity and lateral combinations
See: Gravity only design
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
605
User Guides (UK)
Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
•
Alignment of the minor properties:
Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the minor axis.
Assume extra floors supported
The number of extra floors assumed to be supported by the column.
See: Load Reductions
Simple
Column
[-] All stacks
Indicates if the column is to be designed as a simple column.
See: Simple Columns
Section
Grade
The section initially applied to the column that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section order if the member is auto-designed.
Define the steel grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
Deflection limits
Define the relative and absolute deflection limits to be applied for wind loads.
606
User Guides
[+] Size constraints
[+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
Lambda crit check or drift check
Size Constraints are only applicable when Autodesign is checked. They allow you to impose upper and lower limits to the section depth and width.
See: Size Constraints
Define if out of plane stability is prevented.
Wind drift check
[+] Seismic
By default gable posts are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this calculation being accessed from
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular gable posts from these calculations.
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed from
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
In a seismic force resisting system
Define if the column is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic.
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit parapet post properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing parapet post.
607
User Guides (UK)
Property
[-] General
Description
Name
User Name
Top Level
Base Level
The automatically generated name for the post.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Define the vertical position of the post top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the post base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
The name of the group to which the post belongs.
Indicates the grid along which the post is placed.
Group
Plane
Characteristic Define the basic member type.
Material type Define the material for the post.
Construction Define type of construction.
Fabrication Define the type of fabrication.
Autodesign
Design section order
Rotation
Rotation
Angle
This setting is ignored - Parapet posts are not designed in Tekla Structural Designer.
This setting is ignored - Parapet posts are not designed in Tekla Structural Designer.
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
608
User Guides
Major snap level
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
•
Alignment of the minor properties:
Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the minor axis.
Assume extra floors supported
The number of extra floors assumed to be supported by the post.
See: Load Reductions
[-] All stacks
Section
Grade
The section initially applied to the column that is created.
This will be replaced by a new section from the design section order if the member is auto-designed.
Define the steel grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
[+] Size constraints
Size Constraints are only applicable when Autodesign is checked. They allow you to impose upper and lower limits to the section depth and width.
See: Size Constraints
[+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out
Define if out of plane stability is prevented.
609
User Guides (UK) of plane instability
Lambda crit check or drift check
Wind drift check
[+] Seismic
By default gable posts are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this calculation being accessed from
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular gable posts from these calculations.
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed from
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
Define if the column is part of a seismic force resisting system and if so, the SFRS type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
See: Seismic
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
edit steel truss properties set
Once a truss has been created its properties can be displayed in the Properties
Window by left clicking on the truss.
Property Description
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the truss is derived from the grid line selected.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name
610
User Guides
Autodesign
Section
Grade
Design section order
Rotation
Rotation
Angle if required.
• Unchecked - the specified section sizes are checked during the design process.
• Checked - the section sizes are selected automatically during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
The section size of the truss member.
The steel grade of the truss member.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
Concrete Member Properties
Concrete Member Properties
Topics in this section
•
create concrete wall properties set
•
create concrete column properties set
•
create concrete beam properties set
•
edit concrete wall properties set
•
edit concrete column properties set
•
edit concrete beam properties set
create concrete wall properties set
611
User Guides (UK)
The following properties are displayed when you create a new concrete wall
Property Description
[-] General
Top Level Specifies the top level for the wall.
(When creating a new member, this property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
AutomaticExtension • Checked - the ends of the new wall are automatically trimmed back to remove physical overlaps with existing walls or columns at the same location.
• Unchecked - the ends of the new wall are not trimmed back. This may result in physical overlaps with existing walls or columns at the same location.
See: Concrete wall extensions
Base Level
Fabrication
Specifies the bottom level for the wall.
(When creating a new member, this property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
• Reinforced
• Precast
Design of precast members is beyond scope in the current release.
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Use Mid-Pier
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
See: Autodesign (concrete wall)
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Automatic design is ‘on’. It applies to both longitudinal bars and links.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
• Unchecked - The wall analysis model is formed using finite elements
• Checked - The wall analysis model is formed using a
612
User Guides mid-pier
[-] Reinforcement
Reinforcement country
Form
[-] Wall Zone
Specifies the country from which the reinforcement properties belong.
• Bar
• Mesh
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head
Code Eurocode or
BS)
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head Code
ACI)
Class - horizontal & vertical
Selection order - horizontal & vertical
•
•
•
Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
Plain
Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Rib type - containment (Head
Code Eurocode or
BS)
Rib type - containment (Head
Code ACI)
•
•
•
•
•
Plain
Type 1
Type 2
Plain
Deformed
Class - containment The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Selection order - containment
[-] End Zone
613
User Guides (UK)
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head
Code Eurocode or
BS)
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head Code
ACI)
Class - horizontal & vertical
•
•
•
•
•
Plain
Type 1
Type 2
Plain
Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Selection order - horizontal & vertical
Rib type - containment (Head
Code Eurocode or
BS)
•
•
•
Plain
Type 1
Type 2
Rib type - containment (Head
Code ACI)
•
• Plain
Deformed
Class - containment The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Selection order - containment
[-] Releases
Minor Top • Fixed
• Pinned
• Continuous (incoming members pinned)
The ‘Continuous’ option is only available for FE meshed walls.
614
User Guides
Minor Bottom
[-] All Panels
Concrete type
Concrete class
Nominal cover
Thickness
Alignment
Alignment offset
Reinforcement
Layers
[-] Seismic
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
• Fixed
• Pinned
• Continuous (incoming members pinned)
The ‘Continuous’ option is only available for FE meshed walls.
• Normal
• Lightweight
The concrete grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Nominal cover to reinforcement.
The thickness of the wall.
Alignment of the wall:
• Front
• Back
• Middle
• User
When the alignment is set to User it can be adjusted by specifying an exact offset.
Number of layers of reinforcement to be used in the wall:
• 1
• 2
If this is the case, check the box, and then specify the
SFRS direction and type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head
Code in the current release.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
615
User Guides (UK) create concrete column properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a new concrete column
Property Description
[-] General
Continuous
Top Level
Base Level
• Unchecked - separate discontinuous columns are to be created at each level
• Checked - a single continuous column is to be created between all levels
Specifies the top level for the column.
(When creating a new member, this property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Specifies the bottom level for the column.
(When creating a new member, this property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
[-] Element
Parameters
Characteristic
Material type
Construction
Fabrication
Column
Concrete
Concrete column
• Reinforced
• Precast
Design of precast members is beyond scope in the current release.
Linearity
Use Automatic
Grouping
Concrete type
Although beams can be curved, columns are restricted to straight
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Normal
• Lightweight
616
User Guides
Rotation
Rotation Angle
Concrete class
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Section
Automatic alignment
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to
‘Angle’.
The concrete grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
See: Autodesign (concrete column)
This option controls the starting point for autodesign procedures and is therefore only displayed if
Automatic design is ‘on’. It applies to both longitudinal bars and links.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
See: Autodesign (concrete column)
The section applied to the column that is created.
See: Section
• Unchecked - the major and minor alignment is specified manually
• Checked - the alignment is controlled automatically.
Columns on the perimeter of the grid are aligned with their faces flush to the perimeter and internal columns are aligned centrally on the grid.
617
User Guides (UK)
Major Alignment Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Bottom
Used to further offset the column in the major axis. Major alignment offset
Minor Alignment
Minor alignment offset
[-] Reinforcement
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Right
Used to further offset the column in the minor axis.
Rib type - vertical
(Head
Code Eurocode or
BS)
Rib type - vertical
(Head Code ACI)
Class - vertical
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Selection order - vertical
Rib type - containment
(Head
Code Eurocode or
BS)
Rib type - containment
(Head Code ACI)
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
618
User Guides
Class - link(tie)/containment
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Selection order - link(tie)/containment
[-] Releases
Free end top
Fixity top
Fixity bottom
Free end bottom
[+] Design control
When checked - defines a free end at the top of the top-most stack of the column.
When the column is created the top fixity applied to all stacks in both directions must be set to either:
• Fixed
• Pinned
After the column has been placed, it can be edited if you require to apply different top fixities to individual stacks, or require to pin it in one direction but fix the other.
See: Column Releases
Same as ‘Fixity top’.
When checked - defines a free end at the bottom of the bottom-most stack of the column.
Assume cracked
[+] Design parameters
Permanent load ratio option
(Eurocode only)
Relative humidity
(RH)
(Eurocode only)
Cracked concrete sections have different analytical properties to uncracked concrete sections.
See: Assume cracked
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
Entered as a percentage.
619
User Guides (UK)
Age of loading
(Eurocode only)
[+] Slenderness
Age at which loading is applied.
Direction 1
(Direction 2)
Effective length factor direction 1
(direction 2)
[+] Stiffness
Use slab for calculation (upper major/ minor, lower major/minor)
Lambda crit check or drift check
The bracing classification is set as either ‘Braced’ or as ‘Bracing’ in each of Building Directions 1 and 2.
Whether Direction 1 or 2 applies to the design calculations in the column’s major or minor direction then depends on the column’s rotation angle.
The bracing effective length factor is set as either
‘Calculated’ or as ‘User Input Value’ in each of
Building Directions 1 and 2. Whether Direction 1 or 2 applies to the design calculations in the column’s major or minor direction then depends on the column’s rotation angle.
For the unrestrained length calculation:
• if a slab exists at a stack end, it can be ignored by unchecking the relevant box.
• If no slab exists at that end, the setting is redundant - in which case the program considers the setting at the remote end of the next stack instead.
See: Stiffness
By default all stacks of all columns are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this
calculation being accessed from the Review toolbar .
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular column stacks from these calculations to avoid spurious results associated with very small stack lengths. You can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
620
User Guides
Wind drift check
Nominal cover
[-] Seismic
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation
are accessed from the Review toolbar .
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
The nominal concrete cover is the distance between the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest concrete surface (including links and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the nearest concrete surface.
In a seismic force resisting system
If this is the case, check the box, and then specify the SFRS direction and type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC
Head Code in the current release.
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create concrete beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a new concrete beam.
Property Description
[-] General
Continuous • Unchecked - creates a single span beam
• Checked -creates a multi-span continuous beam.
[-] Element
Parameters
Characteristic
Material type
Beam
Concrete
621
User Guides (UK)
Construction
Fabrication
Linearity
Chord height
Maximum facet error
Use Automatic
Grouping
Rotation
Rotation Angle
Concrete class
Concrete beam
• Reinforced
• Post tensioned
• Precast
Design of precast and post tensioned beams is beyond scope in the current release.
• Straight
• Curved Major
• Curved Minor
This property is only displayed when ‘Linearity’ is curved major or curved minor. It is the perpendicular distance from the mid point of the chord baseline to the curve itself.
This property is only displayed when ‘Linearity’ is curved major or curved minor. It controls number of straight line elements that replace the curved member in the solver model.
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
• Degrees0
• Degrees90
• Degrees180
• Degrees270
• Angle
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
The concrete grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
622
User Guides
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Section
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
See: Autodesign (concrete beam)
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Automatic design is ‘on’. It applies to both longitudinal bars and links.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
The section applied to the beam that is created.
Automatic alignment
• Unchecked - the minor alignment is specified manually
• Checked - the minor alignment is controlled automatically.
Major Alignment Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Minor Alignment
•
Alignment of the minor properties:
Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[-]
Reinforcement
Rib type - longitudinal
•
• Plain
Type 1
• Type 2
Class - longitudinal
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
623
User Guides (UK)
Selection order - longitudinal
Rib type - links
Controls the bar sizes that are available in the design.
Class - links
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Controls the bar sizes that are available in the design. Selection order - links
[-] Releases
Free end 1
(Free end 2)
Fixity end 1
(Fixity end 2)
Torsional load release end 1
(end 2)
[+] Design control
Limit for immediate live load deflection
(ACI only)
Limit for total deflection affecting sensitive finishes
(ACI only)
When checked - defines a cantilever end.
See: Beam Releases
• Moment
• Pin
• Fully fixed
See: Beam Releases
Check one end to define a torsional release. input is as a proportion of span length. input is as a proportion of span length.
624
User Guides
Consider flanges Check this option in order to consider flanges in the concrete beam design calculations - once checked additional fields are displayed for specifying an allowance for openings.
Flange dimensions can only be calculated by editing the beam once it has been positioned and slabs have been defined. (In this case a ‘Calculate flanges’ button is also displayed, this can be clicked in order to automatically calculate the flange dimensions based on the adjoining slabs.)
See: Use of beam flanges
Increase reinforcement if deflection check fails (Eurocode and BS only)
Check this option in order to increase the reinforcement during the auto-design process if the deflection check fails.
Permissible increase in reinforcement
Include flanges in analysis
Specify the max percentage increase in reinforcement that is allowed in order to satisfy the deflection check.
Provided that ‘’Consider flanges’ has been checked, and the flange dimensions have been calculated, if you then check this box the flanged beam properties are used when analysis is performed.
See: Use of beam flanges
Assume cracked Cracked concrete sections have different analytical properties to uncracked concrete sections.
See: Assume cracked
[+] Design parameters
Nominal cover The nominal concrete cover is the distance between the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest concrete surface (including links and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the nearest concrete surface.
Different values of nominal cover can be specified to the beam edges, sides and ends.
Permanent load ratio option (Eurocode
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust
625
User Guides (UK) only) as necessary.
Maximum crack width
[-] Seismic
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
If this is the case, check the box, and then specify the SFRS direction and type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit concrete wall properties set
The following properties are displayed in the Properties Window when you edit an existing concrete wall
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
Top Level
Base Level
Plane
Fabrication
The automatically generated name for the wall.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Specifies the top level for the wall.
Specifies the bottom level for the wall.
Indicates the grid along which the wall is placed.
• Reinforced
• Precast
Design of precast members is beyond scope in the current release.
626
User Guides
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Use Mid-Pier
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
See: Autodesign (concrete column)
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Automatic design is ‘on’. It applies to both longitudinal bars and links.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
See: Autodesign (concrete column)
• Unchecked - The wall analysis model is formed using finite elements
• Checked - The wall analysis model is formed using a mid-pier
Rotation
(mid pier only)
Generate support
(meshed only)
Assume extra floors supported
[-] Panels
(All/Individual)
• 0° - wall spans horizontally
• 90° - wall spans vertically
• Unchecked - no support is exists (appropriate for transfer walls)
• Checked - a line support exists, its degrees of freedom being specified in the ‘Wall support’ area of the wall properties.
Enter the number of extra floors supported.
Concrete class The concrete grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Thickness The thickness of the wall.
627
User Guides (UK)
Alignment Alignment of the wall:
• Front
• Back
• Middle
• User
Alignment offset
When the alignment is set to User it can be adjusted by specifying an exact offset.
End 1 extension The amount the wall is extended or trimmed back from end 1.
• A positive extension extends the wall length beyond its insertion point.
• A negative extension trims the wall back from the insertion point.
See: Concrete wall extensions
End 2 extension The amount the wall is extended or trimmed back from end 2.
• A positive extension extends the wall length beyond its insertion point.
• A negative extension trims the wall back from the insertion point.
See: Concrete wall extensions
Reinforcement
Layers
Number of layers of reinforcement to be used in the wall:
• 1
• 2
Assume cracked
[-] Releases
Cracked concrete sections have different analytical properties to uncracked concrete sections.
See: Assume cracked
Minor Top • Fixed
• Pinned
• Continuous (incoming members pinned)
The ‘Continuous’ option is only available for FE meshed walls.
628
User Guides
Minor Bottom • Fixed
• Pinned
• Continuous (incoming members pinned)
The ‘Continuous’ option is only available for FE meshed walls.
[+] Wall support
Angles
(Fx/Fy/Fz,
Mx/My/Mz)
Translational stiffnesses
(x/y/z)
Rotatational stiffnesses
(x/y/z)
[-] Meshing
Used to specify the translational and rotational degrees of freedom in which the support acts:
• Fixed - indicates the support is fixed in the specified direction.
• Free - indicates the support is free to move, or has a stiffness applied in the specified direction.
Used to specify the translational stiffness applied in a direction that is not fixed:
• Release
• Spring Linear
• Spring Non-linear
Used to specify the rotational stiffness applied in a direction that is not fixed:
• Release
• Spring Linear
• Spring Non-linear
(meshed walls only)
Override
Model’s
Wall Mesh
Horizontal Size
Wall Mesh
Vertical Size
Check this box to override the default wall mesh size that is specified in the Structure properties.
Used to override the default wall horizontal mesh size
(1.000m).
Used to override the default wall vertical mesh size
(1.000m).
629
User Guides (UK)
Wall Mesh Type Used to specify the wall mesh type:
QuadDominant / QuadOnly / Triangular
[-]
Reinforcement
Include end zones
Reinforcement country
Form
[-] Wall Zone
• Unchecked - the wall is designed without end zones of reinforcement
• Checked - the wall is designed with end zones of reinforcement
Specifies the country from which the reinforcement properties belong.
• Bar
• Mesh
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head
Code Eurocode or BS)
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head
Code ACI)
Class - horizontal & vertical
Selection order
- horizontal & vertical
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
630
User Guides
Rib type - containment
(Head Code
Eurocode or
BS)
Rib type - containment
(Head Code
ACI)
Class - containment
Selection order
- containment
[-] End Zone
•
•
•
•
•
Plain
Type 1
Type 2
Plain
Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head
Code Eurocode or BS)
Rib type - horizontal & vertical (Head
Code ACI)
Class - horizontal & vertical
Selection order
- horizontal & vertical
Rib type - containment
(Head Code
Eurocode or
BS)
Rib type - containment
(Head Code
•
•
•
Plain
Type 1
Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
631
User Guides (UK)
ACI)
Class - containment
Selection order
- containment
[+] Design parameters
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Permanent load ratio option
(Eurocode only)
Relative humidity (RH)
(Eurocode only)
Age of loading
(Eurocode only)
[+]
Containment reinforcement
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
Entered as a percentage.
Age at which loading is applied.
Provide support regions
• Checked - containment reinforcement is designed separately in three regions.
• Unchecked - the same containment reinforcement is designed for the whole stack.
[+]
Slenderness
Major
(Minor)
Effective length factor direction
Major
(Minor)
[+] Stiffness
• Braced
• Bracing
• Calculated
• User input value
632
User Guides
Use slab for calculation
(upper major/ minor, lower major/minor)
For the unrestrained length calculation:
• if a slab exists at a panel end, it can be ignored by unchecking the relevant box.
• If no slab exists at that end, the setting is redundant - in which case the program considers the setting at the remote end of the next panel instead.
See: Stiffness
Lambda crit check or drift check
Wind drift check
By default all stacks of all columns are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this calculation being accessed
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular column stacks from these calculations to avoid spurious results associated with very small stack lengths. You can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Nominal cover The nominal concrete cover is the distance between the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest concrete surface (including links and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the nearest concrete surface.
[-] Seismic
In a seismic force resisting system
If this is the case, check the box, and then specify the
SFRS direction and type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head
Code in the current release.
633
User Guides (UK)
[+] Level
Supporting
Restrained
Count the floor as being supported
(Head Code
Eurocode or
BS)
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+] UDA
If unchecked, the panel above is constrained to adopt the same wall thickness and concrete grade as the panel below.
Check if the wall is restrained at this level.
If checked, the floor will be treated as supported when calculating the imposed load reductions.
See: Load reductions
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load reductions
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit concrete column properties set
The following properties are displayed in the Properties Window when you edit an existing concrete column
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
Group
Top Level
Base Level
Plane
The automatically generated name for the column.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The automatically generated name for the column group.
Specifies the top level for the column.
Specifies the bottom level for the column.
Indicates the grid along which the column is placed.
634
User Guides
Concrete type
Characteristic
Material type
Construction
Fabrication
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Rotation
Rotation Angle
• Normal
• Lightweight
Column
Concrete
Concrete column
• Reinforced
• Precast
Design of precast members is beyond scope in the current release.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
See: Autodesign (concrete column)
This option controls the starting point for autodesign procedures and is therefore only displayed if
Automatic design is ‘on’. It applies to both longitudinal bars and links.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
See: Autodesign (concrete column)
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to
‘Angle’.
635
User Guides (UK)
Assume extra floors supported
[-] Reinforcement
The number of extra floors assumed to be supported by the column.
Rib type - vertical
(Head Code
Eurocode or BS)
Rib type - vertical
(Head Code ACI)
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
Class - vertical The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Selection order - vertical
Rib type - containment
(Head Code
Eurocode or BS)
•
•
•
Plain
Type 1
Type 2
Rib type - containment
(Head Code ACI)
•
• Plain
Deformed
Class - link(tie)/containment
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Selection order - link(tie)/containment
[-] Stacks
(All/Individual)
Section
Concrete class
The section applied to the column that is created.
See: Section
The concrete grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
636
Linearity
[-] Releases
Free end top
Fixity top
Fixity bottom
Free end bottom
[+] Alignment
Major snap level
Major offset
Minor snap level
Minor offset
User Guides
Although beams can be curved, columns are restricted to straight
When checked - defines a free end at the top of the top-most stack of the column (available for the topmost stack only).
The fixity at the top of individual stacks can be set to:
• Fixed
• Pinned
If you require to pin one direction but fix the other you can do this from the Column Property
Dialog.
See: Column Releases
Same as ‘Fixity top’.
When checked - defines a free end at the bottom of the bottom-most stack of the column (available for the top-most stack only).
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Bottom
Used to offset the column from the snap point in the major axis.
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Used to offset the column from the snap point in the minor axis.
637
User Guides (UK)
[+] Design control
Assume cracked
[+] Design parameters
Permanent load ratio option
(Eurocode only)
Relative humidity
(RH)
(Eurocode only)
Age of loading
(Eurocode only)
[+] Containment reinforcement
Provide support regions
Cracked concrete sections have different analytical properties to uncracked concrete sections.
See: Assume cracked
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
Entered as a percentage.
Age at which loading is applied.
[+] Slenderness
Direction 1
(Direction 2)
Effective length factor direction 1
(direction 2)
• Checked - containment reinforcement is designed separately in three regions.
• Unchecked - the same containment reinforcement is designed for the whole stack.
The bracing classification is set as either ‘Braced’ or as ‘Bracing’ in each of Building Directions 1 and 2.
Whether Direction 1 or 2 applies to the design calculations in the column’s major or minor direction then depends on the column’s rotation angle.
The bracing effective length factor is set as either
‘Calculated’ or as ‘User Input Value’ in each of
Building Directions 1 and 2. Whether Direction 1 or 2 applies to the design calculations in the column’s major or minor direction then depends on the
638
User Guides column’s rotation angle.
[+] Stiffness
Use slab for calculation (upper major/ minor, lower major/minor)
Lambda crit check or drift check
Wind drift check
Nominal cover
For the unrestrained length calculation:
• if a slab exists at a stack end, it can be ignored by unchecking the relevant box.
• If no slab exists at that end, the setting is redundant - in which case the program considers the setting at the remote end of the next stack instead.
See: Stiffness
By default all stacks of all columns are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this
calculation being accessed from the Review toolbar .
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular column stacks from these calculations to avoid spurious results associated with very small stack lengths. You can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation
are accessed from the Review toolbar .
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
The nominal concrete cover is the distance between the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest concrete surface (including links and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the nearest concrete surface.
639
User Guides (UK)
[+] Stack
Gamma Angle
[-] Seismic
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
If this is the case, check the box, and then specify the SFRS direction and type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC
Head Code in the current release.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
If checked, the floor will be treated as supported when calculating the imposed load reductions.
See: Load reductions
[+] Level
Count the floor as being supported
(Head
Code Eurocode or
BS)
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load reductions edit concrete beam properties set
The following properties are displayed in the Properties Window when you edit an existing concrete beam.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
Group
The automatically generated name for the column.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The automatically generated name for the beam group.
640
User Guides
Plane
Concrete Type
Characteristic
Material type
Construction
Fabrication
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Rotation
Indicates the level at which the beam is placed.
• Normal
• Lightweight
Beam
Concrete
Concrete beam
• Reinforced
• Post tensioned
• Precast
Design of precast and post tensioned beams is beyond scope in the current release.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
See: Autodesign (concrete beam)
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Automatic design is ‘on’. It applies to both longitudinal bars and links.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
• Degrees0
• Degrees90
• Degrees180
• Degrees270
• Angle
641
User Guides (UK)
Rotation Angle
Allow automatic join end 1
(end 2)
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
When checked - the end in question will be automatically joined to a suitable connecting concrete beam end during design process or when the ‘Beam Lines’ command is run,
(providing the Beam Lines limiting criteria specified in
Model Settings are met.)
[-]
Reinforcement
Rib type - longitudinal
(Head
Code Eurocode or BS)
Rib type - longitudinal
(Head Code ACI)
Class - longitudinal
Selection order - longitudinal
Rib type - links
(Head
Code Eurocode or BS)
Rib type - stirrups (Head
Code ACI)
Class- links(stirrups)
Selection order - links(stirrups)
Top longitudinal bar pattern
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Controls the bar sizes that are available in the design.
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The available classes are specified in the Materials dialog on the Home ribbon.
Controls the bar sizes that are available in the design.
Choose from one of the three standard patterns (which can be setup in Design Options) to control the top bar arrangement when the beam is auto-designed.
See: Longitudinal reinforcement
642
User Guides
Bottom longitudinal bar pattern
Choose from one of the two standard patterns (which can be setup in Design Options) to control the bottom bar arrangement when the beam is auto-designed.
See: Longitudinal reinforcement
[+] Spans
(All/Individual)
Section
Concrete class
Linearity
Chord height
Maximum facet error
[-] Releases
Free end 1
(Free end 2)
Fixity end 1
(Fixity end 2)
Torsional load release end 1
(end 2)
[+] Load
Reductions
The section applied to the beam that is created.
The concrete grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Straight
• Curved Major
• Curved Minor
This property is only displayed when ‘Linearity’ is curved major or curved minor. It is the perpendicular distance from the mid point of the chord baseline to the curve itself.
This property is only displayed when ‘Linearity’ is curved major or curved minor. It controls number of straight line elements that replace the curved member in the solver model.
When checked - defines a cantilever end.
See: Beam Releases
• Moment
• Pin
• Fully fixed
See: Beam Releases
Check one end to define a torsional release.
643
User Guides (UK)
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+] Alignment
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load reductions
Major snap level Alignment of the minor properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset
[+] Deflection limits
Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the minor axis.
Limit for immediate live load deflection
(ACI only)
Limit for total deflection affecting sensitive finishes
(ACI only)
[+] Design control
Structure supporting sensitive finishes
(ACI only) input is as a proportion of span length. input is as a proportion of span length. this option influences the deflection check that is performed.
644
User Guides
Consider flanges Check this option in order to consider flanges in the concrete beam design calculations - once checked additional fields are displayed for specifying an allowance for openings.
Flange dimensions can only be calculated by editing the beam once it has been positioned and slabs have been defined. (In this case a ‘Calculate flanges’ button is also displayed, this can be clicked in order to automatically calculate the flange dimensions based on the adjoining slabs.)
See: Use of beam flanges
Increase reinforcement if deflection check fails (Eurocode and BS only)
Check this option in order to increase the reinforcement during the auto-design process if the deflection check fails.
Permissible increase in reinforcement
Include flanges in analysis
Specify the max percentage increase in reinforcement that is allowed in order to satisfy the deflection check.
Provided that ‘’Consider flanges’ has been checked, and the flange dimensions have been calculated, if you then check this box the flanged beam properties are used when analysis is performed.
See: Use of beam flanges
Assume cracked Cracked concrete sections have different analytical properties to uncracked concrete sections.
See: Assume cracked
[+] Design parameters
Nominal cover The nominal concrete cover is the distance between the surface of the reinforcement closest to the nearest concrete surface (including links and surface reinforcement where relevant) and the nearest concrete surface.
Different values of nominal cover can be specified to the beam edges, sides and ends.
Permanent load ratio option (Eurocode
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust
645
User Guides (UK) only) as necessary.
Maximum crack width
[-] Seismic
In a seismic force resisting system
[+] UDA
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
If this is the case, check the box, and then specify the SFRS direction and type.
Design of members in seismic force resisting systems is only supported for the ACI/AISC Head Code in the current release.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Timber Member Properties
Timber Member Properties
Topics in this section
•
•
create timber column properties set
•
create timber beam properties set
•
create timber brace properties set
•
edit timber column properties set
•
edit timber beam properties set
•
edit timber brace properties set
•
Timber property assumptions
The engineer shall verify that the properties of the selected grades are those that are characteristic of the material, are obtained from up-to-date manufacturer’s data and are
applicable to the analysis model. Analysis Modification Factors
must also be confirmed to be correct.
646
User Guides
(Head Code Eurocode)
The following assumptions have been made:
• Loading will be perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations (bending about the major axis).
• Moisture content of the sections will be less than 15% - analysis modification factors may need to be applied if this is not the case.
• The glulam grade being used complies with the characteristic properties outlined in
BS EN 14080:2013.
• The engineer has verified that the E analysis particular application.
value of the member is suitable for the
• The section and strength class are compatible.
(Head Code ACI/AISC)
The following assumptions have been made:
• The moisture content of the structural composite lumber or glulam section is less than 16% and the temperature remains below 100°F - analysis modification factors may need to be applied if this is not the case.
• The glulam section will be loaded perpendicular to the wide faces of the laminations
(bending about the x-x axis).
• The glulam grade being used complies with the characteristic properties outlined in
AWC NDS supplement 2012.
• The engineer has verified that the E analysis
value of the member is suitable for the particular application.
• The section and strength class are compatible. create timber column properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a timber column.
Property Description
Top Level
Base Level
Define the vertical position of the column top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the column base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
647
User Guides (UK)
Continuous Indicates if all stacks have the same properties.
• Checked - all stacks have the same properties
• Unchecked - allows splices to be positioned; enabling different stacks to have different properties.
(This property is only displayed in Structure, or Frame
Views)
Characteristic Column
Material type Timber
Fabrication
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Rotation
• Timber
• Glulam
• Structural Composite Lumber
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
Design section order
Section
Define the timber grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The section applied to the column that is created.
648
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Define alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
[-] Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
[+] UDA
Define if out of plane stability is prevented.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create timber beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a timber beam.
Property Description
Continuous Define if the beam is single or multi-span.
• Unchecked - creates a single span beam
• Checked -creates a multi-span continuous beam.
Characteristic Beam
Material type Timber
User Guides
649
User Guides (UK)
Fabrication
Linearity
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Rotation
• Timber
• Glulam
• Structural Composite Lumber
Indicates if the beam is straight or curved.
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
Design section order
Section
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
Define the timber grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The section applied to the beam that is created.
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
650
User Guides
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. [+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create timber brace properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a timber brace.
Property Description
Type Define the brace pattern to be applied.
Characteristic Brace
Material type Timber
Fabrication
Rotation
• Timber
• Glulam
• Structural Composite Lumber
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade Define the timber grade of the brace.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
651
User Guides (UK)
Autodesign
Design section order
Section
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The section initially applied to the brace that is created.
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Brace Releases
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit timber column properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing timber column.‘
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
Group
The automatically generated name for the column.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the column belongs.
652
User Guides
Top Level
Base Level
Define the vertical position of the column top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the column base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Plane Indicates the grid along which the column is placed.
Characteristic Column
Material type Timber
Autodesign
Design section order
Rotation
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
•
Alignment of the minor properties:
Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
653
User Guides (UK)
Minor offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the minor axis.
Assume extra floors supported
The number of extra floors assumed to be supported by the column.
See: Load Reductions
[-] All stacks
Section The section applied to the column that is created.
Grade Define the timber grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. [+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
Gamma
Angle
[+] Level
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Load
Reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+] UDA
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
654
User Guides edit timber beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing timber beam.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the beam.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the beam belongs. Group
Plane Indicates the level at which the beam is placed.
Characteristic Beam
Material type Timber
Fabrication
Autodesign
• Timber
• Glulam
• Structural Composite Lumber
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Design section order
Rotation
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the major
655
User Guides (UK) axis.
Minor snap level
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the minor axis.
[-] All spans
Section
Grade
The section initially applied to the beam that is created.
Define the timber grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Indicates if the beam is straight or curved. Linearity
Gamma
Angle
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
[+] Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
[+] UDA
Define if out of plane stability is prevented.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
edit timber brace properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing timber brace.
656
User Guides
Property
[-] General
Description
Name The automatically generated name for the brace.
User Name Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the brace belongs. Group
Plane Indicates the level at which the brace is placed.
Characteristic Brace
Material type Timber
Fabrication • Timber
• Glulam
• Structural Composite Lumber
Autodesign
Design section order
Rotation
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
Rotation
Angle
[+] Alignment
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
Major snap level
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the major
657
User Guides (UK) axis.
Minor snap level
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the minor axis.
[-] All spans
Section The section applied to the brace.
Grade Define the timber grade of the brace.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Compression only
Specify if the brace is compression only.
Tension only Specify if the brace is tension only.
Gamma
Angle
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Brace Releases
[+] Load reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
658
User Guides edit timber truss properties
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing timber truss:
Property Description
General
Name
User Name
Autodesign
The automatically generated name for the truss is derived from the grid line selected.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Truss Top
Members
Section
Grade
Design section order
Rotation
Rotation
Angle
Truss Bottom
Members
Section size.
The timber grades that are available here are set from the
Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
Section
Grade
Design section order
Section size.
The timber grades that are available here are set from the
Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
659
User Guides (UK)
Rotation The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
Rotation
Angle
Truss Internals
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
Section Section size.
Grade
Design section order
Rotation
The timber grades that are available here are set from the
Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Not Applicable: timber sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
Cold Formed Member Properties
Cold Formed Member Properties
Topics in this section
•
create cold formed column properties set
•
create cold formed beam properties set
•
create cold formed brace properties set
660
User Guides
•
edit cold formed column properties set
•
edit cold formed beam properties set
•
edit cold formed brace properties set
•
edit cold formed truss properties
create cold formed column properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a cold formed column.
Property Description
Top Level
Base Level
Define the vertical position of the column top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the column base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Continuous Indicates if all stacks have the same properties.
• Checked - all stacks have the same properties
• Unchecked - allows splices to be positioned; enabling different stacks to have different properties.
(This property is only displayed in Structure, or Frame
Views)
Characteristic Column
Material type Cold formed
Indicates whether cold formed member is stress relieved or not.
Stress relieved
(Head Code
AS only)
Use
Automatic
Grouping
•
•
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
Checked - Group names are created automatically
Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
661
User Guides (UK)
Rotation The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
• Define - aligns the column to the angle of any grid line you select
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Autodesign
(Other Head
Codes)
Design section order
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Design section order
(Other Head
Codes)
Section
Major
Alignment
Define the steel grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The section applied to the column that is created.
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
662
User Guides
• Bottom
Minor
Alignment
Define alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. [+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create cold formed beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a cold formed beam.
Property Description
Continuous Define if the beam is single or multi-span.
• Unchecked - creates a single span beam
• Checked -creates a multi-span continuous beam.
Characteristic Beam
Material type Cold formed
663
User Guides (UK)
Stress relieved
(Head Code
AS only)
Linearity
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Rotation
Indicates whether cold formed member is stress relieved or not.
Indicates if the beam is straight or curved.
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Autodesign
(Other Head
Codes)
Design section order
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Design section order
(Other Head
Codes)
Section
Define the steel grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The section applied to the beam that is created.
664
User Guides
Major
Alignment
Minor
Alignment
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. [+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create cold formed brace properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a cold formed brace.
Property Description
Type Define the brace pattern to be applied.
Characteristic Brace
Material type Cold formed
Stress relieved
(Head Code
AS only)
Indicates whether cold formed member is stress relieved or not.
665
User Guides (UK)
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Rotation
Indicates if group names are created automatically:
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Autodesign
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Autodesign
(Other Head
Codes)
Design section order
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Design section order
(Other Head
Codes)
Section
Major
Alignment
Define the steel grade of the brace.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The section initially applied to the brace that is created.
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
666
User Guides
Minor
Alignment
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Brace Releases
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit cold formed column properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing cold formed column.‘
Property Description
[-] General
Name
Stress relieved
(Head Code
AS only)
The automatically generated name for the column.
User Name
Group
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the column belongs.
Top Level
Base Level
Define the vertical position of the column top.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Define the vertical position of the column base.
(This property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Plane Indicates the grid along which the column is placed.
Characteristic Column
Material type Cold formed
Indicates whether cold formed member is stress relieved or not.
667
User Guides (UK)
Autodesign
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
Autodesign
(Other Head
Codes)
Design section order
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Design section order
(Other Head
Codes)
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
Rotation The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
• 0, 90, 180, -90 - aligns the column to the global axes
• Angle - aligns the column to the exact rotation angle you specify
For vertical columns the default (Degrees0) aligns local y with the global X axis.
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
Define alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the major axis.
668
User Guides
Minor snap level
Minor offset Used to offset the column from the snap point in the minor axis.
Assume extra floors supported
The number of extra floors assumed to be supported by the column.
See: Load Reductions
[-] All stacks
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Section The section applied to the column that is created.
Grade Define the steel grade of the column.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Column Releases
[+] Size constraints
Size Constraints are only applicable when Autodesign is checked. They allow you to impose upper and lower limits to the section depth and width.
See: Size Constraints
Define if out of plane stability is prevented. [+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
Lambda crit check or drift check
By default all stacks of all columns are taken into account in the calculation to determine the sway sensitivity of the building. The results of this calculation being accessed from
This parameter provides a facility to exclude particular column stacks from these calculations to avoid spurious results associated with very small stack lengths. You can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude
669
User Guides (UK) the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Wind drift check
Gamma
Angle
[+] Level
Wind drift is automatically checked against the specified limiting ratio, (which can be set differently for different columns). The results of this calculation are accessed from
If you don’t want this check to be performed you can either uncheck the box located under ‘All Stacks’ to exclude the entire column, or you can exclude a particular stack by unchecking the box located under that stack only.
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Load
Reductions
Count the floor as being supported
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
If checked, the floor will be treated as supported when calculating the imposed load reductions.
See: Load Reductions
[+] Load
Reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[+] UDA
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
Modeling Steel Columns and Cold Formed Columns
670
User Guides edit cold formed beam properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing cold formed beam.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the beam.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the beam belongs. Group
Plane Indicates the level at which the beam is placed.
Characteristic Beam
Material type Cold formed
Stress relieved
(Head Code
AS only)
Autodesign
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Autodesign
(Other Head
Codes)
Design section order
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Design section order
(Other Head
Codes)
Indicates whether cold formed member is stress relieved or not.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
671
User Guides (UK)
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the beam from the snap point in the minor axis.
[-] All spans
Section
Grade
The section initially applied to the beam that is created.
Define the steel grade of the beam.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Indicates if the beam is straight or curved. Linearity
Gamma
Angle
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
672
User Guides
[+]
Instability
Factor
Prevent out of plane instability
[+] UDA
Define if out of plane stability is prevented.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
Modeling Steel Beams and Cold Formed Beams
edit cold formed brace properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing cold formed brace.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the brace.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The name of the group to which the brace belongs. Group
Plane
Stress relieved
(Head Code
AS only)
Indicates the level at which the brace is placed.
Characteristic Brace
Material type Cold formed
Indicates whether cold formed member is stress relieved or not.
673
User Guides (UK)
Autodesign
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
Autodesign
(Other Head
Codes)
Design section order
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Design section order
(Other Head
Codes)
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
Rotation Define the rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
[+]
Alignment
Major snap level
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the major axis.
674
Minor snap level
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the minor axis.
[-] All spans
Section Define the section applied to the brace.
Grade Define the steel grade of the brace.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Compression only
Specify if the brace is compression only.
Tension only Specify if the brace is tension only.
Gamma
Angle
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Brace Releases
[+] Load reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
Modeling Steel Braces and Cold Formed Braces
User Guides
675
User Guides (UK) edit cold formed truss properties
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing cold formed truss.
Property Description
Name
User Name
Autodesign
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Rotation
Rotation
Angle
The automatically generated name for the truss is derived from the grid line selected.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
• Unchecked - the specified section will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - sections from the design section order will be considered during the design process.
See: Autodesign (steel)
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
Autodesign
(Other Head
Codes)
Design section order
(Head Code
EC, BS or AS)
Design section order
(Other Head
Codes)
Section
Grade
The design order file from which a section size will be selected if Autodesign is employed.
See: Design Section Order
Not Applicable: cold formed sections cannot be designed or checked.
The section size of the truss member.
The steel grade of the truss member.
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
676
User Guides
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
Cold Rolled Properties
Cold Rolled Properties
Topics in this section
•
create cold rolled section properties set
•
edit cold rolled section properties set
create cold rolled section properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create any type of cold rolled section.
Property Description
Element
Parameters
Characteristic The chosen type of cold rolled section.
Material type Cold rolled
Construction The chosen type of cold rolled section.
Fabrication Cold rolled
Linearity Straight
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Rotation
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
677
User Guides (UK)
Rotation
Angle
Grade
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’.
Autodesign
Design section order
Section
The steel grades that are available here are set from the
Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Not Applicable: cold rolled sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Not Applicable: cold rolled sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The cold rolled section size.
Major
Alignment
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Minor
Alignment
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Beam Releases
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit cold rolled section properties set
The following properties are displayed when you edit an existing cold rolled section.
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the member.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
678
User Guides
Group
Plane
The name of the group to which the member belongs.
Indicates the level at which the member is placed.
Characteristic The chosen type of cold rolled section.
Material type Cold rolled
Construction The chosen type of cold rolled section.
Fabrication Cold rolled
Autodesign
Design section order
Rotation
Not Applicable: cold rolled sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
Not Applicable: cold rolled sections cannot be designed or checked in Tekla Structural Designer.
The rotation of the member around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the major properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the member has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Major snap level
Alignment of the major properties:
• Top
• Centre
• Centroid
• Bottom
Major offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the major axis.
Minor snap level
Alignment of the minor properties:
• Left
• Centre
• Centroid
• Right
Minor offset Used to offset the brace from the snap point in the minor axis.
679
User Guides (UK)
[-] All spans
Section The cold rolled section size.
Grade
Gamma
Angle
The available grades are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Derived from the rotation angle, this value defines the orientation of the major axis of the section.
[+] Releases Define the end releases.
See: Brace Releases
[+] Load reductions
KLL
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
Specify the KLL factor in accordance with Table 4-2 in
ASCE7-05/ASCE7-10.
See: Load Reductions
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Slab and Mat Properties
Topics in this section
•
•
•
Openings, Overhangs and Column Drops
•
Slabs Properties
Topics in this section
•
•
create slab on beams item properties set
•
create flat slab item properties set
•
create precast item properties set
680
User Guides
•
create steel deck item properties set
•
create timber deck item properties set
•
create composite slab item properties set
•
edit slab on beams item properties set
•
edit flat slab item properties set
•
edit precast item properties set
•
edit steel deck item properties set
•
edit timber deck item properties set
•
edit composite slab item properties set
slab properties
These properties are displayed by selecting an existing parent slab in the Slabs branch of the Structure Tree.
Property Description
[-] Slab
General
Name
User Name
Slab type
Deck type
The automatically generated name for the slab.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Define the slab type.
Define the slab type.
Decomposition Depending on the slab type either:
• One-way
• Two-way
[-] Slab parameters,
Design parameters etc.
The remaining parameters that are displayed depend on the slab item - refer to the individual slab item properties. create slab on beams item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a slab on beams:
681
User Guides (UK)
Property
[-] General
Description
Slab
Select bays
From the Slab drop list choose:
• --New Slab-- to add panels within a new automatically named parent slab.
• --Add to existing-- to add panels to an existing parent slab.
Using this option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing slab in the plane with same properties.
If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If not found - a new parent slab is created.
In 2D Views a third option is also provided to:
• select an existing slab name to add extra panels within it.
• Checked - clicking once within a bay creates the panel (in a
2D View).
See: How do I create slab panels by bay?
• Unchecked - successive grid points must be clicked to define the panel’s outline.
See: How do I create slab panels by points?
[-] Slab item parameters
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Override slab depth
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
682
User Guides
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Auto-design
Select bars starting from
Reduce imposed loads by
For panels in Auto-design mode, A s,prov
is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
For panels not in Autodesign mode, the result will be a pass or fail.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
This property is applicable for the design of transfer slabs and mats.
Although the percentage of imposed load reduction is not determined automatically, this property allows you to specify the percentage manually.
It can be applied to an individual slab item - you don't have to apply a single value throughout a slab or mat (this can be important if you have discrete transfer panels within a large slab area).
• reducible loadcases are reduced
• combinations incorporating reducible loadcases are reduced
• The reduced results are used in slab design.
For mats, the bearing pressures are reduced as well.
683
User Guides (UK)
[+]
Reinforcement
Slabs panels can potentially have 4 layers of background reinforcement, (however any of the layers/directions can be set to “none” if required).
[-] Slab general
Check/uncheck the ‘Outside layer in X direction’ box as appropriate to indicate if the outside layer is in the X or Y direction. (The outside layer can be set differently for the top and bottom bars if required.)
Slab type
Deck type
Slab on Beams
• Reinforced concrete
• Post tension
Design of post tensioned slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Decomposition • One-way
• Two-way
Design of one way spanning slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
[-] Slab parameters
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
684
User Guides
Concrete aggregate type
Concrete density class
Dry density
Wet density
Diaphragm option
Specifies the aggregate type.
For normal weight concrete only, specifies the density class.
Specifies the dry concrete density
Specifies the wet concrete density
For new slabs only, sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
[+] Design parameters
Permanent load ratio
(Head Code
Eurocode)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
Maximum crack width
(Head Code
Eurocode)
[+] UDA
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create flat slab item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a flat slab:
Property Description
[-] General
685
User Guides (UK)
Slab
Select bays
From the Slab drop list choose:
• --New Slab-- to add panels within a new automatically named parent slab.
• --Add to existing-- to add panels to an existing parent slab.
Using this option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing slab in the plane with same properties.
If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If not found - a new parent slab is created.
In 2D Views a third option is also provided to:
• select an existing slab name to add extra panels within it.
• Checked - clicking once within a bay creates the panel (in a
2D View).
See: How do I create slab panels by bay?
• Unchecked - successive grid points must be clicked to define the panel’s outline.
See: How do I create slab panels by points?
[-] Slab item parameters
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Override slab depth
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
686
User Guides
Auto-design
Select bars starting from
Reduce
Imposed loads by
For panels in Auto-design mode, A s,prov
is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
For panels not in Autodesign mode, the result will be a pass or fail.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
This property is applicable for the design of transfer slabs and mats.
Although the percentage of imposed load reduction is not determined automatically, this property allows you to specify the percentage manually.
It can be applied to an individual slab item - you don't have to apply a single value throughout a slab or mat (this can be important if you have discrete transfer panels within a large slab area).
• reducible loadcases are reduced
• combinations incorporating reducible loadcases are reduced
• The reduced results are used in slab design.
For mats, the bearing pressures are reduced as well.
687
User Guides (UK)
[+]
Reinforcement
Slabs panels can potentially have 4 layers of background reinforcement, (however any of the layers/directions can be set to “none” if required).
[-] Slab general
Check/uncheck the ‘Outside layer in X direction’ box as appropriate to indicate if the outside layer is in the X or Y direction. (The outside layer can be set differently for the top and bottom bars if required.)
Slab type
Deck type
Flat slab
• Reinforced concrete
• Post tension
Design of post tensioned slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Decomposition Two-way
[-] Slab parameters
Depth
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Concrete aggregate type
Concrete density class
Specifies the slab thickness.
Specifies the aggregate type.
For normal weight concrete only, specifies the density class.
688
User Guides
Dry density
Wet density
Specifies the dry concrete density
Specifies the wet concrete density
Diaphragm option
For new slabs only, sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
[+] Design parameters
Permanent load ratio
(Head
Code Eurocode)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
Maximum crack width
(Head
Code Eurocode)
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create precast item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a precast slab:
Property Description
[-] General
Slab From the Slab drop list choose:
• --New Slab-- to add panels within a new automatically named parent slab.
• --Add to existing-- to add panels to an existing parent slab.
Using this option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing slab in the plane with same properties.
If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If
689
User Guides (UK) not found - a new parent slab is created.
In 2D Views a third option is also provided to:
• select an existing slab name to add extra panels within it.
Select bays • Checked - clicking once within a bay creates the panel (in a 2D View).
See: How do I create slab panels by bay?
• Unchecked - successive grid points must be clicked to define the panel’s outline.
See: How do I create slab panels by points?
[-] Slab item parameters
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of the slab.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Auto-design
[-] Slab general
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
Design of precast slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Slab type Precast
Deck type Precast concrete planks
Decomposition One-way
[-] Slab parameters
690
User Guides
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Concrete aggregate type
Specifies the aggregate type.
Concrete density class
Wet density
For normal weight concrete only, specifies the density class.
Specifies the wet concrete density
Dry density Specifies the dry concrete density
Wet weight per area
Specifies the wet weight per unit area calculated from design wet density
Dry weight per area
Short term elastic modulus, Ecm
Specifies the dry weight per unit area calculated from design dry density
Specifies the short term elastic modulus
Long term elastic modulus =
Ecm divided by...
Factor by which the short term elastic modulus is divided to obtain the long term modulus
Diaphragm option
[+] Decking
Properties
For new slabs only, sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
Manufacturer Specifies the precast plank manufacturer
Reference Specifies the precast plank reference (hollow core or solid slab)
691
User Guides (UK)
Gauge
Depth
Nominal unit width
Core centre to centre spacing
Weight per area
Precast self weight
[+] Topping details
Specifies the gauge of the precast plank.
Specifies the depth of the precast plank alone
Specifies the unit width of each precast plank
Specifies core centre to centre spacing (only applicable to hollow core units)
Specifies weight per area of the precast plank
Define the precast self weight.
Topping
Depth
Specifies type of topping:
• None
• Non-Structural
• Structural
Specifies the depth of topping (if topping other than
‘None’ is selected).
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create steel deck item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a steel deck:
Property Description
[-] General
692
User Guides
Slab
Select bays
From the Slab drop list choose:
• --New Slab-- to add panels within a new automatically named parent slab.
• --Add to existing-- to add panels to an existing parent slab.
Using this option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing slab in the plane with same properties.
If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If not found - a new parent slab is created.
In 2D Views a third option is also provided to:
• select an existing slab name to add extra panels within it.
• Checked - clicking once within a bay creates the panel (in a 2D View).
See: How do I create slab panels by bay?
• Unchecked - successive grid points must be clicked to define the panel’s outline.
See: How do I create slab panels by points?
[-] Slab item parameters
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of the deck.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
Override slab depth
[-] Slab general
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Slab type Steel deck
Deck type Steel plate
693
User Guides (UK)
Decomposition
• One-way
• Two-way
[-] Slab parameters
Depth
Diaphragm option
Specifies the slab thickness.
Sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
[+] Decking
Properties
Self weight density
[+] Material properties
[+] UDA
Define the self weight of the deck.
Define the steel properties
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create timber deck item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a timber deck:
Property Description
[-] General
694
User Guides
Slab
Select bays
From the Slab drop list choose:
• --New Slab-- to add panels within a new automatically named parent slab.
• --Add to existing-- to add panels to an existing parent slab.
Using this option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing slab in the plane with same properties.
If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If not found - a new parent slab is created.
In 2D Views a third option is also provided to:
• select an existing slab name to add extra panels within it.
• Checked - clicking once within a bay creates the panel (in a 2D View).
See: How do I create slab panels by bay?
• Unchecked - successive grid points must be clicked to define the panel’s outline.
See: How do I create slab panels by points?
[-] Slab item parameters
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of the deck.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
Override slab depth
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
695
User Guides (UK)
[-] Slab general
Slab type Timber deck
Deck type Timber
Decomposition One-way
[-] Slab parameters
Depth
Diaphragm option
[+] Decking
Properties
Specifies the slab thickness.
Sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
Define the self weight of the deck. Self weight density
[+] Material properties
[+] UDA
Define the timber properties
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
create composite slab item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a composite slab:
Property Description
[-] General
696
User Guides
Slab
Select bays
From the Slab drop list choose:
• --New Slab-- to add panels within a new automatically named parent slab.
• --Add to existing-- to add panels to an existing parent slab.
Using this option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing slab in the plane with same properties.
If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If not found - a new parent slab is created.
In 2D Views a third option is also provided to:
• select an existing slab name to add extra panels panels within it.
• Checked - clicking once within a bay creates the panel
(in a 2D View).
See: How do I create slab panels by bay?
• Unchecked - successive grid points must be clicked to define the panel’s outline.
See: How do I create slab panels by points?
[-] Slab item parameters
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Override slab depth
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
697
User Guides (UK)
Auto-design
[-] Slab general
Design of composite slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Slab type Composite slab
Deck type Profiled metal decking
Decomposition One-way
[-] Slab parameters
Overall depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Dry density
Wet density
Specifies the dry concrete density
Specifies the wet concrete density
Short term elastic modulus
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
Long term elastic modulus
= Ecm divided by...
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
Define the short term elastic modulus
Factor by which the short term elastic modulus is divided to obtain the long term modulus
Short term elastic modulus
(Head
Code Eurocode)
Define the short term elastic modulus
698
User Guides
Long term elastic modulus
= Ecm divided by...
(Head
Code Eurocode)
Factor by which the short term elastic modulus is divided to obtain the long term modulus
Define the short term modular ratio Short term ratio
(Head Code BS)
Long term ratio
(Head Code BS)
Diaphragm option
Define the long term modular ratio
Set the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
If required, choose either value or percentage and then specify actual ponding allowance accordingly.
Ponding allowance option
Apply ponding allowance to construction stage
Apply ponding allowance to composite stage
[+] Decking
Properties
Check to apply ponding allowance to construction stage.
Check to apply ponding allowance to composite stage.
Define the properties of the profiled metal deck
[+]
Reinforcement in slab for crack control or fire requirements
Define the reinforcement in slab for crack control or fire requirements
699
User Guides (UK)
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit slab on beams item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing slab on beams:
Property Description
[-] General
Name The automatically generated name for the slab item.
User Name Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Override slab depth
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Auto-design For panels in Auto-design mode, A s,prov
is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
For panels not in Autodesign mode, the result will be a pass or fail.
700
User Guides
Select bars starting from
Plane
[-] Slab general
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Indicates the level at which the slab item is placed.
Name
Slab type
Deck type
The parent slab name.
Slab on Beams
• Reinforced concrete
• Post tension
Design of post tensioned slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Decomposition • One-way
• Two-way
Design of one way spanning slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
[-] Slab parameters
[+] Slab properties
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Specifies the aggregate type. Concrete aggregate type
Concrete density class
Dry density
For normal weight concrete only, specifies the density class.
Specifies the dry concrete density
701
User Guides (UK)
Wet density
Diaphragm option
Specifies the wet concrete density
Sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the parent slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
[+] Design parameters
Permanent load ratio
(Head
Code Eurocode)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
Maximum crack width
(Head
Code Eurocode)
[-] Design parameters
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
Adjustment ratio direction X
This factor is applied to the enclosing length X in order to manually adjust the X direction span in the span-effective depth check.
See: Slab on beam idealized panels
Adjustment ratio direction Y
This factor is applied to the enclosing length Y in order to manually adjust the Y direction span in the span-effective depth check.
See: Slab on beam idealized panels
Enclosing length X
Enclosing length Y
Adjusted length
X
Adjusted length
Y
The automatically calculated span length in the X direction.
See: Slab on beam idealized panels
The automatically calculated span length in the Y direction.
See: Slab on beam idealized panels
The adjusted span length in the X direction.
See: Slab on beam idealized panels
The adjusted span length in the Y direction.
See: Slab on beam idealized panels
702
User Guides
Edge category start X
Edge category end X
Edge category start Y
Edge category end Y
Average stiffness ratio
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
[-]
Imposed load reduction
Reduce imposed loads by
The assumed support condition at the start of the span in the X direction.
The assumed support condition at the end of the span in the
X direction.
The assumed support condition at the start of the span in the Y direction.
The assumed support condition at the end of the span in the
Y direction.
In the current release of Tekla Structural Designer the average stiffness ratio is a user defined value. (Default value
= 1.0). The way in which the minimum thickness is calculated directly depends on this value.
This property is applicable for the design of transfer slabs and mats.
Although the percentage of imposed load reduction is not determined automatically, this property allows you to specify the percentage manually.
It can be applied to an individual slab item - you don't have to apply a single value throughout a slab or mat (this can be important if you have discrete transfer panels within a large slab area).
• reducible loadcases are reduced
• combinations incorporating reducible loadcases are reduced
• The reduced results are used in slab design.
For mats, the bearing pressures are reduced as well.
703
User Guides (UK)
[+]
Reinforcement
Slabs panels can potentially have 4 layers of background reinforcement, (however any of the layers/directions can be set to “none” if required).
[-] All edges
Linear Uncheck in order to specify all edges as curved.
Curvature
[-] Edge 1, Edge
2 etc.
Defines the amount of curvature to all edges.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
Linear Uncheck in order to specify a curved edge.
Curvature Defines the amount of curvature.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit flat slab item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing flat slab:
Property Description
[-] General
Check/uncheck the ‘Outside layer in X direction’ box as appropriate to indicate if the outside layer is in the X or Y direction. (The outside layer can be set differently for the top and bottom bars if required.)
704
User Guides
Name The automatically generated name for the slab item.
User Name Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Override slab depth
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Auto-design
Select bars starting from
Plane
[-] Slab general
For panels in Auto-design mode, A s,prov
is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
For panels not in Autodesign mode, the result will be a pass or fail.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Indicates the level at which the slab item is placed.
Name
Slab type
The parent slab name.
Slab on Beams
705
User Guides (UK)
Deck type • Reinforced concrete
• Post tension
Design of post tensioned slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Decomposition • One-way
• Two-way
[-] Slab parameters
[+] Slab properties
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Specifies the aggregate type. Concrete aggregate type
Concrete density class
Dry density
For normal weight concrete only, specifies the density class.
Specifies the dry concrete density
Specifies the wet concrete density Wet density
Diaphragm option
[+] Design parameters
Sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the parent slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
Permanent load ratio
(Head
Code Eurocode)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
706
User Guides
Maximum crack width
(Head
Code Eurocode)
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
[-]
Imposed load reduction
Reduce imposed loads by
[-] Design parameters
This property is applicable for the design of transfer slabs and mats.
Although the percentage of imposed load reduction is not determined automatically, this property allows you to specify the percentage manually.
It can be applied to an individual slab item - you don't have to apply a single value throughout a slab or mat (this can be important if you have discrete transfer panels within a large slab area).
• reducible loadcases are reduced
• combinations incorporating reducible loadcases are reduced
• The reduced results are used in slab design.
For mats, the bearing pressures are reduced as well.
Adjustment ratio direction X
This factor is applied to the enclosing length X in order to manually adjust the X direction span in the span-effective depth check.
Adjustment ratio direction Y
This factor is applied to the enclosing length X in order to manually adjust the X direction span in the span-effective depth check.
The automatically calculated span length in the X direction. Enclosing length X
Enclosing length Y
The automatically calculated span length in the Y direction.
Adjusted length
X
The adjusted span length in the X direction.
Adjusted length The adjusted span length in the Y direction.
707
User Guides (UK)
Y
Edge category start X
Edge category end X
Edge category start Y
Edge category end Y
The assumed support condition at the start of the span in the X direction.
The assumed support condition at the end of the span in the
X direction.
The assumed support condition at the start of the span in the Y direction.
The assumed support condition at the end of the span in the
Y direction.
Average stiffness ratio
(Head Code
ACI/AISC)
In the current release of Tekla Structural Designer the average stiffness ratio is a user defined value. (Default value
= 1.0). The way in which the minimum thickness is calculated directly depends on this value.
[+]
Reinforcement
Slabs panels can potentially have 4 layers of background reinforcement, (however any of the layers/directions can be set to “none” if required).
Check/uncheck the ‘Outside layer in X direction’ box as appropriate to indicate if the outside layer is in the X or Y direction. (The outside layer can be set differently for the top and bottom bars if required.)
[-] All edges
Linear Uncheck in order to specify all edges as curved.
Curvature
[-] Edge 1, Edge
2 etc.
Defines the amount of curvature to all edges.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
708
User Guides
Linear
Curvature
[+] UDA
Uncheck in order to specify a curved edge.
Defines the amount of curvature.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit precast item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing precast slab:
Property Description
[-] General
Name The automatically generated name for the slab item.
User Name Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of the slab.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
Override slab depth
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Auto-design
Plane
Design of precast slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Indicates the level at which the slab item is placed.
709
User Guides (UK)
[-] Slab general
Slab type Precast
Deck type Precast concrete planks
Decomposition One-way
[-] Slab parameters
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Concrete aggregate type
Specifies the aggregate type.
Concrete density class
Dry density
For normal weight concrete only, specifies the density class.
Specifies the dry concrete density
Wet density Specifies the wet concrete density
Wet weight per area
Defines the overall slab wet weight per unit area (PC plank
+ topping)
Dry weight per area
Short term elastic modulus
Defines the overall slab dry weight per unit area (PC plank
+ topping)
Specifies the short term elastic modulus
Long term elastic modulus =
Ecm divided by...
Factor by which the short term elastic modulus is divided to obtain the long term modulus
710
User Guides
Diaphragm option
[+] Decking
Properties
Country,
Manufacturer,
Reference,
Gauge
[+] Topping details
Topping
For new slabs only, sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
Define properties of precast slab.
Depth
[-] All edges
Linear
Curvature
[-] Edge 1,
Edge 2 etc.
Linear
Curvature
[+] UDA
Specifies type of topping:
• None
• Non-Structural
• Structural
Specifies the depth of topping (if topping other than
‘None’ is selected).
Uncheck in order to specify all edges as curved.
Defines the amount of curvature to all edges.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
Uncheck in order to specify a curved edge.
Defines the amount of curvature.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit steel deck item properties set
711
User Guides (UK)
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing steel deck:
Property Description
[-] General
Name The automatically generated name for the slab item.
User Name
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of the deck.
Different angles can be specified for different panels
within the slab.See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
Override slab depth
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Plane Indicates the level at which the slab item is placed.
[-] Slab general
Slab type Steel deck
Deck type
Decomposition
Steel plate
• One-way
• Two-way
[-] Slab parameters
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
712
User Guides
Diaphragm option
Sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
[+] Decking
Properties
Self weight density
[+] Material properties
[-] All edges
Linear
Curvature
Define the self weight of the deck.
Define the steel properties
Uncheck in order to specify all edges as curved.
Defines the amount of curvature to all edges.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
[-] Edge 1,
Edge 2 etc.
Linear
Curvature
[+] UDA
Uncheck in order to specify a curved edge.
Defines the amount of curvature.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit timber deck item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing timber deck:
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the slab item.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
713
User Guides (UK)
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of the deck.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
Override slab depth
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Vertical offset Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Plane Indicates the level at which the slab item is placed.
[-] Slab general
Slab type Timber deck
Deck type Timber
Decomposition One-way
[-] Slab parameters
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Diaphragm option
[+] Decking
Properties
Sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
714
User Guides
Self weight density
[+] Material properties
[-] All edges
Define the self weight of the deck.
Define the timber properties
Linear
Curvature
Uncheck in order to specify all edges as curved.
Defines the amount of curvature to all edges.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
[-] Edge 1,
Edge 2 etc.
Linear Uncheck in order to specify a curved edge.
Curvature Defines the amount of curvature.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
edit composite slab item properties set
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing composite slab:
Property Description
[-] General
Name The automatically generated name for the slab item.
User Name Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the
715
User Guides (UK) diaphragm.
Override slab depth
Vertical offset
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Auto-design
Plane
[-] Slab general
Design of composite slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Indicates the level at which the slab item is placed.
Slab type Composite slab
Deck type Profiled metal decking
Decomposition One-way
[-] Slab parameters
Overall depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Dry density
Wet density
Specifies the dry concrete density
Specifies the wet concrete density
Short term elastic modulus
(Head Code
AISC or EC)
Define the short term elastic modulus
716
User Guides
Long term elastic modulus
= Ecm divided by...
(Head Code
AISC or EC)
Factor by which the short term elastic modulus is divided to obtain the long term modulus
Short term ratio
(Head Code BS)
Long term ratio
(Head Code BS)
Diaphragm option
Define the short term modular ratio
Define the long term modular ratio
Set the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the new slab.
• None
• Semi-Rigid
• Rigid
If required, choose either value or percentage and then specify actual ponding allowance accordingly.
Ponding allowance option
Apply ponding allowance to construction stage
Apply ponding allowance to composite stage
[+] Decking
Properties
Check to apply ponding allowance to construction stage.
Check to apply ponding allowance to composite stage.
Define the properties of the profiled metal deck
[+]
Reinforcement in slab for crack control or fire requirements
Define the reinforcement in slab for crack control or fire requirements
[-] All edges
717
User Guides (UK)
Linear Uncheck in order to specify all edges as curved.
Curvature
[-] Edge 1, Edge
2 etc.
Defines the amount of curvature to all edges.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
Linear
Curvature
[+] UDA
Uncheck in order to specify a curved edge.
Defines the amount of curvature.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Mat properties
Mat properties
Topics in this section
•
•
create foundation mat properties set
•
edit foundation mat properties set
Foundation Mat properties
These properties are displayed by selecting an existing parent slab in the Foundation
Mats branch of the Structure Tree.
Property Description
[-] Slab
General
Name
User Name
Slab type
The automatically generated name for the slab.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Foundation mat
718
User Guides
Deck type • Reinforced concrete
• Post tension
Design of post tensioned slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Decomposition Two-way
[-] Slab parameters
The slab parameters that are displayed depend on the mat item - refer to the individual mat item properties. create foundation mat properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a mat:
Property Description
[-] General
Slab From the Slab drop list choose:
• --New Slab-- to add panels within a new automatically named parent mat.
• --Add to existing-- to add panels to an existing parent mat.
Using this option, at the point of slab item creation a check is made to find if there is a existing mat in the plane with same properties.
If found - the new panel will be added to it (if two are found then the one that is physically closest is used). If not found - a new parent mat is created.
In 2D Views a third option is also provided to:
• select an existing mat to add extra panels within it.
Overhang This value determines how far from the columns and walls the edge of the mat will be placed. When the foundation has been created, each outer edge of the foundation will inherit this value which can then be edited.
UseMinimalArea Displayed for Rectangular mats only:
Check this option to create a rectangular mat foundation that will have the smallest possible area while still supporting all selected columns/walls.
719
User Guides (UK)
RectangularAngle Displayed for Rectangular mats only and only editable if the
‘UseMinimalArea’ option is not checked.
The rectangular mat foundation is created at the specified angle relative to the global axes, while still supporting all selected columns/walls.
Width The width of the strip is displayed for strip mats only.
EndExtension
[-] Slab item parameters
Displayed for Strip mats only, this value determines how far the edge of the mat will extend beyond the first and last columns and wall it supports.
Foundation type Mat
Rotation angle
Include in diaphragm
Override slab depth
Vertical offset
Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the slab.
See: Rotation angle for panels
If this option is unchecked, the slab item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the slab item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Auto-design For panels in Auto-design mode, A s,prov
is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
For panels not in Autodesign mode, the result will be a pass or fail.
720
User Guides
Reduce imposed loads by
[+]
Reinforcement
This property is applicable for the design of transfer slabs and mats.
Although the percentage of imposed load reduction is not determined automatically, this property allows you to specify the percentage manually.
It can be applied to an individual slab item - you don't have to apply a single value throughout a slab or mat (this can be important if you have discrete transfer panels within a large slab area).
• reducible loadcases are reduced
• combinations incorporating reducible loadcases are reduced
• The reduced results are used in slab design.
For mats, the bearing pressures are reduced as well.
Slabs panels can potentially have 4 layers of background reinforcement, (however any of the layers/directions can be set to “none” if required).
Check/uncheck the ‘Outside layer in X direction’ box as appropriate to indicate if the outside layer is in the X or Y direction. (The outside layer can be set differently for the top and bottom bars if required.) edit foundation mat properties set
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing mat:
Property Description
[-] General
Name The automatically generated name for the mat item.
721
User Guides (UK)
User Name Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Rotation angle Specifies the orientation of reinforcement.
Different angles can be specified for different panels within the mat.
See: Rotation angle for panels
Include in diaphragm
If this option is unchecked, the mat item does not participate in diaphragm action. All nodes linked to the mat item will be able to displace independently of the diaphragm.
Override slab depth
Vertical offset
By default all panels in a slab adopt the same depth.
Checking this option allows the selected panel to have a different depth and vertical offset.
Only available when ‘Override slab depth’ is checked.
A positive offset raises the slab panel surface, a negative offset drops it.
Vertical offsets are not structurally significant
Auto-design
Plane
[-] Slab general
For panels in Auto-design mode, A s,prov
is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
For panels not in Autodesign mode, the result will be a pass or fail.
Indicates the level at which the mat is placed.
Name
Slab type
Deck type
The parent foundation mat name.
Foundation mat
• Reinforced concrete
• Post tension
Design of post tensioned slabs is beyond scope in the current release.
Decomposition • Two-way
[-] Slab parameters
722
User Guides
[+] Slab properties
Depth Specifies the slab thickness.
Concrete type • Normal
• Lightweight
Concrete class Specifies the concrete grade.
Concrete aggregate type
Concrete density class
Dry density
Specifies the aggregate type.
For normal weight concrete only, specifies the density class.
Specifies the dry concrete density
Specifies the wet concrete density Wet density
Diaphragm option
[+] Design parameters
Sets the default diaphragm action for all slab items within the parent slab.
• None
• Rigid
Permanent load ratio
(Head
Code Eurocode)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary.
Maximum crack width
(Head
Code Eurocode)
[-] Soil parameters
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
Use Ground
Bearing Springs
Allowable
Bearing
Pressure
Check this option to specify that the mat is ground bearing.
The allowable bearing pressure is only required when the
‘Use Ground Bearing Springs’ option is checked.
723
User Guides (UK)
[+] Ground
Stiffness
Type
Stiffness
Stiffness -ve
Tension limit ve
Stiffness +ve
Compression limit +ve
Horizontal
Support
The following properties are only displayed when the ‘Use
Ground Bearing Springs’ option is checked.
• Spring Linear
• Spring Non-Linear
Only displayed when the Type is set to ‘Spring Linear’.
Only displayed when the Type is set to ‘Spring Non-Linear’.
Only displayed when the Type is set to ‘Spring Non-Linear’.
Only displayed when the Type is set to ‘Spring Non-Linear’.
Only displayed when the Type is set to ‘Spring Non-Linear’.
% of vertical spring stiffness
[-]
Imposed load reduction
Reduce imposed loads by
• Fixed
• Free
• Spring
This field is displayed when the Horizontal Support is set to
‘Spring’.
This property is applicable for the design of transfer slabs and mats.
Although the percentage of imposed load reduction is not determined automatically, this property allows you to specify the percentage manually.
It can be applied to an individual slab item - you don't have to apply a single value throughout a slab or mat (this can be important if you have discrete transfer panels within a large slab area).
• reducible loadcases are reduced
• combinations incorporating reducible loadcases are reduced
• The reduced results are used in slab design.
For mats, the bearing pressures are reduced as well.
724
User Guides
[+]
Reinforcement
Slabs panels can potentially have 4 layers of background reinforcement, (however any of the layers/directions can be set to “none” if required).
Check/uncheck the ‘Outside layer in X direction’ box as appropriate to indicate if the outside layer is in the X or Y direction. (The outside layer can be set differently for the top and bottom bars if required.)
[-] All edges
Linear Uncheck in order to specify all edges as curved.
Curvature
[-] Edge 1, Edge
2 etc.
Defines the amount of curvature to all edges.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
Linear
Curvature
[+] UDA
Uncheck in order to specify a curved edge.
Defines the amount of curvature.
Only displayed when ‘Linear’ is unchecked.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Openings, Overhangs and Column Drops
Openings, Overhangs and Column Drops
Topics in this section
•
slab opening and mat opening properties
725
User Guides (UK)
•
slab overhang and mat overhang properties
•
slab opening and mat opening properties
This command is used to create an opening in an existing slab or deck panel with
properties as specified in the Properties Window .
Property Description
General
Opening Type From the drop list choose:
• Rectangular
• Circular
Rotation
Angle
Centre
For rectangular openings, this is used to specify the rotation of the opening in plan.
X and Y coordinates to the centre of the opening
Width and
Height
Radius
For rectangular openings, the size of the opening.
For circular openings, the size of the opening.
Related topics
•
Modeling slab and mat openings
slab overhang and mat overhang properties
This command is used to create an overhanging slab or deck panel. The overhang will
adopt the properties specified in the Properties Window .
Property Description
General
Edge Parallel Uncheck this box in order to specify an overhang with a curved edge.
Curvature This property only exists for overhangs which are not set as parallel. It is used to specify the maximum extent of the circular curve.
726
User Guides
Tapered
Width1
Width2
Check this box if the width of the overhang varies along the length supported edge.
The width of the overhang.
For tapered overhangs, the width of the overhang at end 2.
Related topics
•
Adding overhangs to existing slab or mat edges
column drop properties
This command is used to create a column drop in a concrete slab panel. The drop
dimensions are specified in the Properties Window .
Property Description
General
Depth The overall depth of the drop measured from the top of the slab.
Plan Breadth The breath of the drop.
Plan Width The width of the drop.
For the drop panel to be inserted correctly, it is important that in the construction level dialog the setting out point ‘Type’ for the slab level in question is set as S.S.L. not T.O.S.
Related topics
•
Rotation angle for panels
The rotation angle is used to control the orientation of the panel span.
Panels defined by a level
When the rotation angle = 0
• Span direction aligns with global X
When the rotation angle = 90
727
User Guides (UK)
• Span direction aligns with global Y
Panels defined by a frame
When the rotation angle = 0
• Span direction is horizontal
When the rotation angle = 90
• Span direction is vertical
Panels defined by a sloped plane
In a sloped plane positive Y is always aligned to the up-slope direction, so that positive X is always perpendicular to the slope.
When the rotation angle = 0
• Span direction aligns with X direction of the slope (i.e. perpendicular to the slope, as shown below)
When the rotation angle = 90
• Span direction aligns with Y direction of slope (i.e. parallel to the slope, as shown below)
728
User Guides
Roof Panel and Wall Panel Properties
Roof Panel and Wall Panel Properties
Topics in this section
•
•
Roof panel properties
The ‘Create Roof’ command is used to create a roof panel.
Once created, the panel properties can then be edited in the Properties Window:
Property Description
General
Plane
Rotation angle
Describes the level at which the panel was placed.
This value determines the following where appropriate:
• Span Direction for 1-way load decomposition
• Orientation of semi-rigid 2D elements in the Solver Model
See: Rotation angle for panels
729
User Guides (UK)
Include in diaphragm
Thickness
Youngs
Modulus
Shear
Modulus
When checked, the roof panel is meshed to form a diaphragm of semi-rigid 2D elements.
Roof panel thickness.
Only displayed/applicable if ‘include in diaphragm’ is checked.
Youngs Modulus.
Only displayed/applicable if ‘include in diaphragm’ is checked.
Shear Modulus.
Only displayed/applicable if ‘include in diaphragm’ is checked.
Temperature coefficient
Divide
Stiffness by
Decompose only wind
RoofType
[+] UDA
Temperature coefficient.
Only displayed/applicable if ‘include in diaphragm’ is checked.
Used to adjust the roof panel stiffness.
Only displayed/applicable if ‘include in diaphragm’ is checked.
Unless this box is checked a ‘Slab/roof overlap’ validation error will be produced if the roof panel overlaps a slab panel. This is because gravity loads cannot be decomposed by both panels types simultaneously.
Checking the box resolves the validation issue as it ensures the roof panel is only used to decompose wind (and not gravity) loads.
The ‘Default’ option treats pitched roofs as monopitch. The droplist allows you to more accurately specify the roof type as ‘Duopitch’, ‘Mansard’, ‘Hip’ etc.
If the type is changed after the wind model has already been established, you will also have to run ‘Update
Zones’ to reinstate the zoning.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
730
User Guides
Wall panel properties
The ‘Create Wind Wall’ command is used to create a wall panel.
Once created, the panel properties can then be edited in the Properties Window:
Property Description
General
Plane Describes the plane in which the panel was placed.
Rotation angle
IsParapet
Describes the panel span direction as an angle, 0° is horizontal and 90° is vertical.
Check to indicate the panel is to be treated as a parapet in the wind analysis.
After the Wind Wizard has been run, extra panel properties are then appended as follows:
Property Description
General
Gap
Solidity
Status
Decompose to
[+] UDA
Where the funnelling gap to the adjacent building is not consistent due to the shapes of the buildings it is up to you to decide whether to specify the average or worst-case gap.
The default gap is 1000 m which effectively give no funnelling. A zero gap value explicitly means ignore funnelling, for example where this building and the adjacent one are sheltered by upwind buildings.
If you indicate that the wall panel is a parapet, then you also need to indicate the Solidity of the parapet. (Walls that are not parapets automatically adopt a solidarity of 1.0).
Indicates whether the panel is valid or not.
Loads can be set to be decomposed to:
• Members
• Nodes (Default)
• Rigid Diaphragms
See: Wind Wall Panel Load Decomposition
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
731
User Guides (UK)
Related topics
•
Support, Element and Bearing Wall Properties
Topics in this section
•
•
•
•
Definition of rotation angle and gamma angle
Support properties
The ‘Create Support’ command is used to apply additional supports to the model.
When a support is first created, it's properties will be taken from those displayed in the
Properties Window at that particular time.
You should edit the properties to suit the support being created:
Property Description
General
Name
User Name
Plane
(This property is only displayed when editing existing supports)
The name displayed here is automatically created based on the grid point location.
(This property is only displayed when editing existing supports)
You can enter a user name to replace the automatically created name if required.
(This property is only displayed when editing existing supports)
Describes the level at which the support was placed.
732
User Guides
3 Grid Points (This property is only displayed when creating new supports)
• Unchecked - support properties are defined in accordance with the global coordinate system.
• Checked - a user defined coordinate system is applied to the support. (After clicking where you want to create the support, the second click defines the x direction and the third click defines the y direction.)
Fx, Fy, Fz
Mx, My, Mz
Angles
The translational degrees of freedom can be set as either
Free, or Fixed in each direction.
The rotational degrees of freedom can be set as either
Free, or Fixed in each direction.
Inclination,
Azimuth and
Rotation
Translational stiffness x, y, and z
When creating new supports, the angles are calculated automatically depending on the placement method (3 Grid
Points on/off).
When editing existing supports, the angles can be edited in order to redefine the direction in which the support acts.
Type
Stiffness
Fmax -ve and
Fmax +ve
In order to define a translational spring in a particular direction, the translational degree of freedom in the same direction must first be set to Free. The available types are then:
• Release - (i.e. zero translational stiffness)
• Spring Linear
• Spring Non-linear
• Spring Linear - a single stiffness value is entered, which acts in both the positive and negative directions.
• Spring Non-linear - two stiffness values are entered, one to act in the positive direction and a second to act in the negative direction..
For non-linear springs you are also able to define the spring capacity in each direction. (Note that this must always be entered as a positive value, for both +ve and -ve directions).
733
User Guides (UK)
Rotational stiffness x, y, and z
Type
Stiffness
Stiffness
Percentage
Fmax -ve and
Fmax +ve
In order to define a rotational spring in a particular direction, the rotational degree of freedom in the same direction must first be set to Free. The available options are then:
• Release - (i.e. zero rotational stiffness)
• Spring Linear
• Spring Non-linear
• Nominally Pinned
• Nominally Fixed
• Spring Linear - a single stiffness value is entered, which acts in both the positive and negative directions.
• Spring Non-linear - two stiffness values are entered, one to act in the positive direction and a second to act in the negative direction.
• Nominally Pinned - 10%
(i.e. 10% * 4 EI/L)
• Nominally Fixed - 100%
(i.e. 100% * 4 EI/L)
In the above equations, L is the length from the base of the column to the level of the next column stack that is denoted as a floor, or it is the distance to the top of the column if this is shorter.
For non-linear springs you are also able to define the spring capacity in each direction. (Note that this must always be entered as a positive value, for both +ve and -ve directions).
Related topics
•
Element properties
The ‘Create Element’ command is used to create a new analysis element with properties
as specified in the Properties Window .
Each property is described in the table below, (those that are specific to analysis elements being emphasised):
734
User Guides
Property Description
Element
Parameters
Characteristic Analysis element
Material type • Steel
• Concrete
• Timber
• General material
• Cold formed
• Cold rolled
Element type Beam
Use
Automatic
Grouping
Rotation
• Unchecked - Group names can be entered manually
• Checked - Group names are created automatically
The rotation of the element around its local x-axis.
The default (Degrees0) aligns the element properties with the global Z axis, (provided that the element has not been specifically defined within an incline plane).
• Degrees0
• Degrees90
• Degrees180
• Degrees270
• Angle
To enter an angle directly, set the above Rotation to ‘Angle’. Rotation
Angle
Grade
Ax
A parallel to minor
A parallel to major
The grades that are available here are set from the
Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Specifies the area of the section.
Specifies the shear area parallel to the minor axis.
Specifies the shear area parallel to the major axis.
735
User Guides (UK)
Ix
I major
Specifies the torsional inertia.
Specifies the major axis inertia.
I minor Specifies the minor axis inertia.
[+] UDA A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Related topics
•
Modeling Steel Beams and Cold Formed Beams
Bearing wall properties
The following properties are displayed when you create a bearing wall
Property Description
[-] General
Top Level
Base Level
Thickness
Alignment
Material type
Grade
[+] UDA
Specifies the top level for the wall.
(When creating a new member, this property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
Specifies the bottom level for the wall.
(When creating a new member, this property is only displayed in 2D Floor Views)
The thickness of the wall.
Alignment of the wall:
• Front
• Back
• Middle
• General
• Timber
• Concrete
The grade for the selected material.
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
736
User Guides
Related topics
•
Definition of rotation angle and gamma angle
•
Rotation angle
The rotation angle is used to control the orientation of the member’s local z axis.
It is measured about the member’s local x axis, which is itself defined by the line between the first and second point clicked when defining the member.
Entering a positive rotation angle results in a clockwise rotation of y and z about x looking towards positive x.
The local z axis is therefore orientated by the rotation angle as follows, but noting that special cases exist when the local x axis of the member is vertical, or when the member is defined within a sloped plane.
For vertical members only
737
User Guides (UK)
When the rotation angle = 0
• Local y aligns with global X
• Local z according to the ‘right hand rule’.
Members defined by a sloped plane
When the rotation angle = 0
• Local z is perpendicular to the sloped plane. The global z component of the local z axis is always negative
738
• Local y according to the ‘right hand rule’.
For all other members
User Guides
When the rotation angle = 0
• Local z lies in the plane created by the local x axis and the global z axis. The global z component of the local z axis is always negative
• Local y according to the ‘right hand rule’.
Gamma angle
The gamma (γ)angle is the angle between the local z axis and the plane created by the local x axis and the global Z axis.
739
User Guides (UK)
You do not enter the gamma angle directly as it is derived for you from the rotation angle, (the rotation angle being easier to work with and visualise, particularly when modeling in sloped planes).
In the majority of cases the gamma angle will have the same value as the rotation angle, although this is not always the case - a hip rafter in a steel portal frame being one example where they could differ.
Patch, Result Strip and Punching Check Properties
Column Patch (unsaved) Properties
The Patch Column command is used to create a slab reinforcement patch over the top of a concrete column.
The properties required to create this type of patch are described in the table below,
(note that these differ from the Column Patch Properties
displayed when an existing patch is edited).
Property Description
General
740
Type
Lx
Column (not editable).
Specifies the size of the patch in the X direction.
Ly Specifies the size of the patch in the Y direction.
Surface Specifies where the reinforcement is placed in the slab:
• Top
• Bottom
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Consider patch surface moments only
This setting applies to all strips in both directions.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface
(except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Related topics
•
How do I create a column patch?
Column Patch Properties
When a Column Patch is edited the following properties are displayed:
Property Description
General
Name
User Name
The automatically generated name for the patch is derived from the slab and the column to which it is attached.
Can be used to override the automatically generated
User Guides
741
User Guides (UK)
Type name if required.
Column (not editable).
Lx
Ly
Specifies the size of the patch in the X direction.
Specifies the size of the patch in the Y direction.
Associated Slab
Panel
Align to Panel
Reinforcement
Local X Angle
Surface
Autodesign
Where a patch sits over more than one panel then an automatic choice is made, but you are able to override this if required by selecting one of the alternative panels from a drop-down list.
When checked, the calculated strip reinforcement is aligned with the background reinforcement in the
Associated Slab Panel.
The angle of the X axis reinforcement is only editable if the Align to Panel Reinforcement property is unchecked.
Specifies the reinforcement to be associated with and designed by the patch:
• Top or Bottom
(cannot be both).
This setting applies to all strips in both directions, but reinforcement in either direction can still be set to none - see below.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
Select bars starting from
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Consider Strips This setting controls which strips are to be designed by the patch.
• X
• Y
742
• X and Y
Consider patch surface moments only
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface (except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Strips in X
Centre, Left and Right
Width
Design Force
The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
(By default the centre strip covers half the panel, so that the left and right strips each cover a quarter of the panel.)
• Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
Strips in Y
Centre, Left and Right
Width The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
(By default the centre strip covers half the panel, so that the left and right strips each cover a quarter of the panel.)
Design Force
Reinforcement
• Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
(By default strips in the Y direction are designed for maximum values.)
User Guides
743
User Guides (UK)
Combine with
Panel
Reinforcement
When checked, the calculated strip reinforcement takes into account any existing panel reinforcement in the
Associated Slab Panel that is in the same alignment as the strip.
Cover as Panel When checked, the cover is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
Outer Bar
Direction as
Panel
When checked, the outer bar direction is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
When unchecked, the outer bar direction can be set in X or Y.
Reinforcement This setting is used to specify whether bars or mesh are to be used in each direction.
• Mesh
• Bars XY
• Bars X
• Bars Y
• None
(If Mesh is selected an extra setting then allows you to specify if main bars are in X or Y.)
Reinforcement in X and Y (or
Mesh)
Bar Size, spacing, Mesh type etc.
The actual reinforcement provided in each of the strips is indicated here.
Related topics
•
How do I edit the properties of an existing patch?
Beam Patch (unsaved) Properties
The Patch Beam command is used to create a slab reinforcement patch over the top of a concrete beam.
The properties required to create this type of patch are described in the table below,
(note that these differ from the Beam Patch Properties
displayed when an existing patch is edited).
Property Description
744
User Guides
General
Type Beam (not editable).
Surface
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Specifies the reinforcement to be associated with and designed by the patch:
• Top or Bottom
(cannot be both).
This setting applies to all strips in both directions.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Consider patch surface moments only
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface
(except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Patch Width Specifies the width of the patch perpendicular to the beam span.
Centre Strip
Width
Specifies the width of the centre strip. The two end strips are recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
Related topics
•
Beam Patch Properties
When a Beam Patch is edited the following properties are displayed:
Property Description
General
745
User Guides (UK)
Name
User Name
Type
Lx
The automatically generated name for the patch is derived from the slab and the beam to which it is attached.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Beam (not editable).
Specifies the size of the patch in the X direction.
Ly Specifies the size of the patch in the Y direction.
Associated Slab
Panel
Local X Angle
Where a patch sits over more than one panel then an automatic choice is made, but you are able to override this if required by selecting one of the alternative panels from a drop-down list.
Calculated value (not editable). For a beam patch the X axis is perpendicular to the beam.
Surface
Autodesign
Specifies the reinforcement to be associated with and designed by the patch:
• Top or Bottom
(cannot be both).
This setting applies to all strips in both directions.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
Select bars starting from
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Consider Strips This setting controls which strips are to be designed by the patch.
• X
• Y
• X and Y
746
Consider patch surface moments only
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface (except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Strips in X
Centre, Left and Right
Width
Design Force
The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
• Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
(By default the centre strip is designed for average values, whereas the left and right strips are designed using maximum values.)
Strips in Y
Centre, Left and Right
Width
Design Force
Reinforcement
The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly.
(By default the centre strip covers the whole panel, so that the left and right strips do not exist.)
• Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
(By default strips in the Y direction are designed for maximum values.)
Combine with
Panel
Reinforcement
When checked, the calculated strip reinforcement takes into account any existing panel reinforcement in the
Associated Slab Panel that is in the same alignment as the strip.
Cover as Panel When checked, the cover is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
User Guides
747
User Guides (UK)
Outer Bar
Direction as
Panel
When checked, the outer bar direction is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
When unchecked, the outer bar direction can be set in X or Y.
Reinforcement This setting is used to specify whether bars or mesh are to be used in each direction.
• Mesh
• Bars XY
• Bars Y
(If Mesh is selected an extra setting then allows you to specify if main bars are in X or Y.)
Reinforcement in X and Y (or
Mesh)
Bar Size, spacing, Mesh type etc.
The actual reinforcement provided in each of the strips is indicated here.
Related topics
•
How do I edit the properties of an existing patch?
Wall Patch (unsaved) Properties
The Patch Wall command is used to create a slab reinforcement patch over the top of a concrete wall.
The properties required to create this type of patch are described in the table below,
(note that these differ from the Wall Patch Properties
displayed when an existing patch is edited).
Property Description
General
Type
Autodesign
Wall (not editable).
This setting applies to all strips in both directions.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
748
User Guides
Select bars starting from
Consider patch surface moments only
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface
(except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Create Mode Choose from:
• Single Patch Along Wall
• Internal with End Patches
• End Patch at Wall End
• Internal Patch
Depending on the mode selected, the number of patches, number of strips, and choice of average or maximum design force in each strip will vary.
Patch Width Specifies the width of the patch perpendicular to the wall.
Related topics
•
Wall Patch Properties
When a Wall Patch is edited the following properties are displayed:
Property Description
General
Name
User Name
Type
Lx
The automatically generated name for the patch is derived from the slab and the wall to which it is attached.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Wall (not editable).
Specifies the size of the patch in the X direction.
749
User Guides (UK)
Ly Specifies the size of the patch in the Y direction.
Associated Slab
Panel
Local X Angle
Surface
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
Where a patch sits over more than one panel then an automatic choice is made, but you are able to override this if required by selecting one of the alternative panels from a drop-down list.
Calculated value (not editable). For a wall patch the X axis is perpendicular to the wall.
Specifies the reinforcement to be associated with and designed by the patch:
• Top or Bottom
(cannot be both).
This setting applies to all strips in both directions.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Consider Strips This setting controls which strips are to be designed by the patch.
• X
• Y
• X and Y
Consider patch surface moments only
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface (except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Strips in X
Centre, Left and Right
750
Width
Design Force
The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
• Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
Strips in Y
Centre, Left and Right
Width
Design Force
Reinforcement
The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly.
• Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
Combine with
Panel
Reinforcement
When checked, the calculated strip reinforcement takes into account any existing panel reinforcement in the
Associated Slab Panel that is in the same alignment as the strip.
Cover as Panel When checked, the cover is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
Outer Bar
Direction as
Panel
When checked, the outer bar direction is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
When unchecked, the outer bar direction can be set in X or Y.
Reinforcement This setting is used to specify whether bars or mesh are to be used in each direction.
• Mesh
• Bars XY
• Bars Y
(If Mesh is selected an extra setting then allows you to specify if main bars are in X or Y.)
Reinforcement in X and Y (or
Mesh)
User Guides
751
User Guides (UK)
Bar Size, spacing, Mesh type etc.
The actual reinforcement provided in each of the strips is indicated here.
Related topics
•
How do I edit the properties of an existing patch?
Panel Patch (unsaved) Properties
The Patch Panel command is used to create a slab reinforcement patch within an existing slab panel.
The properties required to create this type of patch are described in the table below,
(note that these differ from the Panel Patch Properties
displayed when an existing patch is edited).
Property Description
General
Create Patch at Centroid
Type
Lx
Ly
Surface
Autodesign
When checked, the patch is automatically positioned at the centroid of the selected panel.
When unchecked, the patch can be positioned manually within the panel.
Panel (not editable).
Specifies the size of the patch in the X direction.
Specifies the size of the patch in the Y direction.
Specifies where the reinforcement is placed in the slab:
• Top
• Bottom
This setting applies to all strips in both directions, but reinforcement in either direction can still be set to none - see below.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
752
Select bars starting from
Consider patch surface moments only
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface
(except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Related topics
•
How do I create a panel patch?
Panel Patch Properties
When a Panel Patch is edited the following properties are displayed:
Property Description
General
Name
User Name
Type
Lx
Ly
Associated Slab
Panel
Align to Panel
Reinforcement
The automatically generated name for the patch is derived from the slab to which it is attached.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
Panel (not editable).
Specifies the size of the patch in the X direction.
Specifies the size of the patch in the Y direction.
Where a patch sits over more than one panel then an automatic choice is made, but you are able to override this if required by selecting one of the alternative panels from a drop-down list.
When checked, the calculated strip reinforcement is aligned with the background reinforcement in the
Associated Slab Panel.
User Guides
753
User Guides (UK)
Local X Angle
Surface
Autodesign
Select bars starting from
The angle of the X axis reinforcement is only editable if the Align to Panel Reinforcement property is unchecked.
Specifies the reinforcement to be associated with and designed by the patch:
• Top or Bottom
(cannot be both).
This setting applies to all strips in both directions, but reinforcement in either direction can still be set to none - see below.
• Unchecked - the specified reinforcement will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - reinforcement will be designed during the design process.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Consider Strips This setting controls which strips are to be designed by the patch.
• X
• Y
• X and Y
Consider patch surface moments only
• Unchecked - only the specified surface is considered in the design.
• Checked - panel design will consider the opposite surface (except when a patch exists in the opposite surface).
Strips in X
Centre, Left and Right
Width The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
(By default the centre strip covers the whole panel, so
754
that the left and right strips do not exist.)
Design Force • Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
Strips in Y
Centre, Left and Right
Width
Design Force
Reinforcement
The left and right strip widths can be specified independently: the centre strip width is recalculated accordingly and cannot be edited.
(By default the centre strip covers the whole panel, so that the left and right strips do not exist.)
• Average (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
• Maximum (of all the FE nodal values within the strip).
(By default strips in the Y direction are designed for maximum values.)
Combine with
Panel
Reinforcement
When checked, the calculated strip reinforcement takes into account any existing panel reinforcement in the
Associated Slab Panel that is in the same alignment as the strip.
Cover as Panel When checked, the cover is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
Outer Bar
Direction as
Panel
When checked, the outer bar direction is set to be the same as that in the Associated Slab Panel.
When unchecked, the outer bar direction can be set in X or Y.
User Guides
755
User Guides (UK)
Reinforcement This setting is used to specify whether bars or mesh are to be used in each direction.
• Mesh
• Bars XY
• Bars X
• Bars Y
• None
(If Mesh is selected an extra setting then allows you to specify if main bars are in X or Y.)
Reinforcement in X and Y (or
Mesh)
Bar Size, spacing, Mesh type etc.
The actual reinforcement provided in each of the strips is indicated here.
Related topics
•
How do I edit the properties of an existing patch?
Result Strip Properties
To display the properties for a Result Strip you must first select it, (either in a View, or in the Structure Tree).
To select a strip in a View you must ensure that ‘Result Strips’ are switched on in Scene Content.
The following strip properties are then displayed:
Property Description
General
Name
User Name
Start Width
The automatically generated name for the strip.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
The total strip width at the first point picked when creating the strip.
756
User Guides
End Width
Result Type
The total strip width at the second point picked when creating the strip.
Determines how the strip result is calculated:
• Average
• Centreline
• Maximum
The number of stations per metre along the strip. Number of
Stations
Number of
Points
Name
The number of points per metre across the strip at each station.
The automatically generated name for the strip.
Related topics
•
Working with 2D Strips and displaying Strip Results
Punching Check (unsaved) Properties
The Add Check command is used to create a Punching Check item within existing slab panels.
The properties required to create the check are described in the table below, (note that
these differ from the Punching Check Properties
displayed when an existing check item is edited).
Property Description
General
Tension
Reinforcement
Point Load
Breadth and
Depth
Point Load
Orientation
This setting identifies the slab reinforcement to be used in the punching check calculation.
In order to check punching around a point load, the program needs to know the size of the point load.
Point Load Breadth and Depth are not applicable when you apply the check to a column.
Specifies the orientation of the check’s local Z axis to the model’s Global Y axis.
Point Load Orientation is not applicable when you apply the check to a column.
757
User Guides (UK)
Beta - User limit
(Head
Code Eurocode)
Check this box to set a lower limit on the magnification factor β for internal columns/walls.
When checked, the calculated value of β will be a minimum value of 1.15 or greater.
When checked, the user factor for Vt is applied. User factor for
Vt
(Head Code BS) u0 - user reduction u1 - user reduction
Design Input
Can be used to manually specify a reduction in the length of the u0 perimeter to account for undefined openings.
Can be used to manually specify a reduction in the length of the u1 perimeter to account for undefined openings.
Use
Reinforcement
Reinforcement type
Arrangement type
Auto-design
Select reinforcement starting from
Check this box in order to apply a default punching reinforcement arrangement that can then either be checked, or used as the starting reinforcement for an auto-design.
You would only choose to uncheck the box when specifying a new check if you want to perform an autodesign but starting from Minima.
In the current release only Stud reinforcement is considered.
The options are:
• Orthogonal (default)
• Circular
When run in Auto-design mode, the reinforcement is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Autodesign is ‘on’.
• Minima - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - auto-design commences from the current bar arrangement.
758
User Guides
Rib type
Grade
Bar size
Specifies the reinforcement rib type.
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The reinforcement bar sizes that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Defines the spacing between bars along each rail. Spacing
Spacing from column face
Stud rails spacing in Y direction
Stud rails spacing in Z direction
Defines the spacing of the first bar in each rail from the column face.
Spacing between rails in the local Y direction.
Spacing between rails in the local Z direction.
Number of diagonal stud rails on one corner
The number of stud rails adjacent to each corner of the column.
(This property is only displayed when the ‘Arrangement
Type’ is Circular)
The number of stud rails adjacent to the column face in the local Y direction.
Number of studs per column face - Y direction
Number of studs per column face - Z direction
The number of stud rails adjacent to the column face in the local Z direction.
Number of studs per rail
Number of studs on each rail.
Related topics
•
•
How do I create a Punching Check item?
Punching Check Properties
When a Punching Check Item is edited the following properties are displayed:
759
User Guides (UK)
Property
General
Description
Tension
Reinforcement
Centre
This setting identifies the slab reinforcement to be used in the punching check calculation.
The check location (not editable).
Column Drop Indicates if the check considers a Column Drop (not editable).
Beta - User limit
(Head
Code Eurocode)
When checked, a minimum value of Beta = 1.15 is applied to all internal columns.
When checked, the user factor for Vt is applied. User factor for
Vt
(Head Code BS) u0 - user reduction
Can be used to manually specify a reduction in the length of the u0 perimeter to account for undefined openings. u1 - user reduction
Check Status and Ratio
Loaded
Perimeter
Can be used to manually specify a reduction in the length of the u1 perimeter to account for undefined openings.
Indicates the status of the checks for each calculated perimeter and the overall check ratio.
Length Indicates the length of the u0 Loaded Perimeter (not editable).
Reduced length The reduced length of u0 after accounting for openings.
BEquiv, DEquiv,
BBound,
BBound,
Bounding
Perimeter
Refer to the Concrete Design Reference Guide for the current Head Code for the appropriate definition of these terms.
760
d Effective
Depth
Slab Override
Indicates the average effective depth to the tension reinforcement (not editable). d = (d y
+ d z
) / 2 where d y
and d z
are the effective depths in the two orthogonal directions.
There is a value of d for top steel and a different value for bottom steel. Note this definition changes in the presence of a drop panel.
This information is only available if the reinforcement is known in each direction.
When an override is applied the slabs in each direction can be de-activated in the check. In this way the Loaded
Perimeter Position can be edited.
In the typical case of punching checks around a column, the slab ‘y’ & ‘z’, ‘positive’ & ‘negative’ are defined by the local axis system of the column. This can be displayed by displaying the Local Axes for 1D
Elements in Scene Content.
Control
Perimeter
Length Indicates the length of the u1 Control Perimeter (not editable).
Reduced length The reduced length of u1 after accounting for openings.
Design Input
Use
Reinforcement
Reinforcement type
Arrangement type
Check this box in order to apply a default punching reinforcement arrangement that can then either be checked, or used as the starting reinforcement for an auto-design.
You would only choose to uncheck the box when specifying a new check if you want to perform an autodesign but starting from Minima.
In the current release only Stud reinforcement is considered.
The options are:
• Orthogonal (default)
• Circular
User Guides
761
User Guides (UK)
Auto-design
Select reinforcement starting from
Rib type
Grade
Bar size
Spacing
Spacing from column face
Stud rails spacing in Y direction
Stud rails spacing in Z direction
Number of diagonal stud rails on one corner
Number of studs per column face - Y direction
Number of studs per column face - Z direction
When run in Auto-design mode, the reinforcement is increased until either a pass is achieved or the limiting reinforcement parameter limits have been exceeded.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Autodesign is ‘on’.
• Minima - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size.
• Current - auto-design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Specifies the reinforcement rib type.
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The reinforcement bar sizes that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Defines the spacing between bars along each rail.
Defines the spacing of the first bar in each rail from the column face.
Spacing between rails in the local Y direction.
Spacing between rails in the local Z direction.
The number of stud rails adjacent to each corner of the column.
(This property is only displayed when the ‘Arrangement
Type’ is Circular)
The number of stud rails adjacent to the column face in the local Y direction.
The number of stud rails adjacent to the column face in the local Z direction.
762
User Guides
Number of studs per rail
Number of studs on each rail.
Related topics
•
Punching Check (unsaved) Properties
•
How do I edit the properties of an existing patch?
Isolated Foundation and Pile Properties
Pad Base Column Properties
The properties required to create this type of pad base are described in the table below.
Property Description
General
Foundation Type Isolated Pad Base (not editable).
Auto-design depth
• When Autodesign is selected an iterative procedure is used to determine the depth. If the shear design fails the depth is increased until either the check passes, or the maximum depth specified in Design Options has been reached.
• When Autodesign is not selected (i.e. check mode), the existing depth is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one base in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their depth autodesigned.
When Design Member on the right click context menu is used to design an individual base, the depth will be checked or designed according to the auto-design depth setting.
Auto-design size • When Autodesign is selected an iterative procedure is used to determine the base size. If the bearing check fails the size is increased until either the check passes, or the maximum side length specified in Design Options has been reached.
• When Autodesign is not selected (i.e. check mode), the existing size is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one base in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their depth auto-
763
User Guides (UK) designed.
When Design Member on the right click context menu is used to design an individual base, the size will be checked or designed according to the
Auto-design size setting.
Select size/depth starting from
Autodesign reinforcement
This option only appears when either Autodesign depth or Autodesign size is selected. It sets the autodesign start point for the depth, or size, or both.
The options are:
• Minima (default)
• Current
Selecting ‘Minima’ removes the current depth/size and begins with the minimum allowed depth/size specified in Design Options.
For both options the auto-design depth increment is that specified in Design
Options> Foundations Isolated Foundations> Foundation Size
This setting applies to top and bottom reinforcement, but reinforcement in either location can still be set to none.
If enabled, auto-design of reinforcement occurs after the base size and depth have been established.
• When Autodesign reinforcement is enabled an iterative procedure is used to determine the reinforcement. If the bending design fails the reinforcement size gets increased and spacing gets decreased until these checks pass. Iterations continue until either a satisfactory bar configuration has been achieved, or the maximum bar size and minimum spacing specified in Design Options has been reached. At this point the depth gets increased and the above procedure is repeated.
If the smallest bar at largest spacing is insufficient then the next bar size at max spacing is used. If the largest bar is reached the spacing gets reduced and the smallest bar is used. Then the bar size gets increased until the largest bar size reached.
• When Autodesign reinforcement is disabled (i.e. check mode), the existing reinforcement provision is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one base in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their reinforcement auto-designed.
764
User Guides
When Design Member on the right click context menu is used to design an individual base the reinforcement is always designed (irrespective of the Autodesign reinforcement setting).
Select bars starting from
Foundation
Parameters
Eccentricity in Y direction
Eccentricity in X direction
Rotation angle
Shape
Length in Y direction
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Autodesign reinforcement is selected.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size specified in Design Options.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Specifies the eccentricity of the pad in the Y direction.
Specifies the eccentricity of the pad in the X direction.
Specifies the rotation of the base relative to that of the support (which is controlled by the rotation angle specified for column).
Specifies where the base shape in plan:
• Square
• Rectangular
Specifies the size of the pad in the Y direction.
765
User Guides (UK)
Length in X direction
Depth
Specifies the size of the pad in the X direction.
Specifies the depth of the pad.
Concrete class
Permanent load ratio option (Eurocode only)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter. A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary. See: Design parameters
Maximum crack width
The concrete grade.
The concrete grades that are available are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
Reinforcement
Type
Rib type (Head
Code Eurocode or BS)
Rib type (Head
Code ACI)
Bar type
Bar size, spacing,
Mesh type etc.
• Mesh
• Loose Bars
• None
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The actual reinforcement provided in each of the layers is indicated here.
Top, Bottom,
Side cover
Soil Parameters
Nominal cover to reinforcement.
Surcharge depth Surcharge depth
766
User Guides
Soil unit weight Soil unit weight
Permanent surcharge load
Variable surcharge load
Characteristic friction angle
Design shear strength of soil angle (ACI & BS
Head Codes)
Allowable bearing capacity
(ACI & BS Head
Codes)
Bearing capacity
A1 - STR (EC
Head Code)
Bearing capacity
A2 - GEO (EC
Head Code)
[+] UDA
Permanent surcharge load
Variable surcharge load
Characteristic friction angle
Design shear strength of soil angle
Allowable bearing capacity
Allowable bearing capacity A1
Allowable bearing capacity A2
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Strip Base Wall Properties
The properties required to create this type of pad base are described in the table below.
Property Description
General
Foundation Type Isolated Pad Base (not editable).
767
User Guides (UK)
Auto-design depth
• When Autodesign is selected an iterative procedure is used to determine the depth. If the shear design fails the depth is increased until either the check passes, or the maximum depth specified in Design Options has been reached.
• When Autodesign is not selected (i.e. check mode), the existing depth is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one base in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their depth autodesigned.
Auto-design size • When Autodesign is selected an iterative procedure is used to determine the base size. If the bearing check fails the size is increased until either the check passes, or the maximum side length specified in Design Options has been reached.
• When Autodesign is not selected (i.e. check mode), the existing size is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one base in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their depth autodesigned.
Select size/depth starting from
This option only appears when either Autodesign depth or Autodesign size is selected. It sets the autodesign start point for the depth, or size, or both.
The options are:
• Minima (default)
• Current
Selecting ‘Minima’ removes the current depth/size and begins with the minimum allowed depth/size specified in Design Options.
For both options the auto-design depth increment is that specified in Design
Options> Foundations Isolated Foundations> Foundation Size
768
User Guides
Autodesign reinforcement
Select bars starting from
Foundation
Parameters
Eccentricity in Y
(along wall)
Eccentricity in X
(across wall)
Rotation angle
Shape
Width
This setting applies to top and bottom reinforcement, but reinforcement in either location can still be set to none.
If enabled, auto-design of reinforcement occurs after the base size and depth have been established.
• When Autodesign reinforcement is enabled an iterative procedure is used to determine the reinforcement. If the bending design fails the reinforcement size gets increased and spacing gets decreased until these checks pass. Iterations continue until either a satisfactory bar configuration has been achieved, or the maximum bar size and minimum spacing specified in Design Options has been reached. At this point the depth gets increased and the above procedure is repeated.
If the smallest bar at largest spacing is insufficient then the next bar size at max spacing is used. If the largest bar is reached the spacing gets reduced and the smallest bar is used. Then the bar size gets increased until the largest bar size reached.
• When Autodesign reinforcement is disabled (i.e. check mode), the existing reinforcement provision is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one base in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their reinforcement auto-designed.
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Autodesign reinforcement is enabled.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size specified in Design Options.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
Specifies the eccentricity of the pad in the Y direction.
Specifies the eccentricity of the pad in the X direction.
Specifies the angle of the base about global Z.
Not editable
Specifies the width of the base.
769
User Guides (UK)
Extension beyond wall end
Depth
Specifies the amount the base projects beyond both wall ends.
Specifies the depth of the base.
Concrete class
Permanent load ratio option (Eurocode only)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter.
A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary. See: Design parameters
Maximum crack width
The concrete grade.
The concrete grades that are available are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
• 0.2
• 0.3
• 0.4
Reinforcement
Type
Rib type (Head
Code Eurocode or BS)
Rib type (Head
Code ACI)
Bar type
Bar size, spacing,
Mesh type etc.
• Mesh
• Loose Bars
• None
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The actual reinforcement provided in each of the layers is indicated here.
Top, Bottom,
Side cover
Soil Parameters
Nominal cover to reinforcement.
Surcharge depth Surcharge depth
770
User Guides
Soil unit weight Soil unit weight
Permanent surcharge load
Variable surcharge load
Characteristic friction angle
Design shear strength of soil angle (ACI & BS
Head Codes)
Allowable bearing capacity
(ACI & BS Head
Codes)
Bearing capacity
A1 - STR (EC
Head Code)
Bearing capacity
A2 - GEO (EC
Head Code)
[+] UDA
Permanent surcharge load
Variable surcharge load
Characteristic friction angle
Design shear strength of soil angle
Allowable bearing capacity
Allowable bearing capacity A1
Allowable bearing capacity A2
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Pile Cap Column Properties
The properties required to create a pile cap are described in the table below.
Property Description
General
Foundation Type Isolated Pile Cap (not editable).
771
User Guides (UK)
Auto-design depth
• When Autodesign is selected an iterative procedure is used to determine the depth. If the shear design fails the depth is increased until either the check passes, or the maximum depth specified in Design Options has been reached.
• When Autodesign is not selected (i.e. check mode), the existing depth is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one pile cap in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their depth autodesigned.
Auto-design piles Autodesign piles automatically determines the quantity and size of piles.
• Unchecked - the specified number of piles at their specified positions will be checked during the design process.
• Checked - the number of piles and their positions under the pile cap will automatically determined during the design process.
When checked, the actual procedure used will depend on the Pile auto-
design method that has been specified in Design Options > Concrete
Foundations > Isolated Foundations Piles
• The Minimise number of piles method commences by first selecting the pile with the smallest load capacity in the Pile Catalogue. Pile positioning is attempted using the user defined pile arrangements. If one of the limitations is exceeded the pile with the next smallest load capacity in the catalogue is selected and the process starts again. This is repeated until the pile loading check passes.
• The Minimise pile capacity method commences by first selecting the pile with the smallest load capacity in the Pile Catalogue. Pile positioning is attempted using the user defined pile arrangements. If one of the limitations is exceeded one pile is added to the pile group and the process starts again. This is repeated until the pile loading check passes.
Select size/depth starting from
This option only appears when either Autodesign depth or Autodesign
size is selected. It sets the autodesign start point for the depth, or size, or both.
The options are:
• Minima (default)
• Current
Selecting ‘Minima’ removes the current depth/size and begins with the minimum allowed depth/size specified in Design Options.
For both options the auto-design depth increment is that specified in Design
Options> Foundations Isolated Foundations> Foundation Size
772
User Guides
Autodesign reinforcement
Select bars starting from
Shape
This setting will always be enabled if either Auto-design depth or Auto-
design piles are enabled. It applies to top and bottom reinforcement, but reinforcement in either location can still be set to none.
• When Autodesign reinforcement is enabled an iterative procedure is used to determine the reinforcement. If the bending design fails the reinforcement size gets increased and spacing gets decreased until these checks pass. Iterations continue until either a satisfactory bar configuration has been achieved, or the maximum bar size and minimum spacing specified in Design Options has been reached. At this point the depth gets increased and the above procedure is repeated.
If the smallest bar at largest spacing is insufficient then the next bar size at max spacing is used. If the largest bar is reached the spacing gets reduced and the smallest bar is used. Then the bar size gets increased until the largest bar size reached.
• When Autodesign reinforcement is disabled (i.e. check mode), the existing reinforcement provision is retained and Tekla Structural Designer determines if it is sufficient.
In Design Options - if Isolated Foundations have been set to be designed using groups, then if at least one pile cap in the group is set to have its depth auto-designed the whole group will have their reinforcement auto-designed
This option controls the starting point for auto-design procedures and is therefore only displayed if Autodesign reinforcement is enabled.
• Minima (default) - removes the current arrangement and begins with the minimum allowed bar size specified in Design Options.
• Current - the auto design commences from the current bar arrangement.
This option controls the pile cap shape when Auto-design piles is enabled.
• Square
• Rectangular
Foundation
Parameters
Geometry type
Eccentricity in X direction
Specifies where the pile cap shape:
• Cuboid
Tapered, Pedestal and Stepped geometries are currently beyond scope.
Specifies the eccentricity of the pile cap in the X direction.
773
User Guides (UK)
Eccentricity in Y direction
Rotation angle
Specifies the eccentricity of the pile cap in the Y direction.
Specifies the rotation of the pile cap relative to that of the support (which is controlled by the rotation angle specified for column).
Specifies the size of the pile cap in the Y direction. Length in Y direction
Length in X direction
Depth
Specifies the size of the pile cap in the X direction.
Specifies the depth of the pile cap.
Concrete class The concrete grade.
The concrete grades that are available are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
Permanent load ratio option (Eurocode only)
You are required to supply a value for the permanent load ratio parameter.
A default of 0.65 has been assumed, but you are advised to consider if this is appropriate and adjust as necessary. See: Design parameters
Maximum crack width
•
• 0.2
0.3
• 0.4
Piles
Pile type Pile types that have previously been specified in the Pile Catalogue are available for selection. You can choose <New...> to add additional types.
Specifies the eccentricity of the pile cap in the X direction. User defined arrangement
Pile arrangement
Opens the Pile arrangement dialog for specifying the number of piles, and spacing, pile type and principal direction.
Number of piles Specifies the number of piles.
Specifies the principal direction. Principal direction
Pile spacing
Shape
The dimension between pile centres.
For three piles only, you can choose to specify either a triangular. or rectangular pile cap.
774
User Guides
Reinforcement
Type
Rib type (Head
Code Eurocode or BS)
Rib type (Head
Code ACI)
Bar type
Bar size, spacing,
Mesh type etc.
• Mesh
• Loose Bars
• None
• Plain
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Plain
• Deformed
The reinforcement grades that are available here are set from the Materials button on the Home ribbon.
The actual reinforcement provided in each of the layers is indicated here.
Top, Bottom,
Side cover
Soil Parameters
Nominal cover to reinforcement.
Surcharge depth Surcharge depth
Soil unit weight Soil unit weight
Permanent surcharge load
Variable surcharge load
[+] UDA
Permanent surcharge load
Variable surcharge load
A customisable list of the attributes that can be applied to individual members and panels.
See: Working with Attributes .
Pile Type Properties
The following properties are required when adding pile types to the Pile Catalogue.
Property Description
775
User Guides (UK)
Data
Name User specified description.
Installation type
• Driven
• Bored
• CFA
Shape
Dimension
Length
• Square
• Circular
Represents ‘side length’ for square piles, or ‘diameter’ for circular piles.
Pile length
Embedment Length of embedment.
Load transfer type
•
• End-bearing
Friction
Pile Capacity
Axial compressive resistance
Axial tensile resistance
Vertical
Linearity
Vertical spring stiffness
Vertical compression spring stiffness
Enter the compressive capacity.
For Eurocode design both a GEO and STR resistance are requested.
Enter the tensile capacity.
For Eurocode design both a GEO and STR resistance are requested.
Specify the vertical spring type:
• Linear
• Non-linear
For a ‘linear’ spring type only:
• Enter the vertical spring stiffness
For a ‘Non-linear’ spring type only:
• Enter the vertical compression spring stiffness
776
User Guides
Vertical compression limit
Vertical tension spring stiffness
Vertical tension limit
For a ‘Non-linear’ spring type only:
• Enter the vertical compression limit
For a ‘Non-linear’ spring type only:
• Enter the vertical tension spring stiffness
Horizontal
Horizontal restraint
Horizontal spring stiffness
For a ‘Non-linear’ spring type only:
• Enter the vertical tension limit
• Fixed
• Spring linear
For a ‘Spring linear’ type only:
• Enter the horizontal spring stiffness
Pile Properties
Pile Properties create pile properties set
The following properties are displayed when you create a pile:
Property Description
[-] General
Pile type
Direction by
Angles
From the drop list choose an existing pile type from the pile catalogue, or <New>... to add a new pile type to the catalogue.
If you click <New>, the Edit Pile Type dialog is displayed to
allow the Pile Type Properties to be defined.
This property is provided to allow you to define ‘raking piles’ - meaning piles that are not vertical but are inclined.
• Unchecked - the pile direction is defined in accordance with the global coordinate system.
• Checked - a user defined coordinate system is applied to the pile. (After clicking where you want to create the pile, the second click defines the x direction and the third click
777
User Guides (UK) defines the y direction.)
Direction
X, Y, Z
Inclination,
Azimuth and
Rotation
Defines the direction of the pile.
When not defining by angles, the pile direction is defined by an {X, Y, Z} vector. The default direction vector of {0,0,-1} meaning vertically down.
See: How do specify the pile direction of an inclined pile?
If defining the direction by angles, angular measurements are used instead of vectors.
See: How do specify the pile direction of an inclined pile?
edit pile properties set
The following properties are displayed when you select an existing pile:
Property Description
[-] General
Name
User Name
Pile type
Offset
Position
Direction
X, Y, Z
The automatically generated name for the pile.
Can be used to override the automatically generated name if required.
From the drop list choose an existing pile type from the pile catalogue, or <New>... to add a new pile type to the catalogue.
If you click <New>, the Edit Pile Type dialog is displayed to
allow the Pile Type Properties to be defined.
The offset is measured in global X and Y relative to the mat.
The pile position is measured relative to the global origin.
Defines the direction of the pile.
When a pile is edited the pile direction is given as an {X, Y,
Z} vector. The default direction vector of {0,0,-1} meaning vertically down.
778
User Guides
See: How do specify the pile direction of an inclined pile?
Pile Array Properties
The following properties are displayed when you create a pile array:
Property Description
[-] General
Layout
Pile type
Spacing X,
Spacing Y,
Spacing
Angle
Min distance to
Edge
Direction by
Angles
Direction
From the drop list choose to define either a rectangular, or hexagonal array of piles.
From the drop list choose an existing pile type from the pile catalogue, or <New>... to add a new pile type to the catalogue.
If you click <New>, the Edit Pile Type dialog is displayed to
allow the Pile Type Properties to be defined.
• In a rectangular array: ‘Spacing X’ and ‘Spacing Y’ define the spacing between piles in each direction.
• In a hexagonal array: ‘Spacing’ defines the spacing between each pile and its nearest neighbouring piles.
The angle about global Z at which the array is positioned.
Only piles at a greater distance to the edge than this value will be positioned.
This property is provided to allow you to define ‘raking piles’ - meaning piles that are not vertical but are inclined.
• Unchecked - the pile direction is defined in accordance with the global coordinate system.
• Checked - a user defined coordinate system is applied to the pile. (After clicking where you want to create the pile, the second click defines the x direction and the third click defines the y direction.)
Defines the direction of the pile.
779
User Guides (UK)
X, Y, Z
Inclination,
Azimuth and
Rotation
When not defining by angles, the pile direction is defined by an {X, Y, Z} vector. The default direction vector of {0,0,-1} meaning vertically down.
See: How do specify the pile direction of an inclined pile?
If defining the direction by angles, angular measurements are used instead of vectors.
See: How do specify the pile direction of an inclined pile?
Sub Model Properties
The following properties associated with a sub model are displayed in the Properties
Window when it is selected in the Structure Tree .
Name Description
Override
Model’s
Check this box in order to activate the other override parameters.
Shell Mesh Size Used to override the default shell mesh (0.8m) for two way spanning slabs.
Shell
Uniformity
Factor
Semi-Rigid
Mesh Size
Semi-Rigid
Uniformity
Factor
Used to override the default shell uniformity factor (25%)for two way spanning slabs.
Used to override the default (1m) mesh for one way spanning slabs when they are modelled as semi-rigid diaphragms.
Used to override the default uniformity factor (25%) for one way spanning slabs when they are modelled as semi-rigid diaphragms.
Semi-Rigid
Mesh Type
Used to specify the semi-rigid mesh type: (QuadDominant,
QuadOnly, or Triangular).
Solver Model Properties
Solver Node properties
When in a Solver View, solver node properties are displayed in the Properties
Window as shown below. Only certain of these can be edited; properties that are greyed out are derived and cannot be changed directly.
780
User Guides
General
Fx, Fy, Fz
Mx, My, Mz
Coordinate
These define the translational degrees of freedom at the node.
These define the rotational degrees of freedom at the node.
Defines the node location.
P-Delta This property can not be edited.
Exclude from
Diaphragm
Check to remove the node from the diaphragm.
Diaphragm # Specifies the diaphragm number to which the node is connected.
Solver Element properties
When in a Solver View, solver element properties are displayed in the Properties
Window as shown below. Only certain of these can be edited; properties that are greyed out are derived and cannot be changed directly.
General
Active When this is set to False the solver element is inactive in the analysis. Only certain member types (braces, analysis elements) can be made inactive.
The type of the solver element Type
Fabrication The fabrication type of the solver element.
Construction The construction type of the solver element.
Material The solver element material.
Gamma angle Defines the element orientation about its local x axis.
When gamma = 0, the local z lies in the plane created by the local x axis and the global z axis.
Length
Start Releases
The solver element length.
781
User Guides (UK)
Fx, Fy, Fz
Mx, My, Mz
End Releases
Fx, Fy, Fz
Mx, My, Mz
These define the translational end releases at end 1.
These define the rotational end releases at end 1.
These define the translational end releases at end 2.
These define the rotational end releases at end 2.
Solver Element 2D properties
When in a Solver View, solver element 2D properties are displayed in the Properties
Window as shown below. None of these properties can be directly edited in the Solver
View.
General
Type
Thickness
The 2D element type will be Shell or Semi-
rigid depending on the Slab Type, Decomposition and
Diaphragm Options that were been set.
The 2D element thickness is derived from a different property depending on the slab type:
• Composite Slab; Precast Slab; Slab on Beams; Flat Slab -
Overall Depth
• Steel Deck; Timber Deck - Thickness
Orientation The 2D element orientation in the solver model follows the rotation angle defined for the slab item to which it belongs.
DivideStiffnessBy This property applies to semi-rigid elements only.
It adjusts the stiffness determined from the material properties in order to control semi-rigid diaphragm flexibility.
CrackedOption yes/no
782
Glossary
2
2D view: view that displays objects in a two dimensional plane
3
3D view: view that displays objects three dimensionally
A
analysis model: structural model that is created from a physical model and used for analyzing structural behavior and subsequently for design
analysis part: analysis model object that is a representation of a building object in an analysis model
architectural grid: modeling aid that represents a three-dimensional complex of horizontal and vertical planes
B
background reinforcement: The overall panel reinforcement in the slab top and bottom in directions x and y. The background level of reinforcement can be
"none".
beam: linear building object in a mainly horizontal position
BIM: process of modeling and communicating the structure of a building in detail to benefit the entire construction life cycle. Building information modeling facilitates the exchange and use of building information in a digital format.
building object: object that represents something that will exist in the real building or be closely related to it
C
column: linear building object in a mainly vertical position
construction line: construction object that represents a line between two points
construction point; CP: point at the end of a building object
783
User Guides (UK)
D
diaphragm: analysis model object that connects more than two nodes that move with exactly the same rotation and translation
drawing: building contract document that shows, in graphic or pictorial form, the design, location, and dimension of the elements of a project
drawing object: object that is represented in a Tekla Structural Designer drawing
E
element intersection; Elm Inters: point at the intersection of two building objects
entity: Collective term for any object used in the modelling process. For example, model objects and modelling aids are both entities.
G
global coordinate system: coordinate system that reflects the entire space of a Tekla
Structural Designer model . A tripod representing positive global X, Y and Z lies at the bottom left of each 3D view.
grid line: single line that visualizes a single grid plane on a view plane
grid point: point at the intersection of two grid lines
H
highlight: to emphasize a single object so that it stands out. Right click menu commands operate on highlighted (not selected) objects
I
intersection; Inters: point at the intersection of two grid or construction lines
L
load: model object that represents a force or system of forces carried by a structure or a part of a structure
load combination: set of loadcases multiplied by their partial safety factors
loadcase: set of loads that are caused by the same action and to which the user wants to refer collectively
Loading Analysis View: window that is used for reviewing the forces and moments in an individual member
local coordinate system: coordinate system that applies to an individual building object
784
Glossary
M
mesh group: Interconnecting panels and slab features with sufficient common properties are gathered together automatically into ‘mesh groups’. Each mesh group is meshed as a single entity in the meshing process.
model: pattern of an object, a system, or a process that exists or will exist in the real world
model object: Entity that is represented in a Tekla Structural Designer model. A model object is either created in a model or imported into it. For example, an individual steel beam, concrete wall or support is a model object.
Model Settings: the settings applied to the current Tekla Structural Designer model
modeling aid: Entity that represents information that is only relevant in building a model. For example, grids, points, construction lines, frames, planes, and reference drawings are modeling aids.
N
node: analysis model object that Tekla Structural Designer creates at a defined point of an analysis model based on analysis part connectivity
O
object: collection of human and computer interpretable data that is needed to model, manufacture, and construct a structure
P
patch: A special rectangular area of slab at a location in a slab at which design will be performed. The patch may or may not have additional reinforcement defined in its area.
physical model: structural model with a direct or indirect counterpart in the structure to be built
pick: to click one or more points in a model in order to execute an action using those points
point: modeling aid that represents a determined place in a coordinate system
Properties Window: a dialog box in which the properties related to an object can be given values (for example, Grid Line Properties).
punching shear: The punching basic control perimeter surrounds a load or loaded object that might punch through a slab with a shear failure and hence is a location at which a punching shear check is to be performed.
R
785
User Guides (UK)
reinforced concrete: concrete structure which contains reinforcement designed on the assumption that the concrete and reinforcement act together in resisting forces
reinforcement mesh; mesh: reinforcement that represents a mesh of steel bars in two perpendicular directions In Tekla Structural Designer, the reinforcement mesh bars in one direction are called main bars and reinforcement mesh bars perpendicular to them are called crossing bars.
reinforcement; reinforcement object: building object that represents steel bars that are cast into the concrete in such a manner that the steel and the concrete act together in resisting forces Reinforcement types are reinforcing bars (also referred to as rebars) and reinforcement meshes,
reinforcing bar; rebar: reinforcement that represents a steel bar used to increase the tensile strength of concrete
report: model output that is represented as a list of information for the entire Tekla
Structural Designer model, or selected objects, Reports react to modifications in the Tekla Structures model.
result strip: A result strip is a line from point A to point B in the plane of a slab which has a width. The results for bending, shear and deflection are calculated at stations along the length of the strip centre line and displayed to you and used in slab design. .
Results View: view that is used for reviewing the analysis results
Review View: view that is used for reviewing the design model and design status
S
select: to choose one or more objects in order to execute a command directed at them
Settings; Settings Set: a set of defaults typically configured for a particular geographic region
slab: A grouping of slab panels with the same general properties. The panels can either be connected or separated from each other, however they must be on the same level. Each panel in a slab must have certain attributes the same (e.g. slab type and material) but can have other attributes that differ (e.g. thickness and the direction of reinforcement).
slab panel; slab item: An individual area of slab, often within a single bay, that can have specific properties (e.g.reinforcement) that can differ from other panels within the slab. It is also an "on/off" area for pattern loading. Slab design is performed by panel.
slope; sloped plane: construction object that represents a plane that is not perpendicular to the global axes
Solver View: view that is used for reviewing the underlying analytical model
Structural View: view that is used for modeling purposes
786
Glossary
T
Tekla Structural Designer drawing: drawing that includes the output of the selected information in a Tekla Structural Designer model or a part of the model and other information related to the model and the project Tekla Structural Designer drawings react to modifications in the Tekla Structural Designer model and are updated accordingly
Tekla Structural Designer model: model that is built with Tekla Structural Designer and that represents a structure to be constructed, containing information needed to analyse and design the structure, and other information related to the project
U
user coordinate system; UCS: local coordinate system defined by the user
V
view: representation of a Tekla Structural Designer model or a part of it, which is displayed inside the Tekla Structural Designer window
W
Wind View: view that is used for reviewing wind zones and zone load details
787
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project